Arona
Owner’s manual
6F9012720BT
Inglés 6F9012720BT (06.23)
SEAT Arona Inglés (06.23)
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or
omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.06.23
Vehicle identification data
Model:
Vehicle Registration:
Vehicle identification
number:
Date of vehicle registration
or vehicle delivery:
SEAT Official Service:
Service advisor:
Telephone:
Confirmation of receipt of documentation
and vehicle keys
The following items were delivered
with the vehicle:
YES NO
On-board documentation
First key
Second key
Correct working order of all keys was
checked
Location:
Date:
Signature of owner:
Thank you for your con-
fidence
With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy
a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology and
top quality features.
We recommend reading this Instruction Manual
carefully to learn more about your vehicle so
you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily driv-
ing.
Information about handling is complemented
with instructions regarding the operation and
maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure
its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we
want to give you valuable advice and tips to
drive your vehicle eciently and respecting the
environment.
We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.
SEAT, S.A.
WARNING
Read and always observe safety informa-
tion concerning the passenger's front air-
bag ›››page52, Fitting and using child
seats.
2
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
About this instruction manual . . . . . . . . . 4
General views of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 6
Front exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
Rear exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Driver information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
Instrument cluster operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Infotainment system operation and displays . 30
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants . 36
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
In case of emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Keyless Access system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper sys-
tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
106
Driving indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
DSG automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Driving on slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
SEAT Drive Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Assistant systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
132
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Drive assist sensors and cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Lane Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
148
Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . . . . 152
Parking and manoeuvring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Park the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
General information on parking systems . . . . . 157
Park Distance Control Plus (Park Pilot) . . . . . . . 159
Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Parking aid system (Park Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera) . . . . . . . . . . 171
Rear Cross Trac Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Practical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Data transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
179
SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Privacy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
184
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
185
Wired and wireless connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
190
Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
Overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
194
General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
217
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Positioning the luggage and cargo . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Luggage compartment equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Table of Contents
3
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning . . . . . . . 242
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Fuel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Engine management and emissions control
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Miscellaneous situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
247
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
247
Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . .
247
Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . 263
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
263
Fluids and consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
12-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
278
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Important information about wheels and
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
293
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Additional service oers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Vehicle upkeep and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
300
Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . . . 305
Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Information stored by the control units . . . . . . . 307
Vehicle antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Materials and recycling information . . . . . . . . . . 308
Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Radioelectrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
315
Indications about the technical data . . . . . . . . . 315
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
4
About this instruction manual
About this instruction
manual
This instruction manual is valid for all variants
and versions of your SEAT model. It describes
all equipment and models without specifying
whether they are optional equipment or model
variants. As a result, equipment not fitted to
your vehicle or only available in certain coun-
tries may be described. Find out about your
vehicle's equipment in the documentation sup-
plied with it and please contact your SEAT Of-
ficial SEAT Service if you require more detailed
information.
All information provided in instruction manual
corresponds to the information available at the
time of going to press. As the vehicle is under
continuous development, it may have dieren-
ces to the data included in this manual. For this
reason, no claims can be made in the event
of mismatching data, illustrations and descrip-
tions.
Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept
in the vehicle at all times if you sell it or lend it to
third parties. In addition, SEAT recommends re-
setting the infotainment system to factory set-
tings to delete all personal data.
Some details on the drawings may be dierent
to your vehicle and they should be interpreted
as a standard representation.
The
direction indicators (left, right, forwards,
backwards) in this manual refer to the direction
of travel of the vehicle unless otherwise stated.
This instruction manual has been written for
left-hand drive vehicles. In right-hand drive
vehicles, the arrangement of the controls dif-
fers partly from that shown in the illustrations or
described in the texts.
Technical modifications to the vehicle or
safety-critical issues that have arisen since the
time of going to press will be included in a sup-
plement to the on-board documentation.
Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-
sence of this symbol does not guarantee
that the term is not a trademark.
You can access the information in this manual
using:
●
Thematic table of contents that follows the
manual’s general chapter structure.
●
Visual table of contents that uses graphics to
indicate the pages containing “essential” infor-
mation, which is detailed in the corresponding
chapters.
●
Alphabetical index with many terms and syn-
onyms to help you find information.
WARNING
Texts after this symbol contain information
about safety and warn you about possible
accident or injury risks.
NOTICE
Texts after this symbol indicate possible
damage to the vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts after this symbol contain information
on environmental protection.
Note
Texts after this symbol contain additional in-
formation.
About this instruction manual
5
Digital instruction manual
The digital version of the manual can be found
on SEAT's ocial website:
Fig.1 SEAT
website
●
scan the QR code.
●
OR enter the following address in the naviga-
tor website:
https://www.seat.com/owners/about-my-car/
manuals.html
and select your vehicle.
Related videos
The operation of some of the vehicle's features
can be shown as an instruction video:
Fig.2 SEAT
website
●
scan the QR code.
●
OR enter the following address in the naviga-
tor website:
https://www.seat.com/owners/about-my-car/
manuals.html
choose your vehicle and then the “Multimedia”
section.
Note
Video instructions are only available in cer-
tain languages.
6
General views of the vehicle
General views of the vehicle
Front exterior view
Driving assistance sensors ›››page132
1
Front radar
2
Park distance control sensors
3
Park assist sensor
4
Front multifunction camera
A
Levels control
Oil ›››page271
Brake fluid ›››page269
Battery ›››page274
B
Bonnet
Unlocking lever ›››page265
Open/close ›››page265
C
Towing the vehicle
Tow start ›››page252
Towline anchorage ›››page253
General views of the vehicle
7
Rear exterior view
Rear exterior view
Driving assistance sensors ›››page132
1
Rear view camera
2
Park distance control sensors
3
Rear radars
4
Park assist sensor
A
Rear lid
Opening from outside ›››page76
Emergency opening ›››page76
B
Towing the vehicle
Tow-start ›››page252
Towline anchorage ›››page254
C
Opening and closing
Doors ›››page73
Central locking ›››page68
Emergency lock ›››page74
D
Fuel tank
Fuel capacity ›››page315
Open/Close cap ›››page242
E
Action in the event of a puncture
Anti-puncture kit ›››page293
Wheel change ›››page286
8
General views of the vehicle
Interior view
1
Isofix anchors ›››page53
2
Headrest adjustment ›››page82
3
Seat belts ›››page39
4
Interior mirror ›››page96
5
Seat adjustment ›››page81
6
DSG automatic transmission
›››page118 / Manual gearbox
›››page117
7
Connectivity Box / Wireless Charger
›››page221
8
Emergency start ›››page114
9
Glove compartment ›››page175
10
Front passenger airbag ›››page47
11
Disconnecting the front passenger front
airbag ›››page47
General views of the vehicle
9
Overview (left hand drive)
Overview (left hand drive)
1
Electric windows ›››page76
2
Exterior mirror adjustment ›››page97
3
Open bonnet lever ›››page265
4
Lighting control ›››page85
5
Turn signal and main beam lever
›››page87
6
Multifunction steering wheel control panels
›››page79
7
SEAT Digital Cockpit ›››page16
Control lamps ›››page11
8
Wipers and rear window wiper
›››page93
9
Hazard warning lights ›››page59
10
Infotainment system ›››page30,
›››page191
11
Fuses ›››page255
12
Steering wheel adjustment ›››page80
13
Steering wheel with driver’s airbag
›››page47 / Gear shift paddles for the
Tiptronic ›››page120
14
Air conditioning ›››page101
15
Start button (depending on version)
›››page111
16
Central locking ›››page67
10
General views of the vehicle
Overview (right hand drive)
1
Open bonnet lever ›››page265
2
Hazard warning lights ›››page59
3
Infotainment system ›››page30,
›››page191
4
Turn signal and main beam lever
›››page87
5
Multifunction steering wheel control panels
›››page79
6
SEAT Digital Cockpit ›››page16
Control lamps ›››page11
7
Wipers and rear window wiper
›››page93
8
Lighting control ›››page85
9
Exterior mirror adjustment ›››page97
10
Electric windows ›››page76
11
Air conditioning ›››page101
12
Central locking ›››page67
13
Start button (depending on version)
›››page111
14
Steering wheel adjustment ›››page80
15
Steering wheel with driver’s airbag
›››page47 / Gear shift paddles for the
Tiptronic ›››page120
16
Fuses ›››page255
Driver information
11
Control lamps
Driver information
Control lamps
Control and warning lamps
The warning and control lights can be lit indi-
vidually or in combination and serve as a warn-
ing, to indicate the presence of an anomaly or
to warn of the activation of certain functions.
Some turn on when the ignition is switched on
and have to be switched o after a certain pe-
riod of time.
Depending on the model, additional text mes-
sages may be viewed on the instrument panel
display. These may be purely informative or
they may be advising of the need for action.
Depending upon the equipment fitted in the
vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, sometimes
a symbol may be displayed on the instrument
panel.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and messages are ig-
nored, faults may occur in the vehicle, it may
stall in trac, or accidents and serious inju-
ries may occur.
●
Never ignore warning lamps or text mes-
sages.
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
Symbol Meaning
Stop driving!
Central warning lamp ›››page22
Fasten your seat belt ›››page39
Handbrake applied ›››page157
Stop driving!
Fault in the brake system
›››page128
Stop driving
Brake fluid level low ›››page269
Take control of the vehicle and be ready
to brake! ›››page139
Stop driving!
Fault in the motor coolant system
›››page19
Engine oil pressure ›››page274
Stop driving!
Steering anomaly ›››page125
Stop driving!
Alternator fault ›››page277
Symbol Meaning
Collision warning ›››page145
Take control of the steering immediately
›››page152
Central warning lamp ›››page22
Fault in the airbag system or the seat
belt tensioners ›››page46
Front passenger front airbag o
›››page46
Front passenger airbag on
›››page46
Lights up: fault in the electronic stability
control (ESC) ›››page130
Flashing: Electronic stability control
(ESC) or Traction Control regulating
›››page130
TCS manually deactivated, ESC in
“Sport” mode or ECS manually deacti-
vated ›››page130
ABS fault ›››page130
Travel assist unavailable
›››page152
Fault in the vehicle's lighting
›››page85
Fault in the emissions control system
›››page245
12
Driver information
Symbol Meaning
Particulate filter clogged
›››page246
Petrol engine management fault
›››page246
Rear fog light on ›››page85
Fuel tank almost empty ›››page18
Engine oil level ›››page274
Steering anomaly ›››page125
¡Stop driving!
Low tyre pressure ›››page293
Collision warning deactivated
›››page147
Cruise control fault (GRA)
›››page137
Speed limiter not available
›››page139
Gearbox fault ›››page122,
›››page123
Adaptive cruise control (ACC) not avail-
able ›››page144
Lane Assist not available
›››page149
Symbol Meaning
Lane Assist (lane keeping system) regu-
lating ›››page149
Side Assist (lane change assistance
system) not available ›››page135
Rear cross trac alert (RCTA) not avail-
able ›››page135
Battery / 12V power supply
›››page278
Turn signals ›››page85
Trailer turn signals ›››page85
Cruise control (GRA) ›››page136
Speed limiter active ›››page138
Lane Assist (lane keeping system) ac-
tive. ›››page149
Press the brake pedal ›››page122
Travel Assist active ›››page150
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) reg-
ulating, no vehicle detected ahead
›››page141
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) reg-
ulating, vehicle detected ahead
›››page141
Symbol Meaning
Main beam on or flasher on
›››page85
The speed limiter is not active
›››page138
Start-Stop system activated
›››page115
Start-Stop system unavailable
›››page115
Exterior temperature below +4°C
(+39°F) ›››page20
Main beam assist active ›››page88
Take control of the steering
›››page152
Distance warning ›››page145
Reference to information in the on-
board documentation ›››page22
Remove foot from accelerator
›››page26
Service intervals display
›››page28
Driver information
13
Instrument panel
Instrument panel
Introduction
After switching the engine on with a 12-volt
battery that is heavily discharged or newly
changed some system settings (such as the
time, the date, the personalised comfort set-
tings and the programming) might be altered or
deleted. Check and correct these settings once
the battery is suciently charged.
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
the risk of injury.
●
Do not operate the instrument panel con-
trols when driving.
●
To reduce the risk of accident and injury,
only make adjustments to the instructions
on the instrument panel display and to the
instructions on the Infotainment system dis-
play when the vehicle is stationary.
14
Driver information
Basic version digital instrument cluster
Fig.3 Basic version digital instrument cluster: Main
view.
Upper zone: Time, selected driving profile, rev
counter, outside temperature. Lower zone: total
km (miles) or speed set with the cruise control
or ACC, range.
A
Main display: speed in digital format and
road signs.
B
Secondary indications: driving data
(average speed and fuel consumption, dis-
tance travelled, etc.)
C
Secondary indications: radio, media,
phone, navigation indications.
1
Engine coolant temperature indicator
›››page18.
2
Gear engaged and gear or selector lever
position recommendation.
3
Selected driving assistant.
4
Fuel gauge ›››page17.
The Basic version digital instrument cluster is a
digital instrument cluster with a high resolution
colour TFT display.
Other content can be displayed by selecting
dierent views, e.g. Rev counter, and dierent
displays in the main display area and in the
secondary display areas.
Instrument cluster operation
The digital instrument cluster can only be con-
trolled from the buttons on the multi-function
steering wheel. The functions of the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel depend on the
equipment.
As long as a priority 1 warning is active, it will not
be possible to access any menu ›››page22.
Some warnings can be confirmed and hidden
with the button of the multifunction steering
wheel.
Instrument cluster views
To switch between the dierent views press the
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The following views can be displayed:
●
Main: Digital speedometer with secondary
indications.
●
Speed: Classic representation of the speed-
ometer as a circular instrument with secondary
indications in the centre of the dial.
Driver information
15
Instrument panel
●
Rev counter: Classic representation of the rev
counter as a circular instrument with secondary
indications in the centre of the dial.
The amount and content of the information dis-
played may vary depending on the equipment.
Note
After switching o the ignition, a display
appears showing vehicle status information,
such as distance travelled.
Select secondary indications in the “Main” view
The secondary indications
B
or
C
can be in-
dividually configured or hidden. Proceed as fol-
lows to select the secondary indications:
1. Use the keys and to select the right
B
or left
C
secondary indications area.
2. Use the thumbwheel on the multifunction
steering wheel to select the desired secon-
dary indication.
3. Confirm your selection by pressing the
button.
Selecting secondary indications in the “Speed”
or “Rev counter” views
1. Use the thumbwheel on the multifunction
steering wheel to select the desired secon-
dary indication.
2.
Confirm the selection by pressing .
Note
If when switching on the ignition warnings
are shown about existing faults, it might not
be possible to change the settings or show
the information as described. If the fault
continues, visit a duly qualified specialised
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership.
16
Driver information
1)
Pre-set information depending on the selected “Driving mode”.
SEAT Digital Cockpit
Fig.4 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrument
panel (classic view).
1
Engine coolant temperature display.
›››page18
2
Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi-
nute the engine is running ›››page17.
3
Gear engaged or position of the selec-
tor lever.
4
Screen display ›››page19.
5
Speedometer
6
Digital speed display
7
Fuel gauge ›››page17.
8
Information Profile ›››page16.
The SEAT Digital Cockpit is a digital instrument
cluster with a high resolution colour TFT dis-
play. It has a 3 views accessible using the but-
ton of the multifunction steering wheel. By
selecting dierent information profiles, indica-
tions other than the classic circular instruments
can be displayed, such as navigation data,
multimedia information or travel data.
The 3 views are:
●
Classic
●
Dynamic
●
Navigation
All views will display information on the screen
about audio, phone, travel data, vehicle status,
navigation and driving aids.
In all views the information displayed in Infor-
mation profiles can be customised ›››Fig.4
8
.
Information profiles
Use the infotainment system menu > Se-
lection > Digital Cockpit to choose be-
tween the dierent options for viewing informa-
tion to be displayed in the SEAT Digital Cockpit.
Classic View
The revolutions per minute and speedome-
ter needles appear along the entire length
›››Fig.4.
View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC
1)
Personalisation of the information that appears
in the SEAT Digital Cockpit. Only 2 of these
items of information can be displayed at the
Driver information
17
Instrument panel
same time, but the user chooses which to dis-
play, and in what order, by moving the finger
vertically over the dials.
Depending on the version, the Views can be
memorised by exiting the menu or keeping the
View button pressed.
●
Consumption. Graphic representation of the
current consumption and digital display of the
average consumption.
●
Audio. Digital display of the current audio
playback.
●
Altitude. Digital display of the current altitude
above sea level.
●
Compass. Digital display of the compass.
●
Destination arrival information. Digital dis-
play of the remaining travelling time, distance
to the destination and the estimated time of
arrival.
●
Range. Digital display of the remaining range.
●
Travelling time.
●
Route guidance.
●
Journey. Digital display of the distance trav-
elled.
●
Assist systems. Graphic representation of
dierent assistance systems.
●
Road signs. Display of trac signs detected.
●
Navigation. Graphical representation of the
navigation with arrows.
It may vary based on the features, the number
and the contents of the selectable information
profiles.
Revolution counter
The rev counter indicates the number of engine
revolutions per minute.
Together with the gear-change indicator, the
rev counter oers you the possibility of using
the engine of your vehicle at a suitable speed.
The beginning of the red zone of the rev counter
indicates the maximum speed in any gear after
running-in and with the engine hot. However,
it is advisable to move the selector lever to D
or lift your foot o the accelerator before the
needle reaches the red zone ›››
.
We recommend that you avoid high revs and
that you follow the recommendations on the
gear-change indicator. See the additional infor-
mation in ›››page106, Selecting the opti-
mal gear.
NOTICE
●
To prevent damage to the engine, the rev
counter needle should only remain in the red
zone for a short period of time.
●
When the engine is cold, avoid high revs
and heavy acceleration and do not make the
engine work hard.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to
save fuel and minimise emissions and engine
noise.
Fuel gauge
Fig.5 Basic instrument cluster: fuel gauge.
Fig.6 SEAT Digital Cockpit instrument cluster:
fuel gauge.
18
Driver information
A
B
C
Indicator lamps
Its lights up yellow. Fuel tank almost
empty. The fuel reserve level has been
reached ››› . Refuel as soon as you
have the opportunity.
When the fuel level is very low, the lower
diode also flashes red.
The display only works when the ignition is
switched on.
The fuel range is displayed on the instrument
panel.
You can consult the tank capacity of your vehi-
cle in ›››page315.
WARNING
When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may
stall in trac and cause accidents and se-
vere injuries.
●
If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could
reach the engine irregularly, particularly
when driving up or down slopes.
●
The steering system and the assistant sys-
tems and brakes do not work when the en-
gine is running irregularly or switches o due
to lack of fuel or an irregular supply thereof.
●
SEAT recommends always refuelling when
the tank is approximately one quarter full, to
prevent the vehicle from stopping due to a
lack of fuel.
NOTICE
Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An
irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring and
unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust system.
The catalytic converter or the particulate fil-
ter may get damaged!
Note
The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to the
fuel pump symbol points out towards the side
of the vehicle with the fuel tank flap.
Coolant temperature indicator.
Fig.7 Basic digital instrument cluster: engine
coolant temperature display.
Fig.8 SEAT Digital Cockpit digital instrument
cluster: engine coolant temperature indicator.
Cold zone. The engine has not reached
operating temperature yet. Avoid high en-
gine speeds and stressing the engine if it
has not reached operating temperature.
Normal zone. At high outside temperatures
and when making the engine work hard,
the diodes may continue lighting up and
reach the upper zone. This is no cause for
concern, provided the control lamp does
not light up .
Warning area. When the engine is working
hard, especially at high outside tempera-
tures, the diodes may light up in the warn-
ing area.
The coolant temperature gauge only works
when the ignition is switched on.
Driver information
19
Instrument panel
1)
Valid for the basic digital instrument cluster.
Control and warning lamps
Fault in the engine coolant system
The LED flashes red.
Engine coolant
The lamp lights up red.
The motor coolant temperature is too high
or the motor coolant level is too low.
●
Stop driving! Stop the vehicle at the next
opportunity and in a safe place.
●
Switch o the engine and let it cool down.
●
Check the coolant level in the coolant expan-
sion tank ›››page267.
If the warning lamp does not go out even
though the motor coolant level is correct, do
not continue to drive or leave the motor running.
Seek specialist assistance.
NOTICE
●
To ensure a long useful life for the engine,
avoid high revs, driving at high speed and
making the engine work hard for approxi-
mately the first 15 minutes when the engine
is cold. The phase until the engine is warm
also depends on the outside temperature. If
necessary, use the engine oil temperature as
a guide ›››page21.
●
Additional lights and other accessories in
front of the air inlet reduce the cooling eect
of the coolant. At high outside temperatures
and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
engine overheating.
●
The front spoiler also ensures proper distri-
bution of the cooling air when the vehicle is
moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can
reduce the cooling eect, which could cause
the engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis-
tance.
Status display
Possible indications on the instrument panel
display
The instrument cluster can display a variety of
information, superimposed according to the ve-
hicle's equipment:
●
Doors, bonnet and rear lid open
●
Warning and information messages
●
Odometer
●
Time ›››page27
●
Indications of the radio and navigation sys-
tem
●
Indications of the phone
●
Outside temperature
●
Compass indication
●
Selector lever positions
●
Gear-change recommendation
●
Display of travel data (multifunction display)
and menus for dierent settings ›››page21
●
Service interval display ›››page27
●
Speed warning
●
Speed warning for winter tyres
●
Start-Stop system status display
›››page115
●
Signs detected by the trac signal detection
system ›››page24
●
Indication of active cylinder management
status (ACT®) ›››page106
●
Low consumption driving
●
Assistant systems display
●
Personalization: greeting ›››page179
●
Engine oil temperature
●
Indication of radiator fan operation with en-
gine stopped
1)
Doors, bonnet and rear lid open
When the vehicle is unlocked and while driving,
the instrument panel display shows if any of the
doors, the bonnet or rear lid are opened and, in
some cases, it is also indicated by an audible
warning.
20
Driver information
1)
Valid for the basic digital instrument cluster.
Selector lever positions
The current position of the selector lever is
shown on the side of the lever and on the in-
strument panel display. When the lever is in the
D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in some
cases, the gear engaged in each case is shown
on the instrument panel display .
Outside temperature indicator
If the outside temperature is lower than approxi-
mately +4°C (+39°F), the “ice crystal symbol”
also lights up . This symbol remains lit until
the outside temperature exceeds +6°C (+43°F)
››› .
In the following situations, the displayed exte-
rior temperature may be higher than the actual
temperature due to the heat emitted by the
motor:
●
When the vehicle is stationary.
●
When driving very slowly.
Gear-change recommendation
While driving, the instrument panel of certain
vehicles may indicate a gear recommendation
for saving fuel ›››page106.
Odometer
The odometer records the total distance travel-
led by the vehicle.
The
partial odometer (trip) shows the dis-
tance travelled since the last time it was reset
to zero.
●
Set the odometer to zero via the Infotainment
system or the multifunction steering wheel
›››page21.
Speed warning for winter tyres
If the maximum set speed is exceeded, this is
displayed on the instrument cluster display.
The speed warning can be set in the infotain-
ment system ( > Settings > Tyres;
OR > Exterior settings > Tyres)
›››page33.
Compass indication
Depending on the equipment, when the ignition
is on, the instrument panel display indicates the
direction in which you are driving with a symbol,
e.g. NW for Northwest.
When the Infotainment system is on and there is
no route guidance active, the graphic represen-
tation of a compass is also shown.
Low consumption driving
Depending on the equipment, when driving, the
display appears on the instrument panel
when the vehicle is in low consumption status
due to active cylinder management (ACT®)
›››page106.
Radiator fan operation indication
1)
This indication is displayed after switching o
the ignition when the radiator fan is still running.
The operating time of the radiator fan can de-
pend on:
●
Exhaust gas treatment, e.g. during regenera-
tion of the particulate filter.
●
Active brake cooling after descending a
slope.
●
Dissipation of heat from the engine after high
stress, e.g. after a very long drive.
Destination information
1)
If route guidance is enabled, the expected
travel time and the distance to the destination
are displayed.
Navigation indications
1)
If route guidance is activated, the direction of
travel is shown by arrows.
Driver information
21
Instrument panel
1)
This will show all data on the display at the same time: distance travelled, average consumption, average speed and autonomy.
–
–
–
–
–
WARNING
Even when the outside temperature is higher
than freezing temperature, some roads and
bridges could be frozen.
●
The “ice crystal symbol” indicates that
there may be a risk of freezing.
●
At outside temperatures above +4°C
(+39°F), there may be ice even when the “ice
crystal symbol” is not on.
●
The outside temperature sensor takes a
guideline measurement.
Note
●
There are dierent instrument panels and
therefore the versions and instructions on
the display may vary. In the case of dis-
plays without warning or information texts,
faults are indicated exclusively by the con-
trol warning lamps.
●
Some settings can be saved in the user ac-
counts of the personalization function and
can therefore be changed automatically
when switching user accounts ›››page179.
●
Some indications on the instrument panel
screen may be concealed by a sudden
event, e.g. an incoming call.
●
Depending on the equipment, some set-
tings and instructions can be carried out
or displayed on the infotainment system as
well.
●
If there are several warnings at the same
time, the symbols will be displayed one after
the other for a few seconds. The symbols will
stay on until you remove the cause.
●
If when switching on the ignition warnings
are shown about existing faults, it might not
be possible to change the settings or show
the information as described. In this case, go
to a specialised workshop and request a re-
pair.
Driving data indicator
The driving data display shows a range of driv-
ing data and consumption values.
Change from one display to another
●
Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-
tion steering wheel ›››page29.
Changing memory
●
While in Driving data > General in-
formation press
on the multi-function
steering wheel to switch between the 3 memo-
ries
1)
:
Since start: The memory is deleted if
the journey is interrupted for more than 2
hours.
Since refuel:
Display and storage of
the journey data and the consumption val-
ues collected. When refuelling, the memory
is deleted.
Long-term: This memory contains travel
data up to a maximum of 19hours and
59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or
up to a maximum of 1999.9 km or 9999.9
km. When one of these values is exceeded
(varies depending on the version of the in-
strument panel), the memory is deleted.
Delete journey data presets
●
Select the memory that you wish to erase.
●
Keep the button on the multi-function
steering wheel pressed for approximately 2
seconds.
Select the instructions
In the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehicle
settings, you can display dierent travel data
›››page34.
Current consumption: The current fuel
consumption display operates throughout
the journey, in litres/100 km; and with the
engine running and the vehicle stopped, in
litres/hour.
Average consumption: The average
fuel consumption is displayed after driving
for approximately 300 metres.
22
Driver information
1)
Valid for the SEAT Digital Cockpit.
–
–
–
–
–
–
Travelling time: This indicates the
hours (h) and minutes (min) since the igni-
tion was switched on.
Range:
1)
Approximate distance in km that
can still be travelled if the same driving
style is maintained.
Distance travelled: Distance covered
in km (m) after switching on the ignition.
Average speed: The average speed will
be shown after driving for approximately
100 metres.
Digital speed: Current speed dis-
played in digital format.
Eco tips: Recommendations messages
are shown to reduce consumption through
good driving practices, e.g. Air condi-
tioning on: close the window.
Setting a speed warning
●
Select the display Warning at ---km/h or
Warning at ---mph.
●
Press the button on the multi-function
steering wheel to memorise the current speed
and activate the warning.
●
Activate: set the desired speed within 5 sec-
onds by rotating the wheel on the multi-func-
tion steering wheel. Next, press the button
again or wait for a few seconds. The speed is
stored and the warning activated.
●
Deactivate:
press the button. The stored
speed is deleted. The warning can be set for
speeds of between 30 and 250km/h (18 and
155mph).
Oil temperature display
The engine reaches its operating temperature
when, under normal driving conditions, the
oil temperature is between 80°C (176°F) and
120°C (248°F). If a great eort is required from
the engine and the outside temperature is high,
the engine oil temperature may increase. This
does not present any problem as long as the
warning lamps or ›››page274 do not
appear on the display.
Warning and information messages
The system runs a check on certain com-
ponents and functions when the ignition is
switched on and while the vehicle is moving.
Faults are displayed on the instrument cluster
display as red and yellow warning symbols
›››page11 accompanied by messages and,
depending on the case, even an audible warn-
ing. The representation of the messages and
symbols may vary depending on the version of
the instrument panel.
Existing faults can also be checked man-
ually. To do this, open the Vehicle status
›››page29 menu.
Priority 1 warning (in red)
The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-
companied by audible warnings). Stop driv-
ing! Danger! Check the fault and eliminate
the cause. If necessary, seek professional assis-
tance.
Priority 2 warning (in yellow)
The symbol lights up or flashes (in part accom-
panied by audible warnings). Operating faults
or the lack of operating fluids can cause dam-
age to the vehicle or a fault. Check the faulty
function as soon as possible. If necessary, seek
professional assistance.
Reference to information in the owner's
manual
Further information on any warnings can be
found in the owner's manual.
Information message
It provides information about processes in the
vehicle.
Driver information
23
Instrument panel
Driver alert system (break recom-
mendation)
Fig.9 On the screen of the instrument panel:
fatigue detection.
The driver alert system informs the driver when
it deduces tiredness due to his/her behaviour at
the wheel.
Function and operation
Fatigue detection determines the driving be-
haviour of the driver when starting a journey,
making a calculation of tiredness. This is con-
stantly compared with the current driving be-
haviour. If the system detects that the driver is
tired, an audible warning is given with a sound
and an optical warning is shown with a sym-
bol and supplementary message on the instru-
ment cluster screen ›››Fig.9. The message
on the instrument panel display is shown for
approximately 5 seconds, and depending on
the case, is repeated. The system stores the last
message displayed.
The warning on the instrument cluster display
can be hidden as follows:
●
Press the button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel.
The message can be recovered on the instru-
ment cluster display using the multifunction dis-
play ›››page21.
Conditions of operation
Driving behaviour is only calculated on speeds
above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to around
200 km/h (125 mph).
Activating and deactivating
Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti-
vated in the infotainment system using the func-
tion button Driver assistance > Fatigue de-
tector.
The driver alert system is always switched on
when the ignition is switched on ›››page34.
System limitations
The Fatigue detection has certain limitations in-
herent to the system. The following conditions
can limit the Fatigue detection or prevent it from
functioning.
●
At speeds below 60km/h (40mph).
●
At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)
●
When cornering
●
In sections with roadworks.
●
On roads in poor condition
●
In unfavourable weather conditions
●
When a sporty driving style is employed
●
In the event of a serious distraction to the
driver
Fatigue detection will be restored when the ve-
hicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, when
the ignition is switched o or when the driver
has unbuckled their seat belt and opened the
door.
In the event of slow driving during a long period
of time (below 60km/h, 40mph) the system
automatically re-establishes the tiredness cal-
culation. When driving at a faster speed the
driving behaviour will be recalculated.
WARNING
The smart technology of the driver alert sys-
tem cannot overcome the limits imposed by
the laws of physics and only works within the
limits of the system. Do not let the comfort
aorded by the Fatigue detection system
tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
Take regular breaks, sucient in length when
making long journeys.
●
The driver always assumes the responsibil-
ity of driving to their full capacity.
●
Never drive if you are tired.
24
Driver information
●
The system does not detect the tiredness
of the driver in all circumstances. Consult the
information in the section ›››page23, Con-
ditions of operation.
●
In some situations, the system may incor-
rectly interpret an intended driving manoeu-
vre as driver tiredness.
●
No warning is given in the event of the ef-
fect called microsleep!
●
Please observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary.
Note
●
Fatigue detection has been developed for
driving on motorways and well paved roads
only.
●
If there is a fault in the system, have it
checked by a specialised workshop.
Road signs detection system
Fig.10 On the instrument panel display:
examples of speed limits or overtaking
prohibitions with their respective additional
signs.
The dynamic road signs display records stand-
ard road signs using a camera fitted to the base
of the interior mirror, and provides information
about speed limits, overtaking prohibitions and
warning signs that it recognises.
Within its limitations, the system also displays
a additional sign to indicate aspects such as
temporary prohibitions. Even on routes without
signs, the system can, if necessary, display the
applicable speed limits.
The dynamic road sign display system is acti-
vated whenever the ignition is switched on.
The trac sign detection system does not work
in all countries. Keep this in mind when travel-
ling abroad.
Shown on the display
In Germany, on motorways and vehicle roads,
besides speed limits and overtaking provisions
the system also displays the end of prohibition
signs. The valid speed limit at the time in other
countries is always shown.
The road signs detected by the system are
displayed on the instrument cluster display
›››Fig.10 and, depending on the navigation
system fitted in the vehicle, in the infotainment
system as well .
Road sign detection system messages:
There are no road signs available
●
The system is in its start-up phase.
●
OR: the camera has not recognized any man-
datory or prohibitive signs.
Error: Dynamic road sign display
●
There is a fault in the system. Have the system
checked by a specialised workshop.
Driver information
25
Instrument panel
Speed warning is currently unavail-
able
●
The speed warning function of the road sign
detection system is faulty. Have the system
checked by a specialised workshop.
Dynamic road sign display: Clean
the windscreen!
●
The windscreen is dirty in the camera area
or the camera’s visibility is impaired by weather
conditions. Clean the windscreen.
Dynamic road sign display: Cur-
rently restricted
●
The navigation system is not transmitting
data. Check if the navigation system has upda-
ted maps.
●
OR: the vehicle is in a region not included on
the navigation system's map.
No data available
●
The trac sign detection system does not
work in the current country.
Activate and deactivate the road sign dis-
play on the instrument panel
The permanent trac sign view on the instru-
ment cluster can be switched on or o in the
infotainment system using the function button
Driver assistance > Road sign detection.
Display of trac signs
After checking and evaluating the information
from the camera, the navigation system and
the current vehicle data, the system displays up
to three current road signs ›››Fig.10 with
their additional signs.
●
First: The sign that is currently valid for the
driver is shown in the left side of the screen For
example, a maximum speed limit of 130 km/h
(100mph) ›››Fig.10 .
●
Second: A sign valid only in certain circum-
stances, e.g.100 km/h (60mph) is shown sec-
ond, together with the additional rain sign.
●
Additional sign: Displays the circumstances
(rain, times of day, fog, etc.) under which the
displayed speed limit is in force.
●
Third: Thirdly, a sign prohibiting overtaking
is partially displayed. If there is no conditional
speed limit and overtaking is prohibited, the
latter sign will be displayed in second place
›››Fig.10 .
The warning sign display is not available in all
countries and the system may not be able to
detect all existing warning signs.
Speed warning
If the system detects that the permitted speed
is exceeded, it may warn the driver with a
“gong” and visually with a message on the
dash panel display.
The speed warning can be set or deacti-
vated completely in the menu Driver
assistance > Road sign detection
›››page34. The speed warning can be set
to a value of 0, 5 or 10km/h (0, 3 or 5mph)
above the permitted speed.
Trailer mode
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket de-
vice from the factory and a trailer that is electri-
cally connected to the vehicle, it is possible to
activate or deactivate the display of specific
trac signs for vehicles with trailer, such as
speed limits or overtaking prohibitions.
It can be activated or deactivated in the info-
tainment system using the function button
Driver assistance > Trailer assist
›››page34.
For trailer mode, the display of speed limits ap-
plicable to the type of trailer or to the legal pro-
visions can be adjusted. The speed is adjusted
in steps of 10km/h (5 mph) within the range
between 60 and 130 km/h (40 and 80mph). If
it is adjusted to a speed greater than that which
is permitted in the country in question for driving
with a trailer, the system automatically displays
the usual speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80km/h
(50mph).
If the speed warning for the trailer is deactiva-
ted, the system displays the speed limits as if
there were no trailer hitched.
26
Driver information
Limited operation
The trac sign detection system has certain
limitations. The following cases may lead the
system to operate with limitations or not at all:
●
In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow, rain,
fog or intense mist.
●
In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head-on
trac or by the sun.
●
When driving at high speeds.
●
If the camera is covered or dirty.
●
If the trac signs are partially or totally ob-
structed, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehi-
cles.
●
In the case of trac signs that do not fulfil the
regulations.
●
In the case of damaged or bent trac signs.
●
In the case of variable messages on over-
head or gantry signs (LED-based variable traf-
fic signs or other lighting units).
●
If the maps on the navigation system are not
up-to-date.
●
In the case of adhesives axed to vehicles
that depict trac signs, e.g. speed limits on lor-
ries.
WARNING
The technology in the trac sign detection
system cannot change the limits imposed by
the laws of physics and only works within the
system's limits. Do not let the extra conven-
ience aorded by the trac sign detection
system tempt you into taking any risks when
driving. The system is not a replacement for
driver awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style to
suit visibility, weather, road and trac condi-
tions.
●
Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and fog
may lead to the system failing to display
trac signs or not displaying them correctly.
●
If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-
ered or damaged, system operation may be
impaired.
WARNING
The driving recommendations and trac in-
dications shown on the trac sign detection
system may dier from the actual current
trac situation.
●
The system may not detect or correctly
show all the trac signs.
●
Trac signs and trac regulations have
priority over the recommendations and dis-
plays provided by the system.
Eco-ecient driving assistance
Fig.11 Eco-ecient driving assistance
indication (schematic representation).
Eco-ecient driving assistance helps you drive
with care and with low energy consumption by
following instructions superimposed in the digi-
tal cockpit, depending on the situation.
When you approach places such as a junc-
tion, a roundabout or a section of road with a
speed limit, the symbol is displayed along
with an event on the digital instrument cluster
›››Fig.11.
As soon as you follow the indication and
take your foot o the accelerator, the vehicle
adapts, based on the selected driving profile
and distance to the incident, brake energy re-
cuperation and speed.
Eco-ecient driving assistance uses the trip
data from the infotainment system and the sen-
sors of some assist systems. If no destination
guidance is active, the most likely route is used.
Driver information
27
Instrument panel
Pressing the accelerator can cancel the inter-
vention of the assistance at any time.
Eco-ecient driving assistance can be
switched on and o in the infotainment system,
in the assistance system settings ›››page34.
Eco-ecient driving assistance is temporarily
switched o if:
●
The gear selector is in the S position.
●
The Sport driving program is used.
●
Driving with adaptive cruise control (ACC) or
cruise control (GRA).
When these conditions no longer exist, the as-
sistance is reactivated if it is switched on in the
assist system settings.
Eco-ecient driving assistance is available de-
pending on the equipment, although not in all
countries.
WARNING
The system is not a replacement for driver
awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
trac conditions.
●
Trac signs on the road and trac regula-
tions have priority over eco-driving notes.
Note
●
The appearance of the symbols may vary
slightly depending on the equipment and
model. System updates may modify or ex-
pand the symbols.
●
When the system is switched on, eco-ef-
ficient driving assistance can also increase
recuperation without any indication being
displayed. This can occur in situations such
as when the accelerator pedal is released
when a vehicle is driving in front. In this case,
energy recuperation is adapted match the
speed of the vehicle in front without any indi-
cation being displayed.
Time and date
Setting the time on the infotainment system
●
Press > Settings ›››page30.
●
Select the menu option Date and time.
Service Menu
In the Service menu various settings can be ad-
justed depending on the features.
Open the Service menu
Select the Range information profile while in
the Driving data menu, and keep the
key
pressed on the multifunction steering wheel for
approximately 4 seconds. When it is released,
the Service menu will be displayed.
Now you can browse through the menu using
the keys on the multifunction steering wheel as
usual.
Restart the service interval display
Select the Service menu and follow the in-
structions on the screen of the instrument
panel.
Restart the oil service
Select the Reset Oil service menu and
follow the instructions on the instrument panel
display.
Identifying letters on engine (LDM)
Select the menu Engine code. The identifying
letters of the engine will be shown on the instru-
ment cluster display at the bottom left.
Service intervals
The service interval display appears on the in-
strument cluster screen and in the infotainment
system.
There are dierent versions of instrument pan-
els and infotainment systems, so the versions
and instructions on the screens may vary.
SEAT distinguishes between services with en-
gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and
services without engine oil change (e.g. Inspec-
tion).
28
Driver information
In vehicles with Services established by time
or mileage, the service intervals are already
pre-defined.
In vehicles with LongLife Service, the intervals
are determined individually. Thanks to techno-
logical progress, maintenance work has been
greatly reduced. The oil only needs to be
changed when the vehicle requires it. To calcu-
late this variation (max. 2 years), the vehicle's
conditions of use and individual driving styles
are considered. The advance warning first ap-
pears 20 days before the date established
for the corresponding service. The kilometres
(miles) remaining until the next service are al-
ways rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles)
and the time is given in complete days. The
current service message cannot be viewed until
500 km after the last service. Prior to this, only
lines are visible on the display.
Inspection reminder
If a service or an inspection has to be carried
out soon, a service reminder will be displayed
when the ignition is switched on.
The figure displayed are the kilometres that
can still be travelled or the time until the next
service.
Service due
When it is time for a service or an inspection,
an audio warning will sound when the ignition
is switched on, and a spanner symbol may ap-
pear for a few seconds on the instrument clus-
ter display , along with one of the following
messages.
●
Service now!
●
Please have your vehicle inspected
●
Oil change service due!
●
Oil change service and inspection
due!
Consult a service notification
With the ignition switched on, the engine o
and the vehicle at a standstill, the current serv-
ice notification can be read:
Check the date of the current service on the
infotainment system
●
Press the function button Data > Set-
tings > Service; OR > Vehicle sta-
tus.
Checking the date on the digital instrument
panel:
●
The date of the service can only be read
through the Service ›››page27 menu.
Resetting service interval display
If the service was not carried out by a SEAT
dealership, the display can be reset as follows:
●
The service interval display can only be reset
through the Service ›››page27 menu.
Do not
restart the indicator between the
service intervals, otherwise the information dis-
played will be incorrect.
If the oil change service is reset manually, the
service interval display changes to a fixed serv-
ice interval, also in vehicles with Flexible oil
change service.
Note
●
The service message disappears after a
few seconds, when the engine is started or
when the button is pressed on the multi-
function steering wheel.
●
In vehicles with the LongLife system in
which the battery has been disconnected for
a long period of time, it is not possible to cal-
culate the date of the next service. Therefore
the service interval display may not be cor-
rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximum
service intervals permitted ›››page297.
●
If you reset the display manually, the next
service interval will be indicated as in vehi-
cles with fixed service intervals. For this rea-
son we recommend that the service interval
display be reset by an authorised dealer.
Driver information
29
Instrument cluster operation
Instrument cluster opera-
tion
Introduction
With the ignition switched on, it is possible to
read the dierent functions of the display by
scrolling through the menus.
In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,
the multifunction display can only be operated
with the steering wheel buttons.
Some menu options can only be read when the
vehicle is at a standstill.
Instrument panel menus
The number of menus and information items
available will depend on the vehicle’s electron-
ics and features.
●
Vehicle status ›››page22.
●
Driving data ›››page21.
●
Assist systems.
–
Front Assist On/O ›››page144
–
ACC (only display) ›››page139
–
Lane Assist On/O ›››page148
–
Side Assist On/O ›››page152
●
Navigation.
●
Audio.
●
Telephone.
WARNING
Distracting the driver in any way can lead to
an accident and cause injuries.
●
Never use the menus on the instrument
panel display while the vehicle is in motion.
NOTICE
After charging or changing the 12-volt bat-
tery, check the system settings. If the power
supply is interrupted, the system settings
might be incorrect or deleted.
Operation using the multifunction
steering wheel
Fig.12 Right side of multifunction steering
wheel: buttons to the menus and informative
indications on the instrument panel (depending
on the version).
As long as a priority 1 ›››page22 warning
is active, it will not be possible to access any
menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and
hidden with the button of the multifunction
steering wheel ›››Fig.12.
Select a menu or an informative display
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,
press the button ›››Fig.12; several times if
necessary.
●
To change menus, use buttons or .
●
To open the menu or the information dis-
played, press the button or wait a few sec-
onds until the menu or the informative display
opens automatically.
Changing menu settings
●
In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb-
wheel of the multifunction steering wheel until
the desired option of the menu is highlighted.
The option appears framed.
●
Press the button to make the required mod-
ifications. A mark indicates that the system or
function is activated.
Back to menu selection
●
Press the button or .
30
Driver information
Infotainment system opera-
tion and displays
Introduction
The infotainment system brings together impor-
tant vehicle functions and systems into a single
central control unit, e.g. air conditioning, menu
settings, radio equipment and the navigation
system.
The actual number of menus available and the
name of the various options will depend on the
vehicle’s electronics and equipment.
General operating information
General information on the operation of the in-
fotainment system, as well as on the warning
and safety instructions that must be taken into
account, is found in ›››page191.
How to move through the dierent menus
and select them
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
If the infotainment system is o, switch it on.
●
The dierent menus are selected directly on
the touch screen using texts, icons or buttons.
If the box is checked , the function is activa-
ted.
Pressing the menu button will always take
you to the last menu used.
Any changes made using the settings menus
are automatically saved on closing those me-
nus
Scroll bar: Some menus and functions show
more content above or below those displayed
on the screen at that time, for example, long
lists of settings. Press on the scroll bar and pull
up or down.
Tutorial
The first time you connect the Infotainment sys-
tem, a system tutorial will open with a brief de-
scription of the main functions and how to use
it.
Help
In the Help menu can be found more informa-
tion and tips for using the infotainment system.
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
the risk of injury. Operating the Infotainment
system while driving could distract you from
trac.
Note
After starting the engine with a 12-volt bat-
tery that is heavily discharged or recently
replaced, some system settings such as
time, date, personalised comfort settings,
programming and user accounts might be al-
tered or deleted. Check and correct these
settings when the battery is suciently
charged.
Driver information
31
Infotainment system operation and displays
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Explanation of the function buttons
Fig.13 Schematic diagram: Overview of the
possible function buttons on the screen.
Top part of the screen
Current time.
Driving profile and navigation informa-
tion. If the user has an active route, both
the time and the distance to the destination
are displayed. If there is no active route,
the driving profile is displayed. On vehicles
with no available driving profile, the current
address is displayed whenever there is no
active route.
Air conditioning information. In vehicles
with heated steering wheels or windscreen
heating, the corresponding icon is dis-
played when these functions are enabled.
If not, the current outside temperature is
displayed.
Telephone information. Information re-
garding your mobile device is displayed:
available network signal strength, estab-
lished Bluetooth connection, unanswered
calls, new messages, battery status, etc.
System customisation based on user
and notifications. Some settings can be
saved in the user accounts of the per-
sonalization function and can therefore
be changed automatically when switching
user accounts.
Bottom part of the screen
Valid for the infotainment system: Connect Sys-
tem.
Main menu display mode:
: main menu with the 6 main functions
divided into 2 screens (3 + 3, customisable
by the user by pressing on the function).
: main menu in tile mode (all functions of
the Infotainment system).
Direct accesses to the functions of the In-
fotainment system (up to 10 functions, 5 +
5, customisable by the user). By pressing
on the icon, you can select/deselect the
functions in question.
32
Driver information
A
B
C
D
E
Don't show again
Start
End
Initial configuration wizard
Fig.14 Schematic diagram: Initial configuration
wizard
The initial configuration wizard will help you to
set up your Infotainment system the first time
you switch it on.
Whenever you switch on the infotainment sys-
tem, the initial setup screen will be displayed
›››Fig.14 if any parameters have not been set
(marked with “ ”) or if the Don't show again
function button has not been pressed.
Function buttons:
Press to set day and time.
Press to search and store to memory the
radio stations that have the best reception
at that moment.
Press to go to the Online Media settings.
Press to link your mobile phone to the Info-
tainment system.
Press to select your home address using
your current position or by manually enter-
ing an address.
Disables the possibility of
changing the settings of the Infotainment
system. If you wish to perform the initial
configuration, you must access through
Help.
Starts up the Configuration Wizard.
Once one or more settings have been ap-
plied, press to finalise the setup in the main
menu of the wizard.
Closes the Configuration Wizard.
Driver information
33
Infotainment system operation and displays
Vehicle information
Fig.15 Schematic diagram: Vehicle information
and status
Pressing Vehicle > Selection in the
main menu opens the vehicle info menu with
the following submenus:
●
Digital Cockpit: The dierent options for
displaying the information that will appear in
the Digital Cockpit are shown ›››page16.
●
Driving data: The average consumption,
average speed, distance travelled, trip dura-
tion and autonomy are shown. It has 3 memo-
ries: “Since start”, “Long-term” and “Since refu-
elling”.
●
Vehicle status: The warnings regarding
faults, incidents, memorisation of the tyre pres-
sure or information of the next inspection serv-
ice are displayed.
34
Driver information
Assist systems and vehicle settings
Fig.16 Schematic diagram: Assist systems and
vehicle settings
Clicking on Driver assistance from the
main menu opens the menu of vehicle assis-
tants and settings.
The number of assist systems and settings de-
pend on the version and the country in ques-
tion.
●
Parking assistants ›››page157
●
Activate / deactivate ESC, stabilisation sys-
tems and brake assist ›››page128.
●
Switch the Start-Stop system on / o
›››page115
●
Adaptive cruise control (ACC) ›››page139.
●
Lane Assist (lane departure warning system)
›››page148.
●
Emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist) ›››page144.
●
Fatigue detection ›››page23
●
Detection of road signs ›››page24
●
Side assist ›››page152
Safety
35
Safe driving
1)
Depending on the version/market.
Safety
Safe driving
Safety first!
WARNING
●
This manual contains important informa-
tion about the operation of the vehicle, both
for the driver and the passengers. The other
sections of the on-board documentation also
contain further information that you should
be aware of for your own safety and for the
safety of your passengers.
●
Ensure that the on-board documentation is
kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe-
cially important when lending or selling the
vehicle to another person.
Before driving
For your own safety and the safety of your
passengers, always note the following points
before every trip:
●
Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn
signals are working properly.
●
Check tyre pressure.
●
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and
good view of the surroundings.
●
Make sure all luggage is secured
›››page223.
●
Make sure that no objects can interfere with
the pedals.
●
Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors
properly according to your size.
●
Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats
always have the head restraints in the in-use
position ›››page82.
●
Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-
straints according to their height.
●
Protect children with appropriate child seats
and properly applied seat belts ›››page50.
●
Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct
your passengers also to assume a proper sit-
ting position ›››page36.
●
Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your
passengers also to fasten their seat belts prop-
erly ›››page38.
Factors influencing safety
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and
your passengers.
●
Always pay attention to trac and do not get
distracted by passengers or telephone calls.
●
Never drive when your driving ability is im-
paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
●
Observe trac laws and speed limits.
●
Always reduce your speed as appropriate for
road, trac and weather conditions.
●
When travelling long distances, take breaks
regularly - at least every two hours.
●
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or
stressed.
WARNING
Driving under the influence of alcohol, drugs,
medication or narcotics may result in severe
accidents and even loss of life.
●
Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics
may significantly alter perception, aect re-
action times and safety while driving, which
could result in the loss of control of the vehi-
cle.
Safety equipment
Never put your safety or the safety of your pas-
sengers in danger. In the event of an accident,
the safety equipment may reduce the risk of
injury. The following points cover part of the
safety equipment in your SEAT
1)
:
●
Optimised seat belts for all seats.
●
Seat belt tensioners on the driver, front pas-
senger and rear side seats.
●
Seat belt force limiters on the driver, front
passenger and rear side seats.
36
Safety
●
Red warning lamp and, if applicable, seat
belt status indication.
●
Front airbags for driver and passenger.
●
Side airbags for driver and passenger.
●
Head airbags on both sides of the vehicle.
●
Yellow airbag control lamp .
●
Yellow warning lamp on
the centre console.
●
Yellow warning lamp on
the centre console.
●
Control units and sensors.
●
Optimised and height-adjustable headrests.
●
Adjustable steering column.
●
ISOFIX/i-Size anchor points for child seats.
●
Child seat top tether attachment points.
The safety equipment mentioned above works
together to provide you and your passengers
with the best possible protection in the event
of an accident. However, these safety systems
can only be eective if you and your passen-
gers are sitting in a correct position and use this
equipment properly.
Safety is everybody's business.
Correct sitting position of
vehicle occupants
Correct position on the seat
Fig.17 The correct distance between the
driver and the steering wheel must be at least
25 cm (10 inches).
Fig.18 Correct belt web and headrest
positions
The correct sitting positions for the driver and
passengers are shown below.
If your physical constitution prevents you from
maintaining the correct sitting position, contact
a specialised workshop for help with any spe-
cial devices. The seat belt and airbag can only
provide optimum protection if a correct sitting
position is adopted. SEAT recommends taking
your car in for technical service.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accident or sudden
braking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend the
following positions:
Valid for all vehicle occupants:
●
Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is
at the same level as the top of your head, or as
close as possible to the same level as the top of
Safety
37
Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants
your head and under no circumstances below
eye level. Keep the back of your neck as close
as possible to the headrest ›››Fig.18.
●
Short people must fully lower the headrest
completely, even if your head is below its upper
edge.
●
Tall people must fully raise the headrest.
●
Always keep your feet in the footwell while
the vehicle is in motion.
●
Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly
›››page38.
The following also applies to the driver:
●
Move the seat backrest to an almost upright
position so that your back rests completely
against it.
●
Adjust the steering wheel so that it is at a
distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) from the
sternum ›››Fig.17 and can hold it with both
hands on the sides, on the outside, with the
arms slightly flexed.
●
The steering wheel must always point to-
wards the chest and never towards the face.
●
Adjust the seat lengthwise so that you can
fully step on the pedals with your knees slightly
bent and there is a distance between the knee
area and the instrument panel of at least 10 cm
(4 inches) ›››Fig.18.
●
Adjust the height of the seat so that you can
reach the top of the steering wheel.
●
Always keep both feet in the footwell so that
you have the vehicle under control at all times.
For the passenger, the following applies:
●
Move the seat backrest to an almost upright
position so that your back rests completely
against it.
●
Move the seat as far back as possible (mini-
mum 25 cm between the chest and the instru-
ment panel check translation). If you are sitting
closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot
protect you properly.
Number of seats
The vehicle has 5 seats, 2 in the front and 3 in
the rear. All seats are equipped with a safety
belt.
Check the ocial documentation for the num-
ber of occupants approved for your vehicle.
WARNING
Sitting in an incorrect position may increase
the risk of severe or lethal injuries in the
event of sudden braking or manoeuvring, in
case of collision or accident and if the air-
bags deploy.
●
Before starting the car, all passengers
must be sitting in a correct position and stay
like that for the entire journey. This also ap-
plies to a correct use of the seat belt.
●
The maximum amount of people in the ve-
hicle is the same as the amount of seats with
seat belts.
●
For children, always use a protection sys-
tem that is approved and suited for their
weight and height ›››page50.
●
While driving, always keep your feet in the
footwell. Never place them over the seat or
the dash panel, for example, or outside the
window. Otherwise the airbag and seat belt
may oer insucient protection and also in-
crease the risk of injury in the event of an
accident.
Risks of sitting in an incorrect posi-
tion
If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all,
the risk of severe or lethal injuries increases.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only
if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrect sitting
positions substantially reduce the protective
function of seat belts and, therefore, increase
38
Safety
the risk of severe or even lethal injuries. The risk
of severe or fatal injuries is especially height-
ened when a deploying airbag strikes a vehicle
occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting
position. The driver is responsible for all people,
particularly children, inside the vehicle.
The following list contains examples of incor-
rect sitting positions that could be dangerous
for all vehicle occupants.
When the vehicle is in motion:
●
Never stand in the vehicle.
●
Never stand on the seats.
●
Never kneel on the seats.
●
Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the
rear.
●
Never lean against the instrument panel.
●
Never lie on the rear seats.
●
Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
●
Never sit sideways.
●
Never lean out of a window.
●
Never put your feet out of a window.
●
Never put your feet on the instrument panel.
●
Never place your feet on the bench or on the
backrest of the seat.
●
Never travel in a footwell.
●
Never sit on the armrests.
●
Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
●
Never travel in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Sitting in an incorrect position increases the
risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event
of accidents and sudden braking or manoeu-
vres.
●
All occupants must sit correctly during the
journey and wear the seat belt correctly.
●
Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit-
ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt or
are not at a proper distance of the airbag risk
suering very serious or lethal injuries, espe-
cially if the airbags deploy and strike them.
Seat belts
Introduction
Fig.19 Drivers with properly worn seat belts
will not be thrown forward in the event of
sudden braking.
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants
in the proper position. They also help prevent
uncontrolled movements that may result in seri-
ous injury and reduce the risk of being thrown
out of the vehicle in case of an accident.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts cor-
rectly benefit greatly from the ability of the
belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, the
front part of your vehicle and other passive
safety features (such as the airbag system) are
designed to absorb the kinetic energy released
in a collision. Taken together, all these features
reduce the releasing kinetic energy and conse-
quently, the risk of injury. This is why it is so
important to fasten seat belts before every trip,
even when "just driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown
that wearing seat belts is an eective means of
substantially reducing the risk of injury and im-
proving the chances of survival when involved
in a serious accident. Furthermore, properly
worn seat belts improve the protection provi-
ded by airbags in the event of an accident. For
this reason, wearing a seat belt is required by
law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
the seat belts must be fastened and worn. The
front airbags, for example, are only triggered in
some cases of head-on collision. The front air-
bags will not be triggered during minor frontal
or side collisions, rear-end collisions, overturns
or accidents in which the airbag trigger thresh-
old value in the control unit is not exceeded.
Safety
39
Seat belts
Important safety instructions for the use of
seat belts
●
Always wear the seat belt as described in this
section.
●
Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at
all times and are not damaged.
WARNING
●
If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at
all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The
optimal protection from seat belts can be
achieved only if you use them properly.
●
Never allow two passengers (even chil-
dren) to share the same seat belt.
●
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
●
The seat belt should never lie on hard or
fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.)
because this can cause injuries.
●
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged
or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
●
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or
in any other incorrect position.
●
Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as an
overcoat over a sweater) impairs the proper
fit and function of the seat belts, reducing
their capacity to protect.
●
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be
blocked with paper or other objects, as this
can prevent the latch plate from engaging
securely.
●
Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or
similar items to alter the position of the belt
webbing.
●
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to
the connections, belt retractors or parts of
the buckle could cause severe injuries in the
event of an accident. Therefore, you must
check the condition of all seat belts at regu-
lar intervals.
●
Seat belts which have been worn in an ac-
cident and have been stretched must be re-
placed by a specialised workshop. Renewal
may be necessary even if there is no ap-
parent damage. The belt anchorage should
also be checked.
●
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-
moved or modified in any way.
●
The belts must be kept clean, otherwise
the retractors may not work properly.
Seat belt buckled indication
It lights up red
The driver or passenger has not fastened
the seat belt.
The control lamp lights up to remind the
driver to fasten their seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
●
Fasten your seat belt securely.
●
Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat
belts properly before driving o.
●
Protect children by using a child seat ac-
cording to the child's height and weight
›››page50.
When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed
exceeds approx. 25km/h (15mph) and the seat
belts are not fastened or are unfastened while
driving, a warning sound will be heard for a few
seconds. In addition, the warning lamp on the
instrument cluster display flashes.
The lamp goes out when the driver and pas-
senger seat belts are fastened with the ignition
switched on.
Rear seat belts fastened display
Fig.20 Instrument cluster: indication of the
status of the rear seat seat belts.
40
Safety
Depending on the version of the model, when
the ignition is switched on, the status display of
the belts ›››Fig.20 informs the driver on the in-
strument panel display whether the occupants
of the rear seats have their seat belts fastened.
It indicates that the corresponding seat is
empty.
Indicates that the seat is occupied and the
occupant is wearing the seat belt.
If a rear seat occupant unfastens his/her seat
belt while driving, the symbol lights up for
a maximum of 60 seconds. If you drive faster
than approx. 25 km/h (15 mph), an audio signal
sounds for a few seconds.
If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened while
driving in some of the rear seats, the seat belt
status is displayed for approximately 30 sec-
onds.
Head-on collisions and the laws of
physics
Fig.21 A driver not wearing a seat belt may be
thrown forward violently.
Fig.22 Any rear seat occupants not wearing
a seat belt may be thrown forward violently,
hitting the driver who is wearing the seat belt.
The eects of the laws of physics in the case of
a head-on collision are easy to explain: the mo-
ment a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy
called “kinetic energy” starts acting on both the
vehicle and its passengers.
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on the
speed of the vehicle and on the weight of the
vehicle and of its passengers. The higher they
are, the more energy there is to be “absorbed”
in the event of an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the
speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles from
25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30mph), for
example, the corresponding kinetic energy is
multiplied by four.
Given that the passengers of the vehicle in our
example do not have their seat belts fastened,
in the event of a collision the entire amount of
the passengers' kinetic energy will be only ab-
sorbed by the mentioned impact.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h
(30 mph), the forces acting on bodies in a colli-
sion can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At
greater speed these forces are even higher.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on col-
lision, they will move forward at the same speed
their vehicle was travelling just before the im-
pact. This example applies not only to head-on
collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the
body in a collision are so great that it is not pos-
sible to brace oneself with one's hands. In the
Safety
41
Seat belts
event of a head-on collision, vehicle occupants
not wearing a seat belt will be thrown uncon-
trollably forward and will collide, for example,
against the steering wheel, instrument panel or
windscreen ›››Fig.21.
It is also important for rear passengers to wear
seat belts properly, as they could otherwise be
thrown forward violently through the vehicle in-
terior in an accident. If a rear seat occupant
is not wearing a seat belt, they are not only en-
dangering themselves but also the occupants
of the front seats ›››Fig.22.
Fastening and unfastening the seat
belt
Fig.23 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt
into the buckle.
Fig.24 Release the seat belt's latch plate.
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occu-
pants in the position that most protects them
in the event of an accident or sudden braking
››› .
Fastening the seat belt
Fasten your seat belt before each trip.
●
Adjust the front seat and head restraint cor-
rectly ›››page36.
●
Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in
an upright position ››› .
●
Pull the latch plate and place the belt web-
bing evenly across your chest and lap. Do not
twist the seat belt when doing so ››› .
●
Insert the buckle plate in the buckle of the
correct seat ›››Fig.23.
●
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.
Releasing the seat belt
Only unfasten the seat belt when the vehicle
has come to a standstill ››› .
●
Press the red button on the buckle ›››Fig.24.
The latch plate is released from the buckle.
●
Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up
easily and the trim will not be damaged.
WARNING
●
The seat belt cannot oer its full protec-
tion unless the seat backrest is in an upright
position and the seat belt is worn correctly,
according to your size.
●
Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehicle
is in motion can cause severe or fatal injuries
in the event of an accident or sudden brak-
ing.
●
The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt,
can cause severe injuries if the belt moves
from hard areas of the body to soft areas
(e.g. the stomach).
42
Safety
Correct position of the seat belt
Fig.25 Correct seat belt and headrest
positions, viewed from front and the side.
Fig.26 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.
Seat belts oer their maximum protection in
the event of an accident and reduce the risk
of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when
they are properly positioned. Furthermore, if the
webbing is correctly positioned, the seat belt
will hold the vehicle occupants in the optimum
position to ensure the airbag provides the max-
imum protection. The seat belt must therefore
always be worn and the webbing correctly
positioned.
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or
even fatal injuries ›››page36, Correct sitting
position of vehicle occupants.
●
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
on the centre of the shoulder, never across the
neck or the arm, under the arm or behind the
shoulder.
●
The lap part of the seat belt must lie across
the pelvis, never across the stomach.
●
The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably.
Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any
slack.
In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt
should pass uniformly over the chest and as
low as possible through the pelvic area with the
strap flat so it does not press down on the ab-
domen; in addition, it must be used throughout
the entire pregnancy ›››Fig.26.
Adapting the position of the belt webbing to
your size
The position of the seat belt can be adapted by
adjusting the height of the front seats.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause
severe or fatal injuries in the event of an acci-
dent.
●
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
on the centre of the shoulder, never across
the neck or the arm.
●
The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta-
bly on the torso
●
The lap part of the seat belt must lie across
the pelvis, never across the stomach. The
seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on
the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to
take up any slack.
●
In the case of pregnant women, the ab-
dominal strap of the seat belt should pass
as low as possible across the pelvic area,
resting flat and “surrounding” the abdomen
›››Fig.26.
●
Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas-
tened.
●
Once the seat belt is positioned correctly,
don't pull it away from your body with your
hand.
●
Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or frag-
ile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.
●
Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or
similar instruments to alter the position of the
belt webbing.
Safety
43
Seat belts
1)
Only if fitted with the PreCrash System.
Note
If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the correct position of the
belt webbing, contact a specialised work-
shop for help with any special devices to en-
sure the optimum protection of the seat belt
and airbag. SEAT recommends taking your
car in for technical service.
Automatic retractor, tensioner and
belt force limiter
Vehicle seat belts are part of the vehicle’s
safety system ›››page36. This system has the
following important functions:
Automatic belt retractor
The seat belt shoulder straps on the driver's
and front passenger seats, as well as those on
the rear side seats (and, depending on equip-
ment, also the seat belt of the central rear
seat) are fitted with automatic retractors. This
device ensures complete freedom of movement
when the shoulder strap is pulled gently or
during normal driving. However, during sudden
braking, when driving in the mountains, around
bends and when accelerating, the retractor
locks the seat belt if it extends rapidly.
Seat belt tensioner
The seat belts on the front seats and, depend-
ing on the equipment, side rear seats are fitted
with tensioners.
The tensioners are activated by sensors in the
event of severe head-on, side and rear colli-
sions, and tension the seat belts in a direction
opposite their extension.
If the seat belt is slack, the tensioner tightens
it. This cushions the movement of occupants
forwards towards the impact.
The belt pre-tensioners work in combination
with the airbag system. In case of overturn, the
pre-tensioners do not activate unless the head
airbags are deployed.
When activated, a fine powder may be re-
leased. This is completely normal and it is not
an indication of fire in the vehicle.
Belt force limiter
Depending on the equipment and the country
in question, in the event of an accident, the seat
belt force limiter reduces the force the seat belt
exerts on the body.
Note
●
After certain driving situations, the reversi-
ble belt tensioners may be left permanently
tensioned
1)
. In this case, to loosen the belt, it
must be removed manually while the vehicle
is stationary and then replaced correctly.
●
The relevant safety requirements must be
observed if the vehicle or any components of
the system are to be scrapped. Specialised
workshops are aware of these requirements.
Maintenance and disposal of seat
belt tensioners
The belt tensioners are components of the seat
belts that are installed in the seats of your
vehicle. If you work on the belt tensioners or
remove and install parts of the system when
performing other repair work, the seat belt may
be damaged. The consequence may be that,
in the event of an accident, the belt tensioners
function incorrectly or may not function at all.
So that the eectiveness of the seat belt ten-
sioner is not reduced and that removed parts
do not cause any injuries or environmental pol-
lution, regulations, which are known to the spe-
cialised workshops, must be observed.
44
Safety
WARNING
Improper handling and home repairs to seat
belts, automatic retractors and belt tension-
ers may increase the risk of serious or fa-
tal injuries. The tensioners may not activate,
even though they should, or they may acti-
vate unexpectedly.
●
Never repair, adjust, or disassemble and
reassemble seat belt components or ten-
sioners. Always have this work carried out by
a specialist workshop.
●
Seat belts, tensioners and their automatic
retractors cannot be repaired and have to be
replaced.
For the sake of the environment
Airbag modules and belt tensioners may
contain perchlorate.
Observe the legal requirements for their dis-
posal.
Airbag system
Why is it so important to wear a seat
belt and to sit correctly?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best
protection, the seat belt must always be worn
properly and the correct sitting position must
be assumed.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat
belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's
overall passive safety system. Please bear in
mind that the airbag system can only work ef-
fectively when the vehicle occupants are wear-
ing their seat belts correctly and have adjus-
ted the head restraints properly. Therefore, it is
most important to properly wear the seat belts
at all times, not only because this is required by
law in most countries, but also for your safety
›››page38, Seat belts.
The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so if
you are not properly seated when the airbag is
triggered, you may sustain fatal injuries. There-
fore, it is essential that all vehicle occupants as-
sume a correct sitting position while travelling.
Sharp braking before an accident may cause a
passenger not wearing a seat belt to be thrown
forward into the area of the deploying airbag.
In this case, the inflating airbag may inflict criti-
cal or fatal injuries on the occupant. This also
applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible distance
between yourself and the front airbag. This
way, the front airbags can completely deploy
when triggered, providing their maximum pro-
tection.
The most important factors for triggering the
airbag are the type of accident, the angle of
impact and the vehicle speed.
Whether or not the airbags are activated de-
pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration
rate resulting from the collision and detected
by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration
occurring during the collision and measured by
the control unit remains below the specified
reference values, the front, side and/or curtain
airbags will not be triggered. Take into account
that the visible damage in a vehicle involved
in an accident, no matter how serious, is not a
determining factor for the airbags to have been
activated.
WARNING
Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum-
ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to
critical or fatal injuries
●
All vehicle occupants, including children,
who are not properly belted can sustain criti-
cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered.
Children up to 12 years old should always
travel on the rear seat. Never transport chil-
dren in the vehicle if they are not restrained
or the restraint system is not appropriate for
their age, size or weight.
●
To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating
airbag, always wear the seat belt properly
›››page38.
Description of the airbag system
The airbag system oers additional protection
for the occupants in combination with the seat
belts.
Safety
45
Airbag system
The airbag system comprises the following
modules (as per vehicle equipment):
●
Electronic control unit
●
Front airbags for driver and passenger
●
Side airbags
●
Head airbag
●
Airbag control lamp on the instrument
panel ›››page46
●
Key-operated switch for front passenger air-
bag
●
Control lamp for disabled/enabled status of
the front passenger airbag.
The airbag system operation is monitored elec-
tronically. The airbag control lamp will illumi-
nate for a few seconds every time the ignition is
switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the control
lamp :
●
does not light up when the ignition is switched
on ›››page46,
●
turns o after 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on,
●
turns o and then lights up again after the
ignition is switched on,
●
illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is mov-
ing.
The airbag system is not triggered if:
●
the ignition is switched o
●
there is a minor frontal collision
●
there is a minor side collision
●
there is a rear-end collision
●
in the event of the vehicle overturning if the
dynamic characteristics measured by the con-
trol unit are too low,
●
the impact speed is lower than the reference
value programmed in the control unit.
WARNING
●
The seat belts and airbags can only pro-
vide maximum protection if the occupants
are seated correctly ›››page36.
●
If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys-
tem, have the system checked immediately
by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there
is a danger that during a collision, the system
may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Airbag activation
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within
thousands of a second, to provide additional
protection in the event of an accident. A fine
dust may develop when the airbag deploys.
This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in
the vehicle.
The airbag system is only ready to function
when the ignition is on.
In special accidents instances, several airbags
may activate at the same time.
In the event of minor head-on and side colli-
sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or rollover
of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.
Activation factors
The conditions that lead to the airbag system
activating in each situation cannot be general-
ised. Some factors play an important role, such
as the properties of the object the vehicle hits
(hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc.
Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag activa-
tion.
The control unit analyses the collision trajec-
tory and activates the respective restraint sys-
tem.
If the deceleration rate is below the predefined
reference value in the control unit the airbags
will not be triggered, even though the accident
may cause extensive damage to the car.
The following airbags are triggered in seri-
ous head-on collisions:
●
Driver airbag.
●
Front passenger front airbag
46
Safety
The following airbags are triggered in seri-
ous side-on collisions:
●
Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the acci-
dent.
●
Front side airbag on the side of the accident.
In an accident with airbag activation:
●
the interior lights switch on (if the interior light
switch is in the courtesy light position);
●
the hazard warning lights switch on;
●
all doors are unlocked;
●
the fuel supply to the engine is cut;
●
an emergency call is started.
Airbag system control lamps
Lights up on the instrument cluster
Fault in the airbag system and seat belt
tensioners. Have the system checked im-
mediately by a specialised workshop.
It lights up on the dash panel
Front passenger front airbag deactivated.
Check if the airbag should be kept deacti-
vated.
OR: Fault in the airbag system. Have the
system checked immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
It lights up on the dash panel
Front passenger front airbag activated. The
control lamp turns o automatically 60
seconds after the ignition is switched on.
Several warning and control lamps light up for
a few seconds when the ignition is switched
on, signalling that the function is being verified.
They will switch o after a few seconds.
If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system
control lamp remains on or flashes, it indi-
cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat
belt tensioner system ››› . Have the system
checked immediately by a specialised work-
shop.
If the front passenger airbag has been deacti-
vated, the warning lamp remains lit in the
middle of the dash panel to remind you that
the airbag is deactivated. If, with the front pas-
senger airbag deactivated, this lamp does not
remain lit or if it is lit along with the control
lamp on the instrument panel, there is a fault
in the airbag system ››› . If the control lamp
is flashing, there is a fault in the disabling of the
airbag system ››› . Have the system checked
immediately by a specialised workshop.
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat
belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat
belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to
trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.
●
The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-
taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the sys-
tem checked immediately by a specialised
workshop.
●
Do not mount a child seat in the front pas-
senger seat or remove the mounted child
seat! The front passenger front airbag may
deploy during an accident in spite of the
fault.
NOTICE
Always pay attention to any lit control lamps
and to the corresponding descriptions and
instructions to avoid damage to the vehicle
or harm to the occupants.
Safety
47
Airbag system
Front airbags
Fig.27 Driver’s airbag in the steering wheel.
Fig.28 Front passenger airbag located in
dash panel.
The driver's front airbag is housed in the steer-
ing wheel and that of the front passenger, on
the dash panel. Airbags are identified by the
word “AIRBAG”.
The airbag covers open and remain attached
to the steering wheel and instrument panel
when the driver and front passenger air-
bags are triggered, respectively ›››Fig.27 ,
›››Fig.28.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front
airbag system gives the front occupants addi-
tional protection for the head and chest in the
event of a severe frontal collision ››› .
In addition, in certain head-on collisions, the
head airbag is triggered on both sides of the
vehicle.
Their special design allows the controlled es-
cape of the propellant gas when an occupant
puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are protected by the airbag. After the
collision, the airbag deflates suciently to al-
low visibility.
WARNING
●
The deployment space between the front
passengers and the airbags must not in any
case be occupied by other passenger, pets
and objects.
●
The airbags provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed.
●
It is also important not to attach any
objects such as cup holders or telephone
mountings to the surfaces covering the air-
bag units.
Activate and deactivate front pas-
senger front airbag
Fig.29 Switch for activating and deactivating
the front passenger airbag.
Fig.30 Centre of the instrument panel: control
lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag in
centre console.
Deactivate the front passenger front airbag
only if you have to use a rear-facing child seat
in the front passenger seat.
48
Safety
SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the
rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the front
passenger airbag.
When the front passenger airbag is deactiva-
ted, this means that only the front passenger
front airbag is deactivated. All the other airbags
in the vehicle remain activated.
Deactivate and activate the front passenger
front airbag
●
Switch the ignition o.
●
Open the passenger side door.
●
Remove the key shaft from the vehicle key.
●
Insert the key blade into the slot provided
in the front passenger airbag disconnection
switch ›››Fig.29. About 3/4 of the key should
enter; this is as far as it will go.
●
Turn the key gently to change its position to
(deactivate) or to (activate). If you have
diculty, ensure that you have inserted the key
as far as it will go.
●
Close the front passenger door.
●
When deactivating the airbag, switch the ig-
nition on and check that the control lamp
remains lit ›››Fig.30.
●
When reactivating the airbag, check that
when the ignition is switched on, the con-
trol lamp does not light up and the
lamp
lights up for 60 seconds and then turns o.
WARNING
●
The driver of the vehicle is responsible for
disabling or switching on the airbag.
●
Always switch o the ignition before disa-
bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to
do so could result in a fault in the airbag de-
activation system.
●
Never leave the key in the airbag disabling
switch as it could get damaged or enable or
disable the airbag during driving.
●
If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,
reactivate it as soon as possible so that it
can fulfil its protective function.
Side airbags
Fig.31 Side airbag in driver's seat.
Fig.32
Illustration of completely inflated side
airbag on left side of vehicle.
The side airbags are located in the front seat
backrests ›››Fig.31 , ›››Fig.32.
Its location is marked with the word “AIRBAG” on
the upper part of the back of the seats or on the
lower coverings with the word AIRBAG in relief.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air-
bag system provides additional protection for
the upper body in the event of a severe side
collision ››› .
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the
risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the
body facing the impact. In addition to their nor-
mal protection, the seat belts also hold the
passengers in the event of a side collision; this
is how these airbags provide maximum protec-
tion.
Safety
49
Airbag system
WARNING
●
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean
forward, or are not seated correctly while the
vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk
of injury if the side airbag system is triggered
in an accident.
●
In order for the side airbags to provide
their maximum protection, the prescribed sit-
ting position must always be maintained with
seat belts fastened while travelling.
●
In a side-on collision the side airbags will
not work if the sensors do not correctly
measure the pressure increase on the inte-
rior of the doors, due to air escaping through
the areas with holes or openings in the door
panel.
●
Never drive if the interior door panels have
been removed or if the panels have not been
correctly fitted.
●
Occupants of the outer seats must never
carry any objects or pets in the deployment
space between them and the airbags, or al-
low children or other passengers to travel
in this position. It is also important not to at-
tach any accessories (such as cup holders)
to the doors. This would impair the protection
oered by the side airbags.
●
Ensure that children are correctly seated
in their seats and that their heads are not
in the deployment zone of the side airbags
›››Fig.32, as deploying airbags could hit
them and cause serious injury.
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used only
for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any
heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pock-
ets.
●
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,
must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-
ster because the system may be damaged.
In this case, the side airbags would not be
triggered.
●
Under no circumstances should protective
covers be fitted over seats with side airbags
unless the covers have been approved for
use in your vehicle. Because the airbag de-
ploys from the side of the backrest, the use
of conventional seat covers would obstruct
the side airbag, seriously reducing the air-
bag's eectiveness.
●
Any damage to the original seat upholstery
or around the seams of the side airbag units
must be repaired immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
●
The airbags provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed.
●
Any work on the side airbag system or re-
moval and installation of the airbag compo-
nents for other repairs (such as removal of
the front seat) should only be performed by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may
occur during the airbag system operation.
Head-protection airbags
Fig.33 Location and deployment area of the
head-protection airbag.
Head-protection airbags are on both sides of
the passenger compartment, above the doors
›››Fig.33 and their location is indicated with
the word “AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-
protection airbag system gives the vehicle oc-
cupants additional protection for the head and
upper body in the event of a severe side colli-
sion ››› .
The framed area is covered by the head-pro-
tection airbag when it is deployed (deployment
area) ›››Fig.33. Therefore, objects should
never be placed or mounted in this area ››› .
In the event of a side collision the curtain airbag
is triggered on the impact side of the vehicle.
50
Safety
The head-protection airbags reduce the risk of
injury to passengers in the front and rear side
seats facing the impact.
WARNING
●
In order for the head-protection airbags
to provide their maximum protection, the pre-
scribed sitting position must always be main-
tained with seat belts fastened while travel-
ling.
●
For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must
be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a
screen dividing the interior of the vehicle.
See your technical service to make this ad-
justment.
●
There must be no other persons, animals
or objects between the occupants of the
outer seats and the deployment space of the
head-protection airbags so that the head-
protection airbag can deploy completely
without restriction and provide the greatest
possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds
which have not been expressly approved for
use in your vehicle may not be attached to
the side windows.
●
Ensure that children are correctly seated
in their seats and that their heads are not
in the deployment zone of the head airbags
›››Fig.33, as deploying airbags could hit
them and cause serious injury.
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used only
for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any
heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pock-
ets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat
hangers.
●
The airbags provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed.
●
Any work on the head-protection airbag
system or removal and installation of the air-
bag components for other repairs (such as
removal of the roof lining) should only be
performed by a specialised workshop. Oth-
erwise, faults may occur during the airbag
system operation.
●
The side and head airbags are managed
through sensors located in the interior of the
front doors. To ensure the correct operation
of the side and curtain airbags neither the
doors nor the door panels should be modi-
fied in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If
the front door is damaged, the airbag system
may not work correctly. All work carried out
on the front door must be done in a special-
ised workshop.
Transporting children
safely
Introduction
For safety reasons, as we have learned from
accident statistics, we recommend that chil-
dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear
seats. Depending on their age, height and
weight, children travelling in rear seats must use
a child seat or a seat belt. For safety reasons,
the child seat should be installed in the rear
seat, behind the front passenger seat or in the
centre back seat.
The laws of physics involved and the forces
acting in a collision apply also to children
›››page40. But unlike adults, children do not
have fully developed muscle and bone struc-
tures. This means that children are subject to a
greater risk of injury.
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al-
ways use special child restraint systems when
travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety
products from the Original Accessories Pro-
gramme, which includes systems for all ages
made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see
www.seat.com).
These systems have been especially designed
and approved, complying with the ECE-R44.
regulation.
Safety
51
Transporting children safely
SEAT recommends securing the child seats
shown on the website as described below:
●
Child seats in the opposite direction of travel
(group 0+): ISOFIX and support leg (ROMER
BABY SAFE 3 i-SIZE + ISOFIX BASE / PEKE G0
i-SIZE + i-SIZE BASE).
●
Child seats in the direction of travel (group 1):
ISOFIX (PEKE G1 TRIFIX i-SIZE).
●
Forward-facing child seats (group 2): seatbelt
and ISOFIX (ROMER BRITAX KIDFIX i-SIZE. In ad-
dition, the child seat’s attachment point for the
“SecureGuard” lap belt must be used, and the
“SICT” side impact protection system located
at the rear of the child seat must be adjus-
ted. Adjust only the “SICT” closest to the door.
Please follow the child seat manufacturer's us-
age instructions).
●
Forward-facing child seats (group 3): seatbelt
(BRITAX RÖMER KIDFIX i-SIZE / NANIA UP).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and ob-
serve any statutory requirements when instal-
ling and using child seats. Always read and
note ›››page52.
We recommend you always carry the man-
ufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-
gether with the on-board documentation.
Child seats group classification
Fig.34 Examples of child seats.
Use only child seats that are ocially approved
and suitable for the child.
These seats are subject to the ECE-R44 or
ECE-R129 standards. ECE-R stands for: Eco-
nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.
Child seats by weight group
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Age group Weight of the child
Group 0 Up to 10 kg
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg
Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg
Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg
Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and ap-
proved under the ECE R44 or ECE-R129 stand-
ards bear the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129 test marks
on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test
number below it).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and ob-
serve any statutory requirements when instal-
ling and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the
manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual
together with the on-board documentation.
SEAT recommends you use child seats from the
Original Accessories Catalogue. These child
seats have been designed and tested for use in
our vehicles. You can find the right child seat for
your model and age group at our dealers.
Child seats by approval category
Child seats may have the approval category
of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific (all
according to the ECE-R44 standard) or i-Size
(according to the ECE-R129 standard).
●
Universal: child seats with universal approval
can be installed in all vehicles. There is no need
to consult any list of models. In the case of
universal approval for ISOFIX, the child seat is
additionally provided with a Top Tether belt.
●
Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, in
addition to the standard requirements of univer-
sal approval, requires safety devices to lock
the child seat, which require additional test-
52
Safety
1)
Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.
ing. Child seats with semi-universal approval
include a list of vehicle models for which they
can be installed.
●
Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval
requires a dynamic test of the child seat for
each vehicle model separately. Child seats
with vehicle-specific approval also include a list
of vehicle models for which they can be instal-
led.
●
i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must
meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE-
R 129 standard in relation to installation and
safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you
which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-
cle.
Fitting and using child seats
Fig.35 Airbag sticker: on the passenger side
sunshade blind.
Fig.36 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of the
passenger side door.
Warnings about fitting a child seat
Take the following general warnings into ac-
count if you are going to fit a child seat. They
are valid for all child seats regardless of their
attachment system.
●
Please read and follow the child seat manu-
facturer's operating instructions.
●
The child seat should preferably be fitted to
the rear seat behind the front passenger seat
so that the child can exit the vehicle on the
pavement side.
●
Set the height of the seat belt such that it
adapts to the child seat naturally, without twist-
ing. The lowest position of the seat belt height
regulator must be used with rear-facing child
seats.
●
To correctly use a child seat in the back, the
front backrest must be adjusted so that there
is no contact with the child seat in the back in
the case that it goes opposite to the direction
of the car. In the case of front facing restraint
systems, the front backrest must be adjusted so
that there is no contact with the child's feet.
●
For a correct assembly of the child's seat on
the rear seats, adjust or dismount the headrest,
in order to prevent contact with the seat.
●
If a semi-universal type chair is to be installed,
in which the method of attachment to the car
is through the seat belt and support bracket,
it should never be installed in the central rear
seat as the ground clearance is lower than in
other places and the support bracket will not
allow the seat to remain suciently stable.
●
When fitting a child seat on the front passen-
ger seat, the seat must be moved backwards
as far as possible and placed in the highest
position. The backrest must also be put in a
vertical position
1)
.
Important information about the front pas-
senger front airbag
A sticker with important information about the
passenger airbag is located on the passenger's
sunshade blind and/or on the passenger side
door frame ›››Fig.35.
Read and always observe the safety informa-
tion included in the following chapters:
Safety
53
Transporting children safely
●
Safety distance with respect to the passen-
ger airbag ›››page44.
●
Objects between the passenger and the pas-
senger side airbag ››› in Front airbags on
page47.
The passenger side front airbag, when enabled,
is a serious risk for a child that is facing back-
ward since the airbag can strike the seat with
such force that it can cause serious or fatal inju-
ries. Children up to 12 years old should always
travel on the rear seat.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to trans-
port children on the rear seats. This is the safest
location in the vehicle. Alternatively, the front
passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-
operated switch ›››page47. When transport-
ing children, use a child seat suitable for the
age and size of each child ›››page51.
WARNING
●
If a child seat is secured to the front pas-
senger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining
critical or fatal injuries in the event of an ac-
cident increases.
●
An inflating front passenger airbag can
strike the rear-facing child seat and project
it with great force against the door, the roof
or the backrest.
●
Never install a child seat facing back-
wards on the front passenger seat unless
the front passenger front airbag has been
disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to
the child! However, if necessary, the front
passenger front airbag must be deactivated
›››page47 . If the passenger seat has
a height adjustment option, move it to the
highest, most upright position. If you have a
fixed seat, do not install any child restraint
system in this location.
●
For those vehicles that do not include a key
lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the ve-
hicle must be taken to a technical service. Do
not forget to reconnect the airbag when an
adult wants to sit in the front passenger seat.
●
Never allow a child to be transported in a
vehicle without being properly secured, or
to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel-
ling. In an accident, the child could be flung
through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal
injuries to themselves and to the other vehi-
cle occupants.
●
Never leave a child alone in the child seat
or in the vehicle.
●
Children who are less than 1.50 m tall must
not wear a normal seat belt without a child
seat, as this could cause injuries to the ab-
dominal and neck areas during a sudden
braking manoeuvre or in an accident.
●
When a child seat is mounted in the rear
seats, the door child-proof lock should be
activated ›››page74.
Attachment systems
Depending on the country, dierent attach-
ment systems are used for safely installing child
seats.
Attachment systems overview
●
ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attachment
system allowing quick and safe attachment of
child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX attachment es-
tablishes a rigid connection between the child
seat and the car body.
The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,
called connectors. These connectors are fit-
ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found be-
tween the seat cushion and the backrest of
the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISOFIX
attachment systems are used mainly in Europe
›››page54. If necessary, ISOFIX attachment
may have to be supplemented with a Top
Tether belt or a support bracket.
●
Automatic three-point seat belt. Whenever
possible, it is preferable to attach the child
seats with the ISOFIX system rather than at-
taching them with an automatic three-point
seat belt ›››page57.
Additional attachment:
●
Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided over
the back of the rear seat and attached to an
anchor point with a hook. Anchor points are lo-
cated at the back of the rear seat backrest on
54
Safety
the luggage compartment side ›››page56.
The rings for retaining the Top Tether belt are
marked with an anchor symbol.
●
Support bracket: some child seats rest on
the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket.
The support bracket prevents the child seat
from tipping forward in the event of impact.
Child seats fitted with a support bracket should
only be used in the passenger seat and side
rear seats ››› . For the assembly of this type
of seat you should also consult the list of ap-
proved vehicles for this assembly, available in
the instructions for child restraint systems.
Recommended systems for attaching child
seats
SEAT recommends attaching child seats as fol-
lows:
●
Baby carriers or child seats in the opposite
direction of travel: ISOFIX and support bracket
or i-Size.
●
Child seats in the direction of travel: ISOFIX
and Top Tether.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the support bracket can
cause serious or fatal injury.
●
Make sure the support bracket is correctly
and safely installed.
●
When the base of the child seat is sup-
porting the child’s weight, the support foot
should not hang in the air or be supplemen-
ted with objects. In addition, make sure that
the base of the child seat is always suppor-
ted by the surface of the vehicle's seat. The
support leg of the child seat should not raise
the base of the child seat o the surface of
the vehicle's seat.
Securing the child seat with the ISO-
FIX or i-Size system
The marking of ISOFIX or i-Size anchor points
depends on the equipment and the country in
question.
See the following tables to understand the
compatibility of the ISOFIX/i-Size systems in the
vehicle:
Vehicle ISOFIX positions
Weight group Size class
a)
Electrical equip-
ment
Front passenger seat
Rear side seat Rear central seat
airbag enabled airbag disabled
Baby carrier
F ISO/L1 X X X X
G ISO/L2 X X X X
Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X
Group 0+ to 13 kg
E ISO/R1 X X IL X
D ISO/R2 X X IL X
C SO/R3 X X IL X
Safety
55
Transporting children safely
Weight group Size class
a)
Electrical equip-
ment
Front passenger seat
Rear side seat Rear central seat
airbag enabled airbag disabled
Group I 9 to 18 kg
D ISO/R2 X X IL X
C ISO/R3 X X IL X
B ISO/F2 X X IL, IUF X
B1 ISO/F2X X X IL, IUF X
A ISO/F3 X X IL, IUF X
Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- X X IL X
Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- X X IL X
IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group.
IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat
manufacturer's vehicle list into account.
X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.
a)
The indication of class according to size corresponds to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the
class according to size is indicated on the ECE approval label. The indication of class according to size is stated on the corresponding child seat.
Vehicle i-Size positions
Front passenger seat
Rear side seat Rear central seat
airbag enabled airbag disabled
X X i-U X
i-U: Position suitable for forward- or rear-facing i-Size child restraint systems with universal certification.
X: Position not suitable for i-Size child restraint systems.
56
Safety
Securing the child seat with the ISOFIX or
i-Size system
Fig.37 Rear seat: slots die cut to access the
ISOFIX / iSize securing rings.
Fig.38 Rear seats: fitting a child seat with the
ISOFIX system.
You must follow the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
The location of the ISOFIX or i-Size anchor
points is indicated by a symbol ›››Fig.37. In
some vehicles, the rings are secured to the seat
frame and, in others, they are secured to the
rear floor.
●
First open the cut-out section behind the
marked grooves to access the retaining rings
›››Fig.37.
●
Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX or iSize
retaining rings until it is heard to engage se-
curely ›››Fig.38. If the child seat is equipped
with Top Tether anchor points, secure it to the
correspondent ring ›››page56. Follow the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
●
Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure
that it is properly anchored.
Child seats with the ISOFIX or i-Size and Top
Tether attachment system can be purchased
from technical services.
WARNING
The securing rings are designed only for use
with ISOFIX or i-Size and Top Tether system
child seats.
●
Never secure other child seats that do not
have ISOFIX, i-Size or Top Tether systems, or
safety belts or any other objects to the se-
curing rings – as this can result in potentially
fatal injuries to the child.
●
Ensure that the child seat is correctly se-
cured to the ISOFIX or i-Size rings and the Top
Tether.
Top Tether securing belts
Fig.39 Rear seats: adjustment and assembly
according to the Top Tether belt.
Safety
57
Transporting children safely
Fig.40 Rear part of the rear seats: securing
rings for the Top Tether strap.
Child seats with a Top Tether system are fitted
with an additional strap for fastening to an an-
chor point in the vehicle. This anchor point is
located on the rear of the rear seat backrest
(identified with the symbol ) and provides
better retention.
The objective of this system is to reduce for-
ward movements of the child seat in a head-on
collision, to reduce the risk of injuries that may
be caused to the child’s head by impacting
against any element of the inside of the vehicle.
Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mounted
seats
Currently, there are very few rear-facing child
safety seats that have Top Tether. Please care-
fully read and follow the seat manufacturer in-
structions to learn the proper way to install the
Top Tether strap.
Securing the retainer strap
●
Follow the manufacturer's instructions to de-
ploy the child seat Top Tether retaining strap.
●
Position the belt under the headrest (accord-
ing to the instructions of the seat itself, lift or
remove the headrest if necessary) ›››Fig.39.
●
Slide the strap and secure it properly with the
anchor on the rear seat backrest ›››Fig.40.
●
Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-
facturer's instructions.
Releasing the retaining strap
●
Loosen the strap following the manufacturer's
instructions.
●
Push the lock and release it from the anchor-
ing support.
WARNING
An undue installation of the safety seat will
increase the risk of injury in the event of a
crash.
●
Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the
luggage compartment.
●
Never secure or tie luggage or other items
to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the up-
per ones (Top Tether).
WARNING
Child restraint anchors are designed to sup-
port the loads of properly adjusted child
restraint systems. Under no circumstances
should they be used to attach adult seat
belts, harnesses or other items or equipment
to the vehicle.
Fitting a child seat using the seat
belt
If you want to fit a universal approval category
(U) child seat in your vehicle, you must check
that the seat is approved for your vehicle.
You will find any necessary information on the
child seat’s orange ECE approval label.
The following table shows the dierent fitting
options.
58
Safety
Weight group
Front passenger seat
a)
Rear side seat
Rear central
seat
b)
Airbag enabled
c)
Airbag deactivated
c)
Group 0 up to 10 kg X U U U
Group 0+ up to 13 kg X U U U
Group I 9 to 18 kg
Rear-facing X U U U
Forward-facing U X U U
Group II 15 to 25 kg U X U U
Group III 22 to 36 kg U X U U
X: Not compatible for the installation of seats install chairs in this configuration.
U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.
a)
Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.
b)
For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat or the third row.
c)
Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest
position.
Fitting a child seat using the seat belt
Fig.41 On rear seats: installing a child seat.
●
Put the seat belt in place and pass it through
the child seat according to the instructions of
the child seat manufacturer.
●
Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.
●
Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckle
until you hear the engagement click.
WARNING
When travelling, children must be secured in
the vehicle with a restraint system suitable
for age, weight and size.
●
Always read and observe information and
warnings concerning the use of child seats
›››page52.
Safety
59
In case of emergency
Fitting a child seat to the middle seat of the
rear bench using the seat belt
Fig.42 Position of the belt buckle on the rear
seat
1
Belt buckle for the middle seat
2
Belt buckle for the side seat
Child seats must always be fitted in the mid-
dle of a vehicle seat. Take into account these
instructions to ensure that this is possible on the
middle seat of the rear bench:
●
Place the middle seat's belt buckle ›››Fig.42
1
behind the side seat's belt buckle ›››Fig.42
2
.
●
Plug the middle seat's seat belt into the mid-
dle seat's belt buckle ›››Fig.42
1
and make
sure it clicks in place.
●
For seat belts to be correctly fitted, the buck-
les must not be twisted ›››Fig.42.
In case of emergency
Hazard warning lights
Fig.43 Dashboard: switch for hazard warning
lights.
The hazard warning lights are used to draw the
attention of other road users to your vehicle in
emergencies.
If your vehicle is stationary:
1.
Park the vehicle at a safe distance from
road trac.
2.
Press the button to switch on the hazard
warning lights ››› .
3.
Stop the engine.
4.
Apply the handbrake.
5.
Engage 1st gear in vehicles with a manual
gearbox, or set the gear selector to the
P position in vehicles with automatic trans-
mission.
6. Follow the legal provisions of each country
(reflective vest, warning triangles, light bea-
con, etc.).
7. Always carry the key with you when leaving
the vehicle.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the
hazard warning lights are switched on. The two
turn signal turn signal lamps and the turn
signal lamp in the switch will flash at the
same time. The simultaneous hazard warning
lights also work when the ignition is switched
o.
While the hazard warning lights are on, you can
signal a direction or lane change, e.g. during
towing, by operating the turn signal lever. The
hazard warning lights remain switched o dur-
ing this time.
Emergency braking warning
If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continuously
at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50 mph), the
brake light flashes several times per second to
warn the vehicles driving behind. If you continue
braking, the hazard warning lights will come
on automatically when the vehicle comes to a
standstill. They switch o automatically when
the vehicle starts to move again.
60
Safety
WARNING
●
The risk of an accident increases if your
vehicle breaks down. Always use the hazard
warning lights and a warning triangle (or
light beacon, depending on the country) to
draw the attention of other road users to
your stationary vehicle.
●
Never leave anybody inside the vehicle,
particularly children or anybody who may
need help. This is especially important when
the doors are locked. Individuals locked in
the vehicle can be exposed to very high or
very low temperatures.
●
Due to the high temperatures that the cat-
alytic converter can reach, never park in
an area where the catalytic converter could
come into contact with highly inflammable
materials, for example dry grass or spilt pet-
rol. This could start a fire.
Note
●
The 12-volt vehicle battery will run down
if the hazard warning lights are left on for a
long time (even if the ignition is switched o).
●
The use of the hazard warning lights de-
scribed here is subject to the relevant statu-
tory requirements.
Behaviour in the event of an accident
or fire
Actions to take in the event of a fire or acci-
dent
For your own safety and that of other passen-
gers, the following points should be observed in
the order given ››› :
●
Switch o the engine.
●
If possible, switch on the hazard warning
lights ›››page59.
●
Follow the legal provisions of each country
(reflective vest, warning triangles, light beacon,
etc.).
●
If necessary, get any people out of the haz-
ard area and apply first aid.
●
Notify the emergency services.
●
Wait at a safe distance from the scene of the
accident for the emergency services to arrive.
●
In case of fire, do not attempt to extinguish
the fire yourself or remain near the vehicle.
WARNING
For your own safety, do not ignore this impor-
tant check list, otherwise accidents and seri-
ous injuries could occur.
●
Always complete the operations on the
check list and always bear in mind the gen-
eral safety measures.
WARNING
In the event of fire, an explosion may occur
and substances harmful to health may be re-
leased, which can cause serious injury.
●
Never stay near the burning vehicle.
Emergency call service
Fig.44 On the roof console: controls for voice
services
Depending on the equipment, an emergency
call system may be located on the roof con-
sole.
The following voice services can be run by
pressing the buttons , and ›››Fig.44:
●
information call
●
assistance call
●
emergency call service.
A built-in control unit establishes the connec-
tion.
When a voice service is activated, a connection
is established with a phone line.
Safety
61
In case of emergency
1)
Only available in certain countries.
Control lamp
There is a control lamp on the control
›››Fig.44 (arrow). It shows the following sta-
tuses:
●
O: the eCall service is not available.
●
Flashes in red, approx. 20 seconds after
swing on the ignition: the eCall service is de-
activated.
●
Lights up red: system failure. The eCall serv-
ice is available with certain restrictions. SEAT
suggests going to a specialised workshop.
●
Lights up green: the eCall service is availa-
ble. The system works correctly.
●
Flashes green: There is an ongoing voice
connection.
Emergency call service
1)
The automatic emergency call is only activated
if the ignition is switched on.
If the airbags or, if applicable, the seatbelt ten-
sioners are triggered, a connection is automat-
ically established with the emergency coordi-
nation centre. The automatic emergency call
cannot be interrupted by pressing the button
1
.
If the emergency coordination centre's ques-
tions are not answered, the corresponding as-
sistance measures are implemented.
Starting an emergency call manually
●
Press and hold the emergency call button
for a few seconds
1
. The emergency call is
activated and a voice connection is established
with the emergency coordination centre.
If you press the emergency call button inadver-
tently, hang up the call immediately:
●
Press the emergency call button again until
the control light stays green.
Integrated battery
The integrated battery ensures that the emer-
gency call system (eCall) remains available for
some time even if the 12-volt battery has been
disconnected or has failed.
If the integrated battery discharges or is de-
fective, a message stating this is displayed on
the instrument cluster display. Go to a special-
ised workshop and ask for the battery to be
replaced.
EDR data transmission ›››page307
When an emergency call is made, the legally
required data is transmitted to the emergency
coordination centre so that the necessary as-
sistance measures can be determined.
Vehicle location data is continuously overwrit-
ten. This means that the vehicle is not subject to
permanent monitoring.
The data related to the emergency call is only
processed to ensure the correct operation of
the emergency call system (eCall). The system
will automatically delete the data related to the
call a few hours after the call is activated.
The sent data includes:
●
The vehicle's current position at the time the
emergency call is activated.
●
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
●
Type of vehicle and type of drive.
●
Type of activation (automatic or manual).
●
Type of call.
●
Direction in which the vehicle was travelling
at the time the emergency call was activated.
●
Moment of the collision.
●
Estimated number of vehicle occupants.
Situations in which the emergency call serv-
ice may be restricted
●
The emergency call is made from an area
with weak or no mobile and GPS signal, as well
as e.g. tunnels, between very tall buildings, ga-
rages, underground walkways, mountains and
valleys.
●
The components of the vehicle required for
the emergency phone call are damaged or do
not get enough power.
62
Safety
1)
Only available in certain countries.
●
In some countries, the emergency call service
may not be available and depending on the
location of the vehicle, the control lamp LEDs,
and even the operation of the dierent types of
calls, could have a specific behaviour.
Assistance call
1)
With the breakdown call you can directly re-
quest specialised help in the event of a break-
down.
Parallel to the voice call, some vehicle data is
transmitted, e.g. your current location.
Information call
1)
With a information call, a call is placed to the
customer care service of SEAT.S.A.
Note
●
Breakdown service and information calls
can incur an additional cost on your tele-
phone bill.
●
The operation of the eCall system, which is
required by law, may be limited if an infotain-
ment system is retrofitted.
Opening and closing
63
Set of vehicle keys
1
2
3
4
5
Opening and closing
Set of vehicle keys
Vehicle key
Fig.45 Vehicle key
Fig.46 Vehicle key with alarm button.
Unlock the vehicle
Lock the vehicle
Unlock only the rear lid.
Press the button until all the turn signals on
the vehicle flash briefly.
You have 2 minutes to open the rear lid.
Once this time has passed, it will lock
again. In addition, the lamp on the key
flashes.
Control lamp
Alarm button. Only press in the event of
an emergency! When the alarm button is
pressed, the vehicle's sounds and the turn
signals light up for a short time. Press again
to disconnect.
To fold and unfold the key blade, press the but-
ton ›››Fig.45 (arrow).
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked from a
distance using the vehicle key ›››page69.
The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-
tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehicle.
The range of the vehicle key with remote con-
trol and new battery is several metres around
the vehicle.
If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle
using the remote control key, this should be
re-synchronised ›››page65 or the battery
changed ›››page64.
Dierent keys belonging to the vehicle may be
used.
Control lamp on the vehicle key
When a button is pressed briefly on the vehicle
key, the control lamp
4
›››Fig.45 flashes
once briefly, but if pressed for a long period of
time, it will flash several times, for example, in
the convenience opening.
If the vehicle key control lamp does not light up
when the button is pressed, replace the key's
battery ›››page64.
Spare key
To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,
the vehicle chassis number is required.
Each new key contains a microchip which must
be coded with the data from the vehicle elec-
tronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not work if
it does not contain a microchip or the microchip
has not been encoded. This is also true for keys
which are specially cut for the vehicle.
The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be
obtained from a SEAT Ocial Service, a spe-
cialised workshop or an approved key service
qualified to create this kind of key.
New keys or spare keys must be synchronised
before use ›››page65.
64
Opening and closing
WARNING
●
Never leave children or disabled persons in
the vehicle. In case of emergency, they may
not be able to leave the vehicle or manage
on their own.
●
An uncontrolled use of the key by third
parties could activate a piece of electrical
equipment (e.g. electric windows), with the
resulting accident hazard. The doors can be
locked using the remote control key. This
could become an obstacle for assistance in
an emergency situation.
●
Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An
unauthorised use of your vehicle could result
in injury, damage or theft. Therefore always
take the key with you when you leave the
vehicle.
●
Never remove the key from the ignition if
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer-
ing could suddenly block and it would be im-
possible to steer the vehicle.
NOTICE
All of the vehicle keys contain electronic
components. Protect them from damage, im-
pacts and humidity.
Note
●
Only use the key button when you require
the corresponding function. Pushing the but-
ton unnecessarily could accidentally unlock
the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also pos-
sible even when you are outside the radius of
action.
●
Key operation can be greatly influenced by
overlapping radio signals close to the vehicle
working in the same range of frequencies,
for example, radio transmitters or mobile tel-
ephones.
●
Obstacles between the remote control
and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and
discharged batteries can considerably re-
duce the range of the remote control.
●
If the buttons of the vehicle key are
pressed or one of the central locking but-
tons ›››page69 is pressed repeatedly in
short succession, the central locking briefly
disconnects as protection against overload-
ing. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lock it if
necessary.
●
Spare remote control keys are available at
your Technical Service, where they must be
matched to the locking system.
Changing the battery
Fig.47 Vehicle key: opening the battery
compartment.
Fig.48 Vehicle key: removing the battery.
SEAT recommends you ask a specialised work-
shop to replace the battery.
The battery is located to the rear of the vehicle
key, under a cover.
Opening and closing
65
Keyless Access system
A
Changing the battery
●
Unfold the vehicle key shaft.
●
Remove the cover from the back of the vehi-
cle key in the direction of the arrow ›››Fig.47 ,
››› .
●
Remove the battery from the compartment
with a suitable fine object ›››Fig.48.
●
Fit a new button battery into the compart-
ment ›››
.
●
Press the cover onto the key housing until it
clicks into place.
WARNING
Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diameter
or any other button battery can cause seri-
ous and even fatal injuries within a very short
time.
●
Keep the vehicle key and key fobs with bat-
teries out of reach of children.
●
If you suspect that someone may have
swallowed a battery, seek immediate medi-
cal attention.
NOTICE
●
If the battery is not changed correctly, the
vehicle key may be damaged.
●
Use of unsuitable batteries may damage
the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-
place the dead battery with another of the
same voltage, size and specifications.
●
When fitting the battery, check that the po-
larity is correct.
For the sake of the environment
Please dispose of your used batteries cor-
rectly and with respect for the environment.
Synchronize the vehicle key
If the
button is pressed frequently outside of
the vehicle range, it is possible that the vehicle
can no longer be locked or unlocked using the
key. In this case, the key must be resynchron-
ised as described below:
●
Unfold the vehicle key blade ›››page63 .
●
If necessary, remove the cover from the driver
door handle ›››page73.
●
Press the button on the vehicle key. For this,
it must remain with the vehicle.
●
Open the vehicle within one minute using the
key blade. The key has been synchronised.
●
If necessary, fit the cap.
Keyless Access system
Locking and unlocking with the Key-
less Access system
Fig.49 Keyless Access: proximity zones.
Fig.50 Driver door handle: sensor surfaces.
›››Fig.50
Unlocking sensor surface on the inside of
the door handle.
66
Opening and closing
B
Locking sensor surface on the outside of
the door handle.
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may
have the Keyless Access system. This is a key-
less locking and starting system that can un-
lock and lock the vehicle without actively using
its key. For this, it is only necessary that there
is a valid vehicle key in the detection area cor-
responding to the attempted access to the ve-
hicle.
Configuring the Keyless Access system
The behaviour of the Keyless Access system
can be adjusted in the Vehicle settings menu
of the Infotainment system ›››page34.
If the Keyless Access function is disabled, its
operation is limited.
Unlock the vehicle
●
Touch the sensor surface on the inside of the
handle
A
. All turn signals flash twice.
If selective opening is fitted, touching the sen-
sor's surface twice unlocks the entire vehicle.
If the vehicle is not unlocked for an extended
period, the function is deactivated. The function
will reactivate the next time that the vehicle is
unlocked with the remote control.
Lock the vehicle
●
Park the vehicle.
●
Touch the sensor surface ›››Fig.50
B
on the
outside of the door handle. All turn signals flash
once.
To check that the vehicle is properly locked,
the unlocking function is deactivated for a few
seconds.
Unlocking the rear lid
When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-
matically unlocks when it is opened if there is
a vehicle key in its proximity zone. The rear lid
locks again after closing.
Temporarily deactivating the Keyless Ac-
cess system
The “Keyless Access” system’s unlocking func-
tion can be temporarily deactivated:
●
Move the gear lever to position P since other-
wise the vehicle cannot be locked.
●
Lock the vehicle using the button on the
vehicle key.
●
Within 5 seconds, touch the sensor on the
outside of the door handle ›››Fig.50
B
once.
Do not grip the handle while doing so. This tem-
porarily deactivates the Keyless Access system.
●
Check that it is deactivated by pulling the
door handle after at least 10 seconds. It should
not be possible to open the door.
The next time, the vehicle can only be unlocked
electronically with the vehicle key. After being
unlocked the next time, the Keyless Access sys-
tem will be activated again ››› .
Permanently disabling the Keyless Access
system
The Keyless Access system can also be perma-
nently deactivated in the infotainment system
››› .
Convenience functions
To close all the electric windows using the com-
fort function, keep a finger on the locking sen-
sor surface ›››Fig.50
B
(arrow) of the door
handle for a few seconds until the windows
have closed.
How the doors open when touching the sensor
surface on the door handle will depend on the
settings that have been activated in the info-
tainment system, using the button > Set-
tings > Opening and closing.
NOTICE
Deactivating the Keyless Access system also
deactivates the sensor controlled opening
and closing of the rear lid, although the func-
tion is shown as “active” in the vehicle menu.
Opening and closing
67
Central locking
Troubleshooting
The Keyless Access system does not work
The operation of the sensor surfaces may be
limited if they are very dirty.
●
Clean the sensor surfaces.
All turn signals flash four times
The key that was last used is still inside the vehi-
cle.
●
Remove the key and lock the vehicle.
Automatic deactivation of the sensor surfa-
ces
The sensor surfaces are deactivated in the fol-
lowing cases:
●
If the vehicle is not unlocked or locked for a
long period of time.
●
If any of the sensor surfaces are activated
unusually often.
To reactivate the sensor surfaces:
●
Unlock the vehicle using the button on the
vehicle key.
NOTICE
The sensor surfaces on the door handles
may activate if hit by a jet of water or high
pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key
in the proximity area. If at least one of the
windows is open and the sensor surfaces on
one of the handles permanently activates,
all of the windows will close. If the jet of wa-
ter or steam is briefly moved away from the
sensor surfaces of one of the handles and
redirected towards them, all of the windows
may open.
Note
If the message Keyless system faulty
is displayed on the instrument cluster dis-
play, abnormalities may occur in the opera-
tion of the Keyless Access system. Contact a
specialised workshop.
Note
If there is no vehicle key inside the vehicle or
the system fails to detect one, a warning will
display on the instrument cluster screen. This
could happen if any other radio frequency
signal interferes with the key signal or if the
key is covered by another object, e.g. a metal
case.
Central locking
Introduction
Central locking functions correctly when all the
doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. If
the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be
locked with the key.
WARNING
The incorrect use of the central locking sys-
tem may cause serious injuries.
●
The central locking system will lock all
doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can
prevent any non-authorised individual from
opening the doors and accessing the vehicle.
Nevertheless, in case of emergency or acci-
dent, locked doors will complicate access to
the vehicle interior to help the passengers.
●
Never leave children or disabled people
alone in the vehicle. The central locking but-
ton can be used to lock all the doors from
within. Therefore, passengers will be locked
inside the vehicle. Individuals locked in the
vehicle can be exposed to very high or very
low temperatures.
●
Depending on the time of the year, temper-
atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can
be extremely high or extremely low resulting
in serious injuries and illness or even death,
particularly for young children.
68
Opening and closing
●
Never leave individuals locked in a closed
and locked vehicle. In case of emergency,
they may not be able to exit the vehicle by
themselves or get help.
Description
Central locking allows all doors, the rear lid and
the tank flap to be unlocked centrally:
●
From outside, using the vehicle key
›››page69.
●
From outside with the Keyless Access system
›››page65.
●
From inside, by pushing the central locking
button ›››page69.
Self-locking system to prevent involuntary
unlocking
It is an anti-theft system and prevents the unin-
tentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the vehicle
is unlocked and none of the doors (including
the boot) are opened within 45 seconds, it re-
locks automatically.
Automatic locking (Auto Lock)
The vehicle locks automatically at over a speed
of approx. 15 km/h (9 mph). The fuel tank flap is
unlocked so that you can refuel without getting
out of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is locked, the control lamp
of the central locking button lights up yellow.
Automatic unlocking (Auto Unlock)
If one of the following conditions is met, all
doors and the rear lid are unlocked automati-
cally:
●
With the vehicle stopped, the ignition is
switched o or the ignition key is removed (de-
pending on equipment).
●
EITHER: the inside door handle is pulled. This
applies when driving at under 15 km/h (9 mph).
●
OR: in the event of an accident and an airbag
has been triggered ›››page70.
Automatic unlocking allows third parties to ac-
cess the interior of the vehicle to provide assis-
tance if necessary.
Turn signals
The turn signals will flash twice when the vehi-
cle is unlocked and once when the vehicle is
locked.
If it does not flash, this indicates that one of the
doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not closed
correctly.
Accidental lock-out
The central locking system prevents you from
being locked out of the vehicle in the following
situations:
●
If the driver door is open, the vehicle can-
not be locked with the central locking switch
›››page69.
Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,
when all the doors and the rear lid have been
closed. This prevents the accidental locking of
the vehicle.
Central locking settings
Central locking settings can be changed in the
Infotainment system.
Selective unlocking of the doors
●
Press the function button > Settings >
Opening and closing > Central lock-
ing > Door unlocking.
You can choose to unlock all the doors or only
the driver door when you unlock the vehicle.
In all the options, the fuel tank flap is also un-
locked.
With the Driver setting, when you press the
button on the remote control key once, only the
driver door is unlocked. If that button is pressed
twice, the rest of the doors and the rear lid will
be unlocked.
If the button is pressed, all the vehicle doors
are locked. At the same time, a confirmation
signal is heard.
Opening and closing
69
Central locking
Note
●
Never leave any valuable items in the vehi-
cle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not
a safe.
●
If the LED on the driver door sill lights
up for about 30 seconds when the vehi-
cle is locked, the central locking system or
anti-theft alarm is not working properly. You
should have the fault repaired at a SEAT O-
cial Service or specialised workshop.
●
The anti-theft alarm system’s interior mon-
itoring only works perfectly if the windows
are closed.
Unlock and lock with the key
Fig.51 Remote control key: keys.
●
Lock: press the ›››Fig.51 button.
●
Locking the vehicle without the “Safe” secur-
ity system: push the button again and hold for
2 seconds.
●
Unlock: press the
button.
●
Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the but-
ton for at least 1 second.
The vehicle will be locked again automatically
if you do not open one of the doors or the rear
lid within 45 seconds after unlocking the car.
This function prevents the vehicle from remain-
ing unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed
by mistake. This does not apply if you press the
button for at least one second.
Selective unlocking system
The selective unlocking system allows you to
only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank
flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain
locked.
Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap:
●
Press (once) the button on the remote con-
trol key or turn the key once in the opening
direction.
Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the tank
flap simultaneously:
●
Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the button
on the remote control key, or turn the key twice
within 5 seconds in the opening direction.
The “Safe” security system and the anti-theft
alarm deactivate immediately when only the
driver door is opened.
In vehicles with Infotainment system, you can
programme the security central locking system
directly ›››page68.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››page70,
Safe security system.
Note
●
Do not use the remote control key until the
vehicle is visible.
●
Other functions of the remote control key
›››page76, Opening and closing the
windows.
Unlocking and locking from the in-
side
Fig.52 Centre console: central locking switch.
●
Lock: press the ›››Fig.52 button.
●
Unlock: Press the ›››Fig.52 button again.
Please note the following when using the cen-
tral locking switch to lock your vehicle:
70
Opening and closing
●
It is not possible to open the doors or the
rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g.
when stopped at trac lights).
●
The LED in the central locking switch lights up
when all the doors are closed and locked.
●
You can open the doors individually from the
inside by pulling the inside door handle.
●
The fuel tank flap is locked.
●
In the event of an accident in which the air-
bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will
be automatically unlocked to facilitate access
and assistance.
WARNING
●
The central locking switch also works with
the ignition switched o, except when the
“Safe” security system is activated.
●
The central locking switch does not oper-
ate if the vehicle is locked from the outside
and the security system is switched on.
●
Locked doors could delay assistance in an
emergency. Do not leave anyone, especially
children, in the vehicle.
Note
Your vehicle will lock automatically when it
reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)
(Auto Lock) ›››page68. You can unlock the
vehicle again using the button on the cen-
tral locking switch.
“Safe” security system
Depending on its equipment, the vehicle may
be fitted with the “Safe” security system.
When the vehicle is locked, the “Safe” security
system puts the door handles out of operation
and hinders possible attempts by people to ac-
cess the vehicle. The doors cannot be opened
from inside ›››
.
Disabling the “Safe” security system
The “Safe” security system may be disabled in
any of the following ways:
●
Press the vehicle key button again within 2
seconds.
●
Touch the sensor surface on the outside
of the door handle again within 2 seconds
›››page65.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
OR: deactivate interior monitoring and the
anti-tow system ›››page72.
Depending on the equipment, before locking
the vehicle temporarily deactivate interior mon-
itoring and the anti-tow system in the Vehicle
settings menu of the infotainment system
›››page72.
The instrument cluster may display an indica-
tion that the “Safe” security system is switched
on.
When the “Safe” security system is deactivated,
the following needs to be taken into account:
●
The vehicle can be opened and unlocked
from the inside using an inside door handle.
●
The anti-theft alarm is active ›››page71.
●
The interior monitoring system and the anti-
tow system are disabled ›››page72.
“Safe” status
The flashing frequency of the diode in the door
sill immediately confirms the process. Initially,
the diode flashes in a fast sequence for a brief
period, then it stops for approximately 30 sec-
onds and, lastly continues flashing slowly.
WARNING
Using the “Safe” security system negligently
or without paying due attention can cause
serious injuries.
●
Never leave anyone inside the vehicle
when you lock it with the key. When the
“Safe” security system is active the doors
cannot be opened from the inside!
Troubleshooting
The control lamp remains on
The red LED on the driver’s door flashes at short
intervals and then stays on. There is a fault in
the locking system.
●
Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec-
ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
Opening and closing
71
Anti-theft alarm
The turn signals do not flash
If the turn signals do not flash as a confirmation
when the vehicle is locked:
●
At least one door or the rear lid are not closed
or
●
The engine bonnet is not closed.
The vehicle locks automatically
If one of the following conditions is met, the
vehicle re-locks automatically after approx. 45
seconds.
●
The vehicle has been unlocked, but has not
been opened.
●
The ignition has not been switched on.
●
The rear lid has not been opened.
●
The vehicle has been unlocked with the lock-
ing cylinder.
●
The vehicle has been locked with the button
located in the vehicle interior.
What happens when locking the vehicle with
a second key
They key inside the vehicle is blocked and can-
not be used to start the engine as soon as the
vehicle is locked from the outside with a second
key. To activate the key inside the vehicle to al-
low it to switch on the engine, press its
button.
Locking the vehicle after an airbag is trig-
gered
When an airbag is triggered as a result of an
accident, the vehicle is fully unlocked. Depend-
ing on the extent of the damage, the vehicle
may be relocked after the accident as descri-
bed below:
●
Switch the ignition o.
●
Open the driver's door and close it again.
●
Lock the vehicle.
Note
If the 12-volt vehicle battery has little or no
charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost
or entirely out of charge, you will probably
not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle
with the Keyless Access system. The vehi-
cle can be unlocked and locked manually
›››page73.
Note
If there is no vehicle key in the vehicle or
the system does not detect it, a warning will
be displayed on the instrument cluster. This
could happen if any other radio frequency
signal interferes with the key signal or if the
key is covered by another object, e.g. a metal
case.
Anti-theft alarm
Description
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may
be fitted with an anti-theft alarm.
The theft alarm monitors the doors, bonnet and
rear lid.
The anti-theft alarm system activates automat-
ically when the vehicle is locked.
If the vehicle is not opened electronically with
a valid key, the alarm triggers and emits audio
and light signals for a maximum of approx. 5
minutes.
When is the anti-theft alarm triggered?
●
If a mechanically unlocked door is opened
with the vehicle key, you have 15 seconds to
switch on the ignition before the alarm is trig-
gered (depending on markets, the 15 seconds
waiting time disappears and the alarm is trig-
gered immediately when the door is opened).
●
If the bonnet is opened.
●
If the rear lid is opened.
●
If an invalid vehicle key is used.
●
If there are movements inside the vehicle (in
vehicles with interior monitoring ›››page72).
●
If the vehicle is lifted or towed (for vehicles
with an anti-tow system ›››page72.
72
Opening and closing
●
If the vehicle is transported on a ferry or by
rail (in vehicles with an anti-tow system or inte-
rior monitoring ›››page72).
●
If the 12-volt battery is disconnected.
●
If the window is broken.
●
When a trailer connected to the theft alarm
system is unhitched.
Switching o the alarm
●
Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key un-
locking button .
●
Grip the door handle.
●
Switch the ignition on.
Note
●
After 28 days, the indicator light will be
switched o to prevent the battery from ex-
hausting if the vehicle has been left parked
for a long period of time. The alarm system
remains activated.
●
If, after the audible warning goes o, an-
other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the
rear lid is opened after a door has been
opened), the alarm is triggered again.
●
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when
the vehicle is locked from within using the
central locking button .
●
If the driver door is unlocked mechanically
with the key, only the driver door is unlocked,
the rest of the doors remain locked. Only
when the ignition has been turned on will the
other doors be available - but not unlocked -
and the central locking button will be activa-
ted.
●
Vehicle monitoring remains active even if
the battery is disconnected or not working
for any reason.
Interior monitoring and anti-tow sys-
tem
If movement is detected in the vehicle interior
while the vehicle is locked, the interior monitor-
ing triggers the alarm.
If it detects that the vehicle is being lifted, the
anti-tow system triggers the alarm.
Switching on the interior monitoring and the
anti-tow systems
●
Lock the vehicle. When the anti-theft alarm is
activated, the interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system are as well.
Depending on the equipment, the use of a par-
tition net can aect the operation of the interior
monitoring system.
Temporarily switching o the interior moni-
toring and anti-tow systems
●
Open the vehicle with the key, either me-
chanically or by pressing the button on the
remote control. The time period from when the
door is opened until the ignition is turned on
should not exceed 15 seconds, otherwise the
alarm will be triggered.
●
Press the button on the remote control
twice. The interior monitoring and the anti-tow
systems will be deactivated. The alarm system
remains activated.
Disconnect through the infotainment system
●
Press the function button > Settings >
Opening and closing > Central lock-
ing > Interior monitoring.
The interior monitoring and anti-tow system re-
main deactivated until the next time the vehicle
is locked.
To avoid false alarms, deactivate interior moni-
toring and the anti-tow system in the following
situations:
●
When people or animals remain inside the ve-
hicle.
●
When the vehicle is to be loaded onto an-
other means of transport, transported or towed.
●
When the vehicle is to be left in a car wash or
is to be parked in a double-decker garage.
Risk of false interior monitoring alarms
The interior monitoring system will only operate
correctly if the vehicle is completely locked.
Please bear in mind all legal provisions. The
following situations may cause a false alarm:
Opening and closing
73
Doors
●
If one or more windows are partially or com-
pletely open.
●
If light objects are left inside the vehicle, e.g.
loose paper or items hanging from the interior
mirror.
●
If the vibrate function of a mobile left inside
the vehicle is activated.
Note
●
It is not possible to permanently deactivate
the interior monitoring and anti-tow systems.
●
If any doors or the rear lid are open when
the anti-theft alarm is activated, only the
alarm will be activated. The interior monitor-
ing and anti-tow systems will only activate
once all of the doors and the rear lid are
closed.
●
When the interior monitoring and anti-tow
systems are switched o, the “Safe” security
system is also switched o ›››page70.
Doors
Introduction
The doors and rear lid can be locked manually
and partially opened, for example if the key or
the central locking is damaged.
WARNING
Opening and closing doors carelessly can
cause serious injury.
●
If the vehicle is locked from outside, the
doors and windows cannot be opened from
the inside.
●
Never leave children or disabled people
alone in the car. They could be trapped in the
car in an emergency and will not be able to
get themselves to safety.
●
Depending on the time of the year, temper-
atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can
be extremely high or extremely low resulting
in serious injuries and illness or even death,
particularly for young children.
WARNING
Getting in the way of the doors and the rear
lid is dangerous and can lead to serious in-
jury.
●
Open and close the doors and the rear lid
only when there is nobody in the way.
NOTICE
In certain weather conditions, ice or snow
may accumulate on the lower front part of
the doors between the door frame and the
door; do not force the doors open until you
are sure that there is no ice or snow.
NOTICE
When opening and closing in an emergency,
carefully disassemble components and then
reassemble them carefully to avoid damage
to the vehicle.
Emergency unlocking or locking of
the driver’s door
Fig.53 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.
74
Opening and closing
Fig.54 Driver's door handle: pry the cover
open.
If the central locking system should fail to op-
erate, the driver door can still be locked and
unlocked by turning the key in the lock.
As a general rule, when the driver door is locked
manually all other doors are locked. When it is
unlocked manually, only the driver door opens.
Please observe the instructions relating to the
anti-theft alarm system ›››page71.
●
Unfold the vehicle key shaft.
●
Insert the key shaft into the lower opening
in the cover on the driver door handle then re-
move the cover upwards ›››Fig.54.
●
Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to
unlock or lock the vehicle.
Special characteristics
●
The anti-theft alarm will remain active when
vehicles are unlocked. However, the alarm will
not be triggered ›››page71.
●
After the driver door is opened, you have 15
seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this
time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.
●
Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo-
bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and deac-
tivates the anti-theft alarm system.
Note
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when
the vehicle is locked manually using the key
shaft ›››page67.
Emergency lock of doors without lock
cylinders
Fig.55 Locking the door manually.
If the central locking system should fail to work
at any time, doors with no lock cylinder will
have to be locked separately.
The emergency lock is located on the front of
the front passenger's door and the rear doors. It
can only be seen if the door is open.
●
Pull the cap out of the opening.
●
Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it to
the right as far as it will go (if the door is on the
right side) or to the left (if the door is on the left
side).
●
Replace the cap.
Once the door has been closed it can no longer
be opened from the outside. Pull the interior
door handle once to unlock and open the door.
Child lock
Fig.56 Left door child lock.
Opening and closing
75
Rear lid
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors
from being opened from the inside. This system
prevents minors from opening a door acciden-
tally while the vehicle is running.
This function is independent of the vehicle elec-
tronic opening and locking systems. It only af-
fects rear doors. It can only be activated and
deactivated manually, as described below.
Activating the childproof lock
●
Unlock the vehicle and open the door in
which you wish to activate the childproof lock.
●
With the door open, turn the slot with the vehi-
cle key clockwise for the left doors ›››Fig.56
and anticlockwise for the right doors.
Once the childproof lock is activated, the door
can only be opened from the outside.
Deactivating the childproof lock
●
Unlock the vehicle and open the door whose
childproof lock you want to deactivate.
●
With the door open, turn the slot with the
vehicle key anticlockwise for the left doors
›››Fig.56 and clockwise for the right doors.
Rear lid
Introduction
The rear lid unlocks and locks together with the
doors.
On vehicles with the Keyless Access start/lock-
ing system, the rear lid automatically unlocks
when it is opened ›››page65.
WARNING
Careless and unsuitable locking, opening
and closing of the rear lid can cause acci-
dents and serious injury.
●
Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down
with your hand on the rear window. The glass
could smash. Risk of injury!
●
Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing
it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv-
ing.
●
Closing the rear lid without observing and
ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury
to you and to third parties. Make sure that no
one is in the path of the rear lid.
●
Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into
the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poison-
ing!
●
Never open the rear lid if there is cargo,
e.g. bicycles, attached to it. The rear lid may
close by itself due to the additional weight. If
necessary, remove the cargo first or hold the
rear lid.
●
Never leave the vehicle unattended or al-
low children to play inside or next to it, espe-
cially if the rear lid is open. Children could
enter the luggage compartment, close the
rear lid and become trapped. A locked vehi-
cle can reach extremely high and low tem-
peratures, depending on the time of year,
thus causing serious injuries, illness or even
death.
NOTICE
●
Before opening or closing the rear lid, make
sure that there is enough space to open or
close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a ga-
rage.
●
Never use the rear wiper or rear spoiler to
secure cargo or as a handhold. This could
cause damage that could lead to the break-
age of the rear wiper or spoiler.
Note
Before closing the rear lid, make sure that
the key has not been left inside the luggage
compartment.
76
Opening and closing
1
2
Opening and closing the rear lid
Fig.57 Rear lid: opening from the outside.
The rear lid opening system operates electri-
cally.
To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the
or
buttons of the vehicle key.
Opening and closing
●
Open: place slight pressure on the handle.
The rear lid opens automatically ›››Fig.57.
●
Close: grip the rear lid by one of the handles
on the interior trim and move it downwards to
close.
If the doors are locked, the rear lid is also
locked.
A warning appears on the instrument panel
display if the rear lid is open or not properly
closed.
The rear lid locks automatically while driving.
When the outside temperature is around freez-
ing point, the opening mechanism cannot al-
ways automatically raise the partially opened
rear lid. Lift the rear lid by hand.
Note
If the rear lid is not opened within a few mi-
nutes of being unlocked, it re-locks automati-
cally.
Emergency unlocking of the rear lid
Fig.58 Luggage compartment: manual
release.
The rear lid can be unlocked from inside in the
event of an emergency (e.g. if the 12 volt bat-
tery is flat).
There is a groove in the luggage compartment
allowing access to the emergency opening
mechanism.
Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug-
gage compartment
●
Insert the key blade into the slot and move the
key in the direction of the arrow until the lock
unlocks ›››Fig.58.
Window controls
Opening and closing the windows
Fig.59 Detail of the driver door: controls for
the windows.
●
Opening the window: press button
●
Closing the window: pull button
Buttons on the driver door
Window on the front left door
Window on the front right door
Opening and closing
77
Window controls
3
4
5
Window on the rear left door
Window on the rear right door
Safety switch for deactivating the electric
window buttons in the rear doors.
The front and rear electric windows can be op-
erated by using the controls on the driver door.
The other doors each have a switch for their
own window.
Always close the windows fully if you park the
vehicle or leave it unattended ›››
.
You can use the electric windows for approx. 10
minutes after switching o the ignition if neither
the driver door nor the front passenger door
have been opened and the ignition key has not
been removed (depending on the equipment).
Safety switch
The safety control ›››Fig.59
5
on the driver
door can be used to disable the electric win-
dow buttons on the rear doors.
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear
doors are activated.
Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors
are deactivated.
The safety control symbol lights up in yellow
if the buttons on the rear doors are switched o.
Convenience open/close function
The electric windows can be opened or closed
from outside using the vehicle key:
Convenience opening:
●
Press and hold the button on the remote
control key until all the windows have reached
the desired position.
●
OR: First unlock the vehicle using the button
on the remote control key and then keep the
key in the driver door lock until all the windows
have reached the required position.
Convenience closing:
●
Press and hold the button on the remote
control key until all the windows are closed
››› .
●
OR: Lock the driver's door with the key and
hold the key in the lock position until all the
windows are closed
●
OR: using the Keyless Access system (only
locking): Press and hold the locking sensor
surface (arrow) on the door handle for sev-
eral seconds to close the windows. If you re-
lease the sensor surface, the closing movement
stops.
In the infotainment system dierent settings
can be adjusted using the function button
> Settings > Opening and closing
> Window operation > Convenience
opening.
One-touch opening and closing
The one-touch automatic opening and closing
is used to open or close the windows com-
pletely. It will not be necessary to hold the but-
ton of the corresponding electric window.
For the automatic raising function
: pull the but-
ton for the corresponding window upwards until
it reaches the second position.
For the automatic lowering function: push the
button for the corresponding window down-
wards until it reaches the second position.
Stop automatic movement: push or pull on the
button of the corresponding window.
Resetting one-touch opening and closing
If the 12-volt battery is disconnected or dis-
charged when the windows are not completely
closed, the electric window automatic raising
and lowering function deactivates and has to
be reset:
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Close all windows and doors.
●
Pull the corresponding window button up-
wards and hold it in this position for a few sec-
onds.
●
Release the button, pull it up again and hold it
in this position. This resets the automatic raising
and lowering function.
The function can be reset for a single window or
for several windows at the same time.
78
Opening and closing
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro-
duction on page73.
●
Incorrect use of the electric windows can
result in injury.
●
Never close the rear lid without observing
and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could
cause serious injury to you and third parties.
Make sure that no one is in the path of a win-
dow.
●
If the ignition is switched on, the electric
equipment could be activated with risk of in-
jury, for example, in the electric windows.
●
The doors can be locked using the remote
control key. This could become an obstacle
for assistance in an emergency situation.
●
Therefore always take the key with you
when you leave the vehicle.
●
The electric windows will work until the ig-
nition has been switched o and one of the
front doors has been opened.
●
If necessary, use the safety switch to disa-
ble the rear electric windows. Make sure that
they have been disabled.
●
For safety reasons, you should only use
the remote control open and close functions
within about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid
injuries, always keep an eye on the windows
when pressing the button to close them. The
windows stop moving as soon as the button is
released.
Note
If the window is not able to close because
it is sti or because of an obstruction,
the window will automatically open again
›››page78. If this happens, check why the
window could not be closed before attempt-
ing to close it again.
Window anti-trap function
The roll-back function reduces the risk of injury
when the electric windows close.
If a window encounters resistance or an obsta-
cle when closing, it will reopen immediately
››› .
●
Check why the window does not close.
●
Try closing the window again.
●
If the closing process is interrupted again, the
anti-trap function stops working for a few sec-
onds.
●
If the window still cannot be closed, it will stop
in the corresponding position. Pulling the button
again within a few seconds closes the window
without the anti-trap function ››› .
Closing the windows without the anti-trap
function
●
Try to close the window again by pulling the
button without releasing it, within a few sec-
onds. The anti-trap function will be deacti-
vated!
●
If the closing process takes longer than a
few seconds, the anti-trap function is activated
again. The window will stop again if it encoun-
ters resistance or an obstacle, and will reopen
automatically.
●
If the window will still not close, visit a special-
ised workshop.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Open-
ing and closing the windows on page78.
●
The roll-back function does not prevent
fingers or other parts of the body getting
pinched against the window frame. Risk of
accident.
Note
The anti-trap function also works when the
windows are closed with the comfort func-
tion using the vehicle key.
Steering wheel
79
Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel
Multifunction steering
wheel
Functions
Fig.60 Controls on the steering wheel.
Fig.61 Controls on the steering wheel.
The steering wheel includes multifunction mod-
ules from where it is possible to control the
audio, telephone, navigation, voice control and
assist functions without the driver needing to be
distracted from the road.
Buttons available depending on the version
1
Turn: Turn volume up/down.
Press: Mute volume.
2
Turn: Search in the instrument panel
menu. In Navigation mode, turn to zoom
in/out of the map in the instrument clus-
ter.
Press: Select the highlighted option in
the instrument cluster
Radio: Search for the previous/next sta-
tion.
Media: Short press: previous/next track;
long press: fast forward/rewind.
Activate phone menu (answer call, end
call).
Switch between media and radio sour-
ces.
Change the instrument panel menu
(previous/next).
Enable/disable voice control.
Change instrument cluster views
›››page16
Switching ACC on or o
›››page139 / Cruise control
›››page136 / Speed limiter
›››page138 / Travel Assist
›››page150.
Activate ACC / Travel Assist / Speed lim-
iter
Reset programmed speed.
: Increase programmed speed.
: Decrease programmed speed.
Select Travel Assist / ACC.
Open the driver assistants menu in the
instrument cluster.
Modify the programmed ACC distance
80
Steering wheel
Steering wheel position adjustment
Fig.62 Lever in the lower left side of the
steering column.
Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and
only when the vehicle is stationary.
●
Pull lever ›››Fig.62
1
down, move the steer-
ing wheel to the desired position and lift the
lever back up until it locks.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust-
ment function and an incorrect adjustment
of the steering wheel can result in severe or
fatal injury.
●
After adjusting the steering column, push
lever ›››Fig.62
1
firmly upwards so that
the steering wheel does not accidentally
change position while driving.
●
Never adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust the
steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion,
stop safely and make the proper adjustment.
●
The adjusted steering wheel should be fac-
ing your chest and not your face so as not to
hinder the driver's front airbag protection in
the event of an accident.
●
When driving, always hold the steering
wheel with both hands on the outside of the
ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions
to reduce injuries when the driver's front air-
bag deploys.
●
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
o'clock position or in any other manner (e.g.
in the centre of the steering wheel). In such
cases, if the driver's airbag deploys, you
may sustain injuries to your arms, hands and
head.
Seats and head restraints
81
Rear seats
1
2
3
Seats and head re-
straints
Front seats
Manual adjustment of the front seats
Fig.63 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.
Pull the lever to move the seat forwards or
backwards. The seat must engage when
the lever is released!
Move the lever up or down to adjust the
seat height; several times if necessary.
Without placing force on the seat backrest,
turn the wheel to adjust the backrest.
Rear seats
Folding down and raising the rear
seat backrest
Fig.64 Rear seat: folding down the backrest.
The rear seat backrest is split and each part
be lowered separately to extend the luggage
compartment.
Folding the backrest forwards
●
Fully lower the rear headrests ›››page82.
●
Press the unlock button ›››Fig.64
1
for-
wards and at the same time fold the backrest
down. The rear seat backrest is not engaged
when the red marking of the button
2
is visible.
Converting the table to a seat
●
Raise and lock in the back rest. The red mark-
ing on button
2
should no longer be visible
when the backrest is properly secured.
WARNING
Serious injuries can be caused if the rear
seat backrest is lowered or lifted without due
care and attention.
●
Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest
while driving.
●
Do no trap or damage the seat belt when
raising the rear seat backrest.
●
When lowering or lifting the rear seat back-
rest, keep your hands, fingers, feet and other
body parts out of its path.
●
For the rear seat belts to oer the nec-
essary protection all the parts of the rear
backrest must be properly engaged. This
is particularly important in the case of the
centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a
seat whose backrest is not properly engaged
they will fly forward, along with the backrest,
during an accident or a sudden driving or
braking manoeuvre.
●
A red mark on button
2
warns that the rear
backrest is not engaged. Always check that
the red marking is not visible when the back-
rest is in the upright position.
●
When the rear seat backrest is lowered or
is not properly engaged nobody else can
travel in the corresponding seats (not even
a child).
82
Seats and head restraints
NOTICE
Serious damage can be caused to the vehi-
cle and other objects if the rear seat back-
rest is lowered or lifted without due care and
attention.
●
Before lowering the rear seat backrest, al-
ways adjust the front seats so that neither
the head restraints nor the cushions of the
rear backrest can hit them.
Headrest
Introduction
The possibilities for the adjustment and disas-
sembly of the headrests are described below.
Always make sure that the seats are correctly
adjusted ›››page36.
All seats are equipped with a head restraint.
The central rear headrest is only intended for
the central seat of the rear bench. Therefore,
do not install it on any other seat.
Correct adjustment of head restraint
Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is
at the same level as the top of your head and
under no circumstances below eye level. Keep
the back of your head always as close to the
head restraint as possible.
Adjusting the head restraint for short people
Lower the head restraint completely, even if
your head is below its upper edge. In the low-
est position, there may be a small distance be-
tween the head restraint and the backrest.
Adjusting the head restraint for tall people
Push the head restraint up as far as it will go.
WARNING
If travelling with the head restraints removed
or improperly adjusted, the risk of severe or
fatal injuries in the event of accidents and
sudden braking or manoeuvres increases.
●
Always travel with the head restraint cor-
rectly installed and adjusted.
●
To decrease the risk of cervical injuries in
the event of an accident, adjust the head
restraint correctly based on your height, al-
ways making sure that its upper edge is at
the same height as the top of the head, but
never below eye level. Keep the back of your
head always as close to the head restraint as
possible and centred.
●
Never adjust the head restraint while the
vehicle is in motion.
●
Under no circumstances should the rear
passengers travel while the head restraints
are in the non-use position.
NOTICE
When assembling and disassembling the
head restraints, do not let them meet the top
lining of the vehicle, the back rest of the front
seat or other parts of the vehicles. If not, this
could damage the vehicle.
Adjusting the headrests
Fig.65 Front seat: adjusting the head
restraint.
Seats and head restraints
83
Headrest
Fig.66 Rear headrest: adjusting the headrest.
Adjusting the height of the head restraints
●
Grab the sides of the head restraints with
both hands and push upwards to the desired
position. To lower it, repeat the same action,
pressing the button on the side
1
›››Fig.65 ,
›››Fig.66.
●
The headrest must lock correctly in one posi-
tion.
Removing and fitting the headrests
Fig.67 Front head restraint: removal.
Fig.68 Rear head restraint: removal.
Removing the front head restraints
●
Lower the head restraint if necessary.
●
To unlock it, look for the rabbet on the bottom
of the backrest and press in the direction of the
arrow ›››Fig.67
1
.
●
Remove the head restraint in the direction of
the arrow
2
.
Fitting the front head restraints
●
Place the head restraint in the correct posi-
tion on the guides of the corresponding back-
rest and insert it.
●
Press the head restraint downwards until the
bars lock.
●
Adjust the head restraint according to the in-
structions on the correct position of the seat.
Removing the rear head restraints
To remove the head restraint, the correspond-
ing backrest must be partially folded forward.
●
Unlock the backrest ›››page81.
●
Move the head restraint upwards until it ar-
rives to the top.
●
Press button ›››Fig.68
1
, while simultane-
ously pressing on the safety hole
2
with a flat
screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and re-
move the headrest.
●
Move the backrest until it engages properly
››› in Folding down and raising the rear
seat backrest on page81.
84
Seats and head restraints
Fitting the rear head restraints
To mount the external head restraints, the cor-
responding backrest must be partially folded
forward.
●
Unlock the backrest ›››page81.
●
Insert the head restraint bars into the guides
until they perceptibly engage. It should not be
possible to remove the head restraint from the
backrest.
●
Move the backrest until it engages properly
››› in Folding down and raising the rear
seat backrest on page81.
WARNING
Remove the rear headrests only when it is
necessary to fit a child seat. After removing a
child seat, refit the headrest immediately.
Lights
85
Vehicle lighting
Lights
Vehicle lighting
Control lamps
Lights up yellow
There is a total or partial failure of the
exterior lighting.
Lights up yellow
Rear fog light on.
Lights up green
Left or right turn signal. The control
lamp flashes twice as fast when a
turn signal is faulty.
Hazard warning lights on ›››page59.
Lights up green
Trailer turn signals
Lights up blue Main beam on or flasher
activated ›››page87.
Lights up blue
The Light Assist system is on
›››page88.
Lights control
Fig.69 Instrument panel: light panel.
Turning on the lights
●
Turn on the ignition and turn the light switch to
the desired position ›››Fig.69:
Automatic control of dipped beam head-
lights and daytime running lights.
Side lights and daytime running lights on.
Dipped beam switched on.
Daylight running lights switched on.
Turning o the lights
●
Turn o the ignition and turn the light switch to
the desired position:
Lights o.
The “Coming home” and “Leaving home”
guide lights may be switched on.
Side light on.
Dipped beam headlight o.
The driver is personally responsible for the cor-
rect use and adjustment of the lights in all situa-
tions.
Side lights
When the side light is switched on, the side
lights in both headlights, certain areas of the
rear light clusters, the number plate light and
the button lights on the instrument cluster turn
on. The automatic dipped beam activates as of
a speed of approx. 10 km/h (6 mph).
Automatic dipped beam headlight control
When the light control is in position , the
vehicle's lighting and the lighting of the instru-
ments and controls turn on and o under the
following conditions:
●
The light sensor has detected darkness.
●
The wiper has been on for some time.
86
Lights
The automatic dipped beam is only an auxili-
ary function and cannot always identify all sit-
uations that may arise during driving with su-
cient precision.
Cornering light function
The cornering light function is an additional
function to the dipped beam headlights to im-
prove lighting of the side of the road when tak-
ing a sharp turn at low speed.
When the dipped beam is on, a static cornering
light comes on when driving at speeds below
about 40km/h (25mph) or on very tight bends.
●
If the steering wheel is turned or the turn sig-
nal is switched on, the front fog light gradually
turns on. After the turn, the cornering light func-
tion is gradually switched o.
●
When engaging reverse gear, both front fog
lights turn on.
Daytime running lights
Daytime running lights can increase vehicle vis-
ibility when driving during the day.
The daytime running lights switch on every time
the ignition is switched on, if the switch is in
positions or , according to the level of
exterior lighting.
Motorway light
The function is connected and disconnected
via the corresponding Infotainment system
menu.
●
Activation: when going above 110km/h
(68mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dipped
beam raises slightly to increase the driver's visi-
bility distance.
●
Deactivation: when reducing the speed of
the vehicle below 100km/h (62mph), the dip-
ped beam immediately returns to its normal po-
sition.
Audible warnings to advise the driver that
the lights have not been switched o
If the ignition is not switched on or the vehicle
key is not in the ignition (depending on the
equipment) an audible warning signal is heard
in the following cases: this will remind you to
turn the light o.
●
When the parking light is on ›››page87.
●
When the light switch is in position or .
If the exit lighting is switched on (“Coming
Home” function), when you leave the vehicle
there will be no audio warning to warn you that
the lights are still on.
WARNING
If the road is not well lit and other road users
cannot see the vehicle well enough or at all,
accidents may occur.
●
The automatic dipped beam control ( )
only switches on the dipped beam when
there are no changes in brightness, and not,
for example when it is foggy.
WARNING
The side lights or daytime running lights
are not bright enough to illuminate the road
ahead and to ensure that other road users
are able to see you.
●
Always use your dipped beam head lights if
it is raining or if visibility is poor.
●
Never drive with daytime lights if the road
is not well lit due to weather or lighting con-
ditions.
●
On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,
when activating the daytime running light
the rear lights are not switched on. A vehicle
which does not have the rear lights on may
not be visible to other drivers in the darkness,
in the case of heavy rain or in conditions of
poor visibility.
WARNING
If the headlights are set too high and not
used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or
distracting other road users. This could result
in a serious accident.
●
Always make sure that the headlights are
correctly adjusted.
Lights
87
Vehicle lighting
1
2
3
4
Note
●
The legal requirements regarding the use
of vehicle lights in each country must be ob-
served.
●
The dipped beam headlights will only work
with the ignition on. The side lights come on
automatically when the ignition is turned o.
Fog lights
Fig.70 Instrument panel: light panel.
The warning lamps or also show, on the
light switch or instrument panel, when the fog
lights are on.
The fog lights can be switched on with the light
control in position , or when the igni-
tion is switched on:
●
Turn on the fog lights : pull the light switch
to its first position ›››Fig.70
1
.
●
Switching on the rear fog light : pull the
light switch fully out
2
.
●
To switch o the fog lights, press the light
switch or turn it to position .
Note
The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind
you. You should use the rear fog light only
when visibility is very poor.
Turn signal and main beam lever
Fig.71 Turn signal and main beam lever.
More the lever to the required position:
Right turn light or right-hand parking light
(ignition switched o).
Left turn light or left-hand parking light (ig-
nition switched o).
Turning on the main beam. The control
lamp lights up on the instrument cluster.
The headlight flasher turns on when the
lever is pulled. The control lamp lights up
on the instrument cluster.
Place the lever in rest position to turn o the
corresponding function.
Convenience turn signals
When the ignition is switched on, move the lever
as far as possible upwards or downwards and
release the lever. The turn signal will flash three
times.
To switch o the convenience turn signal early,
immediately move the lever in the opposite di-
rection until you feel resistance and release it.
The convenience turn signals are switched on
and o in the infotainment system using the
function button > Settings > Lighting
> Lighting assistant > Convenience
turn signals.
Parking light
The parking lights will only work with the igni-
tion o. If said light is on, an audible warning will
sound while the driver door is open.
●
Switch the ignition o.
●
Move the turn signal lever up or down.
When the parking light is switched on, the front
side light and the tail light on the corresponding
side of the vehicle turn on.
88
Lights
WARNING
Improper or lack of use of the turn signals,
or forgetting to deactivate them can confuse
other road users. This could result in a seri-
ous accident.
●
Always give warning when you are going to
change lane, overtake or when turning, acti-
vating the turn signal in good time.
●
As soon as you have finished changing
lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn
signal o.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the headlights may cause
accidents and serious injury, as the main
beam may distract or dazzle other drivers.
Note
●
When you turn the ignition o without hav-
ing turned the turn signals o, an acoustic
signal sounds while the driver door is open.
This is intended as a reminder to switch o
the turn signal, unless you wish to leave the
parking light on.
●
If the convenience turn signals are oper-
ating (three flashes) and the other conven-
ience turn signals are switched on, the active
part stops flashing and only flashes once in
the new part selected.
●
The turn signal only works when the igni-
tion is switched on. The hazard warning lights
also work when the ignition is switched o.
●
The main beam headlights can only be
switched on if the dipped beam headlights
are already on.
●
If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the
control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn
signals) and the vehicle turn signal will flash
at double speed.
●
In cold or damp weather conditions, the
headlights, tail lights and turn signals may
mist up inside temporarily. This is normal and
in no way eects the useful life of the vehicle
lighting system.
●
The parking light does not activate auto-
matically if the left- or right-hand turn signal
is left on and the ignition is disconnected.
Main beam assist (Light Assist)
The main beam assist automatically prevents
glare from vehicles moving in the opposite di-
rection or ahead in the same direction. In addi-
tion, the main beam assist detects illuminated
areas and disconnects the main beam head-
light when passing, e.g. by populated areas.
Within its limitations, the assist system automat-
ically connects or disconnects the main beam
headlight depending on the environmental and
trac conditions, as well as the speed ››› .
Switching on the main beam assist
●
Turn on the ignition and turn the light switch to
position .
●
From the base position, press the turn sig-
nal and main beam headlights lever forwards
›››Fig.71
3
.
When the main beam assist is switched on,
the control lamp on the instrument cluster
screen turns on. When the main beam is on, the
blue main beam control lamp on the instru-
ment cluster switches on.
Switching the main beam assist o
●
Turn the headlight switch to a position other
than .
●
EITHER: if main beam assist is on, pull the turn
signal light and main beam headlights lever
back ›››Fig.71
4
.
●
OR: if the main beam assistant is on, but the
main beam does not turn on, press the turn
signal and main beam lever forwards to turn
the main beam on manually. Pull the turn signal
and main beam lever back to switch o the
main beam manually, if necessary.
●
OR: switch o the ignition.
System limitations
In the following cases, the main beam headlight
must be switched o manually because the
main beam assist will not disconnect it on time
or disconnect it at all:
Lights
89
Vehicle lighting
●
On roads with insucient lighting with very
reflective signs
●
If road users are insuciently lit up, e.g. pe-
destrians or cyclists.
●
On closed curves, when the trac in the
opposite direction is partially hidden, on pro-
nounced slopes or inclinations.
●
On roads with trac in the opposite direction
and with a central reservation barrier where the
driver can see over it e.g. lorry drivers.
●
In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain
●
In the event of dust or sand storms
●
If the windscreen is damaged in the camera's
field of vision.
●
If the camera's field of vision is misted up, dirty
or covered by a sticker, snow or ice.
●
If the camera is damaged or if the power sup-
ply has been cut o.
WARNING
The convenience features of the main beam
assist should not encourage the taking of
risks. The system is not a replacement for
driver concentration.
●
You are always in control of the main beam
and adapting it to the light, visibility and
trac conditions.
●
It is possible that the main beam headlight
control does not recognise all driving situa-
tions and is limited under certain circumstan-
ces.
●
When the field of vision of the camera is
dirty, covered or damaged, operation of the
main beam control may be aected. This
also applies when changes are made to the
vehicle lighting system, for example, if addi-
tional headlights are installed.
NOTICE
To avoid aecting the operation of the sys-
tem, take the following points into considera-
tion:
●
Clean the field of vision of the camera reg-
ularly and make sure it is free of snow and
ice.
●
Do not cover the field of vision of the cam-
era.
●
Check that the windscreen is not damaged
in the area of the field of vision of the cam-
era.
Note
●
The headlight flasher can be turned on and
o manually at any time with the turn signal
and main beam lever ›››page87.
●
If there are objects that radiate light in the
camera's area of influence, e.g. a portable
navigation system, this may aect the oper-
ation of the main beam assist system.
“Coming home” and “Leaving home”
function (exterior orientation light-
ing)
The “Coming home” and “Leaving home” func-
tion lights up the vehicle’s immediate surround-
ings when getting into and out of it in the dark.
This light is automatically controlled by a light
sensor.
Turning on the “Coming home” light
●
Unlocks the vehicle (if the light switch is in
position and the light sensor detects dark-
ness).
Turning o the “Coming home” light
●
It turns o automatically once the lights o
delay time has elapsed.
●
OR: lock the vehicle.
●
OR: rotate the light switch to position .
●
OR: switch on the ignition.
Turning on the “Leaving home” light
●
Switch the ignition o.
The “Leaving Home” light turns on if the light
control is in position and the light sensor
detects darkness.
The lights-o delay countdown starts when the
last door or rear lid of the vehicle is closed.
90
Lights
Turning o the “Leaving home” light
●
It switches o automatically after the set
lights-o delay time has elapsed.
●
EITHER: it is automatically deactivated if, 30
seconds after the function has been activated,
any vehicle door or the rear lid is still open.
●
OR: rotate the light switch to position .
●
OR: switch on the ignition.
“Coming home” and “Leaving home” set-
tings
The duration of the lights-o delay can be set
in the vehicle settings menu of the infotainment
system, where the function can also be activa-
ted and deactivated ›››page34.
Headlight range control
Fig.72 Next to the steering wheel: regulator
headlight range control.
The headlight range control ›››Fig.72 adapts
according to the value of the light beam of
the headlight to the level of load of the vehi-
cle. This oers the driver optimum visibility and
the headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers
››› .
The headlights can only be adjusted when the
dipped beam is switched on.
To adjust, turn the control ›››Fig.72:
Value Vehicle load status
a)
Two front occupants, luggage com-
partment empty
1
All seats occupied, luggage com-
partment empty
2
All seats occupied, luggage com-
partment full. With trailer and mini-
mum drawbar load.
3
Driver only, luggage compartment
full With trailer and maximum draw-
bar load.
a)
If the vehicle load does not correspond to those
shown in the table, it is possible to select intermedi-
ary positions.
Dynamic headlight range control
The control is not mounted in vehicles with dy-
namic headlight range control. The headlight
range is automatically adjusted according to
the vehicle load status when they are switched
on.
WARNING
Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that
the headlights dazzle and distract other driv-
ers. This could result in a serious accident.
●
Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load
status so that it does not blind other drivers.
Driving abroad
The light beam of the dipped beam lights is
asymmetric: the side of the road on which you
are driving is lit more intensely.
When a car that is manufactured in a country
that drives on the right travels to a country that
drives on the left (or vice versa), it is normally
necessary to cover part of the headlight bulbs
with stickers or to change the adjustment of the
headlights to avoid dazzling other drivers.
In such cases, the regulations specify certain
light values that must be complied with for des-
ignated points of the light distribution. This is
known as “Tourist light”.
The light distribution of the headlights allows
the specific “tourist light” values to be met
without the need for stickers or changes being
made to the settings.
For ECOLED headlamps, it is necessary to
lower the mechanical adjustment of the head-
lamps by 0.15° (2.6 cm at 10 m). To do this, open
the bonnet and adjust the vertical adjustment
screws on both headlights. When the vehicle
Lights
91
Interior lights
returns to its country of origin, the mechanical
adjustment must be reset to its original status.
If you do not have experience with this type of
adjustment, SEAT recommends that you go to a
technical service centre.
Note
“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If
you are planning a long stay in a country that
drives on the other side, you should take the
vehicle to an Authorised Technical Service to
change the headlights.
Interior lights
Lighting of the instrument cluster,
displays and controls
The brightness of the instrument and control
lighting can be adjusted in the infotainment
system:
●
Select > Settings > Lighting >
Vehicle interior lighting; OR >
Interior settings > Lighting > In-
strument cluster.
The set intensity automatically adapts to
changes in ambient brightness in the vehicle.
When the automatic dipped beam light
is turned on, a sensor automatically turns the
dipped beam light on or o, as well as the in-
strument and control lighting, depending on the
ambient brightness.
In some cases, e.g. when driving through a tun-
nel without the automatic dipped beam light
function switched on, the instrument clus-
ter lighting may even switch o. The objective
of this function is to provide the driver with a
visual indication that he or she should activate
the dipped beam. If your vehicle is fitted with
a digital instrument cluster, the message Turn
on the lights will be displayed on the in-
strument cluster.
Interior and reading lights
Fig.73 Detail of headliner: front interior
lighting.
Turning the interior lights on or o.
Door contact connection. The interior
lights come on automatically when you
unlock the vehicle, open a door or remove
the key from the ignition. The light goes out
a few seconds after closing all the doors,
when locking the vehicle or connecting the
ignition.
Turning the reading light on and o
The light controls may vary depending on the
vehicle version.
Luggage compartment lighting
The light is activated when the rear lid is open,
even when the ignition and lights are turned o.
For this reason, ensure that the rear lid is always
closed.
Background lighting
The background lighting lights up the area of
the centre console and the footwell area and,
depending on the version, the front door panels
and the air vents as well.
It will be switched on at full brightness when the
doors are opened and the lights will be dimmed
during driving, when the light selector is in ,
or .
The brightness and colour of the background
lighting can be adjusted in the infotainment
menu using the function button > Set-
tings > Background lighting; OR >
Background lighting.
92
Lights
Note
If not all the doors are closed, the interior
lights will switch o after approx. 10 minutes,
providing the ignition has been turned o and
the door contact is connected. This prevents
the battery from discharging.
Visibility
93
Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper systems
Visibility
Windscreen wiper and rear
window wiper systems
Window washer lever
Fig.74 Operating the windscreen wiper and
rear wiper.
More the lever to the required position:
0
Windscreen wipers o.
1
Intermittent wiping of the windscreen
activates the rain sensor. The intermittent
wiping of the windscreen depends on the
speed at which you are driving. The faster
the speed, the more frequent the wiping.
2
Slow wipe.
3
Continuous wipe.
4
Short wipe. Pressing the lever for longer
accelerates the wiping.
5
Pull the lever to switch on the auto-
matic windscreen washer/wiper. The Cli-
matronic switches on air recirculation for
approx. 30 seconds to prevent the smell of
windscreen washer fluid from entering the
vehicle interior.
6
Switches on the intermittent rear win-
dow wipe. The wiper operates at intervals
of approx. 6 seconds.
7
Pressing and holding the lever turns on
the automatic rear window washer/wiper.
A
A Control for adjusting the duration of
the wiping intervals (vehicles without rain
and light sensors) or the sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
WARNING
If insucient antifreeze is added to the
washer fluid, it could freeze on the glass and
impair visibility.
●
In cold conditions you should not use the
wash/wipe system unless you have warmed
the windscreen with the heating and venti-
lation system. The windscreen washer fluid
could otherwise freeze on the windscreen
and obscure your view of the road.
WARNING
The use of worn or dirty wiper blades re-
duces visibility and increases the risk of seri-
ous accidents and injuries.
●
Replace the wiper blades whenever they
are in poor condition or worn out and
no longer clean the windows suciently
›››page248.
NOTICE
Before driving o and before switching on the
ignition, check the following aspects of the
wiper blades and the wiper motor to prevent
damage to the glass:
●
The wiper lever is in the neutral position.
●
You have removed or cleared any snow and
ice from the wiper blades and windows.
●
You have carefully removed any wiper
blades that may have frozen from the win-
dow. SEAT recommends a de-icer spray for
this operation.
NOTICE
Do not turn on the wiper until the glass is dry.
Using the wipers while dry can damage the
glass.
94
Visibility
0
1
A
Note
●
When the vehicle stops while the wiper is
on, the wiper switches to operating tempora-
rily at the next lower wiping level.
●
If the driver’s or passenger door is opened
when the vehicle is stationary, the wipers re-
turn to the starting position and are switched
o. If the door is closed or the wiper lever is
moved within a few seconds, the wiper turns
on again.
●
In winter, the service position of the wipers
can be useful to make it easier to lift the wip-
ers o the windscreen when the vehicle is
going to be left stationary ›››page248.
Wiper functions
Automatic rear window wipe
The rear wiper switches on automatically when
the wiper is switched on and reverse gear is en-
gaged. The automatic rear window wiper acti-
vation when engaging reverse gear can be ac-
tivated and deactivated in the infotainment sys-
tem, in the vehicle settings menu ›››page34.
Note
The windscreen will be wiped again approx-
imately 5 seconds after the windscreen
washer has been activated, provided the ve-
hicle is moving (“drip” function). If you acti-
vate the wipers less than 3 seconds after the
“drip” function, a new wash sequence will
begin without performing the last wipe. For
the “drip” function to work again, you have to
turn the ignition o and then on again.
Note
The wiper will try to wipe away any obsta-
cles that are on the windscreen. The wiper
will stop moving if the obstacle is still block-
ing its path. Remove the obstacle and switch
on the wiper again.
Rain and light sensor
Fig.75 Windscreen wipers lever: adjust the
rain sensor
A
.
Fig.76
Rain sensor sensitive surface
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the
windscreen wiper intervals, depending on the
amount of rain ››› .
Push the lever to the desired position ›››Fig.75.
Rain sensor o.
Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-
sary.
Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor:
– Set control to the right: high sensitivity.
– Set control to the left: low sensitivity.
When the ignition is switched o and then back
on, the rain sensor stays on and starts operat-
ing again when the windscreen wipers are in
position ›››Fig.75
1
and the vehicle is travel-
ling at more than 16km/h (10mph).
Visibility
95
Mirrors
Abnormal operation of the rain and light
sensor
The possible causes of anomalies and errone-
ous interpretations in the sensitive surface area
›››Fig.76 of the rain sensor are, among others:
●
Damaged wipers: a film of water on the
damaged blades may lengthen the activation
time, reduce the washing intervals or result in a
fast and continuous wipe.
●
Insects: the impact of insects may cause the
wiper to activate.
●
Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on
the roads may cause an excessively long wipe
when the windscreen is almost dry.
●
Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus
eect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may
reduce the eectiveness of the rain sensor or
make it react more slowly, later or not at all.
Regularly clean the sensitive surface of the rain
sensor ›››Fig.76 (arrow) and check for possi-
ble damage to the wiper blades.
●
Windscreen crack: the impact of a stone will
trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain sensor
on. Next the rain sensor detects the reduction in
the sensitive surface area and adapts accord-
ingly. The behaviour of the sensor will vary with
the size of the damage caused by the stone.
WARNING
The rain sensor may not detect enough rain
to switch on the wipers.
●
If necessary, switch on the wipers man-
ually when water on the windscreen ob-
structs visibility.
Note
●
To remove wax and coatings, we recom-
mend a window cleaner containing alcohol.
●
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in
front of the rain sensor. This may cause sen-
sor disruption or faults.
Mirrors
General safety instructions
The exterior and interior mirrors allow the driver
to observe vehicles driving behind and adapt
his or her driving behaviour accordingly.
For safe driving, it is important for the driver
to adjust the exterior mirrors and interior mirror
correctly before setting o.
When looking through the exterior mirrors and
the interior mirror, it is not possible to see the
entire area behind and to the sides of the vehi-
cle. These areas outside the field of view are
known as the blind spot. Other road users and
objects may be in the blind spot.
WARNING
Adjusting the exterior mirrors and interior
mirror while driving can distract the driver.
This could cause accidents and lead to seri-
ous injuries
●
Only adjust the exterior mirrors and interior
mirror when the vehicle is stationary.
●
When parking, changing lanes, overtaking
or turning, always keep a close eye on your
surroundings, as other road users or objects
may also be in the blind spot.
●
Always make sure that the mirrors are ad-
justed correctly and that visibility to the rear
is not reduced by ice, snow, fogging or other
objects.
WARNING
A failure to accurately estimate the distance
to vehicles driving behind can lead to serious
accidents and injuries.
●
Curved (convex or aspherical) mirrors in-
crease the field of view and objects in them
appear smaller and further away.
●
Curved mirrors do not allow you to pre-
cisely calculate the distance to vehicles
driving behind, so using them when changing
lanes could cause serious accidents and in-
juries.
96
Visibility
●
If possible, use the interior mirror to pre-
cisely calculate the distance to vehicles
driving behind you, or to other objects.
●
Always make sure you have sucient visi-
bility to the rear.
WARNING
The automatic anti-dazzle mirrors contain an
electrolyte fluid which could leak if the mirror
is broken.
●
If it gets out, the electrolyte fluid can
irritate the skin, eyes and respiratory or-
gans, particularly in the case of people with
asthma or similar diseases. Immediately in-
hale enough fresh air and get out of the vehi-
cle, or open all windows and doors if this is
not possible.
●
If the electrolytic fluid comes into contact
with your eyes or skin, immediately rinse the
aected area with plenty of water for at
least 15 minutes and seek medical advice.
●
If the fluid comes into contact with foot-
wear or clothing, rinse immediately with
plenty of water for at least 15 minutes.
Clean thoroughly before using the footwear
or clothing in question again.
●
If the electrolytic fluid is swallowed, imme-
diately rinse the mouth with plenty of water
for at least 15 minutes. Do not induce vomit-
ing unless advised by a doctor. Immediately
seek medical attention.
NOTICE
Electrolyte fluid may leak if the automatic
anti-dazzle mirror is broken. This liquid at-
tacks plastic surfaces. Therefore, it should
be cleaned as fast as possible with a damp
sponge or similar.
Interior mirror
Fig.77 Manual anti-dazzle function for rear
vision mirror
Manual anti-dazzle function for interior rear
vision mirror
●
To darken the rear view mirror, press the mir-
ror button updates ›››Fig.77 (arrow).
●
To return to the basic position, press the back
of the button.
Rear view mirror with automatic anti-dazzle
function
When the ignition is switched on, the sensors in
the mirror measure the light falling on it from
behind and in front.
The interior mirror automatically darkens based
on the measured values.
If the light falling onto the sensors is blocked or
interrupted, e.g. by a sunshade blind or hanging
objects, the automatic anti-dazzle interior mir-
ror does not work or does not work properly.
Similarly, the use of portable navigation devi-
ces attached to the windscreen or close to the
automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror can aect
the operation of the sensors ››› .
The automatic anti-dazzle function is deactiva-
ted in certain situations, e.g. when reverse gear
is engaged.
WARNING
Light from screens of portable navigation
devices can cause malfunctions of the au-
tomatic anti-dazzle interior mirror and may
cause serious accidents and injuries.
●
Abnormal operation of the automatic anti-
dazzle function may result in it being impos-
sible to use the interior mirror to precisely
calculate the distance to vehicles driving be-
hind, or to other objects.
Visibility
97
Mirrors
/
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Fig.78 Detail of the driver door: control for the
exterior mirror.
Turn the control to the corresponding position:
Moving the control to the desired position
adjusts the mirrors on the driver's side ( ,
left) and on the passenger's side ( , right)
in the desired direction.
Folding in mirrors.
The exterior mirror cannot be adjusted and
all functions are deactivated.
Heated exterior mirrors
●
Press the demisting switch next to the air
conditioning controls ›››page99.
●
The mirrors demist for some minutes to pre-
vent draining the battery unnecessarily.
●
If necessary, press the button again to repeat
the function.
●
The exterior mirror heating is not activated
in temperatures above approximately +20°C
(+68°F).
Fold the rearview mirrors when locking the
vehicle
Button > Settings > Mirrors and
wipers > Mirrors in the infotainment sys-
tem can be used to select the folding of ex-
ternal mirrors when the vehicle is parked and
locked ›››page34.
When the vehicle is locked or unlocked from
the outside, the exterior mirrors can be folded in
or out automatically, depending on the equip-
ment.
If the rotary control of the electric exterior mir-
rors is in the folded position, the exterior mirrors
remain folded.
Manually folding the exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors of the vehicle may be fol-
ded in. To do this, press the mirror housing to-
wards the vehicle ››› .
WARNING
Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking
care to avoid injuries.
●
Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror
when there is no-one in the way of the mirror.
●
When moving the mirror, take care not to
trap fingers between the mirror and the mir-
ror bracket.
NOTICE
The electrically folding exterior mirrors must
only be operated electrically, not by hand,
and this could damage their electric drive.
NOTICE
Before washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash, please make sure to fold the ex-
terior mirrors in to prevent them from being
damaged.
Note
●
If the electrical adjustment should fail to
operate, both of the mirrors can be adjusted
by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the
mirror glass.
●
The folding function on the exterior mirrors
will not activate at speeds over 40km/h
(25mph).
98
Visibility
Sun protection
Sun blind
Fig.79 Sun visor
Options for adjusting driver and front pas-
senger sun visors
●
Lower the sun visor towards the windscreen.
●
The sun visor can be pulled out of its mount-
ing and turned towards the door ›››Fig.79
1
.
●
Swing the sun visor towards the door, longitu-
dinally backwards.
There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, with
a cover. When the cover is opened
2
a light
comes on.
The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror cover
is closed or the sun visor is pushed back up.
WARNING
Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.
●
Always store sun blinds and visors in their
housing when not in use.
Note
The light above the sun visor automatically
switches o after a few minutes in certain
conditions. This prevents the battery from
discharging.
Air conditioning
99
Heating, ventilation and cooling
Air conditioning
Heating, ventilation and
cooling
Introduction
Depending on the vehicle’s equipment, several
systems may have been fitted:
●
The heating and ventilation heats and ven-
tilates the passenger compartment. It cannot
cool.
●
The manual air conditioning system heats,
cools and dehumidifies the air.
●
The Climatronic is an automatic air condi-
tioner that heats, cools and dehumidifies the
air.
With the Climatronic’s automatic mode it is
possible to automatically regulate the air tem-
perature, distribution and flow to achieve opti-
mal thermal comfort.
To switch a specific function on, press the ap-
propriate button. Press the button again to
switch o the function.
The illuminated LEDs next to the buttons indi-
cate that the function is switched on.
Economic use of the air conditioning
When the air conditioning is switched on, the
compressor consumes engine power and has
influence on fuel consumption.
The air conditioner operates most eectively
with the windows closed. However, if the pas-
senger compartment has become excessively
hot due to being exposed to the sun, it will cool
down more quickly by opening the windows for
a moment.
Dust and pollen filter
The dust and pollen filter with its activated
charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier against
impurities in the air taken into the vehicle inte-
rior.
The dust and pollen filter must be changed reg-
ularly so that air conditioner performance is not
adversely aected.
If the filter loses eciency prematurely due to
use in areas with very high levels of air pollu-
tion, the filter must be changed more frequently
than stated in the Service Schedule.
Air vents
To ensure proper heating, cooling and ventila-
tion in the vehicle interior, the air vents must
remain open.
There are other additional, non-adjustable air
vents in the instrument panel, in the footwells
and in the rear area of the passenger compart-
ment.
WARNING
Reduced visibility through the windows in-
creases the risk of serious accidents.
●
Always ensure that all windows are free of
ice and snow, and that they are not fogged,
so as to maintain good visibility of everything
outside.
●
Only drive when you have good visibility.
●
Always ensure that you use the air condi-
tioner and heated rear window to maintain
good visibility.
●
Never leave the air recirculation on for a
long period of time. If the cooling system
is switched o and air recirculation mode
switched on, the windows can mist over very
quickly, considerably limiting visibility.
●
Switch air recirculation mode o when it is
not required.
NOTICE
Food, medicines and other objects sensitive
to heat or cold may be damaged or made
unsuitable for use by the air coming from the
vents.
●
Never place food, medicines or other tem-
perature-sensitive objects close to the air
vents.
100
Air conditioning
Note
●
When the cooling system is turned o, air
coming from the outside will not be dried. To
prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT recom-
mends leaving the cooling system turned on.
To do this, press the function button . The
icon should light up.
●
The maximum heat output required to de-
frost windows as quickly as possible is only
available when the engine has reached its
normal running temperature.
●
Keep the air intake slots in front of the
windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to
ensure heating and cooling are not impaired,
and to prevent the windows from misting
over.
●
The air from the vents flows through the ve-
hicle interior and is extracted by slots in the
luggage compartment designed for this pur-
pose. Therefore, you should avoid obstruct-
ing these slots with any kind of object.
●
It is advisable to turn on the air condition-
ing at least once a month, to lubricate the
system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-
crease in the cooling capacity is detected,
a Technical Service should be consulted to
check the system.
●
When the engine is under extreme strain,
switch o the compressor for a moment.
Air conditioning
101
Heating, ventilation and cooling
Climatronic controls and functions
Fig.80 In the centre console: Climatronic control
panel.
Temperature
1
/
2
The temperature of the right and left sides can
be adjusted separately using the adjusters. The
selected temperature is shown on the display of
the climate control panel.
Synchronizes the driver’s temperature
settings to the passenger side. Activates
the temperature regulator for the pas-
senger side to set a dierent temperature.
In this mode, the system automatically
regulates the interior temperature, fan
speed and air distribution for optimal
thermal comfort. The mode will deac-
tivate as soon as manual changes are
made to the fan speed, air distribution,
windscreen demisting or air recirculation.
Switches the cooling system on or o.
The cooling mode cools and dehumidi-
fies the air.
Adjust the fan power.
The defrost/demisting function removes
ice and fog from the windscreen. The air
is dehumidified and the fan is set high.
The heated rear window only works when
the engine is running and switches o
automatically after a maximum of 10 mi-
nutes. It should be switched o as soon as
the glass is demisted. By saving electrical
power you can also save fuel.
To avoid possible damage to the battery,
an automatic temporary disconnection of
this function is possible, coming back on
when normal operating conditions are re-
established.
Switches the air recirculation mode on
and o ›››page103.
Switches seat heating on and o
›››page103.
Switch o the air conditioning system.
If the fan is manually set to , it also
switches o.
Air distribution
The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. It
can also be manually distributed to the desired
zone by pressing the corresponding button:
The airflow is directed towards the chest
The airflow is directed towards the foot-
well.
The airflow is directed at the windscreen.
102
Air conditioning
Manual air conditioning controls / Heating and fresh air system
Fig.81 In the centre console: controls for the manual air conditioning; heating and fresh air system controls.
Cooling mode
Manual air conditioning: Press the button to
switch on or o the cooling system.
Temperature
1
Turn the control to adjust the temperature.
Heating and fresh air system: The temperature
cannot be lower than that of the exterior air
temperature, as this system cannot cool or de-
humidify the air.
Fan
Turning the regulator
2
sets the fan power.
At level 0 the fan and manual air conditioning
are disconnected. Level 4 is the maximum.
Air distribution / / / /
Turning regulator
3
distributes the air to the
desired zone:
The airflow is directed towards the chest
The airflow is directed towards the footwell.
The airflow is directed towards the wind-
screen and the footwell area.
Defrost/demist function
Manual air conditioning: When the control
3
is in position the air flow is directed at the
windscreen and air recirculation is disconnec-
ted automatically or not activated. Increase the
fan power to clear the windscreen of conden-
sation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the
air, the cooling system will automatically switch
on.
Rear window heating
This only works when the engine is running and
switches o automatically after a maximum of
10 minutes.
It should be switched o as soon as the glass
is demisted. By saving electrical power you can
also save fuel.
To avoid possible damage to the battery,
an automatic temporary disconnection of this
function is possible, coming back on when nor-
mal operating conditions are re-established.
Air recirculation
›››page103
Seat heating
›››page103
Air conditioning
103
Heating, ventilation and cooling
Air recirculation
Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient air
from entering the interior.
When the outside temperature is very high, you
can select air recirculation for a short period of
time to refresh the vehicle interior more quickly.
For safety reasons, air recirculation is switched
o in the following situations:
●
When the button is pressed or the air dis-
tributor is turned to .
Switching air recirculation on and o
●
Press the button to switch air recirculation
on or o.
WARNING
Stuy or used air will increase fatigue and
reduce driver concentration possibly result-
ing in a serious accident.
●
Never leave the fresh air fan turned o or
use the air recirculation for long periods of
time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be
refreshed.
NOTICE
In vehicles with an air conditioner, do not
smoke when air recirculation is switched on.
The smoke may be deposited on the cool-
ing evaporator and on the active combina-
tion filter and cause permanent unpleasant
odours.
Note
When the outside temperature is very high,
briefly switching on the air recirculation
mode helps to cool the vehicle interior more
quickly.
Seat heating
The front seats have three levels of electric
heating.
Control seat heating
●
Press or on the control panel to turn on
the seat heating at maximum power.
●
Press the or button repeatedly to adjust it
to the required level.
●
To turn o seat heating, press or several
times until no LEDs are lit.
If the ignition is switched on again in approx.
the next 10 minutes, the driver seat heating is
automatically turned on to the level set the last
time.
Cases in which the heat seating should not
be switched on
Do not switch the seat heating on if any of the
following conditions are met:
●
The seat is occupied by a person with limited
perception of pain or temperature.
●
The seat is not occupied.
●
The seat has a cover.
●
A child seat has been installed on the seat.
●
The seat cushion is wet or damp.
●
The outdoor or indoor temperature is greater
than +25°C (77°F).
WARNING
People who cannot perceive pain or temper-
ature because of medications, paralysis or
chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have a
limited perception of these, may suer burns
to the back, buttocks or legs when using seat
heating.
●
People with limited pain and temperature
thresholds must never use seat heating.
●
If an abnormality in the device's tempera-
ture control is detected, have it checked by a
specialist workshop.
104
Air conditioning
WARNING
If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can
adversely aect the operation of the seat
heating, increasing the risk of burns.
●
Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to
using the seat heater.
●
Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is
wet or damp.
●
Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp
on the seat.
●
Do not spill liquids on the seat.
NOTICE
●
To avoid damaging the heating elements of
the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the
seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point
on the seat cushion or backrest.
●
Liquids, sharps objects and insulating ma-
terials (e.g. covers or child seats) can dam-
age the seat heating.
●
In the event of smells, switch o the seat
heating immediately and have it inspected
by a specialised workshop.
●
If the original seat upholstery is replaced
by another material, the seat heating may
overheat or its operation may be limited.
For the sake of the environment
The seat heating should remain on only when
needed. Otherwise, it is unnecessary energy
consumption.
Troubleshooting
The cooling system cannot be switched on
or its operation is limited
If the air conditioning system cannot be
switched on, this may be caused by the follow-
ing:
●
The engine is not running.
●
The fan is switched o.
●
The air conditioner fuse has blown.
●
The outside temperature is lower than ap-
proximately 0°C (+32°F).
●
The air conditioner compressor has been
temporarily switched o because the engine
coolant temperature is too high.
●
Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air con-
ditioner checked by a specialised workshop.
The heating and fresh air system cannot be
switched on or operates in a limited way
●
The heating and fresh air system and the de-
frost function operate best when the engine is
hot.
●
If the fault continues, consult a specialised
workshop.
The windows are misted up
Windows mist up when they are cooler than
the ambient temperature and the air is very
damp. Cold air can absorb less moisture than
hot air, so the windows mist up more often in
cold weather.
●
The air vent in front of the windscreen keeps
it free of ice, snow and leaves, which improves
the performance of the heating and cooling
systems.
●
The air grooves located at the rear of the
luggage compartment must be kept clear to
allow the air to circulate through the vehicle
from front to back.
●
Switch on the demist function.
Change the temperature unit (Climatronic)
The temperature display can be changed from
Celsius to Fahrenheit on the Infotainment sys-
tem screen using the function button > Set-
tings > Units.
Water or water vapour under the vehicle
If the humidity and temperature outside the ve-
hicle are high, condensation can drip o the
evaporator in the cooling system and form a
pool underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
does not indicate a leak!
Air conditioning
105
Heating, ventilation and cooling
Note
After starting the engine, any residual humid-
ity in the air conditioner could mist over the
windscreen. Switch on the defrost function
as soon as possible to clear the windscreen
of condensation.
106
Driving
Driving
Driving indications
Pedals
●
Ensure that you can always press the accel-
erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired to
the floor.
●
Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired
to their initial positions.
●
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened during the trip and do not obstruct the
pedals ››› .
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals
clear and which are secured to prevent them
from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats
from a specialised dealership. Fasteners for
floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
Wear suitable footwear
Always wear shoes which support your feet
properly and give you a good feeling for the
pedals.
WARNING
●
Restricting pedal operation can lead to
critical situations while driving.
●
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor
coverings over the original floor mats. This
would reduce the pedal area and could ob-
struct the pedals. Risk of accident.
●
Never place objects in the driver footwell.
An object could move into the pedal area
and impair pedal operation.
Selecting the optimal gear
Depending on the equipment on the instrument
panel screen, a recommendation is shown with
the gear that should be engaged to optimise
consumption.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, it is
only displayed when driving in Tiptronic mode
›››page120.
No recommendation will appear if the optimal
gear is engaged. The current gear will be dis-
played.
Display Meaning
3
Optimum gear.
4 5 Changing to a higher gear is rec-
ommended.
2 1 Changing to a lower gear is rec-
ommended.
Information regarding the “cleanliness” of
the particulate filter
When the exhaust system detects that the par-
ticulate filter is close to saturation, this system’s
self-cleaning function recommends the optimal
gear for that function ›››page245.
WARNING
The gear change recommendation is an aux-
iliary function and in no case should be a
substitute for careful driving.
●
Responsibility for selecting the correct
gear, depending on the circumstances, rests
solely with the driver.
For the sake of the environment
Selecting the correct gear can help to save
fuel.
Note
The recommended gear display turns o
when you are no longer in tiptronic mode.
Economical and environmentally
friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and
wear to the engine, brakes and tyres all depend
largely on driving style. Consumption can be
reduced between 10-15% with an ecient driv-
ing type. The following section gives you some
Driving
107
Driving indications
tips on lessening the impact on the environment
and reducing your operating costs at the same
time.
Active cylinder management (ACT®)
Depending on vehicle equipment, the active
cylinder management (ACT®) may deactivate
some of the engine cylinders if the driving sit-
uation does not require too much power. The
number of active cylinders can be seen on the
instrument panel display ›››page16.
Foresight when driving
If you think ahead when driving, you will need
to brake less and thus accelerate less. Take ad-
vantage of the inertia of the vehicle whenever
possible, with a gear engaged. This takes ad-
vantage of the engine braking eect, reducing
wear on the brakes and tyres. Emissions and
fuel consumption will drop to zero.
Changing gear to save energy
An eective way of saving is to change in ad-
vance to a higher gear.
Manual gearbox: change from first to second
gear as soon as possible. Choosing the cor-
rect gear saves fuel. Select the highest possi-
ble gear suitable for the driving situation (the
engine should continue to run with cyclical reg-
ularity).
Automatic transmission: accelerate gradually
and without reaching the “kick-down” position.
Avoid driving at high speed
Avoid travelling at your vehicle’s top speed,
whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emission
of harmful gases and noise pollution multiply as
speed is increased. Driving at moderate speeds
will help to save fuel.
Reduce idling time
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling is
automatically reduced. In vehicles without the
Start-Stop system it is worth switching o the
engine, for example, at level crossings and at
trac lights that remain red for long periods of
time. When an engine has reached operating
temperature, and depending on the cylinder
capacity, keeping it switched o for a minimum
of about 5 seconds already saves more than
the amount of fuel necessary for restarting.
The engine takes a long time to warm up when
it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollutant emis-
sions are also especially high during this initial
warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive
o immediately after starting the engine. Avoid
running the engine at high speed.
Regular maintenance
Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even be-
fore the engine is started. A well-serviced en-
gine gives you the benefit of improved fuel
eciency as well as maximum reliability and
an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced en-
gine can consume up to 10% more fuel than
necessary.
Avoid short journeys
The engine and catalytic converter need to
reach their optimal operating temperature in
order to minimise fuel consumption and emis-
sions.
A cold engine consumes a disproportionate
amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-
ing temperature after about four kilometres (2.5
miles), when fuel consumption will return to a
normal level.
Check tyre pressure
Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the
correct pressures ›››page282 to save fuel. If
the pressure is below half bar, fuel consumption
may increase by 5%. Due to the greater rolling
resistance, under-inflation also increases tyre
wear and impairs handling.
Do not use winter tyres all year round as they
increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
Avoid carrying unnecessary loads
Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-
crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable
make sure that no unnecessary loads are being
transported.
Since the luggage rack increases the aerody-
namic drag of the vehicle, you should remove
it when not needed. At speeds of 100-120km/h
(62-75mph), this will save 12% of fuel.
108
Driving
Save electrical energy
The engine drives the alternator, thereby gen-
erating electricity. This implies that any in-
crease in power consumption also increases
fuel consumption! For this reason, switch o any
unneeded electrical devices. Devices that use
a lot of electricity include the blower at a high
setting, the rear window heating or the seat
heating.
Note
●
If you have the Start-Stop system, it is rec-
ommended that it should not be disconnec-
ted.
●
It is recommended that you close the win-
dows when driving at more than 60km/h
(37mph).
●
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the
plate slip. This causes wear and can damage
the clutch plate.
●
Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use the
brake. The fuel consumption will be lower
and you will prevent the clutch plate from
being damaged.
●
Use the engine brake on downhills by
changing to the gear that is best suited for
the gradient. Fuel consumption will be “zero”
and the brakes will not suer.
Driving with a loaded vehicle
In order to achieve appropriate driving charac-
teristics when the vehicle is loaded, please note
the following:
●
Place all luggage securely ›››page223.
●
Accelerate with particular care and precau-
tion.
●
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Brake earlier than usual.
●
If applicable, please note the information
about the roof rack ›››page226.
WARNING
Loads that move around could seriously
threaten the vehicle's stability and safety,
extend the braking distance during hard or
emergency braking and lead to serious acci-
dents and injuries.
●
Secure the load correctly to prevent it from
moving around.
●
Secure heavy objects with suitable lashing
straps or tie-down belts.
●
Ensure that the rear seat backrests are se-
curely engaged.
Driving with the rear lid open
Driving with the rear lid open is particularly
dangerous. Secure all objects and the open
rear lid correctly and take any necessary
measures.
Driving with the rear lid open increases the aer-
odynamic drag of the vehicle, along with fuel
consumption. It is therefore recommended that
you do not drive with the rear lid open.
WARNING
Driving with the rear lid unlocked or open can
cause serious injury.
●
Always drive with the rear lid closed.
●
Place all objects securely inside the lug-
gage compartment. Otherwise, loose ob-
jects could fall out of the luggage compart-
ment and injure road users driving behind.
●
Always drive carefully and with special
care and anticipation.
●
Avoid braking and sudden manoeuvres, as
the open rear lid could move uncontrollably.
●
When transporting objects that protrude
from the luggage compartment, mark them
accordingly to warn other road users. Please
bear in mind all legal provisions.
●
Never use the rear lid to support or secure
objects protruding from the luggage com-
partment.
Driving
109
Driving indications
●
If a luggage rack is fitted on the rear lid, re-
move it and the load when you have to drive
with the rear lid open.
NOTICE
An open rear lid changes the height and, in
some cases, the length of the vehicle.
Note
Depending on the country, it may be forbid-
den to drive with the rear lid open. Please
observe the legal regulations of the country
in question.
Driving on flooded roads
To prevent damage to the vehicle driving on
flooded roads, take the following into account:
●
Water should never come above the lower
edge of the bodywork.
●
Drive at pedestrian speed.
●
Never stop the vehicle in the water, drive in
reverse or stop the engine.
●
Vehicles driving in the opposite direction form
waves that can raise the water level so high
that your vehicle will not be able to cross the
water safely.
WARNING
After driving through flooded zones, braking
eectiveness can decrease if the brake discs
or pads are damp ›››page127.
Note
●
Driving through flooded areas may se-
verely damage vehicle components such as
the engine, drive train or electrical system.
●
Avoid driving through salt water (corrosion)
›››page300.
●
Whenever driving through water, the
Start-Stop system must be switched o
›››page115.
Running in
Please observe the instructions for running-in
new components.
Running-in the engine
A new engine must be driven through a
run-in period during its first 1500 kilometres
(1000 miles). During its first few hours of run-
ning, the internal friction in the engine is greater
than later on when all the moving parts have
bedded down.
How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500km
(1000 miles) influences the future engine per-
formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle,
it should be driven at a moderate speed (es-
pecially when the engine is cold) this will re-
duce engine wear and increase its useful life.
Never drive at extremely low engine speeds.
Always engage a lower gear when the engine
works “irregularly”. For the first 1000km or
600 miles, please note:
●
Do not use full throttle.
●
Do not force the engine above two thirds of its
maximum speed.
●
Do not tow a trailer.
Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600 to
1000 miles), gradually increase power until
reaching the maximum speed and high engine
speeds.
Running in new tyres and brake pads
●
Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres
›››page281.
●
Information about brakes ›››page127.
For the sake of the environment
If the engine is run in gently, the life of the
engine will be increased and the engine oil
consumption reduced.
O-roader?
Your SEAT vehicle is not an o-roader: in fact,
the ground clearance is not enough to be used
as such. Avoid consequently rough tracks and
uneven terrain.
110
Driving
Trips abroad
The vehicle has been manufactured for a spe-
cific country and meets the approval regula-
tions in force in that country at the time it was
manufactured.
If you are going to use the vehicle abroad tem-
porarily or for a short period of time, please
observe the relevant instructions.
Some countries have special safety regulations
and provisions that the vehicle may not com-
ply with. Before travelling abroad, SEAT recom-
mends that you seek information from one of
your dealers about the legal provisions in force
in your destination country.
If you are going to sell the vehicle in another
country or use it there for a longer period of
time, please observe the legal regulations in
force in the country in question.
In some cases it may be necessary to install or
remove certain equipment at a later date, and
to deactivate certain functions. Sets and types
of services may also be aected. In particular,
this can occur if the vehicle is to be used in an-
other climatic region for a long period of time.
Due to the dierent frequency bands around
the world, the factory-fitted infotainment sys-
tem may not work in another country.
With petrol vehicles, it should be ensured that
lead-free petrol is available throughout the
journey. Seek information about service station
networks selling unleaded fuel.
SEAT importers and distributors will provide in-
formation about the technical preparation that
your vehicle requires and also about necessary
maintenance and repair possibilities.
NOTICE
SEAT does not accept liability for any dam-
age to the vehicle due to the use of a lower
quality fuel, an inadequate service or the
non-availability of genuine spare parts.
Starting and stopping the
engine
Ignition lock
Fig.82 Ignition lock
Key positions:
1
Ignition
o. Key can be removed from the
vehicle.
2
Ignition is switched on.
3
Starting the engine.
Locking and unlocking the steering wheel
●
Lock the steering wheel: remove the key from
the ignition and turn the wheel until it locks. De-
pending on the country, in vehicles with auto-
matic transmission, in order to remove the key,
move the gear shift to the P position. If neces-
sary, press the gear shift blocking key and re-
lease it.
●
Unlock the steering wheel: put the key into
the ignition and turn it at the same time as the
steering wheel in the direction indicated by the
arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steering
wheel, it may be because it is locked.
Start-Stop system
If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop sys-
tem switches o the engine, the ignition remains
switched on.
Automatic transmission: before leaving the vehi-
cle, make sure that the ignition is switched o
and the selector lever is in position P.
Driving
111
Starting and stopping the engine
WARNING
●
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a
short period. This is especially important if
children or disabled people are left alone
in the vehicle. They could accidentally start
the engine or operate electrical equipment,
resulting in an accident.
●
The ignition key must NOT be removed from
the lock until the vehicle comes to a stand-
still. Otherwise, the steering could be imme-
diately locked, causing an accident risk.
NOTICE
Always remove the ignition key when leaving
the vehicle, as it may discharge the battery if
it is kept in for a long period of time.
Note
●
If it is dicult to turn the ignition key to the
position
2
, move the steering wheel to both
sides to release the steering lock.
●
If the vehicle battery is disconnected and
reconnected, the key must remain in the po-
sition
2
for around 5 seconds before start-
ing up.
●
Vehicles with automatic transmission: de-
pending on the country, after switching o
the ignition, you can only remove the ignition
key if the selector lever is in position P (park-
ing lock). Next, the selector lever is locked.
Switching the ignition
on/o
Fig.83 In the lower part of the centre console:
start button.
The engine can be started with a start button
(Press & Drive). To do so, there must be a valid
key inside the vehicle in the area of the front or
rear seats, or on the centre console.
In vehicles with the Keyless Access system, the
engine can also be started with the key in the
luggage compartment.
Opening the driver's door when exiting the ve-
hicle activates the electronic lock on the steer-
ing column if the ignition is disabled.
Switching the ignition on/o
If you only want to switch on the ignition (with-
out starting the engine), briefly press the start
button once without pressing the brake pedal
or the clutch pedal ›››page112.
The starter button text
flashes
like a heartbeat when the system is preset for
switching the ignition on and o.
Automatic ignition disconnection
If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the key
with them but leaving the ignition on, the igni-
tion does not switch o automatically. The igni-
tion is switched o by pressing the lock button
on the remote control or by pressing the sen-
sor surface on the door lever. ›››page65
Automatic deactivation of the ignition on ve-
hicles with the Start-Stop system
The ignition is switched o automatically when
the vehicle is stopped and the automatic en-
gine shutdown is active, if:
●
The driver's seat belt is not fastened,
●
the driver does not step on any pedal,
●
the driver door is opened.
After automatically turning o the ignition, if the
dipped beam is on, the side light remains
on for approx. 30 minutes (if the battery has
enough charge). If the driver locks the vehicle
or manually turns o the light, the side light
goes out.
Engine restart feature
If no key is detected inside the vehicle after the
engine stops, you will only have 5 seconds to
restart it. A warning will display on the dash
panel screen.
112
Driving
After this interval, it will not be possible to start
the engine without a valid key inside the vehicle.
Function “My Beat”
For vehicles with a convenience key there is the
“My Beat” function. This feature provides an ad-
ditional indication of the vehicle ignition system.
When entering the vehicle, the start button
›››Fig.83 flashes to draw attention to it.
When the ignition is on/o, the engine start but-
ton flashes.
With the ignition is switched o, the start button
goes o after a few seconds.
With the engine running, the start button light
stays on, indicating that the engine is running.
The time elapsed between the moment the
user starts the engine with the start button and
the lighting changes from flashing to fixed will
depend on specific engine size characteristics.
When the start button is used to stop the en-
gine, the button starts flashing again.
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the
“My Beat” function also oers additional infor-
mation:
●
When the engine stops during the Stop
phase, the light of the start button stays on,
as the Start-Stop system remains active even
though the engine is o.
●
When the engine cannot be started again
with the Start-Stop system ›››page115 and
needs to be started manually, the start button
flashes to indicate this situation.
WARNING
When switching on the ignition, do not press
the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise the en-
gine could start immediately.
WARNING
If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-
out due care, this may cause accidents and
serious injury.
●
Never leave any key inside the vehicle
when you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un-
authorised person could lock the vehicle,
start the engine or connect the ignition and
operate any of the electrical equipment.
Note
●
Before leaving the vehicle, always discon-
nect the ignition and, if appropriate, take into
account the instructions on the screen of the
dash panel.
●
If the vehicle is stationary for a long time
with the engine o and the ignition on, the
vehicle battery might be discharged and it
might not be possible to start the engine.
●
If during the STOP phase you press the
button, the ignition is switched
o and the push-button flashes.
●
If the following indication appears on the
instrument cluster display: “Start-Stop
system deactivated: Start the en-
gine manually”; the button
will flash.
Starting the engine
Before starting the engine
●
Vehicles with manual gearboxes: put the gear
lever in neutral, press the clutch pedal and keep
it in this position until the engine starts.
●
Vehicles with automatic transmission: put the
lever in positionP orN.
Vehicles with ignition locks
●
Turn the key to position ›››Fig.82
2
.
●
Keep turning the key to position ›››Fig.82
3
without pressing the accelerator.
●
Once the engine starts, release the key. When
it is released, the key returns to position
2
.
●
If the engine does not start, stop and wait for
around 1 minute to try again.
Vehicles with start buttons
●
Press and hold the brake pedal until the en-
gine starts.
●
Press the start button ›››Fig.83 without
pressing the accelerator. There must be a
valid key in the vehicle for the engine to start.
After starting the engine, the lighting of the
button changes to permanently
on to indicate that the engine is running.
●
Once the engine starts, release the start but-
ton.
Driving
113
Starting and stopping the engine
●
If the engine does not start, stop and wait
for around 1 minute to try again. If necessary,
perform an emergency start ›››page114.
WARNING
Do not keep the engine running in confined
spaces, as there is a danger of poisoning.
●
The exhaust gases contain carbon monox-
ide, an odourless and colourless poisonous
gas that can cause loss of consciousness
and death.
WARNING
Do not get out of the vehicle with the en-
gine running, especially if a gear is engaged.
The vehicle could then suddenly move or
something strange could happen that would
cause damage, fire or serious injury.
WARNING
Never use cold start sprays, they could ex-
plode or cause the engine to run at high revs.
Doing this risks injury.
NOTICE
●
The starter motor or the engine may be
damaged if you try to start the engine while
driving or if you restart it immediately after
switching it o.
●
When the engine is cold, you should avoid
high engine speeds, driving at full throttle
and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine
damage.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the
engine with the vehicle stationary. Start o
immediately, driving gently. This helps the
engine reach operating temperature faster
and reduces emissions.
Note
●
Electrical components with a high power
consumption are switched o temporarily
when the engine starts.
●
When starting with a cold engine, noise
levels may briefly increase. This is quite nor-
mal, and no cause for concern.
Turning o the engine
●
Bring the vehicle to a full stop ››› .
●
With manual transmission, press the clutch all
the way down. If the vehicle is automatic, set
the selector lever to theP position.
●
Apply the handbrake.
●
Vehicles with ignition locks: Turn the key to
position ›››Fig.82
1
.
●
Vehicles with start buttons: Briefly press the
start button ›››Fig.82.
Emergency disconnection
If the engine does not switch o after briefly
pressing the starter button, an emergency dis-
connect will be required:
●
Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-
onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-
ond››› on page112.
WARNING
Never switch o the engine while the vehicle
is moving. This could cause loss of control of
the vehicle, accidents and serious injury.
●
The airbags and belt tensioners do not
work when the ignition is switched o.
●
The brake servo does not work with the
engine o. Therefore, you need to press the
break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.
●
Power steering does not work when the en-
gine is not running. You need more strength
to steer when the engine is switched o.
●
If the ignition is switched o, the steering
column could be locked, making it impossi-
ble to control the vehicle.
114
Driving
●
Never remove the key from the ignition if
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer-
ing could suddenly lock, making it impossible
to steer the vehicle: risk of accident!
WARNING
Always take the key with you when you leave
the vehicle. This is particularly important if
there are children in the vehicle, as they
might otherwise be able to start the engine
or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the
electric windows), which could cause inju-
ries.
NOTICE
●
If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop
system switches o the engine, the ignition
remains switched on. Make sure that the ig-
nition is switched o before leaving the vehi-
cle, otherwise the battery could discharge.
●
If the engine has been driven at high speed
for a prolonged period of time, it may over-
heat when turned o. To avoid engine dam-
age, allow the engine to run for approxi-
mately two minutes in neutral before switch-
ing it o.
Note
After the engine is switched o the radiator
fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even
if the ignition is switched o. It is also pos-
sible that the fan turns itself on once more
if the coolant temperature increases due to
the heat accumulated in the engine com-
partment or due to its prolonged exposure to
solar radiation.
Electronic immobilizer
The electronic immobiliser helps to prevent the
engine from being started with an unauthorised
key and, consequently, the vehicle being put in
motion.
The vehicle key has an integrated chip which
automatically deactivates the electronic immo-
biliser if there is a valid key inside the passenger
compartment.
The electronic immobiliser is automatically ac-
tivated when there is no longer a valid key in-
side the vehicle.
For this reason, the engine can only be started
with a properly coded Original SEAT key. This
type of keys can be purchased from a SEAT
dealer.
NOTICE
A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured
if genuine SEAT keys are used.
Emergency starting function
Fig.84 On the right of the steering column:
emergency start.
If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,
an emergency start-up will be required. The rel-
evant message will appear in the dash panel
display. This may happen when, for example,
the vehicle key battery is very low.
●
Immediately after pushing the starter button,
keep the key next to the right trim of the steer-
ing column ›››Fig.84, as close as possible to
the Kessy logo.
●
The ignition connects and the engine starts
automatically.
Driving
115
Start-Stop system
1)
Only in vehicles with Keyless Access.
Start-Stop system
Description and operation
The Start-Stop system helps you to save fuel
and reduce CO
2
emissions.
In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati-
cally switch o when the vehicle stops or is
stopping. The ignition remains switched on. The
engine automatically switches back on when
required.
In this scenario, the light of the
button remains lit.
1)
When the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop
function is automatically activated.
Control lamps
The Start-Stop system is available, the
automatic engine shutdown is active.
The Start-Stop system is not available or
has been disconnected.
Stopping and starting the engine
Vehicles with a manual gearbox:
●
When the vehicle is stopped, put it into neu-
tral and release the clutch pedal. The engine
will stop. The warning lamp
will light up on
the display. The engine may be stopped before
the vehicle comes to a standstill (approximately
7 km/h).
●
When you depress the clutch pedal, the en-
gine will start again. The indicator lamp goes
out.
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox:
●
Brake until the vehicle stops and keep your
foot on the brake pedal. The engine will stop.
The warning lamp will appear on the dis-
play. The engine can be stopped before stop-
ping completely (approximately 7 or 2 km/h de-
pending on the vehicle's gearbox).
●
When you take your foot o the brake pedal
the engine will start up again. The indicator
lamp goes out.
Basic requirements for the start/stop mode
●
The driver door must be closed.
●
The driver's seat belt must be fastened.
●
The bonnet must be closed.
●
The engine has reached operating tempera-
ture.
●
The reverse gear must not be engaged.
●
The vehicle must not be on a very steep
slope.
The engine does not turn
o for various rea-
sons
Before stopping the vehicle, the system verifies
whether certain conditions are met. The engine
does not switch o, in the following situations
for example:
●
The engine has not yet reached the required
temperature for the Start-Stop mode.
●
The temperature selected on the climate
control has not been reached.
●
The interior temperature is very high/low.
●
De-icing function button activated.
●
Park assist is switched on.
●
The battery is very low.
●
The steering wheel is overly turned or is being
turned.
●
If there is a danger of misting.
●
After engaging reverse gear.
●
In case of a very steep gradient.
is displayed on the instrument cluster
screen; it is also displayed in the driver informa-
tion system, .
The engine starts by itself
When stopped, the normal system mode may
be interrupted in the following situations. The
engine restarts without the driver's intervention.
116
Driving
●
The interior temperature diers from the tem-
perature selected on the climate control.
●
Defrost function button activated .
●
The brake is pressed several times in a row.
●
The battery is not charged enough.
●
High electricity consumption.
Additional information related to the auto-
matic gearbox
The engine stops when the selector lever is in D,
N and S, as well as in Tiptronic mode. With the
selector lever in P, the engine will also remain
switched o when you take your foot o the
brake pedal.
In order to start the engine up again the ac-
celerator must be pressed, or another gear en-
gaged or the brake released.
If the selector lever is placed in R while stopped,
the engine will start up again.
Change from D to P to prevent the engine from
accidentally starting when passing through R.
Additional information about vehicles with
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will
start up again in certain operating conditions if
the radar sensor detects that the vehicle ahead
drives o again.
WARNING
●
Never switch the engine
o until the vehi-
cle is stationary. The operation of the brake
and steering will not be fully guaranteed.
More force will be needed to turn the steer-
ing wheel or to brake. You could suer an
accident and even serious injuries.
●
To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-
Stop system is switched o when working in
the engine compartment ›››page116.
NOTICE
The Start-Stop system must always be
switched o when driving through flooded
areas ›››page109.
Note
●
In vehicles with an automatic gearbox,
you can control whether the engine should
switch o or not by reducing or increasing
the brake force applied. While the vehicle re-
mains stopped, the engine will not stop if the
brake pedal is slightly pressed, in trac jams
with frequent stopping and starting for exam-
ple. As soon as strong pressure is applied to
the brake pedal, the engine will stop.
●
When stopped, the brake pedal must be
kept pressed to ensure that the vehicle does
not move.
●
If the engine “stalls” with a manual gear-
box, it can be directly started up again by
immediately pressing the clutch pedal.
●
If the lever is placed in position D, N or S
after engaging reverse gear, 10km/h (6mph)
in a forwards direction must be reached for
the system to be in a condition to stop the
engine.
Manually connecting and discon-
necting the Start-Stop system
Fig.85 Centre console: Start-Stop system
button.
If you do not wish to use the system, you can
switch it o manually:
●
To manually switch on/o the Start-Stop sys-
tem, press the button ›››Fig.85
The button symbol remains lit up in yellow
when the system is switched o.
Note
The system switches on every time the en-
gine is turned o voluntarily.
Driving
117
Manual gearbox
Troubleshooting
Indications for the driver on the instrument
cluster screen
Start-Stop system deactivated.
Start the engine manually
●
This indication shows that the Start-Stop sys-
tem cannot restart the engine.
This happens for 2 reasons: if the driver's door
has been opened or if the driver has unbuckled
the seat belt.
Start-Stop system: Fault! Function
not available
●
There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take
the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault re-
paired.
Manual gearbox
Changing gears
Fig.86 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed
manual gearbox.
Gear positions are indicated on the gear lever
›››Fig.86.
●
Depress the clutch and keep your foot as far
as it will go.
●
Move the gear lever to the desired position.
●
Release the clutch.
Engaging reverse gear
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is
stopped.
●
Depress the clutch and keep your foot as far
as it will go.
●
With the gear lever in neutral, push it down,
move it all the way to the left and then forwards
to select reverse gear ›››Fig.86
R
.
●
Release the clutch.
Changing to lower gears
When driving, you should always change down
through the gears progressively, i.e. to the gear
immediately below when engine RPM is not
tool high ››› . Skipping one or several gears
when changing down through the gears at high
speed or high RPM can cause damage to the
clutch and gearbox, even if the clutch is de-
pressed ››› .
WARNING
If the engine is running, the vehicle starts
moving as soon as a gear is engaged and the
clutch pedal is released. This also happens if
the electronic parking brake is switched on.
●
Never engage reverse gear while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
WARNING
Changing down through the gears incor-
rectly by selecting a gear that is too low
can lead to loss of control of the vehicle and
cause accidents and serious injuries.
118
Driving
NOTICE
Engaging a gear that is too low when driving
at high speed or at high engine RPM can
cause considerable damage to the clutch
and gearbox. This can happen even if the
clutch pedal is kept depressed and the gear
is not engaged.
NOTICE
Consider the following to avoid damage and
premature wear:
●
Do not rest your hand on the gear lever
while driving. The pressure exerted by the
hand is transmitted to the gearbox forks.
●
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal;
even if the pressure seems insignificant, it
can cause premature wear of the clutch disc.
Use the footrest when not changing gears.
●
Make sure the vehicle is completely stop-
ped before engaging reverse gear.
●
When changing gears, always fully de-
press the clutch.
●
Do not “ride” the clutch with the engine
running when the vehicle is stopped on an
uphill slope.
DSG automatic transmis-
sion
Introduction
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically
controlled manual gearbox. Torque between
the engine and the gearbox is transmitted via
two independent clutches. They replace the
torque converter found on conventional auto-
matic gearboxes and allow for smooth, uninter-
rupted acceleration of the vehicle.
The Tiptronic system allows the driver to
change gears manually ›››page120, Chang-
ing gear in Tiptronic mode.
Gear selector positions
Fig.87 Selector lever lock.
The selector lever position is shown when the
corresponding sign lights up. With the selector
lever in the manual gearbox positions M, D and
S, the engaged gear is also shown on the dis-
play.
- Parking lock
When the lever is put in this position, the drive
wheels are locked. The lever should only be put
in P when the vehicle is stationary ››› .
To put the lever in P or take it out of P , the
locking button must be pressed and held and
the brake pedal pressed simultaneously.
– Reverse gear
Reverse gear must be engaged only when the
vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling
›››
.
To move the lever to position R, the lock button
must be pressed and held while pressing the
brake pedal at the same time. The reverse lights
come on when the lever is in the R position with
the ignition on.
– Neutral
In this position, the gear is in neutral.
Press the brake pedal to move the lever from
N to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or at
speeds below 3km/h (2mph) ›››
.
Driving
119
DSG automatic transmission
– Permanent forward drive position
The lever in the D/S position enables the gears
to be operated in normal mode (D) or sport
mode (S). To select Sport mode S, move the
lever backwards. Pushing the lever again will
select normal mode D. The selected driving
mode is shown on the instrument panel display.
In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects the
best gear ratio. This depends on the engine
load, the road speed and the dynamic gear
control programme (DCP).
Sport mode(S) should be selected for a sporty
driving style. This setting makes use of the en-
gine's maximum power output. When acceler-
ating the gear shifts will be noticeable.
Under certain circumstances (e.g. on mountain
roads) it can be advantageous to switch tip-
tronic mode ›››page120, to adapt the gears
to suit the road conditions.
Selector lever lock
In P or N, the lever lock prevents a gear range
from being engaged, and prevents the vehicle
from moving o accidentally.
To release the gear lever lock, press and hold
the brake pedal with the ignition on. At the
same time, press the lever lock in the direction
of the arrow ›››Fig.87.
As a reminder to the driver, when the lever is in
positions P or N the following indication will be
shown on the screen:
When stationary, apply foot brake
while selecting a gear.
The lever is not locked if it is moved quickly
through position N (e.g. when shifting from R
to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to
“rock the vehicle backwards and forwards” if it
is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock engages
automatically if the brake pedal is not pressed
and the lever is in position N for more than
about one second at a speed of less than 5
km/h (3mph).
Safety interlock for ignition key
Once the ignition has been turned o, the key
may be removed only if the gear selector is in
position P. While the key is not in the ignition, the
selector lever is locked in position P.
WARNING
●
Take care not to press the accelerator
pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The vehi-
cle could start moving immediately (in some
cases even if the parking brake is engaged)
resulting in the risk of an accident.
●
Never move the lever to R or P when driving.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in an accident or failure.
●
With the lever in any position (except P),
the foot brake must be pushed down when-
ever the engine is running. This is because an
automatic gearbox still transmits power even
at idling speed.
●
While you are selecting a gear and the ve-
hicle is stopped with the engine running, do
not accelerate. Failure to follow this instruc-
tion could result in an accident.
●
As a driver you should never leave your ve-
hicle if the engine is running and a gear is
engaged. Switch on the electronic parking
brake and select the parking lock (P).
Note
●
If the lever is moved accidentally to N when
driving, release the accelerator and let the
engine speed drop to idling before selecting
gear range D or S again.
●
Should the power supply to the lever be in-
terrupted in positionP, it will not be possible
to move the lever. If this should happen the
manual release can be used ›››page122.
Note
●
If the lever lock does not engage, there is a
fault. The transmission is interrupted to pre-
vent the vehicle from accidentally moving.
Follow the procedure below in order for the
lever lock to engage again:
–
With a 6-speed gearbox: press the brake
pedal and release it again.
–
With a 7-speed gearbox: press the brake
pedal. Move the lever to positionP orN and
subsequently engage a gear.
120
Driving
●
If a gear has been selected, the vehicle
does not move forwards or back. Proceed to
the next mode:
–
When the vehicle does not move in
the required direction, the system may not
have the gear range correctly engaged.
Press the brake pedal and engage the gear
range again.
–
If the vehicle still does not move in the re-
quired direction, there is a system malfunc-
tion. Seek specialist assistance and have
the system checked.
Changing gear in Tiptronic mode
Fig.88 Lever in the Tiptronic position
Fig.89 Steering wheel: automatic gearbox
levers
Tiptronic gives the driver the option to change
gears manually.
When you change to the Tiptronic programme,
the vehicle remains in the currently selected
gear. This is possible as long as the system is
not changing gear automatically due to a traf-
fic situation.
Using Tiptronic with the selector lever
It is possible to change to Tiptronic mode, both
when the vehicle is stopped and while driving.
●
Starting from the D/S position, move the lever
to the right. The instrument panel will show
whether the lever is in manual or Tiptronic
mode (e.g. M4).
●
Move the lever forwards
+
or backwards
–
to change up or down a gear ›››Fig.88.
●
To exit Tiptronic mode, move the lever to the
left.
Using Tiptronic with the steering wheel pad-
dles
The gearshift paddles can be used when the
selector lever is in the D/S or M (Tiptronic) posi-
tions.
●
Press the
+
gear shift paddle to change up
a gear ›››Fig.89.
●
Press the
–
gear shift paddle to change
down a gear.
●
To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right-hand
lever towards the steering wheel for approxi-
mately 1 second or move the lever to the left.
If the paddles are not operated for some time
and the lever is not in the Tiptronic selection
position, it will automatically exit from Tiptronic
mode.
NOTICE
●
When accelerating, if a higher gear is
not selected, it will automatically change
shortly before reaching the maximum per-
mitted RPM.
●
Also, if a lower gear is selected, the system
will not change until it detects that the en-
gine will not reach its maximum RPM.
Driving with an automatic gearbox
The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-
cally as the vehicle moves.
Driving
121
DSG automatic transmission
The engine can only start with the selector
lever in positionP or N. At low temperatures
(below -10°C), the engine can only start with
the selector lever in position P.
Driving down hills
Under certain circumstances it may be advan-
tageous to use the Tiptronic mode to select the
gear manually according to driving conditions
››› .
Stop/Park
On level ground, just use the lever to engage
position P. On slopes you should first apply the
parking brake and then set the lever to P. This
makes it easier to remove the lever from posi-
tion P when starting.
If the driver door is opened and the lever is not
in position P, the vehicle could move. The fol-
lowing warning is displayed on the instrument
panel: Gear change: selector lever
in the drive position!. Additionally, a
buzzer will sound.
Stopping on a downhill
Always press the brake pedal firmly to prevent
the vehicle from moving; if necessary, apply the
handbrake ››› .
Do not accelerate while a range of gears is en-
gaged to prevent the car from rolling downhill
››› .
Hill starts
●
Apply the handbrake.
●
Once you have engaged a gear press the
accelerator carefully and disengage the hand-
brake.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Gear
selector positions on page119.
●
Never allow the brake to rub and do not use
the brake pedal too often or for long periods,
as the brakes can overheat. This reduces
the braking power, increases the braking dis-
tance or even causes a brake system fault.
●
If you have to stop on a hill, keep the vehi-
cle’s brakes applied with the brake pedal or
parking brake.
NOTICE
●
If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do not
attempt to stop it from rolling by depressing
the accelerator when a gear has been selec-
ted. This could cause overheating and dam-
age the automatic gearbox.
●
If you allow the vehicle to roll with the lever
in position N and the engine o, the auto-
matic gearbox will be damaged by lack of
lubrication.
●
In certain driving situations or
trac condi-
tions, the gears could overheat and be dam-
aged! If the warning lamp lights up, stop
the vehicle as soon as you can and wait for
the gearbox to cool ›››page122.
●
If the gearbox operates with the backup
programme, take the vehicle to a specialised
workshop and have the fault repaired with-
out delay.
Kick-down
The kick-down device provides maximum ac-
celeration when the gear selector lever is in the
positionsD, S or in Tiptronic mode.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed right
down, the automatic gearbox will shift down
to a lower gear, depending on road speed
and engine speed. This takes advantage of the
maximum acceleration of the vehicle ›››
.
The upshift to the next higher gear is delayed
until the engine reaches maximum rpm.
WARNING
Please note that if the road surface is slip-
pery or wet, the kickdown feature could
cause the driving wheels to spin, which could
result in skidding.
122
Driving
Inertia mode
The inertia mode allows you to travel certain
distances without using the accelerator, which
saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the inertia
mode to let the vehicle roll.
Activation of the inertia mode
Condition: lever in position D, slopes of
less than 12% and speeds between 20 and
130km/h (12 and 80mph).
●
Gently take your foot o the accelerator.
The indication will be shown on the instrument
panel , the engaged gear and current con-
sumption will disappear and the word Inertia
will appear.
The gears will automatically disengage and the
vehicle will roll freely, without the eect of the
engine brake. While the vehicle rolls, the engine
runs at idling speed.
Stopping inertia mode
●
Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.
To take advantage of the engine's inertia mode,
simply remove your foot from the accelerator.
Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged
section with less energy) and inertia discon-
nection (= shorter section without the need for
fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumption and
emission balance.
If the vehicle has
SEAT Drive Profile
›››page125, the inertia mode can be acti-
vated in Normal, Eco and Individual modes.
In Eco mode, it is activated whenever the op-
erating conditions are met, regardless of the
smoothness with which the foot is removed
from the accelerator.
WARNING
●
If the inertia mode has been switched on,
take into account, when approaching an ob-
stacle, that the vehicle will not decelerate in
the usual manner: risk of accident!
●
When using inertia mode while travelling
down hills, the vehicle can increase speed:
risk of accident!
●
If other users drive your vehicle, warn them
about inertia mode.
NOTICE
The driver message Inertia is only displayed
with the current consumption. In inertia mode
the gear will no longer be displayed (for ex-
ample D or E will appear instead of D7 or E7).
NOTICE
The inertia mode will be automatically dis-
connected on gradients steeper than 15%.
Note
In the case of the 1.6l TDI engine, the inertia
mode will only work with the Eco driving pro-
file.
Troubleshooting
The engine does not start
The indicator lamp lights up green.
The brake is not depressed, e.g. when trying to
change the gear selector lever.
●
To select a gear range, press the brake
pedal.
Selector lever lock
The control lamp flashes green.
The selector lever locking button is not en-
gaged. The vehicle is prevented from moving
forwards. Engage the selector lever lock.
Indications on the instrument cluster display:
Clutch
Clutch overheated! Please stop!
●
The clutch has overheated and could be
damaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox to
cool with the engine at idling speed and the
selector lever in position P. When the warning
lamp and the driver message switch o, have
Driving
123
DSG automatic transmission
the fault corrected by a specialised workshop
without delay. If they do not turn o, do not
continue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
Faults in the gearbox
Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehi-
cle and place the lever in the P
●
There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-
cle in a safe place and do not continue driving.
Seek specialist assistance.
Gearbox: System fault! You may
continue driving
●
Have the fault corrected by a specialised
workshop without delay.
Gearbox: System fault! You can
continue driving with restrictions.
Reverse gear disabled
●
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop
and have the fault repaired.
Gearbox: System fault! You can
continue driving in D until switch-
ing off the engine
●
Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek special-
ist assistance.
Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your
driving accordingly
●
Continue driving at moderate speeds. When
the warning lamp switches o, you can con-
tinue driving in a normal manner.
Gearbox: press the brake and
engage a gear again
●
If the warning was caused by the temperature
of the gearbox, this driver message will be dis-
played when the gearbox has cooled again.
Back-up programme
If all the gear positions are shown over a light
background on the instrument cluster, there is
a system fault and the automatic gearbox will
operate with the backup programme. It is still
possible to drive the vehicle, however, at low
speeds and within a selected range of gears.
Driving in reverse gear may not be possible.
Manual release of the selector lever
Fig.90 Selector lever: manual release from
position P.
In the event of a power failure when starting
(e.g. discharged battery), the lever will remain
locked in position P. To move it to position N
to move the vehicle, there is an emergency re-
lease device under the centre console, on the
right side. Releasing the selector lever requires
a certain degree of practical skill.
Removing the cover from the selector lever:
●
Connect the electronic parking brake ››› .
●
Carefully pull the corners of the selector lever
boot and twist it upwards over the lever handle.
Releasing the selector lever:
●
Using the flat part of a screwdriver, press the
yellow tab sideways and keep it pressed down
›››Fig.90.
●
Press the lock button on the selector
lever and move it to positionN.
●
After completing the emergency release, re-
attach the selector lever boot to the gearbox
console.
WARNING
Do not move the lever from position P if the
parking brake is not firmly engaged. If you
still think the car could move, press the brake
pedal. Danger! The vehicle could move in an
unforeseen way and cause an accident or
serious injury.
124
Driving
Driving on slopes
Hill driving assistant
✓ Valid for vehicles: with ESC
The hill driving assistant helps the driver to
move o and upward on a hill, both forwards
and backwards, when the vehicle is stationary.
The system maintains brake pressure for ap-
proximately two seconds after the foot is taken
o the brake pedal, to prevent the vehicle from
moving when it is started. During these 2 sec-
onds, the driver has enough time to release
the clutch pedal and accelerate without the
vehicle moving and without having to use the
handbrake, making start-up easier, more com-
fortable and safer.
These are the basic operation conditions:
●
being on a ramp or hill/slope,
●
driver door closed,
●
vehicle completely stationary,
●
engine running and foot on the brake,
●
having a gear engaged or being in neutral for
a manual gearbox, or with the selector lever at
positions D/S or R for an automatic gearbox.
WARNING
●
If you do not start the vehicle immediately
after taking your foot o the brake pedal,
the vehicle may roll back under certain con-
ditions. Depress the brake pedal or use the
hand brake immediately.
●
If the engine stalls, depress the brake
pedal or use the hand brake immediately.
●
When following a line of trac uphill, if you
want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back
when starting o, hold the brake pedal down
for a few seconds before starting o.
Note
The Ocial Service or a specialist workshop
can tell you if your vehicle is equipped with
this system.
downhill assistant
Downhill speed control is activated when the
gear lever is in the D/S position and the brake is
applied. An appropriate lower gear is engaged.
The assistant attempts to maintain the speed
at which the vehicle was travelling when the
brake was applied, within logical limits. It may
be necessary to correct the speed by pressing
the brake.
The assistant can only change down as far as
3rd gear. It is possible that on very steep slopes
you may have to switch to tiptronic mode and
thus manually change down to 2nd or 1st gear
to take advantage of engine braking and take
the load o the brake system.
Downhill speed control is deactivated as soon
as the road levels out again or you press the
accelerator pedal.
On vehicles with a cruise control system
›››page136, downhill speed control is activa-
ted when you set a cruising speed.
WARNING
The downhill speed control cannot defy the
laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be
maintained constant in all situations. Always
be prepared to use the brakes!
Steering
Information relating to dierent vehi-
cle processes.
To make the vehicle more dicult to steal, al-
ways lock the steering before leaving the it.
Steering
On vehicles with electromechanical steering,
the power steering automatically adjusts ac-
cording to the driving speed, the steering wheel
torque and the orientation of the wheels. The
power steering only works when the engine is
running.
Driving
125
SEAT Drive Profiles
If the power steering does not work properly or
does not work at all, you will have to use much
more strength than usual to turn the steering
wheel.
Progressive steering
Depending on the vehicle’s features, it may or
may not incorporate a progressive steering sys-
tem.
In city trac you do not need to turn so much
on parking, manoeuvring or in very tight turns.
On roads or motorway, progressive steering
transmits, for example, in bends, a sportier,
more direct and noticeably more dynamic driv-
ing sensation.
Steering assist
This help assists the driver in critical situations. It
recommends turning the steering wheel to per-
form a corrective manoeuvre (counter-steer-
ing), turning slightly to avoid skidding ››› .
WARNING
Steering assist helps the driver in critical sit-
uations. The driver is the person who has to
control the vehicle's steering at all times.
Troubleshooting
Steering fault
The warning lamp lights up red.
There is a fault in the power steering.
●
Stop driving! Seek specialist assistance.
●
Do not allow the vehicle to be towed on its
own wheels.
Steering fault
The control lamp lights up or flashes yellow.
The steering is stier or reacts more sensitively
than usual.
The control lamp lights up and remains lit:
●
Restart the engine and drive slowly for a short
distance. Contact a specialist workshop if the
control lamp remains on.
●
OR: the 12-volt battery was disconnected
and reconnected. Drive slowly for a short dis-
tance.
The control lamp flashes:
●
Turn the steering wheel slightly from one side
to the other.
●
Turn o the ignition and turn it on again.
●
Consider the warnings shown on the instru-
ment cluster display.
●
If the control lamp continues flashing after
the ignition has been switched on, do not con-
tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
SEAT Drive Profiles
Introduction
The driver can use the drive profiles to adapt
various features of the vehicle's systems to
the current driving situation, the desired driving
comfort and an economical driving style. Some
of the systems that can be adapted are the
suspension, steering, engine and air condition-
ing.
Depending on the vehicle’s equipment, various
drive profiles can be selected. The degree of in-
fluence of the vehicle's systems on the dierent
drive profiles depends on the vehicle’s equip-
ment.
Engine
Depending on the profile selected, the engine
responds more quickly or smoothly to the ac-
celerator being pressed. When the Eco profile is
selected, the Start-stop function is activated.
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
gear change timing is changed to put the
changes at higher or lower revolutions. The Eco
profile activates the Inertia function, thereby
reducing consumption. The rest of the driving
profiles will activate the inertia use function
when the selector lever is not in the S position,
depending on how the accelerator pedal is re-
leased ›››page122. When the vehicle is turned
on again, the function is activated by default to
reduce consumption.
126
Driving
With manual transmission, the Eco profile
changes the gear change recommendations to
facilitate more ecient driving.
“Dual Ride” suspension
The “Dual Ride” suspension sets the suspension
to comfortable in the Eco and Normal profiles,
and to sport in the Sport profile. In the Indi-
vidual profile the suspension can be switched
between Normal or Sport, depending on per-
sonal preference.
In the event of a fault in the “Dual Ride” sus-
pension, the following message is displayed on
the instrument panel screen: Fault: damping
adjustment.
Steering
Power steering becomes harder in the Sport
profile to enable a sportier driving style.
Air conditioning
In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate in
the Eco profile, especially restricting fuel con-
sumption.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The ACC’s acceleration and braking mode
varies according to the driving profile
›››page139.
Selecting a driving
profile
Fig.91 Next to the gearbox lever: MODE
button.
The drive profile can be selected when the igni-
tion is switched on and the vehicle is stationary
or moving ››› .
The desired profile can be selected by succes-
sively pressing the selection button ›››Fig.91.
Kick-down
The kick-down feature allows maximum accel-
eration ›››page120.
If the Eco profile has been selected in the SEAT
Drive Profile, and the accelerator is pressed
beyond a hard point, the engine power is auto-
matically controlled to give your vehicle maxi-
mum acceleration.
WARNING
Adjusting the driving
profile while driving can
distract attention from trac and cause ac-
cidents.
●
Always drive as carefully and responsibly
as possible.
Characteristics of driving profiles
An icon on the infotainment system display in-
forms about the active profile.
The button lighting comes on when the ac-
tive profile is anything other than Normal.
Driving pro-
file
Characteristics
Places the vehicle in a low state
of consumption, facilitating a
fuel-saving driving style that is re-
spectful to the environment.
Normal
Oers a balanced driving experi-
ence, suitable for everyday use.
Sport
Provides a complete dynamic
performance in the vehicle, ena-
bling the user a more sporty driv-
ing style.
Driving
127
Braking system
Driving pro-
file
Characteristics
Individual
It allows you to personalise the
configuration. The functions that
can be adjusted depend on the
equipment fitted in the vehicle.
WARNING
Your speed and driving style must always
be adjusted to visibility, weather, and trac
conditions.
Note
●
Regardless of the driving profile selected
when the ignition is switched o, all systems
will start up with the Normal profile. Use the
button to select another driving profile.
●
Your speed and driving style must always
be adjusted to visibility, weather, and trac
conditions.
●
Use of the Eco profile is not recommended
when driving with a trailer.
Braking system
Information about the brakes
During the first 200 to 300 km, new brake
pads do not provide maximum braking power
and still have to “settle” ›››
. When running
in the brake pads, the emergency braking
distance is longer than after they have been
run in. During the run-in, avoid sharp braking
and situations that place a lot of demand on
the brakes, e.g. driving too close to another ve-
hicle.
Brake pad wear depends to a large extent on
the conditions in which the vehicle is used, and
driving style. If the vehicle is frequently used in
city trac and for short distances, or for sporty
driving, brake pad thickness should be checked
regularly at a specialist workshop.
Driving with wet brakes, e.g. after driving
through water, in heavy rain or after washing
the vehicle, braking performance may be af-
fected by wet brake discs, or even frozen discs
in winter. The driver should be ready to brake
harder.
If the brake discs and pads have a layer
of salt on them, the braking performance is
reduced and the braking distance increases.
When driving on salted roads without braking
for some time, the layer of salt should be re-
moved by carefully applying the brakes a few
times ››› .
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the
brake pads increase if the vehicle is left unused
for a long time, if it is not driven for many kilo-
metres. If corrosion is present, it is recommen-
ded to clean the discs and pads by braking
hard several times while driving at high speed.
Make sure that you do not endanger any other
vehicles or road users ››› .
WARNING
Driving with worn brake pads or a defective
brake system can lead to accidents and seri-
ous injuries.
●
If you suspect that the brake pads are worn
or that the brake system is faulty, have the
brake pads checked immediately by a spe-
cialist workshop and replaced if they are
worn.
WARNING
The braking performance of new brake pads
is not optimal.
●
During the first 300 km, new brake pads do
not provide maximum braking power and still
have to “settle”. This can be counteracted by
applying more pressure to the brake pedal.
●
When brake pads are new, drive with extra
care to reduce the risk of accidents, serious
injury or loss of control of the vehicle.
●
Only perform hard braking to clean the
brake system when permitted by the trac
situation. Do not endanger the occupants of
other vehicles. Accident hazard!
●
When running in new brake pads, do not
drive too close to other vehicles or cause sit-
uations that would require the brakes to be
applied heavily.
128
Driving
WARNING
When the brakes overheat, their braking per-
formance drops and the braking distance in-
creases.
●
When driving downhill, particular demand
is placed on the brakes and they heat up
very quickly.
●
Before a long steep slope, reduce speed
and change down into a lower gear or range.
Therefore, using the engine brake relieves
the brakes.
●
If you wish to retrofit a front spoiler, inte-
gral trim or other accessories, ensure that
the air inlet around the brakes is not reduced,
as otherwise the brake system could over-
heat. Please also note the information on
brake fluid ›››page269.
WARNING
Wet, frozen or salt-covered brakes take lon-
ger to brake and increases the braking dis-
tance.
●
Test the brakes carefully.
●
Always dry the brakes and free them from
ice and salt by braking repeatedly, if permit-
ted by visibility, weather, road surface and
trac conditions.
WARNING
When braking manoeuvres are started auto-
matically, the brake pedal may move auto-
matically in the application direction. Do not
put your foot under the brake pedal. Risk of
injury!
Note
Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving your
foot on the pedal when it is not necessary
to brake. This can cause the brakes to over-
heat, resulting in increased brake travel and
wear. Please consider the important notes on
brake fluid ›››page269.
Note
Regularly check the thickness of the brake
pads visually through the holes in the rims
or from the underside of the vehicle. If nec-
essary, the wheels should be removed for
a more thorough inspection. SEAT recom-
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
Troubleshooting
Defect in the brake system
The warning lamp lights up red. A message
may also be displayed.
Stop driving!
●
Inform a specialist workshop and request a
brake system inspection.
Brake assist systems
Information relating to brake assist
systems
Brake assist systems can help the driver in crit-
ical driving or braking situations. The driver is
responsible for driving safely ›››
.
When the brake assist systems are regulating
the brakes, the brake pedal may move or make
noises. Even so, continue to brake with the nec-
essary force and control the trajectory of the
vehicle if necessary.
Depending on the equipment, the ESC and TCS
settings may be changed in the vehicle.
●
The ESC, ABS and TCS can only operate cor-
rectly if the four wheels are fitted with the stipu-
lated tyres ››› .
●
If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESC, TCS and
EDS also cease to function.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The ESC helps to reduce the risk of skidding
and to improve stability in certain driving situa-
tions ››› .
Driving
129
Brake assist systems
Traction control (TCS)
The TCS reduces the driving force on skidding
wheels and adapts this force to suit the road
surface conditions. The TCS facilitates starting,
acceleration and hill climbing ››› .
Electronic brake pressure distribution (EBV)
Electronic brake force distribution (EBV) regu-
lates the braking force between the front and
rear axles. Excessive braking of the rear axle is
avoided and the vehicle remains stable during
the braking operation.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS),
The ABS can prevent the wheels from locking
up under braking until shortly before the vehicle
comes to a stop, and helps the driver maintain
control of the steering and the vehicle ››› .
Brake assist (BAS)
Brake assist (BAS) can help to reduce the brak-
ing distance. Brake Assist increases the pressure
exerted by the driver when the brake pedal is
depressed quickly in an emergency.
Electronic dierential lock (EDS and XDS)
The EDS automatically brakes skidding wheels
and transmits the driving force to the other driv-
ing wheels.
The XDS improves traction by applying the
brakes to keep the vehicle in its lane.
Multi-collision brake
The multi-collision brake automatically triggers
braking if the airbag control unit detects a colli-
sion in the event of an accident.
Automatic braking requirements:
●
The driver is not pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Tractor-trailer sway mitigation
If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control the
following: tractor-trailers tend to sway. When
the swaying of the trailer is felt by the vehicle
and detected by the ESC, it will automatically
brake the towing vehicle within the limits of the
system and mitigate the sway. Tractor-trailer
sway mitigation is not available in all countries
›››page235.
WARNING
Smart brake assist technology cannot over-
come the limits imposed by the laws of phys-
ics and only works within the limits of the sys-
tems. Driving at high speed on icy, slippery
or wed road surfaces can cause a loss of
control of the vehicle and serious injury to
the driver and passengers.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
trac conditions. Never take any risk that
compromises safety.
●
Brake assist systems cannot prevent an ac-
cident if you are driving too close to other
vehicles.
●
Always use suitable tyres. Driving stability
depends on tyre grip.
WARNING
The
eciency of the ESC can be significantly
reduced if components or systems that af-
fect the driving dynamics are not properly
maintained or are not working properly. This
can particularly occur if changes are made
to the suspension or unauthorised rim/tyre
combinations are used.
●
Ensure that vehicle conversions and modi-
fications are only made by specialised work-
shops.
●
Always use suitable tyres. Driving stability
depends on tyre grip.
WARNING
When driving without a brake servo or with
restricted brake servo functions, the braking
distance can increase considerably and can
cause accidents and serious injuries.
●
If the brake servo is not working, the brake
pedal has to be pressed harder, as the brak-
ing distance increases due to the lack of as-
sistance from the servo brake.
130
Driving
Connecting and disconnecting the
ESC and TCS
The ESC is switched on automatically when the
engine is started, and only works when the en-
gine is running and includes the ABS, EDS and
TCS systems.
The TCS function should only be switched o in
situations in which traction is insucient.
Depending on the finishes and versions, there is
the possibility of disconnecting only the TCS or
activating the ESC in “Sport” mode.
Disconnecting and connecting the TCS
●
The TCS can be activated or deactivated
in the infotainment system using the function
button > Driver assistance > ESC Menu
›››page34.
When the TC is switched o, the control lamp
lights up on the instrument cluster.
Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in
“Sport” mode
●
The ECS in “Sport” mode can be activated
or deactivated in the infotainment system using
the function button > Driver assistance >
ESC Menu ›››page34.
When “Sport” mode is connected, the interven-
tions of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle, and the
traction control (TCS) interventions are limited.
In vehicles with 4-wheel drive, the TCS is dis-
connected completely . In addition, the control
lamp lights up on the instrument cluster.
WARNING
The ESC Sport mode should be activated
only when trac conditions and the ability
of the driver allow it. Danger of skidding!
●
With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising
function will be limited to allow for a sportier
drive. The vehicle may skid.
Note
If the TCS is disconnected or “Sport” mode
is selected, the cruise control system will be
switched o.
Troubleshooting
The ABS does not work properly or does
not work at all
The control lamp switches on yellow.
●
Contact a specialised workshop. The vehi-
cle’s brakes still work without the ABS.
The ESC or TCS is regulating
The control lamp flashes yellow.
ESC fault
The control lamp switches on yellow. The ESC
has been switched o.
There is a fault or defect.
●
Turn o the ignition and turn it on again.
●
If possible, drive for a short distance at 15-20
km/h (9-12 mph).
●
If the control lamp is still on, go to a speci-
alised workshop.
The brake assist systems make noises
When the described brake assist systems inter-
vene, you may hear noises.
WARNING
●
When the ignition is switched on, the sta-
tus of the brake system and the brake assist
functions are automatically checked. The
control lamps on the instrument cluster light
up briefly and then go out. Any indicator
lamp that remains on indicates a fault. Seek
qualified technical assistance immediately.
●
If the brake system warning light comes
on together with the control lamp, the ABS
regulation function may not work and the
rear wheels may lock relatively quickly when
braking. This can lead to loss of control of
the vehicle! If possible, slow down and drive
slowly and carefully to the nearest specialist
workshop to have the brake system inspec-
ted. During this journey, avoid heavy braking
and any sudden manoeuvres.
Driving
131
Brake assist systems
●
If the control lamp does not go out, or
comes on while driving, it means that the ABS
is not working properly. The vehicle can only
be stopped using normal braking (without
ABS). In this case the protective ABS func-
tion will not be available. Go to a specialised
workshop as soon as possible.
132
Assistant systems
Assistant systems
General notes
Safety advice
WARNING
●
Responsibility for driving rests with the
driver at all times. The drive assist systems
are not a replacement for driver attention.
Focus all your attention on driving and be
prepared to intervene at all times.
●
Use the drive assist systems only when
conditions allow. The driving style must al-
ways be suitable for the weather, visibility,
road and trac conditions.
●
In order for drive assist systems to react
correctly, sensors and cameras must oper-
ate without limitations. Please read the notes
on sensors and cameras in this chapter.
Note
●
Keep in mind the specific rules of each
country, especially when it comes to driving,
formation of an emergency corridor, braking
distance, speed, parking position, wheel po-
sition, etc. The driver is solely responsible for
always complying with the specific regula-
tions of each country.
●
The area in front of and around the radar
sensor should not be covered with adhesives,
additional headlights or similar items, as this
could have a negative impact on the oper-
ation of the assistants. If the vehicle is not
properly repaired or structural modifications
are made to it, the operation of the assistants
may be aected.
●
The repair and adjustment of sensors and
cameras requires special knowledge and
tools. It is recommended to visit a SEAT deal-
ership for this purpose.
System limits
WARNING
●
Drive assist systems can not overcome the
laws of physics. Depending on the circum-
stances, a collision may not be avoidable.
●
Warnings, notices and indicator lamps
may not be displayed on time, or may be
displayed incorrectly, e.g. if a vehicle ap-
proaches too quickly.
●
Corrective interventions by drive assist
systems (e.g. interventions in the steering or
brakes) may be insucient or may never oc-
cur, depending on the circumstances. As a
driver, you must be prepared to act at all
times.
Note
●
Due to the system's detection limits in
the surroundings, the systems may not give
warnings or intervene on time, or they might
do so even if it is not desired. In addition, the
auxiliary systems may incorrectly interpret a
manoeuvre and, as a result, warn the driver in
an unexpected manner.
●
When the towing mode is selected, some
assist systems may react with limitations, in
an unusual way or may not be available.
Keep in mind the instructions relating to the
towing mode.
Button for the assistant systems
Fig.92 On the turn light and main beam lever:
key for driver assistance systems (depending on
the version).
Assistant systems
133
Drive assist sensors and cameras
Fig.93 Left side of the multifunction steering
wheel: button for driver assistance systems
(depending on the version).
Depending on the equipment, the button for the
driver assistance systems is located on the turn
signal and main beam lever or on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel. This button can be used
to switch the driver assistance systems in the
Assistants menu on and o.
●
Press the button to open the Assis-
tants menu.
●
Select the assistance system in question and
turn it o or on. A mark indicates that assistant
system is switched on.
●
Next, confirm the selection by pressing the
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The assistant systems can also be switched on
and o in the infotainment system, in the vehi-
cle settings menu ›››page34.
Drive assist sensors and
cameras
Front radar
Fig.94 On the front bumper: radar sensor.
Fig.95 Detection area.
A radar sensor may be
fitted to the front
bumper of the vehicle ›››Fig.94. The front
radar detects any objects in its detection zone
›››Fig.95 and provides support for the follow-
ing functions:
●
Front Assist ›››page144.
●
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
›››page139.
The radar can have a range of up to 120m
(400ft) depending on road and weather condi-
tions.
WARNING
●
The visibility of the radar sensor can be
impaired by dirt or environmental influences
such as rain, fog, snow, mud, dust, insects
etc. In this case the Front Assist and ACC
functions may stop working. The instrument
panel displays the following message: No
sensor vision! And the Front Assist un-
available or ACC unavailable warning lights
come on.
●
Clean the sensor area on the bumper as
indicated in ›››page301, Cleaning the
exterior. When the radar sensor starts cor-
rectly detecting again, the message disap-
pears from the screen and the functions be-
come available again.
134
Assistant systems
NOTICE
●
If the radar sensor is dirty or poorly adjus-
ted, the Front Assist system may give unnec-
essary warnings and apply the brakes inap-
propriately.
●
The operation of the radar can be aected
by strong reflections of the emitted signal.
This may occur, for example, in an enclosed
car park or due to the presence of metallic
objects (e.g. guard rails or sheets used in
road works).
●
The sensor may not be adjusted correctly
if it receives an impact. This may compro-
mise the system's ecacy or disconnect it. If
you have the feeling that the radar sensor is
damaged or adjusted incorrectly, switch o
the Front Assist and ACC functions to avoid
any damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.
Front camera
Fig.96 On the windscreen: field of vision of
the Lane Assist system camera.
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may
be fitted with a front camera on the front wind-
screen. This camera detects lane boundaries
(lines) to provide support for the following func-
tions:
●
Lane Assist ›››page148.
●
Travel Assist ›››page150.
NOTICE
To avoid aecting the operation of the sys-
tems, take the following points into consider-
ation:
●
Clean the field of vision of the camera reg-
ularly and make sure it is free of snow and
ice.
●
Do not cover the field of vision of the cam-
era.
●
Check that the windscreen is not damaged
in the area of the camera's field of vision.
Rear radar
Fig.97 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor
areas.
Assistant systems
135
Drive assist sensors and cameras
Fig.98 Sensor detection zones.
The radar sensors are located on the left and
right of the bumper and are not visible from the
outside ›››Fig.97. The sensors monitor both
the blind spot and trac behind the vehicle
›››Fig.98.
They support the following functions:
●
Lane departure warning (Side Assist)
›››page152.
●
Rear cross trac alert (RCTA) ›››page173.
Automatic deactivation of supported func-
tions
The rear radar sensors deactivate automati-
cally when, among other reasons, one of the
sensors is detected to be permanently covered.
This may be the case if, for example, there is a
layer of snow or ice over one of the sensors.
The relevant text message will appear in the
instrument panel display.
Indicator lamps
Side Assist (lane change assistance sys-
tem) function not available
Rear cross trac alert (RCTA) function
not available.
NOTICE
●
The radar sensors on the rear bumper may
be damaged or shifted in the event of a colli-
sion, for example, when entering or exiting a
parking space. This may result in the system
disconnecting itself, or at least possibly hav-
ing its functionality diminished.
●
In order to ensure that the radar sensors
work properly, keep the rear bumper free of
snow and ice and do not cover it.
●
The rear bumper should only be painted
with paint authorised by SEAT. The lane de-
parture warning's functions may be limited or
work incorrectly if other paints are used.
●
The visibility of radar sensors may be af-
fected due to leaves, snow, strong haze or
dirt, among others. Clean the area in front of
the sensors.
●
Never use auto lane changing or the rear
cross trac alert if the radar sensors are
dirty.
●
Radar operation may also be aected if
objects such as bicycle racks or luggage
racks interfere with the visibility of the ra-
dars.
Ultrasound sensors
The bumpers are fitted with ultrasound sensors
to perform the following functions:
●
Park Assist ›››page164.
●
Park assist plus ›››page159.
●
Rear park assist ›››page162.
NOTICE
●
Damage to the radiator grille, bumper,
wheel arch and vehicle underbody can mod-
ify the orientation of the sensors. This can af-
fect the parking aid function. Have the func-
tion checked by a specialised workshop.
●
A number plate or number plate holder
with dimensions that exceed the space for
the number plate, or a cured or deformed
number plate can cause false detections or a
loss of visibility for the sensors.
Note
●
In order to guarantee good operation, keep
the sensors clean, free of snow and ice, and
do not cover them with stickers or other ob-
jects.
●
If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,
unless you do so very briefly, and always
keep a distance of more than 10 cm away.
136
Assistant systems
●
Fitting certain accessories to the front of
the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-
vertising, may interfere with the operation of
the Park Assist.
Rear camera
Fig.99 On the rear lid handle: location of the
rear assist camera.
A camera installed in the rear lid handle assists
the driver with reverse parking or manoeuvring.
This provides support to the following function:
●
Rear View Camera ›››page171.
WARNING
Fitting a number plate frame may interfere
with the view shown on the screen, as it may
reduce the camera’s field of vision.
NOTICE
●
In order to guarantee good system opera-
tion, keep the cameras clean, free of snow or
ice, and do not cover them with stickers or
other objects.
●
Never use abrasive cleaning products to
clean the camera lens.
●
Do not use hot or warm water to remove
ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so
could damage the camera.
Cruise control system
Introduction
The cruise control system (GRA) helps maintain
a constant speed set by you.
Speed range
The cruise control system is available when
driving in forward gear at a speed of over ap-
prox. 20km/h (15mph).
Temporarily switching o the cruise control
The saved speed can be exceeded at any time,
e.g. for overtaking. The cruise control is suspen-
ded during acceleration and is then resumed
with the saved speed.
Status display
When the cruise control system is switched on,
the instrument cluster display shows the saved
speed and the system status:
It lights up grey.
The cruise control system is switched on,
but regulation is not active.
It lights up green.
The cruise control system is switched on
and regulation is active.
If there is no speed saved, the instrument clus-
ter display shows ––– instead of speed.
Changing gears
As soon as the clutch pedal is depressed, regu-
lation is suspended and resumes once the gear
change has been made.
WARNING
If it is impossible to drive with sucient brak-
ing distance and at a constant speed, using
the cruise control system may cause acci-
dents and serious injuries may occur.
●
Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is
bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in
slippery circumstances (such as snow, ice,
rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.
●
Only use the cruise control system on
paved roads with a firm surface.
Assistant systems
137
Cruise control system
●
Adapt your speed and safety distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
the visibility, weather, road and trac condi-
tions.
●
After use, always switch o the speed lim-
iter to prevent the speed being regulated
against your wishes.
●
It is dangerous to use a set speed which
is too high for the prevailing road, trac or
weather conditions.
Operating the cruise control
Fig.100 On the multifunction steering wheel:
cruise control operation buttons.
Connecting
●
Press the button.
There is no speed saved and regulation is not
yet operating.
Start regulation
●
While driving, press the button .
The cruise control system saves and regulates
the current speed.
Adjusting the speed
While the GRA is set, the stored speed can be
adjusted:
+ 1 km/h (1mph)
- 1 km/h (1mph)
+ 10 km/h (5mph)
- 10 km/h (5mph)
The cruise control system only operates the ac-
celeration, it does not brake the vehicle.
Interrupting the adjustment
●
Briefly press the button or press the brake
pedal.
The speed is stored.
Reinstating the cruise control
●
Press the button.
The cruise control system resumes the saved
speed and regulates it.
Switching o
●
Press and hold the button .
The cruise control system switches
o and the
saved speed is deleted.
Switching o the speed limiter
●
Press the button.
●
Select the speed limiter on the instrument
cluster display.
The cruise control system is switched o.
Troubleshooting
Cruise control fault
The control lamp switches on yellow.
Abnormal operation. Switch o the cruise con-
trol system and take the vehicle to a specialist
workshop.
The adjustment is interrupted unexpectedly
●
If the clutch pedal is pressed for a long time.
●
The vehicle has exceeded the saved speed
for a long time.
●
No forward gear has been selected.
●
A brake assistance system has intervened,
e.g. TCS or ESC.
●
Front Assist has braked the vehicle.
●
If the fault continues, disconnect the Emer-
gency Assist and consult a specialised work-
shop.
138
Assistant systems
Speed limiter
Introduction
The speed limited helps the driver not to ex-
ceed a set speed.
Speed range
The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a pro-
grammed speed, from 30km/h (20mph) ap-
prox. and faster.
By selecting the speed limiter
The speed limitation can be interrupted at any
time by depressing the accelerator pedal fully,
beyond the point of resistance. As soon as the
saved speed is exceeded, the green indicator
light flashes and an audible warning signal may
sound. The speed is stored.
The limiter is reactivated automatically after re-
turning to less than the set speed.
Status display
When the speed limiter is switched on, the
instrument cluster display shows the saved
speed and the system status:
It lights up grey
The speed limiter is switched on but reg-
ulation is not active.
Lights up green
The speed limiter is switched on and ac-
tive.
WARNING
After use, always switch o the speed limiter
to prevent the speed being regulated against
your wishes.
●
The speed limiter does not relieve the
driver of their responsibility to drive at the
appropriate speed. Do not drive at high
speed if not necessary.
●
Using the speed limiter under adverse
weather conditions is dangerous and can
cause serious accidents, e.g. aquaplaning,
snow, ice, leaves, etc. Only use the speed
limiter when the status of the road and the
weather conditions allow it.
Operating the speed limiter
Fig.101 On the multifunction steering wheel:
buttons to control the speed limiter.
Connecting
●
Press the button.
It does not take eect yet.
Start regulation
●
While driving, press the button .
The current speed is saved as a limit speed.
Adjusting the speed
The programmed speed can be set:
+ 1 km/h (1mph)
- 1 km/h (1mph)
+ 10 km/h (5mph)
- 10 km/h (5mph)
Assistant systems
139
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control
Interrupting the adjustment
●
Press the button.
The speed is stored.
Reinstating the cruise control
●
Press the button.
The limiter will re-activate as soon as the vehi-
cle is moving at a speed lower than the saved
one.
Switching o
●
Press and hold the button .
The speed limiter switches o and the speed is
deleted.
Switch to another driver assistance system
●
Press the button.
●
Observe the corresponding message on the
instrument cluster display. The speed limiter is
switched o.
Troubleshooting
The speed limiter is not available
The control lamp switches on yellow.
●
Malfunctions Switch o the speed limiter and
go to a specialist workshop.
The adjustment is interrupted unexpectedly
●
You have switched o the Electronic Stabiliza-
tion Control (ESC).
●
The brakes have overheated. Wait for the
brakes to cool down and check the operation
again.
●
If the fault continues, consult a specialised
workshop.
For safety reasons, the speed limiter only
switches o fully whenever the driver stops
pressing the accelerator pedal or switches the
system o manually.
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol
Introduction
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) maintains a
constant speed set by the driver. When ap-
proaching another vehicle in front, the ACC de-
tects it and adapts the speed automatically,
maintaining a distance set by the driver.
Does my vehicle have ACC?
Your vehicle has ACC if it has the ACC func-
tion buttons on the multifunction steering wheel
›››page79, or if it has the configuration menu
in the infotainment system.
Speed range
ACC regulates at speeds between 30 and
210km/h (20 and 130mph).
If the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gear-
box, the ACC can bring the vehicle to a stand-
still if a vehicle in front of it stops.
If your vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox,
you must pay attention to speed and gear
changes. The ACC is deactivated if the speed is
too low (less than 30 km/h) of the engine RPM
is too low or high.
Driving with ACC
You can override the ACC at any time. Braking
interrupts the ACC. If you accelerate, regulation
is interrupted during acceleration and then re-
sumed.
Driver intervention prompt
ACC is subject to certain limitations inher-
ent to the system. This means that the
driver will have to control the speed and
distance from other vehicles in certain sit-
uations. In this case, the instrument cluster
display will tell you to intervene by ap-
plying the brake, and an audio warning will
be played.
Radar sensors
The ACC uses the front radar technology. Read
its maintenance instructions and information
about its limitations ›››page132.
140
Assistant systems
1
2
WARNING
The ACC’s technology cannot overcome the
system's inherent limitations or change the
laws of physics. If used negligently or invol-
untarily, it may cause serious accidents and
injuries. The system is not a replacement for
driver awareness.
●
Always be prepared to brake or accelerate.
●
If you press the accelerator pedal the ACC
will stop working. Therefore, it will not brake
or request any braking intervention.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to the
vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-
bility, weather, road and trac conditions.
●
Do not use the ACC in poor visibility, or on
roads that are steep, with lots of curves or
slippery.
●
Never use ACC when driving o-road or on
unpaved roads.
●
The system does not react in time to sta-
tionary obstacles (such as a trac jam
queue). React soon enough to avoid a haz-
ardous situation.
●
The system does not react to people, an-
imals or vehicles that are crossing or ap-
proaching in the opposite direction.
●
If you are driving with a spare wheel fitted,
the ACC system could automatically switch
o. Switch o the system when starting o.
●
Brake immediately if the ACC does not
slow down enough.
●
Brake immediately when a driver interven-
tion instruction is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster screen.
●
If the vehicle continues to move involuntar-
ily after a driver intervention prompt, brake
the vehicle.
Note
If the ACC does not work as described in
this chapter, do not use it until it has been
checked by a specialised workshop. Visiting
a SEAT dealership is recommended.
ACC operation
Fig.102 On the instrument panel display: ACC
active.
Fig.103 On the multifunction steering wheel:
buttons for operating the ACC.
›››Fig.102
Vehicle ahead detected. It will light up if the
distance to the vehicle is adjusted.
Selected distance level 2.
This information can be displayed on the cen-
tral panel of the Assistants view, or in the left
hand information profile ›››page16. If these
views are not selected, it will be automatically
displayed in the lower central part of the instru-
ment cluster in a simplified manner.
The set speed will be displayed next to the
function status indicator.
Connecting
●
Press the button on the multifunction
steering wheel ›››Fig.103.
The ACC does not regulate anything yet
(standby).
Assistant systems
141
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control
Start regulation
Activating the ACC system also automatically
activates the ESC and traction control (TCS).
●
To start regulation, press the button
›››Fig.103.
The ACC sets the current speed, or the closest
speed within the valid range (30-210 km/h), as
the cruise speed.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: the gear
lever must be in the D, S or M.
With manual transmission: the gear lever must
be in any gear except first and reverse, and the
speed must be higher than approximately 30
km/h (18 mph).
Depending on the driving situation, the follow-
ing indicator lamps come on:
Lights up green
ACC connected, no vehicle detected in
front.
Lights up green
ACC connected, vehicle detected in
front.
When the ACC is in standby, the indicator
lamps light up grey.
Setting speed
To program the speed, press the
or
›››Fig.103 buttons to the desired speed. The
speed is adjusted at intervals of 10 km/h (5
mph).
While the ACC is active, you can press the
button to increase the desired speed by 1 km/h
(1 mph). You can then press to decrease it
by 1 km/h (1 mph).
Setting your distance level
The distance can be set to one of five levels,
from very short to very long:
●
Press the button and then the button or
›››Fig.103.
●
Alternatively, press the button as many
times as necessary to set the desired distance.
Keep in mind each country’s regulations on
minimum braking distances.
Suspend regulation (standby)
●
Briefly press the button ›››Fig.103 or
press the brake pedal.
The ACC indicator lamp is grey; the speed and
distance are saved.
If the ESC or TCS is switched o, the ACC is
automatically interrupted.
Reinstating the cruise control
●
Press the button. The ACC regulates to
the last speed and distance setting.
●
OR: Press the button to regulate to the
current speed.
Switching
o
●
Press and hold the button . The set speed is
cleared.
Exceeding the speed regulated by the ACC
While driving with the ACC switched on, the
driver can increase speed by pressing the ac-
celerator pedal. ACC regulation is suspended
until you release the accelerator pedal ››› .
Set the default distance setting
In the Infotainment system, you can pre-select
the distance level when connecting the ACC
from:
●
Very short, Short, Medium, Long and Very long
using the Infotainment system: Driver assis-
tance > ACC ›››page34.
Changing the driving profile
In vehicles with the SEAT Drive Profile, the se-
lected driving profile can have an influence on
the ACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour
›››page125.
In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be-
haviour of the ACC can also be aected if any
of the following drive profiles are selected in
the infotainment system in Drive assist. ACC
settings will be the same as those in the SEAT
Drive Profile.
142
Assistant systems
1)
Or on the left, in countries that drive on the left hand side of the road.
WARNING
Before driving o, check that the road is
clear. The radar sensor may not detect ob-
stacles on the road. This could cause an ac-
cident and serious injuries. If necessary, ap-
ply the brake.
NOTICE
If you increase speed using the accelerator
pedal, the ACC may not be able to safely
adjust the speed of the distance due to the
limitations of the system.
●
Be prepared to react if required by the sit-
uation.
Special driving situations
Fig.104 On the instrument panel display: ACC
active, vehicle detected on the left.
Be aware of the limitations and warnings
described at the beginning of this chapter
›››page139, Introduction.
Avoid undertaking on the right
1)
If a vehicle is detected in the left lane that is
travelling at a speed slower than that set by the
driver, it will brake the vehicle within the comfort
limits of the system to avoid passing it on the
right ›››Fig.104.
You can cancel this regulation by changing the
set speed or by pressing the accelerator pedal.
The function works at speeds over 80km/h
(50mph). It may not be available in certain
countries.
Overtaking
When the turn signal is switched on for over-
taking, the ACC reduces the distance from the
vehicle in front to help with the overtaking ma-
noeuvre. The set cruising speed will not be ex-
ceeded.
The function works at speeds over 80km/h
(50mph). It may not be available in certain
countries.
Stop&Go function
Valid for vehicles with an automatic gearbox
The ACC can bring the vehicle to a standstill (0
km/h) if the vehicle in front stops.
The ACC remains active and the message ACC
ready to start is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster for a few seconds. During this time,
the vehicle will move o again if the vehicle in
front moves forwards.
If the vehicle in front does not move o, the ve-
hicle can be kept at a standstill with the status
ACC ready to start by pressing the brake.
The system can only keep the car stopped for
a few seconds. After this, the Brake warning
will be displayed and an audio warning will be
played. Press the brake pedal. The vehicle may
start moving forward if you do not do this Acci-
dent hazard!
The ACC is deactivated while stopped in the
following cases:
●
If the vehicle stops for several minutes.
●
If a door is opened.
WARNING
If the message ACC ready to start is
displayed on the instrument cluster display
and the vehicle in front moves o, your vehi-
cle will move o automatically. In this case,
any obstacles in the road may not be detec-
ted. This may cause serious accidents and
injuries.
●
Always check the road before moving o,
and apply the vehicle brakes yourself if nec-
essary.
Assistant systems
143
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control
ACC system limitations
Fig.105 Vehicle on a bend. Motorcyclist
ahead, out of range of the radar sensor.
Fig.106 Vehicle changing lanes. One
vehicle turning and another stationary.
The limits of the ACC system mean that it is not
appropriate in all situations.
SEAT does not recommend using the function in
the following cases ››› :
●
Heavy rain, snow or fog.
●
When going through tunnels.
●
In sections with roadworks.
●
On routes with curves, e.g. on mountain roads.
●
On o-road routes.
●
In covered car parks.
●
On roads with embedded metal objects such
as train or tram tracks.
●
On roads with loose gravel.
Pay special attention when using ACC in the
following situations:
On curves
The ACC may not detect the vehicle in front
on a curve, or may regulate the distance from
vehicles in other lanes ›››Fig.105 .
Vehicles outside the sensor zone
In the following situations the ACC may not re-
act, or may react slowly or inappropriately:
●
Vehicles that are not aligned while driving or
that are outside the sensor's detection area,
such as motorcycles ›››Fig.105 .
●
Vehicles that move into your lane, a short dis-
tance from your vehicle ›››Fig.106 .
●
Vehicles with loads or accessories that pro-
trude from the sides, rear or roof.
Objects that are not detected
The ACC function only detects and reacts to
vehicles moving in the same direction. There-
fore it does not detect:
●
People
●
Animals
●
Vehicles travelling in the opposite direction or
crossing the road.
●
Other stationary obstacles
144
Assistant systems
The ACC does not react to stationary vehicles.
If, for example, a vehicle detected by the ACC
turns or moves over and there is a stationary
vehicle in front of it, the ACC will not react to
the second vehicle ›››Fig.106 .
WARNING
Using the ACC in the above situations can
cause serious accidents and injuries, and
you could break the law.
Troubleshooting
ACC not available
The indicator lamp lights up yellow:
●
The radar sensor is dirty or adjusted in-
correctly. Take into account the warnings
described at the beginning of this chapter
›››page133
●
There is a fault or a defect. Turn o the vehi-
cle's ignition and turn it on again after a few
minutes.
●
If the problem persists, consult a specialised
workshop.
The ACC does not work as expected
●
Make sure that the conditions are met for the
radar sensor to operate properly ›››page133.
●
If the brakes overheat, regulation stops au-
tomatically. Wait for them to cool down and
check the operation again.
●
Unusual noises during automatic ACC brak-
ing are normal and do not indicate any anoma-
lies.
The following conditions may lead the ACC
not to react:
●
The accelerator or brake is depressed.
●
No gear is engaged or the vehicle is in gear R.
●
The vehicle is reversing.
●
ESC is operating.
●
The driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.
●
The RPM is too high or too low.
●
A vehicle brake light is faulty.
●
A trailer brake light is faulty.
●
The parking brake is applied.
●
Driving on an excessive slope.
emergency brake assis-
tance system (Front Assist)
Introduction
The objective of the system is to prevent head-
on collisions against objects that may be in the
vehicle’s path or minimise the consequences of
such impacts.
The function is designed to avoid collisions
against:
●
Parked vehicles.
●
Vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists that are
travelling in the same lane and direction.
●
Pedestrians and cyclists who transversely
cross the vehicle path.
Front Assist detects the aforementioned objects
using a radar sensor at the front of the vehicle
›››page133.
Depending on several factors and how critical
the situation is, the system operates in a stag-
gered manner.
First informing the driver, and if there is no or
insucient reaction, then activating an autono-
mous emergency braking as indicated by the
conditions that will be discussed in the follow-
ing points.
The system operation can be cancelled if the
clutch pedal is pressed or the steering wheel is
turned firmly.
Assistant systems
145
emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)
WARNING
●
Front Assist is a driving assistance function
that can never replace the driver’s attention.
●
Front Assist cannot change the laws of
physics or replace the driver in terms of
keeping control of the vehicle and reacting
to a possible emergency situation.
●
Following a Front Assist emergency warn-
ing, pay immediate attention to the situation
and try to avoid the collision where appropri-
ate.
●
Always adapt your speed and distance
away from the vehicle in front of you at
all times to suit visibility, weather, road and
trac conditions.
●
The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-
dents and serious injuries.
●
The Front Assist does not react to animals
or vehicles crossing your path or approach-
ing head-on down the same lane.
●
The Front Assist does not react to pedes-
trians walking head-on in the same lane.
●
If the Front Assist does not work as descri-
bed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly inter-
venes unnecessarily), switch it o. Have the
system checked by a specialised workshop.
SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealer-
ship.
Note
When Front Assist is connected, the indica-
tions of other functions on the screen may be
hidden.
Warning levels and brake assist
Fig.107 On the instrument panel display:
advance warning indications.
Front Assist is active from 5km/h (3mph). De-
pending on dierent conditions (vehicle speed,
speed and type of object recognised, etc.),
some of the stages described below are omit-
ted to optimise the performance of the system.
Safety distance warning
If the system detects that you are driving too
close to the vehicle in front, it will warn the
driver with this indication on the instrument
panel display
.
The timing of the warning varies depending
on driver behaviour, vehicle speed and relative
speed between both.
Advance warning
If the system detects a possible collision with
the vehicle in front, it alerts the driver by means
of an audible warning and an indication on the
instrument panel display ›››Fig.107.
The warning moment varies depending on the
trac situation and driver behaviour. At the
same time, the vehicle will prepare for a possi-
ble emergency braking ›››page146.
When Front Assist is connected, the indications
of other functions on the screen may be hidden.
Critical warning
If the driver fails to react to the advance warn-
ing, the system may actively intervene in the
brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn the
driver of the imminent danger of a collision.
Automatic braking
If the driver also fails to react to the critical
warning, the system may initiate independent
emergency braking by progressively increasing
the braking in accordance with the criticality of
the situation.
146
Assistant systems
Driver emergency braking assistance sys-
tem
If the driver, after the critical warning, starts
braking but the system detects that the brake
is not being applied with sucient force, the
braking intensity will be increased.
WARNING
●
The system cannot prevent a collision, al-
though it can significantly minimise the con-
sequences by reducing the speed and the
force of the impact.
●
When the Front Assist causes a braking, the
brake pedal is “harder”.
●
Automatic interventions by the Front Assist
on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing
the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel.
●
The Front Assist may brake the vehicle until
it stops completely. However, the brake sys-
tem does not halt the vehicle permanently.
Use the foot brake!
System limitations
Fig.108 On the instrument cluster screen:
indication of the system’s initial self-calibration.
Front Assist has certain limitations inherent to
the system. Thus, in certain circumstances,
some of the reactions may be inappropriate
from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention
in order to intervene if necessary.
The following conditions may cause the
Front Assist not to react or to do so too late:
●
In the first few instants of driving after switch-
ing on the ignition, due to the system’s initial
auto-calibration. During this period, a status
icon ›››Fig.108 is displayed.
Unrecognised objects
●
Loads and accessories of other vehicles that
protrude over the sides, backwards or over the
top.
●
If there are metal objects, e.g. guard rails or
sheets used in road works.
●
Other vehicles crossing the vehicle’s path.
●
Misaligned vehicles.
●
Narrow vehicles such as motorcycles.
●
Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-
tion.
Operating limitations
●
If the radar sensor is disabled or faulty.
●
If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
●
On taking tight bends or complex paths.
●
When pressing the accelerator firmly or at full
throttle.
●
If the TCS has been disconnected or the ESC
is activated in Sport mode ›››page130.
●
If the ESC is adjusting or is broken.
●
If several brake lights of the vehicle or electri-
cally connected trailer are damaged.
●
If the vehicle is reversing.
●
In case of snow or heavy rain.
●
In complex driving situations (such as trac
islands, cut-through roundabouts, etc), Front
Assist may issue warnings and intervene in
braking in an unnecessary manner.
Assistant systems
147
emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)
For more details, see section ›››page132.
Manual activation and deactivation
of the function
Fig.109 On the screen of the instrument panel
Front Assist switched o message.
The Front Assist is active whenever the ignition
is switched on.
When the Front Assist is disabled, so too are
the advance warning and the distance warning
functions. SEAT recommends leaving the Front
Assist activated except in the situations presen-
ted in ›››page147.
Switching the Front Assist on and o
With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist
can be deactivated or activated as follows:
●
In the infotainment system: press the function
button Driver assistance > Front Assist
›››page34.
●
OR: Select the corresponding menu option
using the button for the assistants systems
›››page132.
When Front Assist is deactivated, the indication
will be displayed on the instrument cluster.
Each time the ignition is switched on, the Front
Assist will reappear as active.
Activating or deactivating the pre-warning
(advance warning)
The advance warning can be activated or de-
activated in the infotainment system using the
function button Driver assistance > Front
Assist ›››page34.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends keeping advance warning
active.
Depending on the vehicle’s infotainment system
the advance warning function may be adap-
ted in the following modes:
●
Advance
●
Medium
●
Delayed
●
Deactivated
SEAT recommends driving with the function in
“Medium” mode.
Switching distance warning on and
o
The distance warning can be activated or de-
activated in the infotainment system using the
function button Driver assistance > Front
Assist ›››page34.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends keeping the distance warn-
ing active.
Deactivating Front Assist temporarily in the
following situations
In the following situations the Front Assist should
be deactivated due to the system's limitations:
●
When the vehicle is to be towed.
●
If the vehicle is on a test bed.
●
When the radar sensor is damaged.
●
If the radar sensor receives a violent impact.
●
If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.
●
If the radar sensor is temporarily covered by
an accessory.
●
When the vehicle is going to be loaded onto
transportation.
148
Assistant systems
Lane Assist system
Introduction
The Lane Assist System helps the driver stay
in his/her lane within the physical limits of the
system. This function is not suitable and is not
designed to keep the vehicle automatically in
the lane.
Using the camera located in the windscreen,
the Lane Assist system detects the lane boun-
daries dividing the lanes in which the vehicle
is travelling. If the vehicle gets too close to
the detected lane limits, the system alerts the
driver through a corrective motion of the steer-
ing wheel. The driver can cancel the steering
corrective action at any time.
No warning is produced with the turn signals
activated, given that the Lane Assist system un-
derstands that a lane change is required.
System limits
Use the Lane Assist system only on large, well-
maintained motorways and highways.
The system is not available under the following
conditions:
●
The driving speed allowed is below approx.
55 km/h (30 mph).
●
The system has not detected any lane lines.
●
On tight bends.
●
Temporarily in very sporty driving situations.
●
If the turn signal is switched on before a man-
ual lane change.
●
If the driver firmly rectifies a system interven-
tion.
●
If a lane marking is crossed despite system
intervention.
●
If the driver does not react to a request to
intervene.
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the Lane Assist
system cannot change the limits imposed by
the laws of physics and by the very nature of
the system. Careless or uncontrolled use of
the Lane Assist system may cause accidents
and injury. The system is not a replacement
for driver awareness or manoeuvres when
driving.
●
Always adapt your speed and the distance
to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,
weather conditions, the condition of the road
and the trac situation.
●
Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel so it can be turned at any time. The
responsibility of staying in the lane is always
the driver's.
●
The Lane Assist system does not detect
all road markings. The road surfaces, road
structures or objects in poor condition can
be incorrectly detected as road markings un-
der certain circumstances by the Lane Assist
system. Immediately counter any unwanted
intervention of the system.
●
Please observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary if the
trac situation permits.
●
In the following situations there may be
undesired interventions of the system or it
may be that the system does not intervene
at all. In these situations, special attention is
required from the driver and, where appropri-
ate, the temporary deactivation of the lane
assist warning system:
–
In very sporty driving situations.
–
In adverse weather conditions and roads
in poor condition.
–
When passing through areas undergoing
works.
–
Before gradient changes of grade and
river beds.
●
Always observe the vehicle surroundings
carefully and drive proactively.
●
When the area of vision of the camera
becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the
Lane Assist system function can be aected.
Assistant systems
149
Lane Assist system
1
2
Driving with the Lane Assist System
Fig.110 On the instrument cluster screen:
indications of the lane assist system.
Yellow line: The system intervenes assisting
on the represented side.
White line: Lane line detected. The system
does not intervene.
Indicator lamps
Lights up green
Lane Assist system active and availa-
ble.
Lights up yellow
The Lane Assist system intervening
with a rectification of the steering.
Switching the lane assist system on or o
In some countries, the Lane Assist System is al-
ways activated when the ignition is switched on.
The connection status is shown in the Driver
assistance
menu of the Infotainment system or
the driver assistance systems menu after press-
ing the corresponding button. These menus can
be used to activate and deactivate the system.
The Lane Assist system is designed to actively
intervene as of approximately 60 km/h (35
mph) and if it has detected the lane boundaries
(system status: active).
If the control lamp of the instrument cluster dis-
play is o, it means that the system is connec-
ted but not ready to intervene or it is disconnec-
ted.
When you activate a turn signal, the system
temporarily goes into a passive state in order to
allow manual lane change.
An energetic rotation or rectification of the
steering wheel by the driver causes the system
to temporarily switch to a passive state.
Driver intervention prompt
If the steering is not corrected manually, the
system prompts the driver through an indication
on the instrument panel display and acoustic
warnings.
If no reaction is obtained from the driver, the
system switches to a passive state.
Regardless of the steering manoeuvres,
through an indication on the instrument panel
display and acoustic warnings, the driver is also
prompted to drive through the centre of the
lane if the steering correction lasts more than
reasonable.
Steering wheel vibration
The following situations may result in a steering
wheel vibration:
●
The lane ceases to be recognised during a
sudden intervention in the direction of the sys-
tem.
It is also possible to select steering wheel vibra-
tion in the Assistants menu of the infotainment
system. In this case, when a vehicle with Lane
Assist switched on crosses over a detected lane
marking, the steering wheel will vibrate.
Note
If the lane departure warning assistant is
faulty, it may switch o automatically.
Troubleshooting
Lane Assist is not available
The control lamp switches on yellow. A relevant
warning is also displayed on the instrument
panel screen.
●
The field of vision of the camera is dirty.
Clean the windscreen ›››page300.
●
The visibility of the camera is diminished due
to accessories or adhesives.
●
There is a fault or a defect. Switch the engine
o and on again.
150
Assistant systems
The system behaves dierently than expec-
ted
●
The camera has been altered or damaged,
e.g. because of damage caused to the wind-
screen. Check for visible damage.
●
Do not mount objects on the steering wheel.
If the problem persists, consult a specialised
workshop.
Note
After switching on the ignition, it may take a
few seconds before a fault is detected in the
system.
Note
If Lane Assist is unavailable, Travel Assist will
be unavailable as well.
Driving Assist (Travel As-
sist)
Introduction
Travel Assist combines adaptive cruise control
(ACC) and the adaptive lane guidance func-
tion. Within the limitations of the system, the ve-
hicle can maintain a distance from the vehicle
in front that is preselected by the driver and
remain in the preferred position within the lane.
Travel Assist uses the same sensors as Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist.
Therefore, carefully read the information about
the ACC ›››page139 and the Lane Assist
›››page148 and take into account the limita-
tions of the systems and the indications given in
the information.
How to know if the vehicle is fitted with
Travel Assist
The vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist if the mul-
tifunction steering wheel has the button.
Speed range
Depending on the type of gear, Travel Assist
regulates from 0km/h (0mph). The speed can
be set from 30km/h (20mph).
Driving with Travel Assist
Travel Assist automatically controls the accel-
erator pedal, the brakes and the steering. In
addition, Travel Assist may, within its limitations,
decelerate the vehicle until it stops behind an-
other that stops and automatically starts again.
You can override assisted adjustment at all
times.
Status display
Fig.111 On the instrument cluster display:
display of active regulation (schematic
representation).
1
The colour of the lane markings indicates
the status of the adaptive lane guidance
function.
●
Yellow: adaptive lane guidance function
active.
●
Grey: passive adaptive lane guidance
function.
2
Distance set.
Depending on the equipment, additional de-
tails, e. g. dashed road markings and vehicles
in front, can also be shown on the instrument
cluster display.
Control lamps indicate the status of the system
on the instrument panel display:
Green lamp: travel Assist active, adaptive
cruise control and adaptive lane guid-
ance function are active.
Assistant systems
151
Driving Assist (Travel Assist)
Partially green lamp: Travel Assist active,
adaptive cruise control active and adap-
tive lane guidance function passive.
Grey lamp: Travel Assist deactivated, not
regulating.
Driver intervention prompt
If you remove your hands from the steering
wheel, after a few seconds the system asks
you to take over the steering with an indication
on the instrument panel display and acoustic
warnings.
If you do not react, Travel Assist is deactivated.
WARNING
The Travel Assist smart technology cannot
overcome the limits imposed by the laws of
physics and it only works within the limits
of the system. If Travel assist is used negli-
gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious
accidents and injuries. The system is not a
replacement for driver awareness.
●
Bear in mind the system limitations and
the indications regarding the control of the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane As-
sist.
●
Adapt your speed and safety distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to
suit visibility, weather, road and trac condi-
tions.
●
Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is
bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in
slippery circumstances (e. g., snow, ice, rain
or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.
●
Do not use Travel Assist oroad or on roads
where the surface is not firm. Travel Assist
has been designed for use on paved roads
only.
●
Travel Assist does not react to people or
animal or vehicles crossing your path or
which approach you head-on in the same
lane.
●
Brake immediately if Travel Assist does not
slow down enough.
●
Brake immediately when instructed to do
so on the instrument cluster display, or if
Travel Assist does not reduce speed su-
ciently.
●
Brake when the vehicle continues to move
forward without it being desired after an indi-
cation to brake.
●
If possible, do not wear gloves while driv-
ing. The system could interpret this as no
driving activity.
●
If driver intervention is requested on the in-
strument panel display, immediately resume
control of the vehicle.
●
Keep your hands on the steering wheel at
all times, to ensure you have control over the
steering at all times. The driver is always re-
sponsible for keeping the vehicle in its own
lane.
●
Always be prepared to adjust the speed
yourself.
Operating Travel Assist
Fig.112 Left side of the multifunction steering
wheel
Switch on and start regulation
1.
While driving with ACC activated, press
on the multifunction steering wheel.
The vehicle switches from ACC to Travel As-
sist.
Depending on the driving situation, the vehicle
switches to the following system statuses in
Travel Assist:
●
When ACC is regulating, Travel Assist main-
tains the current speed and the preset distance
to the vehicle in front.
When lane markings are detected, the vehicle is
also kept in the lane by steering movements.
●
If ACC is not regulating, Travel Assist remains
selected but in a passive (unregulated) status.
1.
Press the button.
152
Assistant systems
Travel Assist switches to the active system
status, depending on the driving situation.
The indicator lamp for the driving situation
lights up on the instrument cluster display. A
message is also displayed.
Interrupting the adjustment
1. Briefly press the button .
OR: press the brake pedal.
The set distance remains saved.
Switch to ACC
1. Press the button on the multi-function
steering wheel.
The vehicle switches from Travel Assist to
the ACC system status corresponding to
the driving situation.
Making other adjustments
All other aspects of Travel Assist are controlled
like the ACC.
Troubleshooting
Travel Assist is not available or does not
work as expected
The control lamp switches on yellow. A relevant
warning is also displayed on the instrument
panel screen.
●
There is a fault in the sensors. Check the cau-
ses and solutions described in the information
about the ACC ›››page144 or the Lane Assist
›››page149.
●
There is a fault or a defect. Switch the engine
o and on again.
●
The system limits are exceeded.
●
If the problem persists, consult a specialised
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership.
Grip the steering wheel
The warning lamp lights up white, and a mes-
sage is shown on the instrument cluster display.
●
You released the steering wheel for a few sec-
onds. Take hold of the steering wheel and take
control of the vehicle.
Grip the steering wheel
The warning lamp lights up red and a mes-
sage is shown on the instrument cluster display.
Depending on the situation, an audio warning
sounds or the steering wheel vibrates.
●
You have let go of the steering wheel for
a long time, or the system limits have been
reached. Immediately take hold of the steering
wheel and take control of the vehicle.
Travel Assist disconnects automatically
●
You have released the steering wheel for a
long period.
●
There is a fault or a defect. Switch the engine
o and on again.
●
If the problem persists, consult a specialised
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership.
The adjustment is interrupted unexpectedly
●
You have turned on the turn signal.
Lane departure warning
(Side Assist)
Introduction
The lane departure warning uses radar sen-
sors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle
›››page6. The system does this by measuring
the vehicle's distance from other vehicles and
its speed dierential. The lane departure warn-
ing will not work at speeds of less than approx.
15km/h (9mph).
Assistant systems
153
Lane departure warning (Side Assist)
The lane width is not detected individually, but
is rather pre-configured in the system. Thus if
you are driving in wide lanes or in between two
lanes, the indications may be incorrect. Further-
more, the system can detect vehicles driving in
the lane next to you (if there are any), and can
also detect stationary objects such as dividers,
and thus give an incorrect indication.
Trailer mode
Side assist is automatically deactivated and
cannot be switched on if the factory-fitted tow-
bar is electrically connected to a trailer or simi-
lar device.
As soon as the driver starts to drive with a trailer
connected electrically to the vehicle, a mes-
sage is displayed on the instrument panel dis-
play indicating that side assist is switched o.
Once the vehicle trailer has been disengaged,
side assist will return to the initial state prior to
the moment the trailer was electrically connec-
ted.
If the tow-bar is not factory fitted, side assist
should be switched o manually when driving
with a trailer.
Physical limitations inherent to the system
In some situations the lane departure warning
may not interpret the trac situation correctly.
I.e. in the following situations:
●
on tight bends;
●
in the case of lanes with dierent widths;
●
in areas with
significant gradient changes;
●
in adverse weather conditions;
●
in the case of special constructions to the
side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid-
ers.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into Side
Assist cannot overcome the limits imposed
by the laws of physics; it only works within
the limits of the system. Accidents and se-
vere injury may occur if Side Assist is used
negligently or involuntarily. The system is not
a replacement for driver awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to the
vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-
bility, weather, road and trac conditions.
●
Keep your hands on the wheel at all times
to be ready to intervene in the steering at any
time.
●
Pay attention to the indicator lamps that
may come on in the external rear view mir-
rors and on the instrument cluster, and follow
any instructions they may give.
●
The lane departure warning could react
to any special constructions that might be
present to the sides of the vehicle, e.g. high
or irregular dividers. This may cause errone-
ous warnings.
●
Never use the lane departure warning on
unpaved roads. The lane departure warning
has been designed for use on paved roads.
●
Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-
roundings.
●
The control lamps of the lane departure
warning may have limited functionality due
to solar radiation.
Note
If Side Assist does not work as described in
this chapter, stop using it and contact a spe-
cialised workshop.
154
Assistant systems
Driving with Side Assist
Fig.113 Control lamp of the lane departure
warning.
Connecting and disconnecting
Side Assist can be switched on and o by
accessing the Assistants menu of the infotain-
ment system or through the instrument clus-
ter display using the controls on the steering
wheel. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi-
function camera, it can also be accessed by
means of the assistants systems key located on
the main beam headlight lever.
When the lane departure warning is ready to
operate, the indications in the control lamps will
turn on briefly as confirmation.
When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust-
ment in the system will remain active.
Indication on the exterior mirror
The control lamp provides an indication on the
corresponding side regarding the trac situa-
tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be
critical. The control lamp on the left-hand side
indicates the trac situation to the rear left of
the vehicle, and the control lamp on the right-
hand side indicates the trac situation to the
rear right of the vehicle .
In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or win-
dows with tinted film, the indications of the ex-
ternal mirrors may not be seen clearly.
Keep the external mirrors clean and free of
snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad-
hesives or other similar materials.
It lights up
It turns on once briefly: the lane departure warning
is activated and ready to operate, i.e. when acti-
vating the system.
It lights up continuously: the lane departure warn-
ing has detected a vehicle in the blind spot.
Flashes
A vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane
and the turn signal has been engaged in the direc-
tion of the detected vehicle.
For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane As-
sist ›››page148, a warning to switch lanes will
also appear even though the turn signal has not
been engaged (Lane Assist “Plus”).
The control lamps light up when the ignition is
switched on and should turn o after approxi-
mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the
function check.
If there are no indications from the control lamp
of the lane departure warning, this means that
the lane departure warning has not detected
any other vehicles at the rear area.
When the exterior lighting is low, the intensity
with which the control lamps come on is dim-
med. The user can modify the intensity of the
control lamps with up to 5 levels in the infotain-
ment system menu.
Lane assist Plus.
The Lane Assist Plus function can be used by
activating the Lane Assist ›››page148 and
Side Assist functions. In this case its functions
are expanded as described below.
If the driver initiates a lane change manoeuvre
in a potential critical situation:
Assistant systems
155
Lane departure warning (Side Assist)
●
The lamp flashes in the corresponding rear-
view mirror even though the turn signal has not
been activated.
●
The steering wheel vibrates to warn the driver
of the risk of collision.
●
torque is applied to correct the steering and
return the vehicle to its lane.
Driving situations
Fig.114 Schematic diagram: Overtaking
with trac behind the vehicle. Side Assist
indication on the left hand side.
Fig.115 Schematic diagram: Overtaking in
the central lane and then joining the right lane.
Side Assist indication on the right hand side.
In the following situations, an indication will be
displayed in the control lamp ›››Fig.114
(arrow) or ›››Fig.115 (arrow):
●
When being overtaken by another vehicle
›››Fig.114 .
●
When passing another vehicle ›››Fig.115
with a speed dierential of approx. 10 km/h (6
mph). If the vehicle is passing at a considerably
higher speed, no indication will be displayed.
The faster the vehicle approaches, the sooner
an indication will be displayed in the control
lamp, because the lane departure warning
takes into account the speed dierential with
other vehicles. Thus even though the distance
from the other vehicle is identical, the indication
will appear sooner in some cases and later in
others.
156
Parking and manoeuvring
Parking and manoeu-
vring
Park the vehicle
Parking
When parking your vehicle, all legal require-
ments should be observed.
1. Apply the handbrake
2. Automatic transmission: move the selector
lever to position P.
3.
Stop the engine and turn o the ignition.
Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage
the steering lock.
4.
Manual gearbox: engage first gear on flat
ground and slopes, or even reverse gear on
hills, and release the clutch pedal.
5.
On slopes, turn the steering wheel so that if
the parked vehicle were to start moving, it
would steer toward the kerb.
6. Exit the vehicle ››› . Watch out for other
road users!
7. Take all vehicle keys with you and lock it.
To avoid damage or hazardous situations, al-
ways park the vehicle on a suitable parking sur-
face ›››
.
WARNING
If the vehicle is parked incorrectly, it could
roll away, even on gentle slopes. This can
cause accidents and serious injuries.
●
When parking, always carry out the opera-
tions in the stipulated order.
●
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that
the electronic parking brake is engaged.
WARNING
If children, people who may need assistance
or animals are left unattended in the vehicle,
accidents and serious injuries can occur.
●
Never leave children, people who may
need assistance or animals unattended in
the vehicle. They could operate the gear
selector and release the electronic parking
brake. The vehicle could be set in motion.
●
Never leave children, people who may
need assistance, or animals in the vehicle.
Depending on the season, very high or low
temperatures can be reached inside a closed
vehicle.
●
Always take all vehicle keys with you when
leaving the vehicle.
NOTICE
The presence of irregularities on the ground,
sand or mud can cause damage to the vehi-
cle and mean that it cannot be parked prop-
erly.
●
Always park the vehicle on firm and flat
ground.
NOTICE
Components on the underside of the vehicle,
such as bumpers, spoilers and running gear
components, can be damaged when running
over objects protruding from the ground.
●
Drive carefully when entering buildings, on
ramps, driving over kerbs or fixed markings,
and on descents.
NOTICE
Avoid parking the vehicle where the hot ex-
haust system could ignite inflammable mate-
rials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel
or flammable materials.
NOTICE
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
key can only be removed from the ignition
when the lever is in position P.
Parking and manoeuvring
157
General information on parking systems
Handbrake
Apply the handbrake
Fig.116 Handbrake between the front seats.
The handbrake should be applied firmly to pre-
vent the vehicle from accidentally moving. Ap-
ply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle
and when you park.
When the handbrake is on, the red indica-
tor lamp on the instrument cluster lights
up.
Applying the handbrake
●
Pull the handbrake lever up ›››Fig.116.
Releasing the handbrake
●
Pull the lever slightly up, press the unlock
button in the direction of the arrow ›››Fig.116
and lower the lever completely ›››
.
Always pull the handbrake all the way up, to
avoid driving o while the brake is on ››› .
WARNING
●
Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi-
cle when it is in motion. The braking distance
is considerably longer, because braking is
only applied to the rear wheels. Accident
hazard!
●
Failure to fully lower the handbrake lever
can aect the operation of the system, and
can also cause heating and wear of the rear
brakes.
NOTICE
Always apply the handbrake before you
leave the vehicle. In addition, engage first or
rear gear in the gradient function, or set the
selection lever to P.
General information on
parking systems
Automatic brake operation
The automatic braking feature of a parking sys-
tem is used to reduce the danger of collision
when an obstacle is detected during a parking
manoeuvre.
Braking functions
Depending on the equipment, the following
systems are available:
●
Park assist plus manoeuvre braking function
›››page159.
●
Rear cross trac alert emergency brake
function ›››page173.
●
Assisted parking assistant emergency brake
function ›››page164.
Infotainment system lamps
White lamp: system activated, the sys-
tem brakes when it detects an obstacle
in the path.
Coloured lamp: system deactivated, the
system does not brake when it detects
an obstacle although the sensors still de-
tect it.
Requirements
●
The vehicle is moving between approx.
3km/h and 8km/h when manoeuvring
●
A parking system is switched on.
The brakes are not automatically operated
when park assist is switched on automatically
while moving forward.
158
Parking and manoeuvring
What happens in the event of automatic
braking?
If there is an obstacle, the system brakes the
vehicle to a standstill and keeps it stationary for
approx. 2 seconds. Press the brake!
Activate
●
Automatic braking is activated when the
driver switches a parking system on.
Deactivating
●
The automatic brake operation function de-
activates when a park assist system is switched
o.
●
OR: to temporarily deactivate the manoeuvre
braking function, press the function button
on the park assist screen and change the set-
ting.
WARNING
Never allow the automatic braking opera-
tions of park assist systems to lead you to
take any risk that compromises safety. In
certain situations, the automatic braking in-
tervention may only work in a limited way
or not work at all. Collisions with obstacles
can injure people and damage the vehicle.
The system is not a replacement for driver
awareness.
●
Pay attention and do not rely solely on
park assist systems.
●
Always be prepared to brake and control
the steering yourself.
●
Do not take any risks that compromise
safety.
●
Act in accordance with the warnings and
driving recommendations of the parking sys-
tems.
Note
●
Switch o the parking system if the auto-
matic brakes operate excessively, e.g. when
driving o-road.
●
After the park assist’s manoeuvre braking
function has braked the vehicle, driving in the
same direction for 5 metres is deactivated,
and becomes active again after changing
gear or changing the position of the gear se-
lector.
Troubleshooting
The parking system behaves dierently than
expected
There can be several causes:
●
The system requirements are not met.
●
The sensors or the camera are dirty or have
ice on them ›››page301.
●
The camera lens is not clean and the camera
image is not clear ›››page301.
●
Some noise sources, such as a jackhammer
or a cobblestone surface can interfere with the
ultrasound signal.
●
The vehicle has some type of damage in the
sensor or camera area, e.g. due to a parking
impact.
●
The sensor detection zone or field of view of
the camera are blocked by an accessory, e.g. a
bike rack.
●
Changes have been made to the paintwork
or structural modifications in the sensor or
camera area, e.g. at the front of the vehicle or
to the running gear.
Also take into account the messages displayed
on the infotainment system screen.
Sensor or camera without visibility, or the
parking system has been switched o
If a sensor fails, that sensor zone is permanently
switched o. The aected sensor zone may be
displayed on the infotainment system with a
symbol and a greyed-out graphic segment. If
necessary, the parking system switches o the
aected zone.
If the park assist is not working properly, a con-
tinuous audio signal sounds for a few seconds
when it is switched on. If applicable, a message
to this eect is displayed on the instrument
cluster screen
Parking and manoeuvring
159
Park Distance Control Plus (Park Pilot)
A
B
C
●
Check if one of the causes indicated above
has occurred.
●
Once the source of the problem has been
eliminated, the system may be reconnected.
●
If the problem persists, consult a specialised
workshop.
Park Distance Control Plus
(Park Pilot)
Description
Fig.117 Parking aid view on the Infotainment
system display.
Parking aid plus
assists the driver by giving
visual and audio warnings about obstacles de-
tected in front of and behind the vehicle.
The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When
an obstacle is detected, it is indicated by au-
dible signals and in the Infotainment system
›››Fig.117.
When moving close to an obstacle, it is possible
to know if the obstacle is in front of the vehicle
or behind it according to the sound frequency.
The approximate measurement range of the
sensors is:
1.20 m
1.60 m
0.90 m
As you approach the obstacle, the frequency of
the audible signals will increase. The signal will
sound continuously at around 0.30 m: Stop the
vehicle!
If the separation is maintained, the warning vol-
ume is reduced after about 4 seconds.
In order to view the entire periphery of the vehi-
cle, the vehicle must be moved a few metres
forwards or backwards. Therefore, the missing
areas are screened and obstacles at the sides
of the vehicle are displayed ›››Fig.117
C
.
Special features of ParkPilot with Area View
In the following situations the screened area on
the side of the vehicle is automatically hidden:
●
When a vehicle door is opened.
●
When the TCS is switched o.
●
When there is TCS or ESC regulation.
●
If the vehicle remains stationary for more than
approximately 3 minutes.
Error messages
If a an error or fault message is displayed on
the instrument cluster in Park Assist, there is a
fault.
If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-
necting the ignition, it will not be indicated next
time the parking aid is connected.
If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in
the front area are detected. If a front sensor is
faulty, only the obstacles in the rear area are
displayed. The symbol is displayed.
We recommend taking the vehicle to a special-
ised workshop to have the fault repaired.
Trailer mode
Fig.118 Parking assist display on the screen
with trailer attached.
160
Parking and manoeuvring
On vehicles with a factory-fitted trailer hitch,
when the trailer is connected, the rear sensors
will not activate when reverse gear is engaged
or button is pressed. Therefore, any objects
behind or to the side of the vehicle will not be
indicated on the screen and no audio signals
will sound.
The screen will only display objects detected
at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will be
hidden.
Parking assist settings
The audio indications and signals are set in the
infotainment system ›››page34:
●
Automatic activation: On/o
●
Front volume: Volume in the front and rear
area.
●
Rear volume: Volume in the rear area.
●
Reduce volume: When the parking aid is
switched on, the volume of the audio source will
be reduced, depending on the selected option.
●
Front sound settings/treble: Sound
tone in the front area.
●
Rear sound settings/treble: Sound
tone in the rear area.
WARNING
●
Always pay attention, by looking directly,
to trac and the area around the vehicle. As-
sistance systems are not a replacement for
driver awareness. Responsibility always lies
with the driver.
●
The sensors have blind spots in which ob-
stacles and people are not detected. Pay
special attention to children and animals.
●
Always keep visual control of the surround-
ings: use the mirrors for additional help.
NOTICE
Park assist plus functions can be aected by
various factors which may cause damage:
●
Under certain circumstances, the system
does not detect or display certain objects:
–
Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences,
posts and thin trees.
–
Objects that are located above the sen-
sors, such as protrusions in a wall.
–
Objects with certain surfaces or struc-
tures, such as wire mesh fences or powder
snow.
●
Certain surfaces of objects and garments
do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig-
nals. The system cannot detect these ob-
jects or people wearing such clothes cor-
rectly.
●
Sensor signals may be aected by exter-
nal sound sources. This may prevent them
from detecting people or objects.
●
If the system warns you of the proximity
of a low obstacle, please note that after be-
ing detected by the system, the obstacle in
question may disappear from the measure-
ment sensors as the vehicle moves closer,
and the system will no longer warn of its
presence. In certain circumstances, objects
such as high kerbs that could damage the
underside of the vehicle are not detected.
●
If the parking distance warning system is
ignored, the vehicle could suer considera-
ble damage.
●
Damage to the radiator grille, bumper,
wheel arch and vehicle underbody can mod-
ify the orientation of the sensors. This can
aect the parking aid function.
Have the function checked by a specialised
workshop.
●
A number plate or number plate holder
with dimensions that exceed the space for
the number plate, or a cured or deformed
number plate can cause false detections or a
loss of visibility for the sensors.
Parking and manoeuvring
161
Park Distance Control Plus (Park Pilot)
Note
●
The display on the Infotainment system
screen shows a slight time delay.
●
In certain situations, the system can give a
warning even though there is no obstacle in
the detected area:
–
Rough or cobbled surfaces or surfaces
with long grass.
–
External ultrasound sources, such as
other vehicles equipped with ultrasound
systems.
–
Heavy rain or snow, hail or dense exhaust
gases.
–
If the number plate is not properly se-
cured to the surface of the bumper.
–
Gradient changes.
●
In order to guarantee good operation, keep
the sensors clean, free of snow and ice, and
do not cover them with stickers or other ob-
jects.
●
If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,
unless you do so very briefly, and always
keep a distance of more than 10 cm away.
●
Fitting certain accessories to the front of
the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-
vertising, may interfere with the operation of
the Park Assist.
●
We recommend that you practice parking
in an area without trac.
●
The volume and tone of the signals and
indications can be changed.
●
Please observe information on towing a
trailer.
Note
In vehicles without an infotainment system,
these parameters can be modified in a SEAT
Ocial Service or in a specialised workshop.
Operating Park Assist Plus
Fig.119 Centre console: parking aid button
(depending on the version).
Switching on and o manually
●
Press the button once.
Automatic activation
●
Select reverse gear.
●
EITHER: if you drive forward at a speed of less
than 15 km/h (9 mph) and an obstacle is en-
countered, it is detected when it is approx. less
than 95 cm. away. If the automatic connection
is activated, a reduced view is shown.
●
OR: if the vehicle moves backwards.
When the Plus Parking Aid connects automat-
ically, a diagram of the vehicle and the seg-
ments will appear on screen.
It only operates every time the speed drops be-
low 15 km/h (9 mph) for the first time.
Automatic activation of park assist can be
switched on and o in the infotainment system:
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
In the infotainment system, select > Set-
tings > Parking and manoeuvring.
●
Check the Automatic activation box.
●
OR, in the parking assistance function, select
Settings > Automatic activation.
If activated automatically, an audible sound
warning will only be given when obstacles in
front are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap-
prox.
If it is switched o using the button, one of
the following actions must be taken for it to re-
activate automatically:
162
Parking and manoeuvring
1)
The RVC button will only be displayed when reverse gear is engaged.
●
Switch o the ignition and switch it on again.
●
EITHER:drive forward at over approx. 15km/h
(9mph).
●
OR: move the lever into position P and back
again.
●
OR: switch the automatic activation on and
o in the Infotainment system.
Automatic disconnection
●
Drive forward at 15 km/h (9mph) or faster.
●
OR: move the selector lever to position P.
Temporary sound suppression
●
Press the function button on the infotain-
ment screen.
Change from reduced view to full view
●
Select reverse gear.
●
Press the car icon on the reduced view
Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear
View Camera “RVC”)
●
Select reverse gear.
●
OR press the RVC function button
1)
.
A short confirmation signal will be heard and
the button symbol will light up when the system
is switched on.
NOTICE
Park assist plus only connects automatically
when driving very slowly. If driving style is
not adapted to the circumstances, an acci-
dent and serious injury or damage may be
caused.
Visual indication segments
Fig.120 Parking aid view on the Infotainment
system display.
The optical indication of the segments works as
follows:
●
White segments: the obstacle is more than
approx. 30 cm away from the path or in the
direction opposite to travel. They are also dis-
played when the electronic parking brake is ac-
tivated.
●
Yellow segments
: the obstacles lie on the
vehicle’s path and are at a distance of less than
approx. 30 cm away.
●
Red segments: obstacles are less than ap-
prox. 30 cm away.
A guiding track will indicate the anticipated for-
ward or backward trajectory, depending on the
gear that is engaged.
If an obstacle is located in the vehicle’s way, the
corresponding audible warning will sound.
When the penultimate segment is displayed,
the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In
the collision zone, the obstacles are represen-
ted in red (including those out of the path). Stop
the vehicle! ››› in Description on page160
Rear parking aid
Description
The rear park assist is an optical and audible
assistant that warns of obstacles located be-
hind the vehicle.
There are sensors integrated in the rear
bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you are
alerted by audible and visible warnings on the
Infotainment system.
Parking and manoeuvring
163
Rear parking aid
Make particularly sure that the sensors are not
covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and the
like, as this could aect the system's operation.
Cleaning instructions ›››page301.
The approximate measurement range of the
rear sensors is:
●
Side area: 0.60 m
●
Central area: 1.60 m
As you approach the obstacle, the frequency of
the audible signals will increase. The signal will
sound continuously at around 0.30 m: Stop the
vehicle! ››› on page160.
If the separation is maintained, the warning vol-
ume is reduced after about 4 seconds.
Parking Aid connection
●
Select reverse gear.
Parking Aid disconnection
●
Drive forward at 15 km/h (9mph) or faster.
●
OR: place the selector level in position P, N
or D (for automatic gearboxes) or disengage
reverse (for manual gearboxes).
Set the lever to the N or D position to maintain
the system active for approximately 8 seconds
before switching o. During this time, the Park-
ing aid will be deactivated if the selector lever is
set to P.
Temporary sound suppression
●
Press the function button on the infotain-
ment screen.
Change from reduced view to full view
●
Select reverse gear.
●
OR: on vehicles fitted with reverse assist
(Rear View Camera “RVC”) press on the car
icon of the reduced display.
Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear
View Camera “RVC”)
●
Select reverse gear.
●
OR: press the “RVC” function button.
Parking assist settings
The audio indications and signals are set in the
infotainment system ›››page34:
●
Rear volume: Volume in the rear area.
●
Reduce volume: When the parking aid is
switched on, the volume of the audio source will
be reduced, depending on the selected option.
●
Rear sound settings/treble: Sound
tone in the rear area.
Error messages
If a an error or fault message appears on the in-
strument panel in Parking assist, there is a fault.
If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-
necting the ignition, it will not be indicated next
time the parking aid is connected.
If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol is
displayed on the infotainment system display.
We recommend taking the vehicle to a special-
ised workshop to have the fault repaired.
Towing device
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket de-
vice from the factory, when the trailer is con-
nected, the parking aid will not be activated
when reverse gear is engaged.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ››› in De-
scription on page160.
164
Parking and manoeuvring
Visual indication segments
Fig.121 Parking aid view on the Infotainment
system display.
The distance to the obstacles can be estimated
with the help of the segments at the rear of the
vehicle.
The optical indication of the segments works as
follows:
●
White segments: the obstacle is more than
approx. 30 cm away from the path or in the
direction opposite to travel. They are also dis-
played when the electronic parking brake is ac-
tivated.
●
Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on the
vehicle’s path and are at a distance of less than
approx. 30 cm away.
●
Red segments: obstacles are less than ap-
prox. 30 cm away.
Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-
cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding audi-
ble warning will sound.
When the penultimate segment is displayed,
the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In
the collision zone, the obstacles are represen-
ted in red (including those out of the path). Stop
the vehicle! ››› in Description on page160.
Parking aid system (Park
Assist)
Introduction
The assisted parking system is an additional
function of ParkPilot ›››page159 and helps
the driver find a suitable parking space from
among the following types:
●
park driving in reverse in suitable perpendic-
ular and parallel spaces,
●
park driving forwards in suitable perpendicu-
lar spaces,
●
exit a parking space driving forwards from a
parallel space.
In vehicles with a Park Assist system and factory
infotainment system, the front, rear and side
areas are represented, and the position of ob-
stacles is shown relative to the vehicle.
The assisted parking system is subject to cer-
tain limitations inherent to the system and
its use requires special attention by the
driver››› .
WARNING
The technology used in the park assist sys-
tem involves a series of limitations inherent in
the actual system and in the use of ultrasonic
sensors. The use of Park Assist should never
tempt you to take any risk that may compro-
mise safety. The system is not a replacement
for driver awareness.
●
Any accidental movement of the vehicle
could result in serious injury.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
trac conditions.
●
Certain surfaces of objects and garments
do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig-
nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor-
rectly, these objects or people wearing such
clothes.
●
Ultrasound sensor signals may be aected
by external sound sources. In certain circum-
stances this may prevent them from detect-
ing people or objects.
●
The ultrasound sensors may have blind
spots in which obstacles and people are not
detected.
Parking and manoeuvring
165
Parking aid system (Park Assist)
●
Monitor the area around the vehicle at all
times, since the ultrasound sensors do not
detect small children, animals or certain ob-
jects in all situations.
WARNING
Quick turns of the steering wheel when park-
ing or exiting a parking space with Park As-
sist can cause serious injury.
●
Do not hold the steering wheel during ma-
noeuvres to park or exit a parking space un-
til the system requests it. Doing so disables
the system during the manoeuvre, resulting
in the parking being cancelled.
NOTICE
●
In certain circumstances, the ultrasonic
sensors do not detect objects such as trailer
tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or
an open (or opening) rear lid, which could
damage the vehicle.
●
Retrofitting of certain accessories to the
vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may interfere
with the operation of the Park Assist system
and cause damage.
●
The Park Assist system uses as a reference
parked vehicles, curbs and other objects.
Make sure that the tyres and wheels are not
damaged while parking. If necessary, oppor-
tunely interrupt the parking manoeuvre to
avoid damaging the vehicle.
●
The ultrasound sensors on the bumper may
be damaged or shifted in the event of a colli-
sion, for example, when entering or exiting a
parking space.
●
If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do not
apply it directly unless very briefly and al-
ways from a distance of more than 10 cm.
●
A registration plate or plate holder on the
front with larger than the space for the reg-
istration plate, or a registration plate that is
curved or warped can cause:
–
False detections.
–
The sensors to lose visibility.
–
Cancellation of the parking manoeuvre
or defective parking.
●
If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam-
aged, the area corresponding to that group
of sensors (front or rear) is deactivated and
cannot be activated until the fault is correc-
ted. However, you can still use the sensors
of the other bumper as per usual. If there
is a fault in the system, consult a specialist
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership for this.
Note
●
In order to guarantee good system oper-
ation, keep the ultrasound sensors of the
bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do not
cover them with adhesives or other objects.
●
Certain sources of noise, such as rough as-
phalt or paving stones and the noise of other
vehicles can induce the Park Assist system
or ParkPilot to give erroneous warnings. The
presence of metal objects can also aect
the manoeuvre.
●
In order to become familiar with the system
and its functions, SEAT recommends that you
practice operating the Park Assist system in
an area where there is not too much trac or
in a car park.
166
Parking and manoeuvring
Description of the parking assist sys-
tem
Fig.122 In the centre console: button to switch
on the Park Assist system.
The components of the Park Assist system are
the ultrasonic sensors located in the front and
rear bumpers, the button to switch the sys-
tem on and o and the messages on the instru-
ment panel display.
Prerequisites for parking
●
The traction control (TCS) must be switched
on ›››page130.
●
Speed when passing next to the parking
space (parallel parking): do not exceed approx.
40 km/h (25 mph).
●
Speed when passing next to the parking
space (angle parking): do not exceed approx.
20 km/h (12 mph).
●
Keep a distance between
0.5 and 2.0me-
tres when driving past the parking space.
●
Space length (parallel parking): vehicle
length + 0.8 metres.
●
Space width (parking bay): vehicle width
+ 0.8 meters.
●
Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h
(4mph) when parking.
Requirements for leaving the parking space
(only for parallel parking)
●
The traction control (TCS) must be switched
on ›››page130.
●
Space length: length of the vehicle
+ 0.5 metres.
●
Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h
(4mph) when exiting the parking space.
Prematurely stopping or automatically in-
terrupting the manoeuvres for parking or ex-
iting a parking space
Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for park-
ing or exiting a parking space in any of the fol-
lowing cases:
●
Press the button.
●
When exceeding a speed of approximately 7
km/h (4mph) more than once.
●
The driver takes control of the steering wheel.
●
The parking manoeuvre does not end within 6
minutes after activation of the automatic steer-
ing.
●
There is a fault in the system (the system is
temporarily unavailable).
●
The TCS is disconnected.
●
TCS or ESC intervene with regulation.
●
The driver door is opened.
To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that
none of these things occur and that the but-
ton is pressed again.
Braking to avoid damage due to unsuitable
speed
It is possible that the system operates the
brakes to reduce excess speed. The parking
manoeuvre can then continue. The brakes will
intervene during each parking process.
Special characteristics
The Park Assist system is subject to certain limi-
tations inherent to the system. For example, it is
therefore not possible to use it to enter or exit a
parking space on sharp bends or on very steep
hills.
While entering or exiting a parking space, a
brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to
change between forward and reverse gears
(depending on the case). In successive ma-
noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver to
change gears, at the latest, when the continu-
ous audible signal is given (object present at a
distance of ≤30cm) by Park Pilot.
Parking and manoeuvring
167
Parking aid system (Park Assist)
When the Park Assist system turns the steer-
ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the instru-
ment panel also displays the symbol . Keep
the brake pedal depressed while the symbol
remains on the dash panel display to turn the
wheels with the vehicle stopped. This way, the
system will require fewer manoeuvres to com-
plete the parking action.
Trailer mode
The Park Assist system cannot be switched on if
the factory-fitted towing bracket is electrically
connected to a trailer.
After changing a wheel
If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops
entering and exiting parking spaces correctly,
the circumference of the new wheel may be
dierent and the system may need to adapt to
it. The adaptation is automatic and takes place
during driving. Making turns slowly and in both
directions (20 km/h [12 mph]) for a few minutes
may contribute to this adaptation process.
Selecting a parking type
Fig.123 On the instrument panel display:
display of the assisted parking system with
decreased visibility.
Fig.124 On the instrument cluster display:
parking modes indication.
Park assist has the following 3 parking types:
Reverse parallel parking.
Reverse angle parking.
Forward angle parking.
Selecting a parking type after passing in
front of the space
After activating the Park Assist system and
after detecting a parking space, the display
on the instrument panel proposes a parking
mode. The Park Assist system selects the park-
ing mode automatically. The selected mode
is shown on the instrument panel display
›››Fig.123. The reduced display of other possi-
ble parking modes is also shown ›››Fig.124. If
the mode selected by the system does not cor-
respond to the desired mode, you can select
another mode by pressing the
button.
●
The necessary conditions to park with Park
Assist have to be met ›››page166.
●
Press the button.
●
A control lamp on the button lights up
when the system is switched on. Additionally,
the selected parking mode is shown on the
instrument panel display and the reduced dis-
play shows another parking mode it can be
changed to.
●
Turn on the corresponding turn signal to-
wards the side of the road where you are park-
ing. The instrument panel displays the side cor-
responding to the road. By default, if the turn
signal is not on, it parks on the right in the direc-
tion of trac.
168
Parking and manoeuvring
●
If necessary, press the button again to
change to the next parking mode.
●
Once you have switched to all possible park-
ing modes, if the button is pressed again, the
system switches o.
●
Press the button again to switch the system
back on.
●
Follow the instructions displayed on the in-
strument panel while paying attention to trac
and drive the vehicle past the parking space.
Parking in a parking bay without driving past
first
Special case of perpendicular parking space to
park forwards without driving past first:
●
The necessary conditions to park with Park
Assist have to be met ›››page166.
●
Move forward towards the parking space
while paying attention to trac and stop the
vehicle with the front part partially inside the
parking space.
●
Press the button once.
●
A control lamp on the button lights up
when the system is switched on. Additionally,
the selected parking mode is shown on the
instrument panel display without reduced dis-
play.
●
Let go of the steering wheel.
Parking and manoeuvring
169
Parking aid system (Park Assist)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Parking with the parking assist system
Fig.125 On the instrument cluster display: parallel
parking.
: Finding a parking space : Parking
position. : Manoeuvring.
Fig.126 On the instrument cluster display: angle
parking.
: Finding a parking space : Parking
position. : Manoeuvring.
Message to move forwards
Your vehicle
Parking space detected
Message to park
Message to press the brake pedal
Progress bar
The prerequisites have to be met to park with
the parking assist system ›››page166 and the
parking mode has to be selected ›››page167.
Parking
●
Look at the instrument cluster screen to see if
the space has been detected as “appropriate”
and if the correct position for parking has been
reached ›››Fig.125 or ›››Fig.126 . The
space is considered “appropriate” if the instru-
ment cluster display shows the parking indica-
tion
4
.
●
Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, en-
gage the reverse gear.
●
Let go of the steering wheel.
●
Please note the following message:
Intervention in active steering.
Watch your surroundings!
While keeping watch around you, carefully
start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h
(4mph). During the parking manoeuvre, the
system only takes charge of the steering. You,
170
Parking and manoeuvring
1
2
3
as the driver, have to accelerate, engage
the clutch if necessary, change gears and
brake.
●
Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot signal
sounds; OR: reverse until the indication to move
forward appears on the instrument panel dis-
play ›››Fig.125 or ›››Fig.126 ; OR: re-
verse until the Park Assist finished mes-
sage appears on the instrument cluster display.
The progress bar
6
indicates the distance to
cover.
●
Press the brake pedal until the parking assist
system completes the steering wheel turns; OR:
until the symbol goes out on the instrument
panel screen.
●
Select first gear.
●
Move forward until the continuous ParkPilot
signal sounds; OR: move forward until the re-
verse indication appears on the instrument
panel display. The Park Assist system steers the
vehicle forward and back until it centres it in the
space ›››Fig.125 or ›››Fig.126 .
●
For best results, wait at the end of each
manoeuvre until the Park Assist system has fin-
ished turning the steering wheel. The parking
manoeuvre ends when a corresponding mes-
sage is displayed on the instrument panel and,
in some cases, an acoustic signal sounds.
Progress bars
The progress bar ›››Fig.125
6
and
›››Fig.126
6
on the instrument cluster display
shows the relative distance to be covered as a
symbol. The greater the distance, the fuller the
progress bar. When driving forward, the content
of the progress bar decreases upwards, and
when reversing, it decreases downwards.
Note
If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurely
during parking, the result may not be the
best.
Leaving a parking space with the
parking assist system (only for par-
allel parking)
Fig.127 On the instrument panel display:
driving o from perpendicular parking.
Your vehicle in reverse gear
Message giving the proposed manoeuvre
to exit the parking space
Progress bar to indicate the distance left to
cover
Leaving a parking space (parallel parking)
The necessary conditions to exit a parking
space with Park Assist have to be met
›››page166.
●
Press the button. A control lamp on the
button lights up when the system is switched
on.
●
Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards
the road you will enter when exiting the parking
space.
●
Select reverse gear.
●
Let go of the steering wheel. Please note the
following message:
Automatic steering enabled Pay at-
tention to your surroundings.
While keeping watch around you, carefully
start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h
(4mph). When exiting the parking space, the
system only takes charge of the steering. You,
as the driver, have to accelerate, engage
the clutch if necessary, change gears and
brake.
●
Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot signal
sounds; OR: reverse until the instrument panel
display shows the forward indication. The pro-
gress bar ›››Fig.127
3
indicates the distance
to cover.
Parking and manoeuvring
171
Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)
●
Press the brake pedal until the parking assist
system completes the steering wheel turns; OR:
press the brake pedal until the symbol goes
out on the instrument panel screen.
●
Move forward until the continuous ParkPilot
signal sounds; OR: move forward until the re-
verse indication appears on the instrument
panel display. The Park Assist system steers the
vehicle forward and back until it can exit the
space.
●
The vehicle can exit the space when a cor-
responding message is displayed on the instru-
ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic
signal sounds. Take charge of the steering with
the turning angle set by the Park Assist system.
●
Paying attention to the trac, exit the parking
space.
Reverse Assist (Rear View
Camera)
Introduction
A camera installed in the rear lid handle assists
the driver with reverse parking or manoeuvring
›››page136.
The camera image is viewed together with ori-
entation lines projected on the Infotainment
system screen. Part of the bumper can be seen
at the bottom, which can be used by the driver
as a reference point.
Reverse assist settings
Reverse assist oers the user the possibility to
change the image's brightness, contrast and
colour settings. To change these settings:
●
Stop the vehicle in a safe place without
switching o the ignition or the infotainment
system.
●
Apply the parking brake.
●
Select reverse gear.
●
Press the function button displayed on
the screen.
●
Make the desired adjustments on the menu
by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by mov-
ing the scroll button.
Requirements for parking and manoeuvring
with the rear assist
The system should not be used in the following
cases:
●
If the image displayed is not very reliable or is
distorted, or if the lens is dirty.
●
If the area behind the vehicle is incomplete.
●
If the vehicle is heavily loaded.
●
If the position of the camera has changed
after a rear-end collision. Have the system
checked by a specialised workshop.
Familiarising yourself with the system
To familiarise yourself with the system, the ori-
entation lines and their function, SEAT recom-
mends practising in a place without too much
trac or in a car park when there are good
weather and visibility conditions
WARNING
●
The reverse assist does not make it possi-
ble to precisely calculate the distance from
obstacles and nor can it overcome the sys-
tem's own limits, hence its negligent use may
cause serious accidents and injuries if used
without due care. The driver should be aware
of his/her surroundings at all times to ensure
safe driving.
●
The camera lens expands and distorts the
field of view and displays the objects on the
screen in a way that is dierent from reality.
Distance perception is also distorted.
●
Due to the screen resolution or light con-
ditions, some items may be blurry or not dis-
played at all. Take care with thin posts, fen-
ces, railings or trees that might not be seen
on the screen and could damage the vehicle.
●
The reverse assist has blind spots where
it cannot see people or objects. Monitor the
vehicle's surrounding area at all times.
●
The system is not a replacement for driver
awareness. Supervise the parking manoeu-
vre and the vehicle's surrounding area at all
times.
172
Parking and manoeuvring
1)
The RVC button will only be displayed when reverse gear is engaged.
●
Do not be distracted from the trac by
looking at the screen.
●
The images are only two-dimensional. Pro-
truding objects or holes in the road, for ex-
ample, are more dicult to detect or may not
be seen at all.
●
Vehicle load modifies the representation of
the guide lines. The width represented by the
lines decreases with vehicle load. Pay spe-
cial attention to the surroundings when the
inside of the vehicle of the luggage compart-
ment are loaded.
●
In the following situations, objects or other
vehicles appear to be further away or closer
than they actually are. Pay special attention:
–
If moving from a flat surface to a slope
and vice-versa.
–
If the vehicle is heavily loaded.
–
When the vehicle approaches objects
that are not on the ground surface or that
protrude from it. These objects may be out-
side the camera angle when reversing.
Note
●
It is important to take great care and pay
special attention if the driver is not familiar
with the system.
●
The reverse assist reference lines disap-
pear when the rear lid is open.
Shown on the display
Fig.128 Infotainment system display:
guidance lines.
1
Lateral lines: extension of the vehicle (ap-
proximately in its total width) on the road.
2
End of the side lines: approx. 2 m behind
the vehicle on the road.
3
Intermediate line: approx. 1 m behind the
vehicle on the road.
4
Horizontal red line: a safe distance of ap-
prox. 40 cm at the rear of the vehicle on the
road.
Switching the system on and o
●
Reverse assist is connected by a contact
when engaging reverse gear.
●
The system switches o 8 seconds after dis-
engaging reverse gear and immediately after
removing the contact.
●
The camera will stop transmitting images
above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re-
verse engaged.
In combination with the parking aid plus system
›››page159, the camera image will no longer
be displayed when reverse gear is disengaged,
and the system will display the optical informa-
tion provided by the parking aid system.
It is also possible to hide the reverse assist im-
age:
●
By pressing one of the Infotainment system
buttons on the display.
●
OR: by pressing on the miniature vehicle
shown on the screen.
If you wish to display the rear assist image
again:
●
Disengage and re-engage reverse gear.
●
OR: Press the RVC function button
1)
.
Parking and manoeuvring
173
Rear Cross Trac Alert (RCTA)
1)
It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with a parking system.
Parking manoeuvre
●
Stop the vehicle in front of a space and select
reverse gear.
●
Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel
so that the side lines lead towards the parking
space.
●
Guide the vehicle into the parking space so
that the side lines run parallel to it.
Rear Cross Trac Alert
(RCTA)
How it works
Fig.129 Diagram of the parking assistant:
detected area around the vehicle that is driving
o.
Park Assist uses the radar sensors on the rear
bumper ›››page134 to monitor trac cross-
ing behind the vehicle as it reverses out of a
parking bay, or as it is being manoeuvred, for
example in very low visibility conditions.
When the system detects a relevant vehicle on
the road that is approaching the rear of the ve-
hicle ›››Fig.129, an acoustic alarm may sound
if the relevance so requires it.
In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver is
also informed by means of a visual signal on
infotainment system display. This signal is dis-
played in the form of a red strip at the back
of the image of the vehicle on the infotainment
system screen. This strip displays the side of the
vehicle towards which trac is approaching in
transverse direction
1)
.
Automatic braking to reduce damages
›››page157.
Connecting and disconnecting
The rear cross trac alert can be switched on
and o by accessing the Assistants menu on
the dash panel display using the steering wheel
controls. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi-
function camera, it can also be accessed by
means of the assistants systems key located on
the main beam headlight lever.
When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust-
ment in the system will remain active.
Trailer mode
The rear cross trac alert will be automatically
deactivated and it will be impossible to activate
them if the tow hitch is electrically connected
to a trailer or other similar object. As soon as
the driver starts driving, a message appears on
the instrument cluster screen indicating that the
assistant is deactivated.
Once the trailer is uncoupled from the vehicle,
the assistant will return to its initial state prior
to the moment when the trailer was electrically
connected.
If the tow hitch is not factory fitted, then the rear
cross trac alert will have to be deactivated
manually when driving with a trailer.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into the
rear cross trac alert cannot overcome the
limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only
works within the limits of the system. The
parking assistant function should not tempt
you into taking any risks. The system is not a
replacement for driver awareness.
●
The system should never be used in limi-
ted visibility conditions or complicated traf-
fic, e.g., in high-trac areas or when crossing
multiple lanes.
174
Parking and manoeuvring
●
Be sure to always be aware of the vehicle's
surroundings, since the system often fails
to detect things such as bicycles or pedes-
trians.
●
The rear cross trac alert itself will not
brake the vehicle to a complete stop.
Practical equipment
175
Storage compartment
Practical equipment
Storage compartment
Introduction
Use the storage compartments only for small or
light items.
WARNING
Objects inside the vehicle that are not se-
cured could be thrown across the cabin in
the event of sudden braking or manoeuvring.
This may cause severe injuries as well as loss
of control of the vehicle.
●
Do not carry animals or sharp, hard or
heavy items in open storage compartments
of the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the
cover behind the rear seats, or inside pieces
of clothing or bags inside the vehicle.
●
Keep the storage compartments closed at
all times while the vehicle is in motion.
●
Do not hang garments weighing more than
2.5 kg (approx. 5.5 lb) on the vehicle’s coat
hooks. Never leave heavy, hard or sharp ob-
jects in the pockets of these pieces of cloth-
ing.
WARNING
If you leave lighters inside the vehicle, they
might be damaged or lit inadvertently. This
could lead to severe burns and damage to
the vehicle.
●
Before moving a seat, make sure there are
no lighters in the moving part area of the ve-
hicle.
●
Before closing a storage compartment,
make sure there are no lighters in the closing
area.
●
Never leave a lighter inside a storage com-
partment or any other surface of the vehicle
as it could ignite due to the high tempera-
tures on such surfaces, particularly during
the summer.
NOTICE
●
Do not store heat- or cold-sensitive ob-
jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heat
and cold could damage them or render them
useless.
●
Objects made from transparent materials
left inside the vehicle, such as glasses, mag-
nifying glasses or transparent suction pads
stuck to the windows can concentrate sun-
light and damage the vehicle.
Glove compartment
Fig.130 On the passenger side: glove
compartment.
Opening and closing the glove compart-
ment
Opening: Pull the handle ›››Fig.130 and open
the glove compartment.
Closing: Press the glove compartment up-
wards.
WARNING
If the glove compartment is left open, the risk
of causing severe injuries in the event of an
accident, sudden braking or manoeuvring in-
creases.
●
Always keep the glove compartment
closed while the vehicle is in motion.
176
Practical equipment
Drink holder
Fig.131 Front drink holders in the centre
console.
The storage compartments of the driver and
passenger doors contain a bottle holder.
Front drink holders
There are two cup holders in the centre con-
sole .
WARNING
Incorrect use of the bottle holders may
cause injuries.
●
Never put hot drinks in the drink holders.
In the event of sudden braking or an acci-
dent while driving, hot beverages in the bot-
tle holders might spill and cause burns.
●
Ensure that no bottles or other objects are
dropped in the driver footwell while driving,
as they could get under the pedals and ob-
struct their working.
●
Never place glasses, food or other heavy
objects drink holders. These heavy objects
may be thrown across the cabin in the event
of an accident and cause serious injuries.
WARNING
Closed bottles may explode inside the vehi-
cle due to cold or heat.
●
Never leave closed bottles in the vehicle
if the temperature inside is very high or very
low.
NOTICE
Do not leave open cans in the drink holders
when the vehicle is in motion. If the drink is
spilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it may
damage the vehicle and its electrical sys-
tem.
Note
The inside elements of the drink holders can
be extracted for cleaning.
Storage compartment under front
seats
Fig.132 Storage compartment under the right
front passenger seat.
Opening: Press the tab on the drawer handle
and take the drawer out.
Closing: Push the drawer under the seat until it
engages.
Depending on the equipment, under the driver's
seat there may be a magazine holder (about
the size of the instruction manual) instead of the
storage compartment.
Practical equipment
177
Power sockets
WARNING
If the drawer is left open, it could prevent use
of the pedals. This may cause serious acci-
dents and injuries.
●
Always keep the drawer closed while the
vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer
and any objects in it could fall into the driv-
er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.
NOTICE
The drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most.
Other object holders
You will find more object holders, compart-
ments and supports in other parts of the vehi-
cle:
●
In the centre console.
●
Inside the central armrest.
●
Other storage compartments are found in the
rear seat, to the left and the right of the seats.
●
In the backrests of the front seats, storage
pockets.
●
In the luggage compartment, on both sides,
there may be hooks for hanging light bags.
There are hangers on the struts of the doors
and the rear.
WARNING
Hanging clothes may decrease the driver's
visibility, which may cause serious accidents
and injuries.
●
Always hang clothes from hangers in such
a way that the driver's visibility is not aec-
ted.
●
Only hang light pieces of clothing from the
hangers of the vehicle. Never leave heavy,
hard or sharp objects in the pockets of these
pieces of clothing.
●
Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the
clothing, as this could interfere with the func-
tion of the head-protection airbags.
NOTICE
Do not place overly large objects in the
pockets on the front seat backrests (e.g. bot-
tles) or objects with sharp edges. Risk of
damage to the pockets and the upholstery.
Power sockets
Introduction
Electrical equipment can be plugged in to the
vehicle's sockets.
The devices must be in a perfect state of repair.
Do not use defective devices.
The 12 volt power socket will only work with the
ignition on.
WARNING
Improper use of the sockets or electrical de-
vices could lead to a fire and cause serious
injuries.
●
Please ensure that children are never left
unsupervised inside the vehicle. The sockets
and the devices connected to them can be
used when the ignition is switched on.
●
If electrical devices overheat, switch them
o immediately and disconnect them from
the mains.
NOTICE
●
To avoid damaging the electrical system,
never connect electrical devices that sup-
ply power, such as solar panels or battery
chargers, to 12-volt sockets to charge the 12-
volt battery.
●
Only use electrical devices that comply
with the applicable electromagnetic com-
patibility directives.
●
To prevent voltage fluctuations from caus-
ing damage, unplug any connected electri-
cal devices before switching the ignition on
and o.
●
Never connect electrical devices that con-
sume more than the specified power to a 12
volt socket. Exceeding the maximum power
consumption could damage the vehicle's
electrical system.
●
Observe the instruction manuals of electri-
cal devices!
178
Practical equipment
Note
●
The use of electrical appliances with the
engine switched o will cause the 12-volt
battery to discharge.
●
Uninsulated devices can interfere with the
radio, infotainment system and the vehicle’s
electronic system.
Vehicle power sockets
Fig.133 Vehicle 12-volt socket.
●
Remove the plug from the socket located in
the centre console ›››Fig.133.
●
Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into
the power socket.
Electrical equipment can be connected to the
12 volt power socket.
The appliances connected to each power
socket must not exceed a power rating of 120
Watt.
NOTICE
If the 12-volt socket is used at full power for
longer than the specified time, the fuse may
blow.
●
Never use the 12 volt socket at full power
for more than 10 minutes.
Data transmissions
179
SEAT CONNECT
Data transmissions
SEAT CONNECT
Introduction
With SEAT CONNECT Gen3 you can connect
your vehicle to the Internet. This allows you to
extend the scope of various services. A descrip-
tion of the available services can be found on
the Internet at:
https://www.seat.com/owners/connectivity/
seat-connect-service
To use it, SEAT CONNECT must first be activa-
ted online by entering into a SEAT CONNECT
contract with SEAT, S.A. and is subject to a tem-
porary use limitation depending on the country.
Both the SEAT CONNECT service portfolios of-
fered by SEAT and individual services can be
modified, cancelled, deactivated, reactivated,
renamed and extended, even without prior noti-
fication.
The execution and availability of the SEAT
CONNECT services and service portfolios may
vary depending on the country, as well as the
vehicle, its equipment and connectivity.
SEAT CONNECT's voice recognition or search
technology does not recognise or oer results
for all words.
There are SEAT CONNECT services for which
registration is mandatory and others for which it
is not mandatory.
Description of services
Before running SEAT CONNECT services, read
and take into account the description of the
corresponding services. Descriptions are upda-
ted on a non-periodical basis.
●
Always use the most up-to-date version of
the corresponding service description.
WARNING
In areas with insucient mobile phone and
GPS coverage, emergency calls and phone
calls will not be connected and data cannot
be transmitted.
●
Change location if possible.
NOTICE
The vehicle may be damaged by factors out-
side the control of SEAT, S.A. These damaged
can include:
●
Misuse of mobile terminals
●
Data loss during transmission.
●
Unsuitable or defective third party appli-
cations.
●
Malicious software on data storage devi-
ces, computers, tablets or mobile phones.
Services portfolio
The initial service assignment shown here rep-
resents the maximum possible volume. The
maximum possible volume is only available on
a few vehicle models. During the useful life of
the vehicle, you can change the assignment
shown here.
After activating the service management in the
infotainment system, you can check whether
services are available to the vehicle and what
services they are ›››page183.
In some countries and in the event of a contract
renewal, the services oered may be combined
dierently than indicated here. They may also
vary depending on the year of production of
the vehicle. The services mentioned correspond
to SEAT CONNECT Gen3 (third generation).
SEAT CONNECT services and functions that
do not require activation
The following services also work without the
activation of SEAT CONNECT:
●
Public emergency call service.
●
Privacy mode.
●
Legal.
SEAT CONNECT services
The SEAT CONNECT services are:
●
Public emergency call
●
Roadside assistance call
●
Customer support
●
Service appointment planning
●
Online system update
●
Customisation
180
Data transmissions
●
Activating SEAT CONNECT
●
Private mode (deactivation of services)
●
Delete user / Reset factory settings
●
Remote opening
●
Horn and turn signals
●
Vehicle status incl. doors and lights
●
Driving data
●
Vehicle status report
●
Anti-theft alarm warning
●
Zone warning
●
Speed warning
●
Online map update
●
Search for points of interest
●
Petrol stations
●
Online trac information
●
Parking lots
●
Online infotainment system update
●
Online route calculation
●
Information on risks
●
Dictation
●
Online radio
●
Online media
●
Online route import
●
Online destination import
●
Remote auxiliary ventilation
●
Parking position
●
Privacy mode
●
Legal
SEAT CONNECT individual options
●
In-Car Applications. These applications can
be purchased and installed directly in the info-
tainment system through the In-Car store.
●
Full Link.
●
Data package. Pay per use data rates for the
use of online functions, for example, 2 GB per
month.
Note
●
The public emergency call service is avail-
able regardless of whether the infotainment
system is logged in.
●
Customisation and purchase of In-Car ap-
plications require logging into infotainment
system, but the activation of the vehicle in a
SEAT CONNECT account is not necessary.
Activation of SEAT CONNECT and S-
PIN
The following steps are necessary for the ac-
tivation of SEAT CONNECT (including registra-
tion):
●
Create a user account through the infotain-
ment system in the User Management menu.
●
Place the SEAT CONNECT order and activate
it.
●
Add the vehicle to your user account.
●
Prove ownership.
●
Prove your identity. It is only necessary if you
are to run SEAT CONNECT services relevant to
security.
●
To activate it, proceed as follows:
9.2” HOME > Manage users > Become
primary user.
8.25” MENU > Settings > SEAT Connect
> Register.
Follow the rest of the indications and the infor-
mation shown in the infotainment system. Dur-
ing activation, you may be asked to create an
S-PIN.
Update option
9.2” Infotainment yes
8.25” Infotainment yes
SEAT CONNECT portal yes
SEAT CONNECT application yes
S-PIN
The S-PIN is a sequence of several digits, which
can be selected when completed the SEAT
CONNECT registration.
When creating the S-PIN, avoid easy-to-guess
number sequences and known dates of birth.
You can change the S-PIN in the SEAT
CONNECT user account in “Account settings”.
Data transmissions
181
SEAT CONNECT
The S-PIN is necessary, for example, to protect
your user profile or to run a SEAT CONNECT
service relevant to the security of your vehicle.
You must manage this S-PIN with absolute con-
fidentiality.
If you reveal the S-PIN to third parties, for secur-
ity reasons you must change it immediately.
Ownership and identity accredita-
tion
Depending on the Infotainment system, the
ownership accreditation method will be the 2-
key method or the registration code method.
9.2” Infotainment system
To become a main user and thus prove own-
ership of the vehicle, you need both of the ve-
hicle’s physical keys. Ownership accreditation
takes place in the vehicle during registration or,
if you already have a SEAT CONNECT user ac-
count, you must log in through the infotainment
system and then go to User management.
●
Switch on the ignition and the infotainment
system.
●
In the infotainment system, register in SEAT
CONNECT.
●
Or: open the menu Manage users > Settings
> Become primary user and follow the instruc-
tions.
●
Press the unlock button on the
first vehicle
key.
●
Press the unlock button on the second vehi-
cle key.
8.25” Infotainment system
To become the main user and therefore ac-
credit ownership of the vehicle, you will need
the registration code found on the SEAT website
and in the APP after linking the vehicle to your
account (My Garage > Add Vehicle > Accept
terms and conditions and SEAT privacy pol-
icy). Ownership is accredited inside the vehicle.
Go to Vehicle settings > SEAT CONNECT >
Registration and enter the pairing code shown
on the website or in the App.
Once the infotainment system has processed
the orders by radiofrequency, the accreditation
of the ownership will have been completed.
You can control the current status in the SEAT
CONNECT portal.
How is ownership accredited?
9.2” Infotainment 2-Key method.
8.25” Infotainment Pairing code.
SEAT CONNECT portal No, it is not possible
SEAT CONNECT appli-
cation
No, it is not possible
Identity accreditation (SEAT Ident)
Identity accreditation must be done before you
can use SEAT CONNECT services that are rele-
vant to security, such as the “Remote Opening”
service. Identity accreditation can be done in
two ways:
●
In person at the SEAT dealership.
●
You can find more information about SEAT
Ident on the SEAT CONNECT website.
Legal provisions
During the use of SEAT CONNECT services, in-
formation is transferred and processed online
through the vehicle. Such data can also provide
(at least indirectly) information about the driver
in question, for example, driving behaviour and
location. As a contracting party in the SEAT
CONNECT contract with SEAT, S.A., you must
ensure that when your vehicle is used by other
drivers (for example, family or friends), data
protection and personal rights are respected.
Therefore, you must inform drivers in advance
that the vehicle transfers and receives data on-
line, and that you can access such data.
Not taking into account this obligation to inform,
can infringe certain rights of the occupants.
Users can manage data sending and transfers
through the privacy mode at any time.
182
Data transmissions
Follow-up services: ask all occupants
The follow-up services need geographical and
vehicle data to determine whether the vehicle is
being used within defined speed ranges, where
it has been parked or if it is being used in an es-
tablished geographical area. This information is
displayed on the SEAT CONNECT portal and in
the SEAT CONNECT app.
Therefore, before moving o, ask all the vehi-
cle occupants if they agree with the activated
services. If they do not, deactivate the service in
question (if possible) or do not allow the occu-
pants to use the vehicle.
GPS tracking: marking
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted control unit
that transmits its current geographical position
and speed, the vehicle usually has this GPS
marking, e.g. on the ceiling console. The ab-
sence of the marking on the vehicle does not
guarantee that the control unit does not trans-
mit the vehicle’s current geographical position
and speed.
Personal information
SEAT protects your personal data and only
uses them, as long as the law allows it or you
have given your consent on the occasion of a
use. You will find detailed information on data
processing in relation to SEAT CONNECT serv-
ices in the Privacy Policy, which you can ac-
cess in its corresponding current version on the
SEAT website.
Permanent transfer of the vehicle
If another person has left you the vehicle for
permanent use (for example, if you buy a used
vehicle), SEAT CONNECT may already be acti-
vated and the previous user still has the possi-
bility of accessing the data registered through
SEAT CONNECT and control certain functions
of your vehicle.
In the infotainment system you can check if
your vehicle is assigned to a person as the
main user. In this case, you can register yourself
as the main user of the vehicle and thus auto-
matically delete the previous main user. Alter-
natively, through the infotainment system you
can directly and permanently delete the previ-
ous user as the main user, as well as put the
vehicle in oine mode and thus limit both the
communication of your vehicle with the SEAT,
S.A. data server and the processing of personal
and vehicle data.
Deactivating SEAT CONNECT serv-
ices
The following functions are available to acti-
vate and deactivate the SEAT CONNECT serv-
ices:
●
Allow or prevent data transmissions through
the infotainment system ›››page183, Privacy
mode.
●
Whenever possible: individual deactivation or
activation ›››page183.
You can run the relevant services again after
cancelling their deactivation.
Note
The services required by law and their data
transmission cannot be disconnected or de-
activated, for example, the emergency call
system (eCall).
Faults
Even if the prerequisites for the use of SEAT
CONNECT services are met, there may be fac-
tors beyond the control of SEAT, S.A. that inter-
fere with the execution of such services or pre-
vent them. These may be specifically:
●
Maintenance, repair, deactivation, software
update and technical expansion of telecommu-
nication equipment, satellites, servers and data
banks.
●
Change of the mobile telephony standard
for the transmission of mobile data by the tele-
communications service provider, for example,
from UMTS to EDGE or GPRS.
●
Disconnection of an existing mobile phone
standard by the telecommunications service
provider.
●
Interference, disturbance or interruption in
the reception of the mobile phone and GPS sig-
nal due to aspects such as high-speed driving,
solar storms, meteorological influences, topog-
Data transmissions
183
Privacy mode
raphy, blocking equipment and the intensive
use of mobile phones in the radio cells in ques-
tion.
●
When in areas with zero or insucient mobile
telephony or GPS signal. Also, for example, in
tunnels, confined areas between very tall build-
ings, garages, underpasses, mountains and val-
leys.
●
External information from third party supplies
available with limitations, incomplete or incor-
rect, e.g. representations of maps.
●
Countries and regions where SEAT CONNECT
is not oered.
Service management
Open the settings in Users and go to Privacy
settings and services. In vehicles fitted with
the 9.2” Infotainment, it is accessed from Users
> Settings > Private Mode (deactivation of
services). In vehicles equipped with the 8.25”
Infotainment it is accessed from Settings >
SEAT Connect > Privacy settings and serv-
ices. You can do the following in the infotain-
ment system:
●
Check which SEAT CONNECT services are
currently available in the vehicle.
●
The number of SEAT CONNECT services that
are enabled or disabled.
●
Activate or deactivate SEAT CONNECT serv-
ices.
Note
If you deactivate all SEAT CONNECT serv-
ices, the vehicle can still transmit emergency
call (eCall) data.
Privacy mode
Introduction
With the “Privacy” function, data transmissions
between the vehicle and the Internet can be
allowed or blocked.
The desired mode can be set in vehicle settings
in the infotainment system.
Data transmission by external devices and their
communication with the vehicle cannot be
blocked using the “Privacy” function.
The services required by law and their data
transmission cannot be disconnected or deac-
tivated, for example, the emergency call system
(eCall).
Note
Please note that all vehicle users can config-
ure individual settings in the “Privacy” func-
tion. These settings may not match those de-
sired by the vehicle owner.
Privacy and services settings
SEAT CONNECT services can be activated and
deactivated individually. To do this, just check
the box corresponding to the service you want
to activate or deactivate. Use the privacy mode
option if you want to deactivate all of the serv-
ices at the same time.
Privacy mode
Allows you to deactivate or activate the serv-
ices depending on the selected privacy level.
Tracking
Share location. Main users and
co-users can view position data on
the SEAT CONNECT portal or app.
Location
Use location. Position, vehicle,
and user data are used for services.
Personal
No location. Only the vehicle
data and user data are used for
services.
Incognito
Maximum privacy. Your serv-
ices are disabled. Only services re-
quired for legal reasons use data.
Setting options are not available in all markets
or in all vehicle models.
184
Data transmissions
no icon
Connectivity status indication
The following symbols indicate the respective
data transmission status in the infotainment
system.
Symbol white: full connectivity, all serv-
ices active
Symbol grey: limited connectivity, some
services may not be available.
No connectivity, no services available.
WLAN access point
Introduction
✓ Not available on vehicles without SEAT CONNECT
and without navigation
The infotainment system can be used to share
a WLAN connection with up to 8 devices
›››page184, Configuration for sharing a
connection over WLAN.
The infotainment system can also use the WLAN
hotspot of an external device to provide Inter-
net to the devices connected to the hotspot
(WLAN client) ›››page185.
Note
●
Data transmission may incur charges. Due
to the high volume of data exchanged, SEAT
recommends the use of a flat rate tari for
data transmission. Mobile phone operators
can provide the relevant information.
●
Exchanging data packages and purchas-
ing them from third parties may generate
additional costs, depending on your mobile
phone rate, particularly if you are abroad
(for example, roaming rates).
Configuration for sharing a connec-
tion over WLAN
Establishing the connection with the wire-
less network (WLAN)
●
Press the HOME > button.
●
Activate the wireless network. To do this, press
the function button Wi-Fi > Infotainment sys-
tem as hotspot.
●
Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the
device that is to be connected. If necessary,
refer to the manufacturer’s instruction manual.
●
Activate the mobile device assignment in the
infotainment system. To do this, press the func-
tion button Use as hotspot and check the
checkbox.
●
Enter and confirm the network key displayed
on the device.
The following adjustments can also be made in
the Infotainment system as hotspot menu:
●
Security level: WPA2 encryption automati-
cally generates a network key.
●
Network key: Network key automatically
generated. Press the function button to man-
ually change the network key. The network key
must have a minimum of 8 characters and a
maximum of 63.
●
SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of 32
characters).
The wireless (WLAN) connection is established.
To complete the connection, it may be neces-
sary to enter other data into the device.
Depending on the version, it is only possible to
connect in Hotspot mode to get AppConnect,
and a maximum of 5 devices can be connec-
ted.
Repeat this process to connect other devices.
There is also the option of scanning the QR
code by connecting the device directly to the
infotainment system’s Wi-Fi network without
having to enter the password: select Settings
> Wi-Fi > Quick connection to infotainment
system.
An additional feature is that the infotainment
system can provide data to any device over
WPS (Hotspot mode) in the same menu as the
QR code.
Data transmissions
185
Full Link
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
✓ This depends on the equipment and the country
in question.
Wi-Fi Protected Setup allows an encoded local
wireless network to be created quickly and sim-
ply (Settings > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi > Quick
WPS connection).
●
Establish the connection with the wireless
network (WLAN).
●
Press the WPS button on the WLAN router un-
til the warning light on the router starts flashing.
If the WLAN router does not support WPS the
network must be configured manually.
●
OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on the
WLAN router until the WLAN light on the router
starts flashing.
●
Press the WPS button on the WLAN device.
The wireless (WLAN) connection is established.
Repeat this process to connect other devices.
Configure Internet access
The infotainment system can use the WLAN hot-
spot of an external device to establish an Inter-
net connection.
Establishing the connection with the wire-
less network (WLAN)
●
Activate and share a wireless hotspot with In-
ternet on the external device. Refer to the man-
ufacturer’s instruction manual.
●
Press the
HOME > button.
●
Press the Wi-Fi > Connect to Wi-Fi menu and
put a check in the checkbox.
●
Press the Search for Wi-Fi button and select
the device you want from the list.
●
If necessary, enter the network key of the
device in the infotainment system and confirm
with OK.
Manual settings:
●
To manually enter the network settings of an
external (WLAN) device.
The wireless (WLAN) connection is established.
To complete the connection, it may be neces-
sary to enter other data into the device.
Note
Due to the large number of devices on the
market, it is not possible to guarantee fault-
free operation of all functions.
Full Link
Introduction
With Full Link it is possible to view and use
the contents and functions that are shown on
the mobile phone device on the infotainment
screen.
To do this, the mobile phone device must
be connected with the infotainment system
through a USB interface.
Some technologies can also be used by Wire-
less Full Link through the Bluetooth® interface
and a Wi-Fi connection.
The following technologies may be availa-
ble:
●
Apple CarPlay™
●
Apple CarPlay™ Wireless
●
Android Auto™
●
Android Auto™ Wireless
●
MirrorLink®
The availability of the technologies that Full Link
includes depends on the country and the mo-
bile phone device used.
You will find more information on the SEAT web-
site (www.seat.com).
Access the Full Link main menu
Browsing the Full Link main menu depends on
the infotainment system used.
●
Press Home > Full Link
Configure Wireless Full Link
In order to use Wireless Full Link, you must first
pair the mobile phone device with the infotain-
ment system. To do this, proceed as follows:
186
Data transmissions
Connect a mobile phone device for the first
time.
●
Unlock the mobile phone device.
●
Enable Wi-Fi reception and Bluetooth® on the
mobile phone device.
●
Connect the mobile phone device to the info-
tainment system using a USB cable or via Blue-
tooth®.
●
Access the Full Link main menu, if it is not
displayed automatically.
●
Select the mobile phone device and the
technology you want.
●
Confirm authorisation inquiries on the mobile
phone device to grant the necessary authorisa-
tions to the infotainment system.
●
Disconnect the USB connection and connect
with the infotainment system again via Wi-Fi or
Bluetooth®. Wireless Full Link is now configured.
The pairing has concluded. The connected mo-
bile phone device can also use Wireless Full
Link from now on without the USB connection.
If pop-up menus are rejected during the con-
nection process, Wireless Full Link will not be
available. In this case, SEAT recommends delet-
ing the devices in both the telephone settings
and the infotainment system, and restarting the
connection process.
WARNING
The use of applications while driving can dis-
tract your attention from the trac. Any dis-
traction aecting the driver in any way can
lead to an accident and cause injuries.
●
Always drive as carefully and responsibly
as possible.
WARNING
Any applications that are not suitable or ex-
ecute incorrectly may cause damage to the
vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.
●
Protect the mobile phone device and its
applications from inappropriate use.
●
Never carry out modifications to the appli-
cations.
●
Follow instructions in the instruction man-
ual for the mobile phone device.
NOTICE
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
caused to the vehicle as a result of the use
of applications that are of poor quality or
are defective, the inadequate programming
of the applications, the insucient coverage
of the network, the loss of data during trans-
mission or the improper use of mobile phone
devices.
Note
●
Wireless Full Link may not be compatible
with all technologies.
●
When crossing the border into countries
with permitted radio frequencies dierent to
those in your own country, running the Full
Link Wireless function may be restricted or
even unavailable due to legal regulations.
This can also be indicated by a message in
the infotainment system. Running Full Link via
cable is not aected by this restriction and
can continue to be used.
Applications (apps)
With SEAT Full Link, the display of the contents
of SEAT applications and other providers instal-
led on mobile phone devices can be transferred
to the infotainment screen.
In the case of third-party applications, there
may be compatibility problems.
Applications, their use and the necessary mo-
bile phone connection may be pay per use.
The oer of applications can be varied and de-
signed for a vehicle or a specific country. The
content and volume of applications, as well as
the companies that oer them, may vary. Some
applications also depend on the availability of
third-party services.
It cannot be guaranteed that all the applica-
tions oered will work on all mobile phone devi-
ces or with all their operating systems.
Data transmissions
187
Full Link
The applications oered by SEAT can be modi-
fied, cancelled, deactivated, reactivated and
extended without prior notification.
To avoid distracting the driver while driving, only
certified applications can be used.
Full Link symbols and settings
To show more information.
To open the Full Link settings menu
To select Apple CarPlay technology.
To select Android Auto™ technology.
To select MirrorLink® technology.
Apple CarPlay™
In order to use Apple CarPlay, the following re-
quirements must be met:
●
The iPhone™ must be compatible with Apple
CarPlay™.
●
Voice control (Siri ™) must be active on the
iPhone™.
●
Apple CarPlay™ must be active without limi-
tations in the iPhone™ settings.
●
If this is not possible via Apple CarPlay™ Wire-
less, the iPhone™ must be connected to the
infotainment system via a USB connection. Only
USB connections with data transmission are
suitable for the use of Apple CarPlay™.
●
The USB cable used must be an original Ap-
ple™ cable.
Apple CarPlay™ Wireless
: Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi
must also be activated on the iPhone™.
Establish connection
When you first connect an iPhone™, follow the
instructions on the infotainment system screen
and on the iPhone ™.
The requirements must be met to use Apple
CarPlay™.
Launch Apple CarPlay™:
●
Press HOME > Full Link to access the Full
Link main menu.
●
Press Apple CarPlay™ to establish a connec-
tion with the iPhone™.
Disconnecting
●
On the Apple CarPlay™ mode, press the SEAT
icon to access the Full Link main menu.
●
Press to interrupt the active connection.
The representation of function buttons on the
screen may vary.
Special characteristics
During an active Apple CarPlay™ connection,
the following characteristics are applicable:
●
Bluetooth® connections between the
iPhone™ and the infotainment system are not
possible.
●
If there is an active Bluetooth® connection, it
is automatically interrupted.
●
The phone functions are only available
through Apple CarPlay™. The functions descri-
bed for the Infotainment system are not availa-
ble.
●
The connected iPhone™ cannot be used as
a media device in the Media main menu.
●
It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-
tion system and the Apple CarPlay™ navigation
system at the same time. The last route started
interrupts the one that was previously active.
●
Depending on the infotainment system you
use, on the instrument panel screen you can
view data from the Telephone mode.
●
Depending on the infotainment system you
use, on the instrument panel screen you can
view data from the Media mode.
●
The instrument panel screen does not display
any indication to turn.
●
With the multifunction steering wheel you can
accept or reject incoming calls, as well as end
an ongoing telephone conversation.
Voice control
●
Press briefly to start voice control using
the infotainment system.
●
Press this button for a long time to start voice
control (Siri™) of the connected iPhone™.
188
Data transmissions
Note
●
The availability of technologies depends
on the country and may vary.
●
You will find information about technical
requirements, compatible iPhones, certified
applications and their availability on the
SEAT (www.seat.com) and Apple CarPlay ™
websites, or at SEAT dealerships.
Android Auto™
Requirements for Android Auto™
In order to use Android Auto™, the following re-
quirements must be met:
●
The mobile phone device, called smartphone
from here on, must be compatible with Android
Auto™.
●
The smartphone must have an Android Auto™
application installed.
●
If this is not possible via Android Auto Wireless,
the smartphone must be connected via the USB
connection with data transmission to the info-
tainment system.
●
The USB cable used must be an original ca-
ble provided by the smartphone manufacturer.
Android Auto Wireless: Bluetooth® and WLAN
(Wi-Fi) also have to be active on the smart-
phone.
Establish connection
When you first connect a smartphone, follow
the instructions on the infotainment system
screen and on the smartphone.
The requirements must be met to use Android
Auto™.
Launch Android Auto™:
●
Press HOME > Full Link to access the Full Link
main menu.
●
Press Android Auto™ to establish a connec-
tion with the smartphone.
Disconnecting
●
In Android Auto™ mode, press the / Exit
icon to access the Full Link main menu.
●
Press to interrupt the active connection.
Special characteristics
During an active Android Auto™ connection, the
following characteristics are applicable:
●
An active Android Auto™ device can be con-
nected at the same time via Bluetooth® (HFP
profile) with the infotainment system.
●
It is possible to use the phone’s functions
through Android Auto™. If the Android Auto™
device is connected at the same time via Blue-
tooth® with the infotainment system, the tele-
phone function of the infotainment can also be
used.
●
An active Android Auto™ device
cannot be
used as a media device in the Media main
menu.
●
It is not possible to use the built-in navigation
system and the Android Auto™ navigation sys-
tem at the same time. The last route started
interrupts the one that was previously active.
●
Telephone and Media data can be displayed
on the instrument cluster screen.
●
With the multifunction steering wheel you can
accept or reject incoming calls, as well as end
an ongoing telephone conversation.
Voice control
●
Press briefly to start voice control using
the infotainment system.
●
Press and hold this button to start voice con-
trol (Google Assistant) on the connected smart-
phone.
Note
●
The availability of technologies depends
on the country and may vary.
●
You will find information about technical
requirements, compatible mobile phone de-
vices, certified applications and their avail-
ability on the SEAT (www.seat.com) and An-
droid Auto™ websites, or at SEAT dealerships.
Data transmissions
189
Full Link
APP
MirrorLink®
Requirements for MirrorLink®
In order to use MirrorLink®, the following re-
quirements must be met:
●
The mobile device must be compatible with
MirrorLink®.
●
The mobile phone device must be connec-
ted to the infotainment system via a USB con-
nection that is suitable for data transmission.
●
The USB cable used must be an original ca-
ble provided by the mobile phone device man-
ufacturer.
●
Depending on the mobile phone device used,
a Car-Mode application that is suitable for us-
ing MirrorLink® must be installed.
Establish connection
When you first connect a mobile phone device,
follow the instructions on the infotainment sys-
tem screen and on the mobile phone device.
The requirements must be met to use Mirror-
Link®.
Start MirrorLink®:
●
Press HOME > Full Link to access the
Full Link main menu.
●
Press MirrorLink to connect to the mobile
device.
Disconnecting
●
In MirrorLink® mode, press APP to access
the Full Link main menu.
OR: press to access the MirrorLink® main
menu.
●
Press to interrupt the active connection.
Special characteristics
During an active MirrorLink® connection, the
following characteristics are applicable:
●
An active MirrorLink® device can be connec-
ted to the infotainment system at the same time
via Bluetooth®.
●
If the MirrorLink® device is connected to the
infotainment system via Bluetooth®, the tele-
phone function of the infotainment system can
be used.
●
You cannot use an active MirrorLink® device
as a media device in the Media main menu.
●
On the instrument panel screen you can view
data from the Telephone mode.
●
The instrument panel screen does not dis-
play any indication to turn or the Media mode.
●
With the multifunction steering wheel you can
accept or reject incoming calls, as well as end
an ongoing telephone conversation.
Function buttons
Function buttons and their function:
Return the Full Link main menu. Here
you can end the MirrorLink® connection,
connect another mobile phone device or
select another technology.
Press to close the open apps. Then press
the apps to be closed or the Close
all function button to close all the open
applications.
Press to display the mobile phone device
screen on the infotainment system screen.
To open the MirrorLink® settings.
Press to return to the MirrorLink® main
menu.
Note
You will find information about technical re-
quirements, compatible mobile phone devi-
ces, certified applications and their availa-
bility on the SEAT (www.seat.com) and Mir-
rorLink® websites, or at SEAT dealerships.
190
Data transmissions
Wired and wireless connec-
tions
USB connection
Fig.134 Centre console: USB input.
Depending on the equipment and the country,
the vehicle may have dierent types of USB
connections.
The USB port can be found in the storage
compartment area of the front centre console
›››Fig.134.
Note
Before switching the ignition on or o, unplug
the appliances from the USB ports to protect
them from any damage caused by fluctua-
tions in voltage.
Infotainment system
191
First steps
Infotainment system
First steps
Introduction
Infotainment functions and settings depend on
the country and equipment.
Before first use
Before the first use, bear in mind the following
points, to take full advantage of the functions
and settings oered:
●
Observe the basic safety warnings
›››page191.
●
Reset the Infotainment factory settings.
●
Search and store favourite radio stations
on the preset buttons so you can tune them
quickly.
●
Use only suitable audio sources and data me-
dia.
●
Pair a mobile phone to use phone manage-
ment through the Infotainment system.
●
Use current maps for navigation.
●
Register in SEAT CONNECT to run the corre-
sponding services.
Current documentation attached
For using infotainment and its components, take
into account, together with this instruction man-
ual, the following documentation:
●
Supplements to your vehicle’s on-board doc-
umentation.
●
Instruction Manual of the mobile phone de-
vice or audio sources.
●
Operating instructions for data media and ex-
ternal players.
●
Manuals for the Infotainment accessories
subsequently installed or used additionally.
●
Description of services when running SEAT
CONNECT services.
Safety instructions
Some function areas may include links to third-
party websites. SEAT, S.A. is not the owner of
the third-party websites accessible through the
links, and assumes no liability for their content.
Some function areas may include outside infor-
mation from third-party providers. SEAT, S.A. is
not responsible for such information being cor-
rect, up-to-date or complete, or for ensuring it
does not infringe the rights of third parties.
Radio stations and owners of data media and
audio sources are responsible for the informa-
tion they transmit.
Bear in mind that parking lots, tunnels, tall
buildings, mountains or due to the operation of
other electrical devices, such as chargers, can
also interfere with the reception of the radio
signal.
Foils or adhesives with metallic layers on the
antenna and on the window panes can inter-
fere with radio reception.
WARNING
The infotainment central computer is inter-
connected with the control units mounted
on the vehicle. Therefore, there is a serious
danger of accident and injury if the central
computer is repaired or disassembled and
reassembled incorrectly.
●
Never replace the central computer with
another used, recycled or from another vehi-
cle at the end of its useful life.
●
The repair or disassembly and reassembly
of the central computer should only be car-
ried out at specialised workshops. SEAT rec-
ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
WARNING
Any distraction aecting the driver in any
way can lead to an accident and cause inju-
ries. Reading the information on the screen
and managing the infotainment system can
distract your attention from trac and cause
an accident.
●
Always drive as carefully and responsibly
as possible.
192
Infotainment system
WARNING
Connecting, inserting or removing an audio
source or data media while driving can dis-
tract your attention from the trac and
cause an accident.
WARNING
Select volume settings that allow you to
easily hear signals from outside the vehicle
at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens).
●
Hearing may be impaired if using too high a
volume setting, even if only for short periods
of time.
WARNING
The following circumstances may result in an
emergency call, phone call or data transmis-
sion not being made or being interrupted:
●
When in areas with zero or insucient mo-
bile telephony or GPS signal. Also in tunnels,
confined areas between very tall buildings,
garages, underpasses, mountains and val-
leys.
●
When in areas with sucient mobile phone
or GPS signal, the telephony network of
the telecommunications provider has inter-
ference or is not available.
●
When the vehicle components necessary
to make emergency calls, phone calls and to
transmit data are damaged, do not work or
do not have sucient electrical power.
●
When the battery of the mobile phone de-
vice is discharged or its charge level is insuf-
ficient.
WARNING
In some countries and some telephone net-
works it is only possible to make an emer-
gency call, if a mobile telephone device is
connected to the telephone interface of the
vehicle, inside it there is an “unlocked” SIM
card with sucient balance to make calls
and with sucient network signal coverage.
WARNING
Read and observe the operating instructions
provided by the manufacturer in question
when using mobile phone devices, data me-
dia, external devices, external audio and
multimedia sources.
WARNING
When changing or connecting an audio
or multimedia source may cause sudden
changes in the volume.
●
Lower the volume before connecting or
switching to audio or multimedia sources.
WARNING
If mobile phone and radiocommunication de-
vices are used without connection to an
external antenna, the maximum electromag-
netic radiation levels inside the vehicle might
be surpassed, thus posing a risk to the health
of the driver and passengers. This is also the
case if the external antenna has not been
correctly installed.
●
Keep a distance of at least 20 centimetres
between the antennas of the mobile phone
device and an active medical device, such as
a pacemaker, as mobile phones might alter
the functioning of these devices.
●
Do not carry a mobile phone switched
on very close or directly on top of an ac-
tive medical device, for instance in a chest
pocket.
●
Immediately turn o the mobile phone if
you suspect it is causing interferences in an
active medical device or any other medical
device.
WARNING
Mobile phones, external devices and acces-
sories that are loose or not properly secured
could move around the passenger compart-
ment during a sudden driving or braking ma-
noeuvre or an accident and cause damage
or injury.
●
Set mobile phone devices, external devices
and their accessories outside the airbag de-
ployment areas or store them securely.
Infotainment system
193
First steps
●
Position the connection cables of the audio
sources and external devices so that they do
not interfere with the driver.
WARNING
The centre armrest may obstruct the driver's
arm movements, which could cause an acci-
dent and severe injuries.
●
Keep the storage compartments of the
centre armrest closed at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
If the light conditions are not good and the
screen is damaged or dirty, the indications
and information displayed on the screen may
not be read or be read incorrectly.
●
The indications and information displayed
on the screen should never induce to take
any risk that compromises safety. The screen
is not a replacement for driver awareness.
WARNING
Radio stations can transmit disaster or haz-
ard announcements. The following condi-
tions prevent such notices from being re-
ceived or issued:
●
When in areas with zero or insucient ra-
dio signal. Also in tunnels, confined areas
between very tall buildings, garages, under-
passes, mountains and valleys.
●
When the frequency bands of the radio
station have interference or are not available
in areas with sucient radio signal recep-
tion.
●
When the speakers and the vehicle com-
ponents necessary for radio reception are
damaged, do not work or do not have su-
cient electrical power.
WARNING
Switch o mobile phone devices in areas
with a risk of explosion!
WARNING
The driving recommendations and trac in-
dications shown on the navigation system
may dier from the current trac situation.
●
Trac signs, signalling systems, trac
regulations and local circumstances prevail
over driving recommendations and naviga-
tion system indications.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style to
suit visibility, weather, road and trac condi-
tions.
●
Certain circumstances can significantly in-
itially planned lengthen both the duration of
the trip and the route to the destination, or
even temporarily prevent navigation to it, for
example, if a road is closed to trac.
NOTICE
In areas where special regulations apply or
the use of mobile phones is forbidden, the
mobile device in question must be switched
o at all times. The radiation produced by a
mobile phone device when switched on may
interfere with sensitive technical and medi-
cal equipment, possibly resulting in malfunc-
tion or damage to the equipment.
NOTICE
If the playback volume is excessive or distor-
ted, the speakers may be damaged.
194
Infotainment system
Overview and controls
Connect System
Fig.135 Overview: control unit
1
Touch screen. The infotainment functions
can be used through the screen.
2
Navigation Menu
3
Full Link menu
4
Turn volume up
5
Turn volume down
6
Turn the infotainment on/o
7
HOME button.
: main menu with widget views.
: main menu in tile mode.
Infotainment system
195
Overview and controls
Media System
Fig.136 Overview: control unit and indication in
the 8.25-inch version
1
Touch screen. The infotainment functions
can be used through the screen.
2
Rotary push button (to adjust the volume
and to switch the infotainment on/o)
3
Rotary push button (to search and select)
4
HOME button (to open the start page)
5
Radio/Multimedia ›››page203
6
Telephone ›››page217
7
Full Link ›››page185
8
Vehicle information ›››page33
9
Vehicle settings ›››page34
196
Infotainment system
General instructions for use
Operating indications
●
The infotainment needs a few seconds for
the complete start-up of the system and during
that time it does not react to inputs. Only the
image of the rear view camera system can be
displayed during system start-up.
●
The display of all indications and the execu-
tion of functions only takes place once the info-
tainment system has finished booting. The du-
ration of the system booting depends on the
number of infotainment functions and may take
longer than normal in the event of very high or
very low temperatures.
●
When using the infotainment system and
corresponding accessories, e.g., headphones,
bear in mind country-specific regulations and
legal provisions.
●
Some functions of the infotainment system
require an active SEAT CONNECT user account
and an Internet connection for the vehicle. The
data transmission must not be limited to per-
form the functions.
●
To use the infotainment system, simply lightly
press a button or touch the screen.
●
For the correct operation of the infotainment
system it is important that it is switched on and
that, if necessary, the time and date of the vehi-
cle are set correctly.
●
If a function button is missing on the screen,
it is not a device defect, but corresponds to the
specific equipment of the country or version.
●
Some infotainment functions can only be se-
lected when the vehicle is at a standstill. In
some countries, the selector lever must also be
in the parking position P or in neutral position N.
It is not a malfunction, but is due to compliance
with legal provisions.
●
Restrictions on the use of devices using Blue-
tooth® technology may apply in some coun-
tries. For further information, contact the local
authorities.
●
If you disconnect the 12 volt battery, turn on
the ignition before restarting the infotainment
system.
●
If the setup is changed, this may change the
display on the screen and in some cases, the
infotainment system may behave in a manner
dierent to that described in this instruction
manual.
●
In some countries, the infotainment system
automatically shuts o when the engine is
switched o and the vehicle's 12-volt battery
charge level is low.
●
Ensure that any repairs or modifications that
need to be carried out on the infotainment sys-
tem are carried out by a specialised workshop.
SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership
for this.
●
Using a mobile phone device inside the vehi-
cle may cause noise in the speakers.
●
On vehicles with park assist, the audio source
volume is automatically lowered when reverse
gear is selected, as well as when the doors are
opened. The volume reduction can be adjusted.
●
Information about the included software and
the license conditions can be found in Set-
tings > Copyright.
●
When selling or lending the vehicle, make
sure that all saved data, files and settings have
been deleted and, if necessary, external audio
sources and data media have been removed.
Note
You will find more information and tips for
using the infotainment system in the Help
menu.
HOME screen
In the control and display unit you can set
up the views and representation on the home
screen or use the factory setting templates.
If an icon is missing on the screen, it is not a
device defect, but corresponds to the specific
equipment of the country or version.
The following menus can be included as an
icon on the home screen:
Main menus on the home screen
Navigation ›››page210
Infotainment system
197
General instructions for use
Radio ›››page203, Media
›››page207
Telephone ›››page217
Full Link ›››page185
Settings ›››page198
Vehicle ›››page34
Data ›››page33
Air conditioning ›››page99
Sound
Users
Store
Legal
Help
Managing the infotainment system
Execute the functions and settings with the info-
tainment controls.
Depending on the equipment, the infotainment
system has dierent controls:
●
Touch screen.
●
Touch zones outside the screen, for example,
Volume (+ -).
●
Function buttons, for example, RADIO or ME-
DIA.
Open the Quick Guide
More information and operating tips can be
found in the Infotainment Quick Guide.
●
Press HOME > Help.
Connecting and disconnecting the infotain-
ment system
The infotainment system turns on when the igni-
tion is switched on, unless it has been manually
turned o beforehand.
The infotainment system starts-up with the last
set volume, provided that this does not exceed
the preset maximum start-up volume.
The infotainment system automatically turns o
when the driver's door is opened, provided the
ignition has been switched o beforehand.
Moving objects and adjusting volume
Move objects on the screen to adapt settings,
for example, with scrollable buttons or to move
the areas of a menu.
Depending on the equipment, menus and dis-
plays can be customised.
Increasing and reducing images or map
sizes
Tip: use your thumb and index finger.
●
Press on the map with both fingers at the
same time and leave them on the screen.
●
To enlarge views, slowly separate one finger
from the other. To reduce views, slowly bring
one finger towards the other.
Note
If you turn on the infotainment system man-
ually with the ignition o, it will automati-
cally turn o after about 30 minutes.
Note
As with most state-of-the-art computer and
electronic equipment, in certain cases the
system may need to be rebooted to make
sure that it operates correctly. To do this, if
appropriate, press and hold the On/O but-
ton of the infotainment system () for approx.
15 seconds until the SEAT logo appears on
the display.
Customising the infotainment sys-
tem
Customise the menus and infotainment views
to quickly access your favourite or most fre-
quently used functions.
198
Infotainment system
The main menu contains function buttons for
accessing all of the Infotainment apps.
Customise shortcuts
At the bottom of the screen you will find short-
cuts to customisable system functions. Use the
settings to delete or replace them, or change
their order.
●
Press and hold one of the icons (or press +
of an empty position) to display an additional
window.
●
Select one of the icons from the apps bar.
●
Press to delete an icon.
●
Click on an icon in the additional window to
replace the value.
●
Hold your finger on one of the icons and drag
it to the desired position.
●
To close the edit mode, press in the addi-
tional window, or press .
Settings (system and sound)
The selection of possible settings varies de-
pending on the country, the equipment in ques-
tion and the equipment of the vehicle.
Modifying settings
The meaning of the following symbols are valid
for all system and sound settings.
All changes are automatically applied when
the menus are closed.
/
The setting is selected and activated
or connected.
/
The setting is not selected, disabled or
disconnected.
To open a drop-down list.
To increase a setting value.
To reduce a setting value.
To go back step by step.
To go forward step by step.
To change a setting value with the
scrollable button without adjusting.
Sound settings
●
Access the sound settings: HOME > .
In the sound settings there may be the following
functions, information and setting options:
●
Equaliser.
●
Position.
●
Settings.
System settings
●
Access the system settings: HOME > .
In the system settings there may be the follow-
ing functions, information and setting options:
●
Screen.
●
Time and date.
●
Language.
●
Additional keypad languages.
●
Units.
●
Voice control.
●
Wi-Fi.
●
Data connection.
●
Manage mobile devices.
●
Reset factory settings.
●
System information.
●
Copyright.
●
Configuration wizard.
Adjust the volume of external audio sources
If you need to increase the playback volume for
the external audio source, first lower the volume
on the infotainment system.
If the sound from the connected audio source
is very low, increase the output volume on
the external audio source. If this is not enough,
change the input volume to medium or high.
If the sound from the connected external audio
source is too loud or distorted, lower the out-
put volume on the external audio source. If this
is not enough, change the input volume to me-
dium or low.
Infotainment system
199
General instructions for use
1)
Equipment name: Media System.
Clean the screen
Remove persistent dirt carefully and without us-
ing aggressive cleaning products. To clean the
screen we recommend that:
●
The infotainment system is switched o.
●
Use a clean, soft cloth dampened with water
›››page300.
●
In case of persistent dirt: soften the dirt by
moistening with a little water. Then carefully re-
move with a clean, soft cloth.
NOTICE
Cleaning the screen with inappropriate
cleaning products or when dry, may damage
it.
●
When cleaning, only press lightly.
●
Do not use aggressive cleaning products
or that contain solvents. Such products
may damage the equipment and darken the
screen.
Trademarks, licenses and copyrights
Registered trademarks and licenses
Certain terms in this manual bear the symbol
® or ™. These symbols indicate that they are
trademarks or registered trademarks. The ab-
sence of this symbol, however, does not neces-
sarily mean that the term in question can be
used freely.
Other product names are registered trade-
marks of the respective rights holders.
●
Manufactured under license from Dolby Lab-
oratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
●
Manufactured under license from Dolby Lab-
oratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
●
Android Auto™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
●
Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark of Apple Inc.
●
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth® SIG, Inc.
●
iPod®, iPad® and iPhone® are trademarks of
Apple Inc.
●
MirrorLink® and MirrorLink® Logo are certified
trademarks of Car Connectivity Consortium
LLC.
●
Windows® is a registered trademark of Micro-
soft Corporation, Redmond, USA.
●
MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technology
and patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS.
●
This product is protected by certain Microsoft
Corporation industrial and intellectual property
rights. The use or commercialization of technol-
ogy of this type outside the configuration of this
product, without a licence from Microsoft or an
authorised Microsoft branch is prohibited.
Copyright
As a general rule, audio and video files stored
on data media and audio sources are subject to
intellectual property protection in accordance
with the national and international provisions
applicable in each case. Please bear in mind all
legal provisions!
Technical data
Radio with integrated hardware (8.25 ")
1)
The factory-mounted radio in the vehicle with
integrated hardware includes country-specific
components and software for connectivity and
for the execution of vehicle, comfort and info-
tainment functions.
The corresponding indications are displayed on
the radio screen and partly on the instrument
panel.
●
Capacitive colour screen:
–
8.25 inch version, TFT, WVGA: 1082 x 480
pixels.
●
Touch operation via the device screen, rotary
push-button, menu button and buttons on the
multifunction steering wheel.
200
Infotainment system
1)
Equipment name: Connect System
Central computer with control and display
unit
1)
The factory-mounted central computer in the
vehicle includes country-specific components
and software for connectivity and for the ex-
ecution of vehicle, comfort and infotainment
functions.
The corresponding indications are shown on
the control and display unit screen and partly
on the instrument panel.
●
Capacitive colour screen
●
Using the equipment with:
–
Touch zones Touch operation.
–
Buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
–
Proximity sensors and gesture control.
HOME > Settings > Display.
Vehicle and comfort functions
●
Assistants system settings.
●
Heating and air conditioning settings.
●
Lights and visibility function settings.
●
Vehicle comfort settings.
●
Parking and manoeuvring settings.
Sound system (basic equipment):
The infotainment system that is supplied from
the factory is equipped as follows:
●
Speakers in dierent locations and with dif-
ferent power levels (watts).
●
Internal amplifier depending on the system:
–
4 speakers: 2 x 20 W
–
6 speakers: 4 x 20 W
Setting options:
●
Equaliser, depending on the system:
–
4 speakers: treble, mid and bass.
–
6 speakers: 5 frequency bands and default
settings.
●
Sound distribution, depending on the system:
–
4 speakers: Balance (left / right)
–
6 speakers: Balance + Fader (left / right /
front / rear).
●
Sound optimisation by zones (valid for the 6-
speaker system):
–
Manual (Driver and All)
–
Automatic depending on the seats occu-
pied.
Optional sound system
The infotainment system that is supplied from
the factory is equipped as follows:
●
7 speakers in dierent locations and with dif-
ferent power levels (watts).
●
External amplifier (Ethernet or CAN depend-
ing on the 300W infotainment system), which
processes the audio signals sent by the central
computer.
●
Excitation of speaker channels through class
AB final stages.
●
Audio signal processing in digital internal sig-
nal processor (DSP).
●
Independent subwoofer in the luggage com-
partment.
Setting options:
●
Equaliser, depending on the system:
–
User equaliser: 5 bands.
–
Sound distribution: Balance + Fader (left /
right / front / rear).
●
Sound optimisation by zones:
–
Manual (Driver, Front and All)
●
Subwoofer volume
Wi-Fi
●
Wi-Fi conforming to IEEE 802.11 b/g/n.
●
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz transfer (depending on
the country).
Infotainment system
201
Voice control
●
Apple Car Play™ and Android Auto™ over Wi-
Fi
●
Simultaneous connection of up to 8 Wi-Fi de-
vices.
●
Media System:
–
5GHz access point for Full Link Wireless
only
●
Connect System:
–
Access point
–
Tethering
–
Pairing process simplified by WPS or QR
code
Bluetooth® profiles
There can be a maximum of two mobile devices
connected to the Bluetooth® hands-free and a
third device connected to the Bluetooth® as a
music player.
When a mobile phone is connected to the tele-
phone management system, a data exchange
takes place via one of the Bluetooth® profiles.
●
Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): the
HFP can be used to manage calls through the
infotainment system.
●
Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allows au-
dio to be transmitted with stereo quality. It may
require connecting other profiles for managing
and controlling playback.
●
Phone book access profile (PBAP): Allows
phone book contents to be downloaded from
the mobile telephone.
●
Messaging
profile (MAP): It allows short
messages (SMS) and emails to be downloaded
and synchronised.
Voice control
Introduction
Voice control works both online and oine, tak-
ing into account the aspects indicated in the
section “Languages available depending on
the market”. In online mode, commands are re-
corded more accurately, as more data is avail-
able.
Voice control understands questions and ex-
pressions without having to learn commands.
Commands can be formulated freely and can
be colloquial. Command proposals can be
found in the infotainment system, for example
in the
Help > Voice control menu.
Functions are reduced in oine mode.
Loud noises inside or outside the vehicle can
cause malfunctions, as well as confusing phra-
ses and answers.
Languages available depending on the mar-
ket
●
Online and oine: German, American Eng-
lish, British English, French, Italian, Spanish,
Czech, Dutch, Polish, Portuguese, Swedish,
Danish and Norwegian. These languages have
advanced functions such as Online Com-
mands, natural interaction, etc.
The other languages of the infotainment system
do not oer natural interaction.
Requirements
●
Online and oine: voice control with the cor-
responding infotainment installed in the vehicle.
●
Online: current SEAT CONNECT Plus contract
active.
Note
●
Voice control only recognises commands
in the language that is set in the infotainment
system.
●
Test the voice control with the vehicle stop-
ped before starting to move to familiarise
yourself with its operation.
●
Online voice search will be faster and more
reliable if the “Use location” privacy setting
is selected.
●
Voice control can only control functions
that are available as part of the vehicle’s
equipment.
Wake word and commands
Voice control wake words
Voice control starts when the infotainment rec-
ognises the wake word.
202
Infotainment system
If you have connected the voice control via the
wake word, the connected infotainment replies
with “What would you like to do? ”.
●
OR: after the wake word, say the desired
command, for example: “Hola Hola” and then
“heating”.
The system scans the words spoken in the vehi-
cle after the wake word.
Connect and disconnect the wake word
●
Press HOME > Settings > Voice control >
Activate / deactivate wake word.
Wake word: Hola Hola
Commands
To help the voice control recognise commands
reliably:
●
Pronounce clearly. Confusing commands are
not recognised. Speak in a normal tone of
voice. Speak a little louder if you are driving at
high speed.
●
Avoid outside noises. Open windows and
doors can interfere with voice control.
●
Avoid other secondary noises, such as con-
versations in the vehicle. Do not direct the air
flow from the outlets towards the microphone
or the interior lining of the roof.
●
Do not make long pauses.
Voice control is active and recognises
the words pronounced.
Note
●
When the activation word is disconnected,
the infotainment system cannot be activated
by means of the activation word. Voice con-
trol is still available via the button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
●
Availability depends on country and equip-
ment.
Start and stop voice control
Depending on the equipment, you can start
voice control in dierent ways.
Start voice control
●
Voice control activation: say the word that
activates voice control.
●
Multifunction steering wheel: press the voice
control button .
In some cases you can also start voice con-
trol of the connected mobile phone device, by
pressing and holding the voice control button.
Manually ending voice control
Voice control can be cancelled with the Can-
cel command.
●
Multifunction steering wheel: press the voice
control button twice in a row, or press and
hold.
The voice control ends automatically, if you use
infotainment functions, if the parking system is
activated or by incoming calls.
Infotainment system
203
Radio mode
Radio mode
Introduction
Fig.137 Schematic diagram: Radio view.
In Radio mode you can tune in the available
radio stations in dierent frequency bands and
memorise your favourites on the preset buttons
to access them quickly.
The types of reception and frequency bands
available depend on the equipment and the
country. In certain countries, frequency bands
may stop broadcasting or not be available
again.
Access the RADIO menu
●
Press HOME > ›››Fig.137.
Access the settings
●
Press HOME > > .
Online functions in Radio mode
Online functions in Radio mode are only availa-
ble under the following conditions:
●
SEAT CONNECT or SEAT CONNECT Plus
equipment.
●
You have an active SEAT CONNECT user ac-
count.
●
The vehicle is assigned to your user account.
●
You have a corresponding data package ac-
quired from the In-Car store or have a data
volume for your own mobile phone device via
Wi-Fi access point.
Note
●
For streaming services you need to have an
account with the provider in question.
●
Radio stations are responsible for the con-
tent of the information they transmit. Elec-
trical equipment connected to the vehicle
may also cause interference in radio signal
reception and noise in the loudspeakers.
●
Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to
the windows may aect reception on vehi-
cles with a window aerial.
204
Infotainment system
AM
FM/DAB
Internet radio
TP
Radio equipment and symbols
The functions, as well as the types of reception
and frequency bands available depend on the
equipment and the country.
●
AM tuner.
●
Dual FM receiver (diversity antenna).
●
Summarised FM station list.
●
Merger of DAB and FM stations into one list.
●
Fusion of all stations stored in preset buttons
into one list. Maximum 36 favourite stations.
●
Station logos.
●
DAB presentation (slideshow). Images that
are emitted sequentially.
●
Internet radio.
Universal symbols in Radio mode
To select the desired AM frequency band.
To select the desired FM/DAB fre-
quency band.
To select the type of Internet ra-
dio reception.
Next to the name of the station, monitoring
of active trac information stations (TP).
Symbols on the FM/DAB frequency band
To display the frequency band for manual
selection of the FM frequency. Only possi-
ble when the summary station list is discon-
nected.
DAB not available.
DAB stations support presentations (slide-
show).
Symbols on the AM frequency band
Manually updating the station list.
To display the frequency band for manual
selection of the AM frequency.
Menus in Internet radio mode
Show station selection.
Open text search.
Show the last online radio stations heard.
Show the 100 most played radio stations
and podcasts.
Show available online radio podcasts.
Show online radio stations, grouped by
country.
Show online radio stations by the desired
language.
Show online radio stations whose pro-
gramme belongs to the desired musical
genre.
Selecting, tuning and saving a sta-
tion
Select the frequency band
Before selecting a station you have to select
a frequency band or a type of reception. Dier-
ent stations are available depending on the fre-
quency band selected or the type of reception.
The types of reception and frequency bands
available depend on the equipment and the
country.
●
Select the frequency band or type of recep-
tion: AM, FM/DAB, FM (for devices that do not
have DAB), Internet radio.
Search and select a station
You can select radio stations in dierent ways.
The options vary depending on the frequency
band and the type of reception.
Select via the frequency band (AM and FM)
1.
Activate the frequency band.
2.
Click on the cursor, scroll through the fre-
quency band and release it when you
reach the frequency band you want.
OR: press on a point on the frequency
band. The cursor will automatically jump to
the corresponding frequency.
The station of the set frequency is tuned.
Infotainment system
205
Radio mode
Select from the station list (AM and FM/DAB)
The station list shows the stations that are cur-
rently tunable. In the AM frequency band, you
may have to update the station list if you are no
longer in the area where you last accessed the
station list. In the FM/DAB frequency band, the
station list is automatically updated.
1. Open the station list
2. Press the station you want.
The selected station is tuned. In the case of
FM/DAB and if the station is available, the best
quality reception is automatically selected.
Search and filter stations (Internet radio)
In Online Radio mode, stations can be filtered
by categories and can be searched by text.
1. Open the station list.
2. Select the category by which the stations
are to be filtered.
OR: press to start the text search. The
input field is displayed.
3. Enter the name of the station you want. The
list of the stations found is updated while
entering the text.
4. Press the station you want.
The selected station is tuned.
Search in SCAN mode (AM and FM/DAB)
In SCAN mode the stations are automatically
tuned in a sequential manner and each of them
is played for approx. 5 seconds.
●
To start the SCAN mode, under Settings
press SCAN.
SCAN mode starts and the station currently
tuned in is shown on the screen. Next to it is a
SCAN function button.
●
To select a station press SCAN.
SCAN mode stops and the station is tuned. The
SCAN function button is hidden.
Storing the station on the preset buttons
You can store up to 36 stations of dierent fre-
quency bands and reception types as favour-
ites using the preset buttons.
1. Tune the station you want.
2. Access the preset buttons.
3. Press the preset button and keep it pressed
until the station is stored.
OR: press the station on the station list and
keep it pressed. The preset buttons are dis-
played.
4. Press the preset button.
The station is stored in the selected preset but-
ton.
If a station was already stored in the preset
button, it is overwritten with the new station.
Special functions in Radio mode
Trac information (TP)
The TP function monitors the announcements
of a station with trac information and auto-
matically reproduces them in the Radio mode
or in the multimedia playback that is active. To
do this, you have to be able to tune into a sta-
tion with trac information.
Some stations without their own trac informa-
tion support the TP function by broadcasting
trac information from other stations (EON).
In the AM frequency band or in the Multimedia
mode, a station with trac information in the
background is automatically tuned while it is
possible to tune into a station with trac infor-
mation.
If no station with trac information can be
tuned in, the device automatically searches for
stations with tunable trac information.
Stations with trac information are not availa-
ble in all countries.
Activating and deactivating the TP function
●
In Radio mode or Multimedia mode, press
> Trac programme (TP).
Presentations (SlideShow) in DAB
The slideshow function (SLS) is a feature of digi-
tal radio (DAB) stations, allowing a slideshow of
images, e.g. the station’s logo, to the user.
206
Infotainment system
Activating and deactivating the SLS function
It is possible to deactivate the slideshow func-
tion on DAB radio stations:
●
In the Radio Menu click on the area where
the station information is located, either in the
name or on the additional information (author
or information text).
OR: tap Radio Settings > Display DAB pic-
ture gallery and additional information (acti-
vate/deactivate).
Online radio
Online radio is a type of reception for Internet
radio stations and podcasts that are independ-
ent of AM, FM and DAB. Thanks to Internet
transmission, reception is not limited to the re-
gion.
Online radio is only available through the Inter-
net connection of the active infotainment sys-
tem. The use of online radio can generate ex-
penses due to the transmission of data from the
Internet.
●
In Online radio mode, press and set the audio
quality to high or low to tune the online radio.
Station logos
In the case of some frequency bands, station
logos may already be pre-installed in the info-
tainment system.
If in the FM/DAB frequency band settings the
automatic selection of station logos is acti-
vated, station logos are automatically assigned
to the stations.
In the Online radio mode, the infotainment sys-
tem accesses the station logos of the online
database and automatically assigns them to
the stations.
Assign station logos manually
1. In FM/DAB mode, press Station logos.
2. Press on the icon and then select the
station to which a station logo is to be as-
signed.
3. Select the station logo. If desired, repeat
the same process with other stations.
4. OR: via the menu > Station logos.
Infotainment system
207
Media Mode
Media Mode
Introduction
Fig.138 Schematic diagram: Media view
In Media mode you can play multimedia
files from data media and streaming services
through the infotainment system.
Depending on the equipment, the following
data media can be used:
●
USB storage support (for example, a USB
stick, a mobile phone connected via USB).
●
Bluetooth® device (for example, a mobile
phone or a tablet).
Depending on the equipment, the following
types of multimedia files can be played:
●
Audio files.
●
Video files (depends on the system).
You can also use streaming services. The avail-
ability of streaming services depends on the
equipment and the country.
To use streaming services you need to have
your own user account in the streaming service
in question.
Access the MEDIA menu
●
Press HOME > ›››Fig.138.
Access the settings
●
Press HOME > > .
Limitations and indications of data media
Data media may not work if they have been ex-
posed to high temperatures or have been dam-
aged. Please bear in mind the manufacturer’s
indications.
Quality dierences between data media pro-
duced by dierent manufacturers can cause
multimedia playback malfunctions.
Incorrect configuration on a data media may
cause the data media to be unreadable.
Playlists only specify a playback order and re-
fer to the storage location of the multimedia
files within the folder structure. In a playlist
there are no multimedia files saved. To play a
208
Infotainment system
playlist, multimedia files have to be found in the
storage places of the data media to which the
playlist refers.
Note
SEAT assumes no liability for any deteriora-
tion or loss of files on data storage devices.
Equipment features and media sym-
bols
Audio, multimedia and connectivity:
●
Media playback and control via Bluetooth®.
●
Audio playback in these formats: AAC, ALAC,
AVI, FLAC, MP3, MP4, WMA.
●
Video playback in these formats: MPEG-1
and MPEG-2 (.mpg, .mpeg), ISO MPEG4, DivX
3, 4 and 5 Xvid (.avi), ISO MPEG4 H.264
(.mp4, .m4v, .mov), Windows Media Video 10
(.wmv, .asf).
●
Playlists on any type of device.
●
Multimedia streaming (online).
●
Multimedia search.
Universal symbols in Media mode
Start playback.
Pause playback.
Change to the previous track.
Change to the next track.
Repeat the track that is playing.
Repeat all titles.
Activate the shue playback order.
Display a list of favourites.
Add a media file as favourite.
Top right: select media source.
Access the settings.
Open the search.
Return to the top folder of the media
source.
Select and play a multimedia source
Select multimedia source
Before playing multimedia files you must first
connect a multimedia source.
To use streaming services you must be connec-
ted to the Internet.
●
Connect an external multimedia source.
●
Select the connected media source to be
used for playback.
Playing audio and video files
You can search and play multimedia files from
an available multimedia source in dierent
ways.
Search in the folder structure
Multimedia files can be catalogued by catego-
ries (for example, album, artist, title). In My me-
dia this category view is always displayed. The
classic folder structure of individual USB data
media is also found in My media.
1. Activate the folder structure.
The folder structure of the selected multi-
media source is displayed. When My media
is selected, the categories (music, videos,
playlists) and connected multimedia sour-
ces are displayed first.
2. Search for the title you want in the folder
structure.
OR: press to start a text search The input
field is displayed.
3. Enter the name of the desired title. The list
of the titles found is updated while entering
the text.
4. Press the desired title.
If at the beginning of the playback your se-
lection is in a folder of a multimedia source,
the multimedia files that are in it are also
added to the playback.
If a playlist is played, all available titles in
the playlist are added to the playback.
5.
Close your selection with .
Select favourites
In favourites you can save titles, music genres,
artists and albums individually for playback.
Infotainment system
209
Media Mode
●
Access favourites .
●
Press the favourite you want.
Depending on your selection, all the titles be-
longing to the favourite are added to the play-
back.
Save favourites
Only multimedia files in My media of the info-
tainment system can be saved as favourites.
You can save up to a maximum of 30 titles, al-
bums, artists and music genres individually as
favourites.
1. Start playback.
2. Access favourites.
3. Tap a favourite that is not assigned.
OR: press and hold on an existing favourite
for approx. 3 seconds.
4. Select from the selection list: Title, Album,
Artist, Genres, Playlist.
The selection is saved instead of the previously
selected favourite. If the favourite was already
assigned, the previously saved favourite is over-
written.
The selectable options in the selection list de-
pend on the data attached to the multimedia
file. If the music genre is not indicated in the
music files, for example, you cannot save the
music genre as favourite.
If a video file is playing, only that video can be
saved as favourite.
Configure
streaming services
Depending on the equipment you can use
streaming services directly through the infotain-
ment system. For this you need to have a pre-
mium user account of the streaming service in
question and you have to log in with it in the
infotainment system. You also need to be con-
nected to the Internet.
1. Select Streaming as the multimedia
source.
A list of available streaming services is dis-
played.
2. Select the streaming service you want.
3. Follow the steps indicated by the infotain-
ment system.
The streaming service is added to the list
of multimedia sources as a new function
button.
Playing entertainment content in the
infotainment system
Depending on the infotainment system, videos
can be played.
Video mode
When in video mode, a video can be played
on the infotainment screen if this is stored on a
data media, in My media or is sourced from a
streaming service. In this case, the video sound
is played through the vehicle's speakers.
The image is only displayed if the vehicle is
stopped. When the vehicle is in motion, the in-
fotainment screen turns o. The sound of the
video can still be heard.
A stable Internet connection is required for
playback from a streaming service. In this case,
telephony costs may be generated.
210
Infotainment system
Navigation
Introduction
Fig.139 Schematic diagram: Navigation view.
A global satellite system determines the current
position of the vehicle and the sensors moun-
ted on the vehicle analyse the routes taken.
All measured values and possible trac events
are compared with the available maps to allow
optimal navigation to the destination.
Navigation announcements and graphic repre-
sentations will guide you to your destination.
Navigation management is carried out on the
screen.
Depending on the country, some functions of
the infotainment system will not be available
on the screen when travelling above a certain
speed. It is not a malfunction, but is due to com-
pliance with legislation.
Navigation announcements
Navigation announcements are acoustic indi-
cations for driving referred to the current route.
The type and frequency of navigation an-
nouncements depend on the driving situation,
for example, starting the guide to the destina-
tion, driving on the motorway or on a round-
about and the settings.
If the exact destination cannot be reached be-
cause, for example, it is in a non-digitised area,
indications relating to the address and the dis-
tance to the destination are displayed on the
screen.
During dynamic route guidance, you will re-
ceive information about reported trac con-
gestion on the route. An additional navigation
announcement is given if the route is recalcula-
ted due to trac congestion.
While a navigation announcement is playing,
its volume can be adjusted. The following navi-
gation announcements provided will be played
with the newly adjusted volume.
Limitations during navigation
If the infotainment system cannot receive data
from GPS satellites, for example, in a tunnel or
in an underground garage, navigation contin-
ues using the vehicle's sensors.
Infotainment system
211
Navigation
In areas that are not digitised or are only parti-
ally digitised on the infotainment memory, the
infotainment system will still attempt to provide
route guidance.
In the case of missing or incomplete navigation
data, it may not be possible to determine the
exact position of the vehicle. This may mean
that navigation is not as precise as usual.
Roads and streets are subject to constant
change (e.g. new roads, road works, roads
closed to trac, changes to street names and
building numbers). If the navigation data is ob-
solete, this may lead to errors or inaccuracies
during the route guidance.
Managing the navigation map
To allow an optimal view, you can also man-
age the navigation map with additional finger
movements.
Moving the map
Tip: use your index finger
●
Move the map with your finger.
Zoom in
Tip: use your index finger
●
To increase the view in a certain position,
double-click on the map.
Zoom out
Tip: use your index and middle fingers
●
Press on the map with both
fingers at the
same time.
Change view
Tip: use your index finger
●
Press twice on the map and keep your finger
pressed on the screen.
●
To zoom out the view of the map, move your
finger upwards. To zoom in the view of the map,
move your finger downwards.
Change view
Tip: use your thumb and index finger
●
Press on the map with both fingers at the
same time and keep them pressed.
●
To zoom out the view of the map, move one
finger towards the other. To zoom in the view of
the map, move one finger away from the other.
Tilt the view
Tip: use your index and middle fingers
●
Press on the map with both fingers at the
same time and horizontal to each other, keep
them pressed.
●
To tilt the view of the map forward, move your
fingers upwards. To tilt the view of the map
backward, move your fingers downwards.
Rotate the map
Tip: use your thumb and index finger
●
Press on the map with both
fingers at the
same time and keep them pressed.
●
To rotate the map view, turn your fingers
clockwise anticlockwise.
Saved data
The infotainment system saves certain data, for
example, frequent routes and position data, to
make the entry of the destination more agile
and optimise the route guidance.
Delete saved data
●
Press Settings > Basic function settings >
Delete and then Accept.
WARNING
Select the settings, enter the destination and
the modifications for navigation only with the
vehicle at a standstill.
Note
●
If a detour is passed during route guidance,
navigation may recalculate the route.
●
The quality of the navigation recommen-
dations given by the Infotainment system de-
pends on the navigation data available and
any reported trac congestions.
●
Navigation announcements are not emit-
ted if the sound is muted in the infotainment
system.
212
Infotainment system
Navigation functions and symbols
Navigation
Navigation functions depend on the equipment
and country.
Functions
●
Entering the destination and route calcula-
tion (oine and online).
●
Display of two navigation maps at the same
time (screen and instrument cluster).
●
Update of online maps.
●
Predictive navigation.
●
3D urban maps.
●
Online trac information.
●
Dynamic POIs (points of interest).
Symbols on the map
The buttons and indications depend on the set-
tings and the current driving situation.
Symbols for trac events and points of inter-
est (POIs) are displayed on the map, for exam-
ple, petrol stations, train stations or interesting
stopovers, provided navigation has such data
›››page215.
Current position.
Search for destinations.
Destinations along the route.
Final destination.
Home address.
Work address.
Favourite destinations.
Additional window with more options.
Additional window with route options.
Centre the map on the current position.
Change view: 2D oriented to the north, or
2D oriented to the direction of travel, or
3D to the direction of travel.
Information about the current route guid-
ance.
Map scale.
Symbols in the additional window
●
To open the additional window, press .
Repeat the last navigation announcement.
Volume of navigation announcements.
Map lighting in Automatic, Day or Night
mode.
Oer new guidance routes.
Other symbols
Entering the detailed destination for an ad-
dress.
Search for destinations.
Frequent destinations.
Last destinations.
Favourite destinations.
Back
Symbols in the route details
Current position.
Destination of the current guidance.
POI symbols (points of interest)
POIs (points of interest) are shown on the map,
provided the navigation has said data.
Click on the desired POI (point of interest) to
start a route guidance ›››page213.
Petrol station.
Parking lot.
Tourist information oces.
Train station.
Restaurant.
Trac information.
POIs (points of interest) are shown on the
map, provided the navigation has said data
›››page215.
Click on a trac event to open an additional
window with further details ›››page215.
Slow trac.
Trac jam.
Infotainment system
213
Navigation
Accident.
Broken down vehicle.
Slippery surface (ice or snow).
Road closed to trac.
Slippery road hazard.
Danger.
Road works.
Strong wind.
Reduced visibility.
Navigation data
The Infotainment system is equipped with a
built-in navigation data memory. Depending
on the country, the necessary navigation data
may already be pre-installed.
To provide correct route guidance and make
the most of the functions oered, the infotain-
ment system should be updated on a regular
basis.
Using obsolete data may lead to errors during
navigation. Current routes cannot be traced or
the route guidances will lead to mistaken desti-
nations.
Ensure navigation data is updated at all times.
Online updating of navigation data
The navigation data of the regions through
which you travel frequently is automatically up-
dated in the background if the Internet connec-
tion is established and the privacy settings are
valid.
●
With the ignition switched on, the navigation
data is updated automatically.
Manual update of navigation data
Current navigation data for large regions, for
example Western Europe, can be downloaded
from www.seat.com and stored on USB data
devices.
●
Download the navigation data to a USB data
device.
●
Turn on the ignition of the vehicle.
●
Connect the USB data device to the infotain-
ment system. Navigation data is automatically
updated in the background.
The map version is displayed in HOME > >
System information.
WARNING
If you update the navigation data manually
while driving, it may cause accidents with se-
rious injuries.
●
Update the navigation data only with the
vehicle at a standstill.
Note
Automatic update of the navigation data is
subject to the privacy settings. No update is
made in incognito mode.
Start route guidance
Depending on the country and equipment, dif-
ferent functions are available to enter destina-
tions.
The dierent functions for entering destinations
are found in the navigation main menu.
Opening the Navigation main menu
●
Press HOME > .
Select the destination and start navigation
1. Press .
2.
Select the desired destination. You can
chose from Frequent destinations,
Last destinations or Favourite desti-
nations.
214
Infotainment system
OR: press and enter the address in the
input screen.
OR: detailed address.
3. Press Start.
Frequent destinations
The destination synopsis uses recorded data to
propose possible destinations.
Select the destination and start navigation:
1. Press and then .
2. Select the desired destination. The route
guidance starts automatically.
Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold
the desired destination for a few seconds.
Recent destinations
Navigation saves the last destinations to make
them available for a route guidance.
Select the destination and start navigation:
1.
Press and then .
2.
Press the desired destination.
3.
Press Start.
Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold
the desired destination for a few seconds.
Favourite destinations
Save up to 20 destinations as favourites.
To save a destination as a favourite press
in
the split screen when entering the destination.
Select the destination and start navigation:
1. Press and then .
2. Press the desired destination.
3. Press Start.
Note
Enter the destination as accurately as possi-
ble. If you enter a destination incorrectly, the
route guidance will not be able to start or it
will guide you to an incorrect destination.
Start route guidance by selecting from the
map
The navigation map includes active areas at
many points that are suitable for entering the
destination. To do this, press the desired posi-
tion or place on the map. If there is map data at
this point, you can start a route guidance.
Whether it is possible to enter the destination
through the navigation map depends on the
state of the data and it is not possible for all
positions.
To start “oroad navigation”, press an empty
area without position data.
Start navigation:
1. Press .
2. Move the view on the map until the desired
position can be selected. The navigation
map can be used by means of additional
finger movements ›››page210.
3. Press the desired destination on the map.
4. Press Route.
Oroad navigation
“Oroad navigation” calculates routes to se-
lected destination points using unknown data.
When a destination point is outside the known
roads or position data, navigation finds the
route to the next point of the known road and
completes the path to the next destination
point with a direct connection.
Start navigation:
1. Move the view on the map until the desired
position can be selected. The navigation
map can be used by means of additional
finger movements ›››page210.
2. Press on any point on the map without posi-
tion data.
3. Press Route.
Start route guidance using contact details
Start route guidance with the saved address
data of a contact. Contacts saved without ad-
dress data cannot be used for route guidance.
Infotainment system
215
Navigation
Start navigation:
1. Press .
2. Press on the contact you want.
3. Press Route.
Note
If the address details of a contact are ob-
solete, the route guidance will nevertheless
take you to the registered address. Check
that the contact address is updated.
Trac information
The infotainment system receives detailed traf-
fic information automatically if the Internet con-
nection is established. This information is shown
with symbols and highlighting the road network
in colour on the map.
Trac incidents
Trac incidents, for example, trac jams or
congested trac, are shown on the navigation
map using symbols.
With an active route guidance, trac incidents
that are on the current route are shown in the
route details. Such trac incidents can be avoi-
ded ›››page215, Function descriptions.
Hazard information
Hazard information is shown on the navigation
map with symbols in the same way as trac
incidents. In this case, the source of this infor-
mation is another vehicle that has detected the
hazard and has uploaded the information to the
service provider.
The hazards shown are: accident, broken down
vehicle and slippery road surface.
Trac flow indication
The navigation map shows trac flow accord-
ing to current trac events, highlighting the
road network in colour.
●
Yellow: Slow trac.
●
Red: Trac jam.
Note
Trac information receipt is subject to the
privacy settings. In maximum Privacy mode,
no trac information is received. Tracking or
Location level setting is necessary.
Function descriptions
Route details
The route details contain information on all inci-
dents, for example, the starting point, stopovers,
trac events, POIs and destination, provided
the navigation has such data.
If you press on an incident, an additional win-
dow opens providing more options. The avail-
able options depend on the incident and the
current settings.
Open and close the route details
●
To open them, press or swipe it.
●
To close them, press or swipe it.
Edit route guidance
To edit the route guidance, move the stopovers
to the destination in the TripView view.
●
Hold the desired destination pressed until it is
visibly highlighted.
●
Move the destination to the desired position.
●
Remove your finger from the screen. The
route will recalculate.
Avoid trac incidents
The details of the route show the current traf-
fic incidents if the navigation has such data.
Avoid trac incidents by editing route details
›››page215.
●
Press on a trac event.
●
Press on Avoid. The route will recalculate.
Split screen
When handling navigation functions, an addi-
tional window with other options may open.
Possible options depend on the function being
used.
216
Infotainment system
Close the additional screen
●
Press on an empty area outside the addi-
tional window.
●
OR: press .
●
OR: press Accept.
Functions in the additional window:
Show on
map
Show what is selected on the map.
Add stop-
over desti-
nation
Add a stopover to the route guid-
ance.
Direct
route
Starts direct route guidance.
Delete Delete a stopover from the route
guidance.
Avoid Avoid trac jam. The route will re-
calculate.
Stop route
guidance
Ends the current route guidance.
Close the additional window.
Add a destination to favourites.
Learn usage pattern
When the vehicle is in motion, navigation saves
routes and destinations used to automatically
generate destination proposals. Destinations
are learned based on the time of day and the
day of the week.
Navigation can propose up to 5 routes at the
same time. The proposed routes may be dier-
ent from the routes of the normal route guid-
ance.
If one of the proposed destinations is selected,
the guide to that destination is started.
The route guidance follows the selected route
until the vehicle deviates from it. In that case,
the route is recalculated and takes you back
along the most direct path to the initially selec-
ted destination.
Important trac jams are taken into account
in the route guidance, and are avoided if alter-
native routes are available, provided navigation
has such data.
You can activate and deactivate the function
whenever you want.
Enable and disable learning usage pattern
The setting is in the corresponding navigation
menu > Basic function settings.
●
To activate the function, activate Learn us-
age pattern.
●
To disable the function, disable Learn usage
pattern.
●
To delete saved data, press Delete usage
pattern.
Infotainment system
217
Telephone interface
Telephone interface
Introduction
Fig.140 Schematic diagram: Phone view.
You can use the telephone interface to connect
your mobile to the infotainment system and op-
erate phone functions through it. The sound is
played through the vehicle's speakers.
You can connect up to two mobile phone devi-
ces simultaneously to the infotainment system.
High speeds, poor weather or road conditions
and a noisy ambience (even outside of the ve-
hicle), as well as the quality of reception can all
aect the quality of a telephone conversation
in the vehicle.
Note
●
As a general rule, pairing a device (for ex-
ample, a mobile phone device) is only nec-
essary once. You can restore the device con-
nection via Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi with the info-
tainment system whenever you want without
having to pair the device again.
●
The availability of some telephone func-
tions will depend on the mobile phone con-
nected to the infotainment system.
Telephone interface equipment and
symbols
Equipment features
●
Hands-free function.
●
Use up to two phones at the same time.
●
Phone book with up to 5,000 contacts, de-
pending on the infotainment system.
●
SMS functions via Bluetooth®: SMS reading,
SMS writing (templates included), SMS play-
back, message history.
●
Email functions via Bluetooth®: reading email,
writing email.
218
Infotainment system
●
Connection to wireless charging option.
●
Connection to the microphone mounted on
the vehicle.
Symbols in the main menu
Contacts.
List of incoming and outgoing calls.
Enter telephone number.
Text messages (SMS and emails).
Telephone interface settings.
Symbols for calls
The symbols may be dierent depending on
the infotainment system.
Start a call or bringing it to the foreground.
End or reject a call.
Open contact list.
Enter telephone number.
Mute the sound of the hands-free
Hold call.
Continue call.
Start conference call.
Pass call to private mode.
Make an emergency call.
Voice mail.
Get help in case of breakdown.
Obtain information on the SEAT brand
and selected additional services related to
trac and your travel.
Call list symbols
●
To open the call lists, press .
Incoming call.
Outgoing call.
Missed call.
Telephone number (company).
Telephone number (private).
Mobile telephone number (company).
Mobile telephone number (private).
Fax (private).
Fax.
Symbols for text messages
The symbols may be dierent depending on
the infotainment system.
●
To open the text messages, press .
Activate voice control input ›››page201.
Templates for text messages.
Places with special regulations
Switch o the mobile telephone and the tel-
ephone interface in places with a risk of ex-
plosion. These places are not always clearly
marked. They include, for example:
●
The vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks.
●
The lower decks of boats and ferries.
●
In the proximity of vehicles that run on lique-
fied gas (such as propane or butane).
●
Places where the air is laden with chemicals
or particles such as flour, dust or metal powder.
●
All other places where the engine or tele-
phone must be switched o.
WARNING
Switch o the mobile phone in areas with a
risk of explosion!
Note
In areas where special regulations apply or
the use of mobile phones is forbidden, it
must be switched o at all times. The radi-
ation produced by the mobile phone when
switched on may interfere with sensitive
technical and medical equipment, possibly
resulting in malfunction or damage to the
equipment.
Pair, connect and manage
Requirement for pairing:
●
Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone
device.
●
Bluetooth® is activated on the infotainment
system.
Infotainment system
219
Telephone interface
Active
Passive
●
Depending on the mobile device, it will be
necessary to have the Bluetooth® menu open
or activate the Visibility option so that the de-
vice is visible from the infotainment system.
Pair a mobile phone device suitable for teleph-
ony with the infotainment system to use the
telephone interface functions. On the first con-
nection, the mobile phone device is paired with
the infotainment system. Doing so saves a user
profile ›››page219, User profiles.
The pairing can take a few minutes. The func-
tions available depend on the mobile phone
device used and its operating system.
Pair a mobile phone device
1. Open the list of available Bluetooth® devi-
ces on the mobile phone device and select
the name of the infotainment system.
2. Please note and, if necessary, confirm the
messages that appear on the mobile phone
device and on the infotainment system. If
the pairing was successful, the phone data
is saved in the user profile.
3. Optional: confirm the data transfer mes-
sage on the mobile phone device.
Active and passive connection
To use the functions of the telephone interface,
there must be at least one mobile phone device
connected to the infotainment system. If there
are several mobile phone devices connected
to the infotainment system, you can switch be-
tween active and passive connections. To use
the telephone interface with the desired mobile
phone device, establish the active connection
with the infotainment system.
Dierence between connection types
The mobile phone device is paired and
connected. The functions of the telephone
interface are performed with the data of
said mobile phone device.
The mobile phone device is paired and
connected. Calls can be managed but the
phone book, messages or other functions
will not be active.
Paired mobile phone devices are stored in the
infotainment system, even if they are not cur-
rently connected.
Connect a mobile phone device
Requirement: the mobile phone device is paired
with the infotainment system.
●
Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone
device.
Establish an active connection
Requirement: several mobile phone devices are
connected to the infotainment system at the
same time.
●
Select the desired mobile phone device from
the drop-down menu. All other mobile phone
devices are automatically in the passive con-
nection.
User
profiles
For each of the paired mobile phone devices an
individual user profile is automatically created.
In the user profile, data from the mobile phone
device is stored, for example, contact details or
settings. A maximum of four user profiles can be
saved in the infotainment system at the same
time.
WARNING
If you perform the pairing while driving, it
could cause an accident or injury.
●
Perform pairing only with the vehicle at a
standstill.
Note
●
While the infotainment system is in the
Known mobile phones menu, the wireless
charging function is disabled. When you exit
this menu, the wireless charging function is
activated again.
●
In the pairing of some mobile phone devi-
ces, a PIN number is shown on the screen of
the mobile phone device. Enter that number
in the infotainment system to complete the
pairing.
Basic and Comfort Telephony
Depending on the equipment, two types of tel-
ephone interface can be used:
220
Infotainment system
●
Basic telephone interface.
●
Comfort telephone interface.
Basic telephone interface
The Basic telephone interface uses the Blue-
tooth® HFP profile for transmission. This inter-
face allows the use of telephone functions
through the infotainment system and playback
through the vehicle's speakers.
Comfort telephone interface
Like the Basic telephone interface, the Comfort
telephone interface also uses the Bluetooth®
HFP profile.
The Comfort phone interface can be equip-
ped with the wireless charging function
›››page221.
In order to use the functions of the wireless
charging function, you have to place a suitable
mobile phone device correctly in the storage
compartment. The mobile phone device will
then connect to the vehicle antenna. This im-
proves the reception and sound quality of calls.
Calling and sending messages
Open the telephone interface
●
Press HOME > .
Make a call
Select a phone number to start a call. Dierent
functions are available for selecting a phone
number:
Contacts
If a contact has several registered phone num-
bers you have to select one.
●
Press and press a number on the list to
start the call.
OR: press and enter the contact name in the
input field to search for it. Press on the contact
to start the call.
OR: press a favourite in the telephone interface
main menu to start the call.
Calls
The telephone interface shows the call list of
the mobile telephone device. Start a call from
the call list.
●
Press > All and press a number on the list
to start the call.
OR: press and filter the call list entries (for
example, missed calls or dialled numbers). In
filtered list, press a number to start the call.
Dial number
Manually enter a phone number to start a call.
While entering the phone number, contacts that
match that number are shown on the infotain-
ment screen.
●
Press and enter the telephone number.
Press to start the call.
The last call is dialled by pressing and hold-
ing the button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Send messages
Depending on the mobile phone device and the
infotainment system used, you can send and
receive SMS and e-mails through the telephone
interface.
Send an SMS:
1. Press > Text message > Enter new mes-
sage and enter the message on the screen.
2. Enter the contact you want in the search
bar.
3. To send the message press OK.
Send an email:
●
Press > E-mail > Enter new message and
enter the message on the screen.
●
Enter the contact you want in the search bar.
●
To send the message press OK.
Infotainment system
221
Telephone interface
1)
Qi technology allows you to charge your mobile phone wirelessly.
Phone book, favourites and speed
dial buttons
In the first connection of a telephone with the
infotainment system, the phone book is saved
in the infotainment system. It may be necessary
to confirm the data transmission on the mobile
phone.
Each time the phone is reconnected, the phone
book is updated.
If conference calls are supported, the phone
book can be accessed during a call. If there is a
saved image for a contact, it can be displayed
in the list next to the entry.
Favourites
A speed dial button can be assigned to a phone
book favourite up to a maximum of six. If there
is a registered photo saved to the contact, it is
shown on the speed dial button.
All speed dial buttons have to be manually
edited and will be assigned to a user profile
›››page218.
Assign the speed dial button
●
In the Favourites menu, press the button,
then open the phone book to select a contact
as a favourite. If the contact has several phone
numbers, press on the number in the list.
Edit the speed dial button
●
To edit or delete a favourite contact press on
the icon in the Favourites menu screen. You
can delete one or more favourites.
Call a favourite
●
Press the assigned speed dial button.
Note
Favourites are not updated automatically. If
you change a contact's phone number, you
have to reassign the speed dial button.
Connectivity Box
Fig.141 Centre console: slot for mobile phone
connection.
The Connectivity Box includes the Wireless
Charger functionality.
Wireless charger
The Wireless Charger allows mobile devices
with Qi
1)
technology to be charged without a
cable.
To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:
●
Place your mobile device in the middle of
the pad with the screen facing up ›››Fig.141 ,
››› .
Make sure there are no objects between the
pad and the mobile phone.
The mobile phone will start charging automat-
ically. For further information about whether
your mobile device uses Qi technology, check
your phone's user manual or visit the SEAT
website
WARNING
Notifications on the screen of the mobile de-
vice can distract the driver’s attention and
increase the risk of a serious accident.
●
Only place one suitable mobile device,
with Qi compatibility if applicable. To ensure
that it operates properly, place it without
the protective case and ensure that it has
maximum dimensions (width x length) of 80 x
140 mm (3.15 x 5.512 inches) on the base of
the Connectivity Box as indicated.
●
If the mobile device is not placed on the
base of the Connectivity Box, in the correct
position, or if its dimensions exceed those
222
Infotainment system
specified, it may not be recognised or may
not charge correctly. Under certain circum-
stances, the infotainment system indicates
that there is a foreign object in the storage
compartment. Using a suitable mobile phone
device and correcting its position can elimi-
nate the fault.
●
If necessary, remove any objects that may
obstruct the cover’s closing function.
WARNING
●
The mobile phone may heat up due to the
wireless charging. Think about this before
you pick it up, and take care when removing
it.
●
There must be no metallic or other objects
between the mobile phone and the housing,
to prevent the functionality of the Connectiv-
ity Box from being aected.
NOTICE
The base of the Connectivity Box is not re-
movable.
Note
●
Your mobile device must support the Qi
inductive charging interface standard for
proper operation.
●
The charging time and the temperature
vary in accordance with the device used.
●
The maximum charging capacity is 5 W.
●
Qi technology does not allow you to
charge more than one mobile device simul-
taneously.
●
You are advised to keep the engine running
to guarantee proper wireless charging.
●
When a telephone with Qi technology is
connected by USB, it will be charged by the
means specified by the manufacturer.
Storing objects
223
Positioning the luggage and cargo
Storing objects
Positioning the luggage
and cargo
General information
Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely
It is possible to carry objects and luggage in
the vehicle, in a trailer ›››page228 and on
the roof ›››page226. When doing so, please
consider all legal provisions.
●
Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly as
possible.
●
Always place luggage and heavy objects as
far forwards as possible in the luggage com-
partment ››› .
●
Take into account the maximum authorised
weight per axle, as well as the maximum au-
thorised weight of the vehicle ›››page315.
●
Secure the objects to the fastening rings
of the boot using appropriate chains or belts
›››page226.
●
Also place small objects safely.
●
In vehicles with dynamic headlight range
control, the lights adapt automatically.
●
Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take into
account the pressure sticker of the tyres
›››page282.
●
In vehicles equipped with tyre pressure con-
trol system, adjust to the new load status if nec-
essary ›››page292.
WARNING
Loose or unsecured objects can cause seri-
ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvring
or braking or in case of an accident. Partic-
ularly if the airbag hits them when deploying
and they are thrown across the inside of the
vehicle. Please observe the following rules to
minimise the risk of injury:
●
Place all objects inside the vehicle safely.
●
Secure all objects, little and large.
●
Place the objects in the cabin in such a
way that they can never reach the airbag de-
ployment areas while the vehicle is in motion.
●
Keep the storage compartments closed at
all times while the vehicle is in motion.
●
Place the objects in such a way that they
never force any occupant of the vehicle to sit
in an incorrect position.
●
When transporting objects that take up a
seat, never let anyone use that seat.
●
Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objects
loose in open storage compartment of the
vehicle, on the cover behind the rear seat or
on the instrument panel.
●
Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objects
from the fabrics and bags inside the cabin
and store them safely.
WARNING
The transport of heavy object changes vehi-
cle handling and increases braking distance.
Heavy objects that are not properly placed
or secured may cause loss of control of the
vehicle and thus severe injuries.
●
Never put too much load in the vehicle.
Both the carrying capacity as well as the
distribution of the load in the vehicle have
eects on the driving behaviour and braking
ability.
●
When transporting heavy objects, the driv-
ing behaviour of the vehicle varies due to the
displacement of the centre of gravity.
●
Always distribute the load in the vehicle as
evenly and horizontally as possible.
●
Always place heavy objects in the boot be-
fore the rear axle and as far away from it as
possible.
●
Objects in the luggage compartment that
are unsecured could move suddenly and
modify the handling of the vehicle.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
trac conditions.
●
Accelerate with particular care and cau-
tion.
●
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Brake earlier than usual.
224
Storing objects
NOTICE
Electrical wires or, depending on the fea-
tures, the antenna embedded into the rear
windows could be damaged, even irrepara-
bly, if they are in contact with objects.
Note
Straps for securing the load to the fasten-
ing rings are commercially available from
accessory shops.
Luggage compartment
Luggage compartment shelf
Fig.142 In the boot: removing and installing
the shelf.
Fig.143 In the boot: removing and installing
the shelf.
Removing
●
Detach the cord loops ›››Fig.142
B
from
their hooks
A
.
●
Remove the rear shelf from the side supports
›››Fig.143 by pulling it upwards and then take
it out.
If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un-
der the luggage compartment double floor
›››page224.
Fitting
●
Insert the cover horizontally so that the
“recess” fits onto the axis of the supports
›››Fig.143 and press down until it engages.
●
Attach the securing straps ›››Fig.142
B
onto the rear lid.
WARNING
Animals, loose or unsecured or objects car-
ried on the rear shelf can cause serious injury
in case of sudden manoeuvring or braking or
in case of an accident.
●
Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy objects
or in bags on the rear shelf.
●
Never transport animals on the rear shelf.
NOTICE
●
Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the
rear shelf is correctly fitted.
●
An overloaded luggage compartment
could mean that the rear shelf is not cor-
rectly seated and it may be bent or dam-
aged.
●
If the luggage compartment is overloaded,
remove the tray.
Note
Ensure that, when placing items of clothing
on the luggage compartment cover, rear visi-
bility is not reduced.
Store the rear shelf
Depending on the equipment, once the lug-
gage compartment shelf has been removed, it
can be stored under the variable floor of the
luggage compartment.
Storing objects
225
Luggage compartment
●
Remove the side cover by sliding it upwards.
●
Place the luggage compartment shelf in the
space provided for this purpose.
●
Place the cover back in its original position.
Variable luggage compartment floor
Fig.144 Variable luggage compartment floor:
raised position; lowered position.
Fig.145 Variable boot floor: tilted position.
Variable floor in high position
●
To move from the low position to the high po-
sition, lift the floor using the handle ›››Fig.144
1
, and pull it back until the front of the floor
has fully passed the supports
2
.
●
Move the floor forward over the supports as
far as the rear seat backrest and then lower the
floor with the handle
1
.
Variable floor in low position
●
To move from the high position to the low po-
sition, lift the floor using the handle ›››Fig.144
1
, and pull it back until the front of the floor
has fully passed the supports
2
.
●
Now let the front part fall to the floor and
slide the floor forwards as far as the rear seat
backrest; lower the floor at the same time with
the handle
1
.
Variable floor in the tilted position
When the variable floor is tilted you can access
the spare wheel or anti-puncture kit area.
●
Lift the variable floor in the high position using
handle ›››Fig.144
1
, pull it up and push it
towards the backrest of the rear seats until it
folds along the hinge line and the movable part
of the floor is resting on itself.
●
Rest the floor on its housings ›››Fig.145 (ar-
rows).
WARNING
●
Always secure objects, even when the lug-
gage compartment floor is properly lifted.
●
Only objects that do not protrude more
than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-
ried between the rear seat and the raised
luggage compartment floor.
●
Only objects that do not weigh than ap-
proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between
the rear seat and the raised luggage com-
partment floor.
NOTICE
●
The maximum weight that can be loaded
on the luggage compartment variable floor
in the top position is 100 kg.
●
Do not let the luggage compartment floor
fall when closing it. Always carefully guide
it downwards in a controlled manner. Other-
wise, the lining and the floor of the luggage
compartment could be damaged.
226
Storing objects
Luggage compartment
equipment
Fastening rings
Fig.146 Location of fastening rings in
luggage compartment.
There are fastening rings ›››Fig.146 on the
front and rear of the boot to secure loose
objects and luggage with fastening belts and
cords.
WARNING
If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining
straps are used, they could break in the
event of braking or an accident. Objects
could then be launched across the passen-
ger compartment and cause serious or fatal
injuries.
●
Always use belts or straps that are suitable
and in good condition.
●
Tighten the belts and straps in a cross
layout over the load placed on the boot
floor and secure them to the fastening rings
safely.
●
Never exceed the maximum tensile load of
the fastening rings when securing objects.
●
Make sure that, particularly for flat ob-
jects, the upper edge of the load is higher
than the fastening rings.
●
Depending on the features, take into ac-
count the instruction panels on the boot on
how to place the load.
●
Never secure a child seat to the fastening
rings.
Note
●
The maximum tensile load that the fasten-
ing rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN.
●
Belts, straps and securing systems for the
appropriate load can be obtained from spe-
cialised dealerships. SEAT recommends visit-
ing a SEAT dealership for this.
Roof carrier
Introduction
The vehicle roof has been designed to optimise
aerodynamics. For this reason, cross bars or
conventional roof carrier systems cannot be
secured to the roof water drains.
As the roof water drains are integrated in the
roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-
proved cross bars and roof carrier systems can
be used.
Cases in which cross bars and the roof car-
rier system should be disassembled.
●
When they are not used.
●
When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.
●
When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-
mum height, for example, in some garages.
WARNING
●
Always secure the load properly using
belts or retaining straps that are suitable and
in a good condition.
●
Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a neg-
ative eect on aerodynamics, the centre of
gravity and driving performance.
●
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
trac conditions.
Storing objects
227
Roof carrier
NOTICE
●
Remove the cross bars and the roof carrier
system before entering a car wash.
●
Vehicle height is increased by the installa-
tion of cross bars or a roof carrier system
and the load secured on them. For this pur-
pose, check that your vehicle's height does
not surpass the headspace limit, for exam-
ple, for underpasses or for entering garage
doors.
●
Any cross bars, roof carrier systems or
loads secured to them must not interfere with
the roof aerial or block the path of the rear
lid.
●
On opening the rear lid make sure that it
does not knock into the roof load.
For the sake of the environment
When cross bars and a roof carrier system
are installed, the increased air resistance
means that the vehicle uses more fuel.
Securing the crossbars and the roof
carrier system
Fig.147 Attachment points for the roof railings
for the roof carrier
The crossbars are the basis of a series of spe-
cial roof carrier systems. For safety reasons,
special fixtures must be used to safely transport
luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or boats on
the roof. Suitable accessories can be acquired
at SEAT dealerships.
Always secure the crossbars and the roof car-
rier system properly. Always take the assembly
instructions that come with the crossbars and
the roof carrier system in question into account.
Installing the bars
The crossbars are assembled on the roof
railings. The distance between cross bars
›››Fig.147
A
should be 75 cm and the dis-
tance between the cross bars and the brackets
of the roof railings
B
should be 5 cm.
WARNING
Incorrect attachment and use of the cross-
bars and the roof carrier system may cause
the whole system to detach from the roof
and cause an accident and injuries.
●
Always take the manufacturer assembly
instructions into account.
●
Check threaded joints and attachments
travelling and if necessary tighten them after
you have travelled a short distance. When
making long trips, check the threaded joints
whenever you stop for a rest.
●
Do not modify or repair the crossbars or
roof carrier system.
Note
Always read the assembly instructions that
come with the crossbars and the roof carrier
system carefully and keep them in the vehi-
cle.
228
Storing objects
Loading the roof carrier system
The load can only be secured if the crossbars
and the roof carrier system are properly instal-
led››› .
Maximum authorised cargo on the roof
The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg.
This figure comes from the combined weight
of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load
itself on the roof ››› .
Always check the weight of the roof carrier
system, the cross bars and the weight of the
load to be transported and weigh them if nec-
essary. Never exceed the maximum authorised
roof load.
If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier
with a lower weight rating, you will not be able
to carry the maximum authorised roof load. In
this case, do not exceed the maximum weight
limit for the roof carrier which is listed in the
fitting instructions.
Distributing a load
Distribute loads uniformly and secure them cor-
rectly ››› .
Check attachments
Once the cross bars and roof carrier system
have been installed, check the bolted connec-
tions and attachments after a short journey and
subsequently with a certain frequency.
WARNING
●
Never exceed the maximum authorised
load on the roof and on the axles or the ve-
hicle's maximum authorised weight.
●
Never exceed the load capacity of the
cross bars and the roof carrier system, even
if the maximum authorised roof load has not
been reached.
●
Secure heavy items as far forward as
possible and distribute the vehicle load uni-
formly.
WARNING
If the load is loose or not secured, it could
fall from the roof carrier system or cause ac-
cidents and injuries.
●
Always use belts or retaining straps that
are suitable and in a good condition.
Trailer mode
Introduction
Take into account country-specific regulations
about driving with a trailer and the use of a
towing bracket.
The vehicle has been developed primarily for
carrying people, although it can also be used
to tow a trailer if fitted with the corresponding
technical equipment. This additional load has
an
eect on the useful life, fuel consumption
and vehicle performance and in some cases
can reduce the service intervals.
Driving with a trailer requires more force from
the vehicle, and thus more concentration from
the driver.
In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on both
the vehicle and the trailer.
Maximum vertical load technically permit-
ted on the coupling device
The maximum vertical load technically permit-
ted from the trailer draw bar on the towing
bracket's tow ball is 55 kg.
Vehicles with the Start-Stop system
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing
bracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the
Start-Stop system operates as normal. No spe-
cial characteristics need to be taken into ac-
count.
If the system does not recognise the trailer or
the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by
SEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon-
nected by pressing the corresponding button
in the lower part of the centre console before
driving with the trailer, and it should remain o
for the rest of the journey››› .
Storing objects
229
Trailer mode
Vehicles with driving profile selection
If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use of
the Eco driving profile is not recommended. You
are advised to select another of the available
driving profiles before beginning to drive with a
trailer.
Trailer weight/drawbar load
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If
you do not load the trailer up to the maximum
permitted trailer weight, you can then climb
correspondingly steeper slopes.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only ap-
plicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea
level. Since higher altitude decreases engine
performance and the ability to climb slopes, the
tow load decreases proportionally. The weight
of the vehicle and trailer combination must be
reduced by 10% for every 1000 m of altitude.
When possible, operate the trailer with the max-
imum authorised drawbar load on the ball
joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed
the specified limit.
WARNING
Never use the trailer to transport people,
since it would put their life in danger and is
also prohibited.
WARNING
Undue use of the towing bracket may cause
injury and accidents.
●
Only use the towing bracket if it is in a per-
fect state of repair and is properly secured.
●
Never modify or repair the towing bracket
in any way.
●
In order to reduce the danger of injury in
the event of rear-end collisions and to avoid
injury to pedestrians and cyclists when park-
ing the vehicle, cover or remove the tow hook
when you are not using a trailer.
●
According to EU regulation 2021_535 it is
not permitted to install a towing device that
completely or partially covers the rear num-
ber plate.
●
Never fit a towing bracket “with weight dis-
tribution” or “load compensation”. The vehi-
cle has not been designed for this type of
towing bracket. The towing bracket could fail
and the trailer could be released from the
vehicle.
WARNING
Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy
or large objects can aect driving properties
and even cause an accident.
●
Always secure the load properly using
belts or straps that are suitable and in good
condition.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
trac conditions.
●
Trailers with a high centre of gravity are
more likely to overturn than those with a low
one.
●
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Take great care when overtaking.
●
Reduce speed immediately if you notice
that the trailer is swaying, however slightly.
●
Never drive at more than 80km/h (50mph)
when towing a trailer (or at more than
100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional circum-
stances). This also applies in countries where
driving at higher speeds is permitted. Take
into account the speed limit for vehicles with
trailers in the corresponding country, as it
could be less than the speed limit for vehi-
cles without a trailer.
●
Never attempt to “straighten” the towing
vehicle and trailer while accelerating.
230
Storing objects
WARNING
If the towing bracket has been retrofitted by
a non-SEAT workshop, the Start-Stop system
must be disconnected manually whenever
driving with a trailer. Otherwise the brake
system could be damaged and could conse-
quently cause a serious accident or injury.
●
Always disconnect the Start-Stop system
manually when using a towing bracket that
has not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.
Note
●
Before hitching or unhitching a trailer,
always deactivate the anti-theft alarm
›››page71. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could
cause the alarm to go o.
●
Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's
first 1000km ›››page109.
●
Some retrofitted towing brackets cover the
rear towing eye. In these cases, the towing
eye should not be used for tow-starting or
for towing other vehicles. For this reason, if
the vehicle has been retrofitted with a towing
bracket, always keep the tow hook in the ve-
hicle when you remove it.
Note
●
If a removable and retractable tow hook is
fitted, it should not be mounted when not in
use. In the event of a rear-end collision, the
damage to the vehicle could be greater if the
tow hook is fitted.
Technical requirements
Vehicles that are factory-equipped with a tow-
ing bracket fulfil all the technical and legal re-
quirements for driving with a trailer.
If the vehicle is retrofitted with a tow bracket,
only a bracket that is authorised for the max-
imum authorised load of the trailer that is to
be towed may be fitted. The towing bracket
must be suitable for the vehicle and the trailer
and must be properly secured to the vehicle's
chassis. Only use a towing bracket that has
been authorised by SEAT for this vehicle. Al-
ways check and take into account the towing
bracket manufacturer's instructions.
Towing bracket fitted on the bumper
Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to
the area where the bumper is mounted. The
towing bracket should not impair the bumper's
function. Do not make modifications or repairs
to the exhaust system or the brake system.
Make regular checks to ensure that the towing
bracket is secure.
Engine cooling system
Driving with a trailer increases the load on the
engine and cooling system. The cooling system
should have sucient coolant and be prepared
for the additional eort involved in driving with
a trailer.
Trailer brakes
If the trailer has its own brake system, please
take the relevant legal requirements into ac-
count. Never connect the trailer's brake system
to the vehicle's brake system.
Tow cable
Always use a cable between the vehicle and
the trailer ›››page231.
Trailer tail lights
The trailer's rear lights should comply with the
statutory safety regulations ›››page231.
Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly
to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not
sure that the trailer's electrical connection is
correct, have it checked by a specialised work-
shop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealer-
ship for this.
Exterior mirrors
If you cannot see the area behind the trailer
with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle,
additional mirrors will have to be installed in
accordance with the regulations of the country
in question. The exterior mirrors should be ad-
justed before you start driving and must provide
a sucient field of vision at the rear.
Trailer maximum electricity consumption
Never exceed the values indicated!
Storing objects
231
Trailer mode
Brake lights (total) 84 Watts
Turn signal (on each side) 42 Watts
Side lights (on each side) 50 Watts
Reverse lights (in total) 42 Watts
Rear fog light 42 Watts
WARNING
If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is
not the right one, the trailer could become
detached from the vehicle and cause serious
injury.
NOTICE
●
If the rear lights of the trailer are not
correctly connected, the vehicle's electronic
system may be damaged.
●
If the trailer absorbs excessive electric cur-
rent, the vehicle's electronic system may be
damaged.
●
Never connect the trailer's electric system
directly to the electrical connections of the
tail lights or any other power sources. Only
use the connections intended for providing
electric current to the trailer.
Hitching and connecting a trailer
Fig.148 Diagram: assignment of the pins of
the trailer's electrical socket.
Pin Meaning
1 Left turn signal
2 Rear fog light
3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
4 Right turn signal
5 Rear light, right
6 Brake lights
7 Rear light, left
8 Reverse lights
9 Permanent live
10 Live charge cable
11 Earth for pin 10
12 Unassigned
Pin Meaning
13 Earth for pin 9
Power socket for trailer
The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power socket
for the connection between the trailer and the
vehicle. With the engine running, electrical devi-
ces on the trailer receive power from the elec-
trical connection (pin 9 and pin 10 of the trailer
power socket).
If the system detects that a trailer has been
connected, the consumers on the trailer will re-
ceive electricity through this connection (pins 9
and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live. This pow-
ers, for example, the trailer's interior lighting.
Electrical devices such as a fridge in a caravan
only receive electrical power if the engine is
running (through pin 10).
To avoid overloading the electrical system, you
cannot connect the ground wires of pin 3, pin 11
or pin 13.
If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you
will need to use an adapter cable. In this case
the function corresponding to pin 10 will not be
available.
232
Storing objects
Tow cable
The tow rope must always be securely fixed to
the towing vehicle and loose enough so that the
vehicle can handle turns smoothly. However,
make sure that the cable does not rub on the
ground while driving.
Trailer tail lights
Always check the trailer's rear lights to ensure
they are working correctly and that they com-
ply with the relevant safety regulations. Make
sure that the maximum permissible power that
can be absorbed by the trailer is not exceeded
›››page230.
Include in the anti-theft alarm
The trailer is included in the anti-theft system if
the following conditions are met:
●
If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an
anti-theft alarm.
●
If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow
bracket.
●
If the trailer is electrically connected to the
towing vehicle through the trailer power socket.
●
If the electrical systems of the vehicle and
trailer are in perfect condition and have no
faults or damage.
●
If the vehicle is locked with the key and the
anti-theft alarm is activated.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-
gered if the electrical connection with the
trailer is cut o.
Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always
turn o the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tilt
sensor could cause the alarm to go o.
Trailers with LED tail lights
For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED
rear lights cannot be connected to the anti-
theft alarm system.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does not
go o when the electrical connection with the
trailer is cut if it has rear lights with light-emit-
ting diodes.
If the Eco driving profile was selected when
hitching the trailer, this will automatically switch
to theNormal profile. If the system cannot de-
tect the attached trailer or if the towing bracket
has been retrofitted by an auto repair shop
other than SEAT, you must manually select the
Normal profile before you start driving with a
trailer attached. To reconnect the Eco profile
once the trailer has been unhitched, switch the
ignition o and back on once.
WARNING
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly
connected, it may lead to an excessive
amount of current supplied to the trailer,
which can cause abnormalities in the entire
vehicle electronic system, as well as acci-
dents and serious injuries.
●
Ensure that any repairs that need to be
carried out on the electrical system are car-
ried out by a specialised workshop.
●
Never connect the trailer's electric system
directly to the electrical connections of the
tail lights or any other power sources.
WARNING
Contact between the pins of the trailer
power socket can cause short circuits, over-
loading of the electrical system or failure of
the lighting system, and consequently can
cause accidents and serious injuries.
●
Never connect the pins of the trailer power
socket to each other.
●
Make sure any work on bent pins is carried
out by a specialised workshop.
Storing objects
233
Trailer mode
NOTICE
Do not leave the trailer connected to the ve-
hicle when parked; place it on its support
wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or
falls due, for example, to a variation of the
load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will
be placed on the towing bracket and the
trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
Note
●
In case of anomalies in the electrical sys-
tems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in the
anti-theft alarm system, have them inspec-
ted by a specialised workshop.
●
If the trailer accessories consume energy
through the power socket to the trailer and
the engine is turned o, the battery will dis-
charge.
●
If the vehicle battery is running low, the
electrical connection with the trailer will be
automatically cut.
Trailer loading
Technically permissible maximum trailer
weight and vertical load on the coupling de-
vice
The technically permissible maximum trailer
weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow
››› . The vertical load on the coupling is ex-
erted vertically from above on the hook of the
towing bracket.
The information on the maximum trailer weight
and vertical load on the coupling device con-
tained in the type plate of the towing bracket
are experimental values only. The correct fig-
ures for your specific model, which may be
lower than these figures, are given in the vehicle
documentation. The information in the vehicle
documentation takes precedence at all times.
To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom-
mends making the most of the maximum ver-
tical load technically permissible on the cou-
pling device ›››page228. An insucient ver-
tical load has a negative influence on the be-
haviour of both the vehicle and trailer.
The vertical load increases the weight on the
rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca-
pacity.
Gross combination weight of the towing ve-
hicle and trailer
The gross combination weight is the actual
weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual
weight of the loaded trailer.
In some countries trailers are classified into
distinct categories. SEAT recommends obtain-
ing information from a specialised workshop re-
garding which type of trailer is most suitable for
your vehicle.
Trailer loading
The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer
must be balanced. In order to do this, the load
must be as close as possible to the maximum
vertical load technically permissible on the
coupling point, and it must be evenly distributed
between the back and front of the trailer:
●
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy
objects are as near to the axle as possible or
above it.
●
Secure the trailer load properly.
Tyre pressure
Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac-
cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec-
ommendations.
When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the
towing vehicle with the maximum allowable
pressure ›››page282.
234
Storing objects
1)
This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED xenon headlights.
WARNING
If the maximum permissible axle weight, the
maximum load technically permissible on the
coupling point, the maximum authorised ve-
hicle weight or the gross combination weight
of the towing vehicle and trailer are excee-
ded, accidents and serious injuries may oc-
cur.
●
Never exceed the indicated values.
●
The actual weight on the front and rear
axles must never exceed the maximum per-
missible axle weight. The weight on the front
and rear axles must never exceed the maxi-
mum permissible weight.
WARNING
A shift in weight could jeopardize the stability
and security of the towing vehicle and trailer,
which could lead to accidents and serious
injuries.
●
Always load the trailer correctly.
●
Always secure the load properly using
belts or straps that are suitable and in good
condition.
Driving with a trailer
Adjusting the headlights
The front part of the vehicle may be raised
when the trailer is connected and the light may
dazzle the rest of the trac.
Adapt the height of the headlights using the
headlight range adjuster ›››page90.
1)
Specific features of driving with a trailer
●
If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake
gently at first and then rapidly. This will prevent
the jerking that can be caused by the locking of
trailer wheels.
●
Due to the gross combination weight of the
towing vehicle and trailer, the braking distance
increases.
●
When going down a slope, engage a lower
gear (with a manual gearbox, or use the auto-
matic gearbox's tiptronic mode) to use engine
braking. Otherwise, the brake system could
overheat and even fail.
●
The trailer weight, as well as the gross combi-
nation weight of the towing vehicle and trailer,
change the centre of gravity and the properties
of the vehicle.
●
If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer
is loaded, then the load distribution is incorrect.
Under these conditions, drive slowly and with
extra caution.
Hill starts with a trailer
Depending on the slope of the hill and the
combination weight of the towing vehicle and
trailer, the vehicle might start rolling backwards
slightly when you first start up.
For hill starts with a trailer hitched:
●
Press and hold the brake pedal.
●
Manual gearbox: Depress the clutch pedal
fully and engage 1st gear.
Automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever to
the D/S position.
●
Apply the handbrake.
●
Release the brake pedal.
●
Move o slowly.
Manual transmission: release the clutch pedal
slowly.
●
Do not release the hand brake until the en-
gine has sucient power to start driving
WARNING
If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may lead
to loss of control of the vehicle and serious
injury.
●
Driving with a trailer and transporting
heavy or large objects will change the vehi-
cle handling and braking distances.
●
Always drive cautiously and carefully.
Brake earlier than usual.
Storing objects
235
Trailer mode
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
trac conditions. Slow down, especially
when driving down hills or slopes.
●
Accelerate with particular care and cau-
tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Take great care when overtaking. Reduce
speed immediately if you notice that the
trailer is swaying, however slightly.
●
Never attempt to “straighten” the towing
vehicle and trailer while accelerating.
●
Take into account the speed limit for vehi-
cles with a trailer, as it could be lower than
for vehicles without a trailer.
Stabilisation of the towing vehicle
and trailer combination
The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer com-
bination is an additional function of the elec-
tronic stability control (ESC).
If the system detects that the trailer is weaving,
it intervenes to reduce the swaying of the trailer.
Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisation
requirements
●
The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-
ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with a com-
patible towing bracket.
●
The ESC and TCS are active. The control
lamp or is not lit up on the instrument clus-
ter.
●
The trailer is connected to the towing vehicle
through the trailer power socket.
●
The vehicle is travelling at over 60km/h (ap-
prox. 37mph).
●
The maximum vertical load technically per-
missible is not being exceeded on the coupling
device.
●
The trailer has a rigid draw bar.
●
If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped
with a mechanical overrun brake.
WARNING
The enhanced safety provided by the elec-
tric stability control of the vehicle and trailer
should not lead you to take any risks that
could compromise your safety.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
trac conditions.
●
Accelerate with caution when the road is
slippery.
●
When adjusting any settings, stop acceler-
ating.
WARNING
The electric stability control for the vehicle
and trailer may not correctly detect all driv-
ing conditions.
●
When the ESC is switched o, the stabili-
sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is also
switched o.
●
The stability system does not always de-
tect light trailers, so it may not stabilise
these correctly.
●
When driving on surfaces with poor grip,
the trailer can even interfere with the stabil-
ity system.
●
Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip
over without having previously weaved.
●
If a trailer is not attached, but a connector
is plugged into the power socket (e.g. instal-
lation of a bicycle rack with lights), repea-
ted automatic braking may occur in extreme
driving conditions.
Installing a rear carrier system or a
bicycle rack on the trailer hitch
Fig.149 Recommended weight distribution on
the rear support system.
236
Storing objects
A
B
Examples of rear carrier systems are bicycle
racks or multi-purpose boxes that are installed
on the trailer hitch.
Only use rear carrier systems that have been
specified by the respective manufacturer for
the vehicle model, model year and version of
the vehicle in question ››› .
SEAT recommends the use of genuine SEAT
spare parts and accessories, which can be pur-
chased from the brand’s dealers. Install the rear
carrier system according to the manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
The load capacity results from the weight of the
rear carrier system and the weight of the load
carried on it.
The recommended maximum load capacity of
the rear carrier system installed on the trailer
hitch may be dierent from the maximum verti-
cal load on the specific vehicle coupling.
However, it is not permitted to exceed the max-
imum permitted vertical load on the tow hitch
(which depends on the model).
The load capacity is reduced due to the lever
eect that occurs the further the carrier system
is from the ball head.
Place heavy objects as close as possible to the
trailer hitch ›››Fig.149.
Maximum load capacity depending on the
vehicle
To find out the recommended load capacity for
your vehicle, check the maximum vertical load
on its coupling ›››page315. Please refer to
the following table for the load capacity.
In accordance with the UN-R-55 guideline,
SEAT recommends not carrying more bicycles
than recommended on the rear rack system.
Maximum vertical
load on the vehi-
cle's specific cou-
pling
Maximum
load ca-
pacity
Number of
bicycles
50 kg 50 kg 2
55 kg 55 kg 2
From 75 kg 75 kg 3
Maximum load overhang of the rear carrier
system
Fig.150 Schematic representation of the
maximum load overhang of a bicycle rack for two
or three bicycles.
With up to 55 kg load capacity: 500mm
(approx. 19.7in)
With 75 kg load capacity: 700mm (approx.
27.6in)
The maximum overhang shall not exceed
500 mm from the centre of the ball head to
the to the centre of the rail of the last support
›››Fig.150
A
for two-bicycle racks. In the
case of three-bicycle racks, the overhang must
not exceed 700mm ›››Fig.150
B
.
Storing objects
237
Trailer mode
WARNING
The incorrect use of a rear carrier system in-
stalled on the tow hook can cause accidents
and injury.
●
Make sure that the carrier system is suita-
ble for your vehicle.
●
Read and observe the installation instruc-
tions of the rear carrier system manufacturer.
●
Never attach a rear carrier system below
the ball head of the trailer hitch. The system
could slip due to the shape of the hitch.
Note
Before setting o, SEAT recommends remov-
ing, to the extent possible, all accessories
from the load attached to the carrier system.
Examples of these accessories are baskets
and panniers, child seats or batteries. This
improves the aerodynamics and centre of
gravity of the rear carrier system.
Retrofitting a towing bracket
Fig.151 Limits and attachment points for
retrofitting a towing bracket.
Distance measurements:
A
Attachment points (lower part of the vehi-
cle)
B
65 mm (minimum)
C
350 mm to 420mm (fully laden vehicle)
D
1,025 mm
E
322 mm
F
448 mm
G
854 mm
SEAT recommends that towing brackets be ret-
rofitted at a specialised workshop. For exam-
ple, it may very well be necessary to adjust
the cooling system or mount thermal protection
plates. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT deal-
ership for this.
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance
specifications should always be kept in mind.
The distance between the centre of the ball
head and the road ›››Fig.151
C
must never
be less than that indicated. This also applies
when the vehicle is fully loaded, including the
technically permissible maximum vertical load
on the coupling device.
WARNING
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly
connected, this may lead to malfunctions in
the entire vehicle electronic system, as well
as to accidents and serious injuries.
●
Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
tem to the electrical connections of the tail
lights or any other unsuitable power sources.
Only use suitable connectors to connect the
trailer.
●
The towing bracket should be retrofitted
only at a specialised workshop.
238
Storing objects
WARNING
If the towing bracket is badly fitted or unsuit-
able, the trailer may separate from the ve-
hicle while driving. This could cause serious
accidents and fatal injuries.
Note
●
According to regulation EU2021_535 it is
not permitted to install a towing device that
cannot be removed or retracted.
●
Only use towing brackets that have been
approved by SEAT for the model in question.
●
In some versions, the fitting of a conven-
tional towing hook solution is not recommen-
ded. Please consult your Technical Service.
Towing device
Fitting the removable tow hitch
Fig.152 Overview: removable tow hitch.
1
Spherical head
2
Locking balls
3
Locking mechanism (ball)
4
Centring guides
5
Stem
6
Key
7
Key slot cover
8
Thumbwheel
9
Green mark on the tow hitch
10
Red mark on the thumbwheel
The removable tow hitch is located in the lug-
gage compartment, either in a side storage
compartment or under the floor.
First step: preparations
1.
Before using the removable tow hitch,
note the number engraved on the key
›››Fig.152
6
in case it is necessary to
make a duplicate.
2. Remove the cover from the tow hitch hous-
ing, located underneath the rear bumper
and store it in the vehicle.
3. From the top right side, move the trailer
socket as far as possible towards the lower
left side. This makes the towbar housing ac-
cessible.
4. Check that the housing, the thumbwheel
›››Fig.152
8
, the stem
5
and the locking
balls
2
of the tow hitch are clean and in
good condition. Clean them if necessary.
Step 2: Check that the tow hitch is pre-ten-
sioned
The tow hitch must be pre-tensioned before it
can be installed correctly.
The following conditions must be met:
Storing objects
239
Towing device
●
The red mark ›››Fig.152
10
on the thumb-
wheel points towards the green mark
9
on the
tow hitch.
●
The thumbwheel
8
is clearly separated from
the tow hitch by at least 4 mm (0.2 in).
●
All locking balls
2
can be fully engaged on
the stem
5
.
●
The key
6
is inside the lock, the arrow on the
key is pointing towards the lock open symbol
on the thumbwheel
8
and the key cannot be
removed.
If all of these conditions are met, proceed to
step four.
If these conditions are not met, continue with
step three.
Step 3: pre-tensioning the tow hitch
If the tow hitch is not pre-tensioned, pre-tension
it as follows:
1. Open the lock cover ›››Fig.152
7
and
insert the key into the lock.
2. Turn the key
6
counterclockwise until the
arrow on the key points towards the lock
open symbol on the thumbwheel
8
.
3. Hold the tow hitch with one hand. With the
other, pull out the thumbwheel
8
in direc-
tion
A
.
4.
Turn the extracted thumbwheel
8
in direc-
tion
B
as far as the stop.
Step 4:
fitting the pre-tensioned tow hitch to
the vehicle
Once the tow hitch has been pre-tensioned, do
not touch the thumbwheel again ›››Fig.152
8
.
When the tow hitch is locked, the thumbwheel
rotates to its original position and can cause
injury ››› .
1. Insert the pre-tensioned tow hitch into the
housing tube, from the bottom.
2. Firmly press the tow hitch upwards until it
locks in place. The tow hitch is locked in
place when:
●
The green mark on the thumbwheel
9
faces upwards.
●
The hitch is locked with the key
6
and
the key can be removed.
●
There is no longer any gap between the
thumbwheel
8
and the hitch.
3. Turn the key
6
clockwise to lock the hitch.
4. Close the lock cover
7
.
Step 5: safety check
Before hitching a trailer, check that the tow
hitch is attached correctly.
●
Forcefully move the hitch several times from
side to side to check that the housing bushing is
properly fixed in place.
●
The green mark on the thumbwheel
›››Fig.152
9
faces upwards.
●
The thumbwheel
8
is right next to the hitch
and can be locked.
●
The hitch is locked and the key
6
removed.
●
It is no longer possible to pull the thumbwheel
8
sideways.
Safety cable
In some countries, both brakeless and braked
trailers must be secured with a safety or break-
away cable.
Take into account country-specific regulations
about using a safety cable.
1. Attach the safety cable or the breakaway
cable to the eye provided for it on the tow
hitch.
2. Insert the cable through the ring and hook it
onto the carabiner ››› .
WARNING
Undue use of the towing bracket may cause
injury and accidents.
●
Never unlock the tow hitch when a trailer is
hitched to it.
●
Only use the tow hitch when it is correctly
attached.
●
Do not use the tow hutch is the diameter of
the spherical head ›››Fig.152
1
is less than
49 mm (1.9 in) any any point.
●
The tow hitch is heavy. When performing
the safety check, it could jump out of its
housing and cause bruising.
240
Storing objects
●
Once the tow hitch is pre-tensioned, do not
touch the thumbwheel again. When the hitch
fits into its housing, the thumbwheel returns
to its original position.
●
If it is not possible to fit the tow hitch, go
to a properly qualified specialised workshop
and request an inspection of the tow hitch.
SEAT recommends a SEAT dealership.
●
Never use the hitch if it does not fit cor-
rectly or cannot be pre-tensioned.
●
Never use the tow hitch if, once the hitch
has been fitted, the key cannot be removed.
This means that the hitch is not locked cor-
rectly.
●
After removing the tow hitch, always store
it safely in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
If the trailer is not secured correctly, injuries
and accidents can occur.
●
Never place the trailer’s safety or break-
away cable loosely over the tow hitch.
NOTICE
Fitting an unsuitable tow hitch could cause
damage to the vehicle and its approval could
be lost.
●
Use the factory supplied tow hitch or one
that has been approved for your vehicle
model and model year. SEAT recommends
the use of genuine SEAT spare parts and ac-
cessories, which can be purchased from the
brand’s dealers.
NOTICE
●
The housing on the vehicle, the thumb-
wheel, the step and the locking balls of the
tow hitch must be clean and in good condi-
tion. Otherwise, it may not be possible to lock
the hitch correctly.
●
If you clean the vehicle with high pressure
or steam equipment, do not direct the jet
directly at the hitch housing, as this may
remove the grease required for lubrication
from the housing.
Removing the tow hitch
Fig.153 Overview: removable tow hitch.
1
Spherical head
2
Locking balls
3
Locking mechanism (ball)
4
Centring guides
5
Stem
6
Key
7
Key slot cover
8
Thumbwheel
Storing objects
241
Towing device
9
Green mark on the tow hitch
10
Red mark on the thumbwheel
1. Park the vehicle.
2. Unhook the trailer and interrupt the electri-
cal connection between it and the vehicle.
If you are using an adapter, remove it from
the trailer socket.
3. Open the lock cover ›››Fig.153
7
and
insert the key
6
into the lock.
4.
Turn the key
6
counterclockwise until the
arrow on the key points towards the lock
open symbol on the thumbwheel
8
.
5.
Hold the tow hitch with one hand. With the
other, pull out the thumbwheel
8
in direc-
tion
A
.
6. Turn the extracted thumbwheel
8
in direc-
tion
B
as far as the stop.
7. Pull the tow hitch downwards out of the
housing.
8. Release the thumbwheel
8
.
9. Store the tow hitch in the luggage compart-
ment, either in the side storage compart-
ment or under the floor.
WARNING
The removable tow hitch is heavy. When re-
moving it it can fall and cause bruising.
●
Never unlock the tow hitch when a trailer is
hitched to it.
242
Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning
Fuel and exhaust gas
cleaning
Refuelling
Safety warnings regarding fuel han-
dling
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable and can cause seri-
ous burns and other injuries.
●
When refuelling, turn o the engine and
turn o the ignition for safety reasons.
●
Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or
a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in the
vicinity due to the risk of explosion.
●
Observe legislation governing the use,
storage and carrying of a spare fuel canister
in the vehicle.
●
For safety reasons we do not recommend
carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle.
In an accident the canister could be dam-
aged and could leak.
●
If, in exceptional circumstances, you have
to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe
the following points:
–
Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canister
if it is inside or on top of the vehicle. This
could cause an explosion. Always place
the canister on the ground to fill it.
–
Insert the filling nozzle as far as possible
into the spare fuel canister.
–
If the spare fuel canister is made of
metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact
with the canister during filling. This helps
prevent an electrostatic charge building
up.
–
Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the
luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is ex-
plosive. Risk of fatal accident!
NOTICE
●
If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it should
be removed immediately. It could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
●
Never run the tank completely dry. The
catalytic converter can be damaged.
For the sake of the environment
Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause the
fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
Note
There is no emergency mechanism for the
manual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec-
essary, request assistance from specialised
personnel.
Refuelling
Fig.154 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.
The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the
vehicle.
●
The tank flap is unlocked when the car is un-
locked using the central locking remote control
›››page67.
●
Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the
retainer zone.
●
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.
●
Place it in the space on the hinge of the open
flap ›››Fig.154.
●
Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon as
the pump’s automatic nozzle cuts o the fuel
supply. Do not try to put in more fuel after the
nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansion
chamber in the fuel tank.
●
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as
far as it will go.
●
Close the lid.
Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning
243
Fuel types
1)
Depending upon country.
1
2
3
4
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is given
on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank
flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at
›››page243.
The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is given
in ›››page315.
Fuel types
Identification of fuels
1)
Fig.155 Identification of fuels according to
European Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/
Fuels are identified by dierent symbols on the
pump and on your vehicle's tank flap. The
identification serves to prevent confusion when
choosing the fuel.
Petrol
with ethanol (“E” stands for Ethanol).
The number indicates the percentage of
ethanol in the petrol:
“E5” means an ethanol ratio of 5% max.
“E10” means an ethanol ratio of 10% max.
“E20” means an ethanol ratio of 20% max.
Diesel according to EN590 standard. The
number indicates the maximum percent-
age of Biodiesel in the fuel. “B7” means a
maximum of 7% Biodiesel.
Synthetic diesel according to EN15940
standard.
Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed
Natural Gas
Type of petrol
The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the
fuel tank flap.
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-
verter and must only be run on unleaded pet-
rol. The petrol must comply with the standard
EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Follow the regula-
tions of the country you are driving in. The types
of petrol are dierentiated by using the octane
numbers (RON) or via the anti-knock index
(AKI).
Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or
normal 91 octane petrol at least
We recommend refuelling with super 95 octane
petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91 oc-
tane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power loss)
may be used.
Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at least
You should use super 95 octane petrol (91 AKI)
at least.
If super petrol is not available, if necessary, use
normal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case
only use moderate engine speeds and a light
throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possible.
Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or su-
per 95 octane petrol at least
We recommend refuelling with super plus 98
octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super 95
octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power loss).
If super petrol is not available, if necessary, use
normal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case
only use moderate engine speeds and a light
throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possible.
244
Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning
1)
This motor is only available in some markets.
NOTICE
●
Fuels with a high percentage of ethanol,
e.g. E30 - E100 button must not be used. The
fuel system would be damaged.
●
A single refuelling with leaded fuel or other
metal additives entails a permanent deterio-
ration of the eectiveness of the catalytic
converter.
●
Only use fuel additives that have been ap-
proved by SEAT. The products that contain
substances to increase the octane rating or
decrease knocking may contain metal addi-
tives that damage the engine and catalytic
converter. This type of products must not be
used.
●
Do not use fuels shown in the pump as
containing metals. LRP (lead replacement
petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of
metal additives. Risk of engine damage!
●
High engine speed and full throttle can
damage the engine when using petrol with
an octane rating lower than the correct
grade for the engine.
Note
●
Fuel with an octane rating higher than the
one required by the engine can be used.
●
In countries in which there is no sulphur-
free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sulphur
content fuel.
Ethanol fuel
✓ Valid for: vehicles with Totalflex engines
You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en-
gines
1)
by label on the fuel tank lid with the
marking “Petrol/ethanol”.
Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with un-
leaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) according
to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high per-
centage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuelled in
the same way as petrol refuelling.
Also consider that ›››page243, Type of pet-
rol.
Note
SEAT recommends filling the tank exclusively
with petrol every 10,000 km to decrease im-
purities that using E100 ethanol fuel might
have left in the engine.
Engine management and
emissions control system
Introduction
WARNING
Due to the high temperatures reached by the
exhaust gas scrubbing system, you should
not park your vehicle near a surface that can
catch fire easily. Fire hazard!
WARNING
Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle
around the area of the exhaust system: Fire
hazard!
Catalytic converter
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic
converter
●
Only use unleaded petrol with petrol en-
gines.
●
Never run the fuel tank dry.
Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning
245
Engine management and emissions control system
●
When changing or adding engine oil, do not
exceed the necessary amount ›››page272,
Checking and topping up the engine oil
level.
●
Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump
leads if necessary ›››page249.
If you should notice misfiring, uneven running or
loss of power when the car is moving, have the
vehicle inspected by a specialised workshop.
In general, the emissions warning lamp will
light up when any of these symptoms occur. If
this happens, any unburnt fuel can enter the ex-
haust system and escape into the atmosphere.
The catalytic converter can also be damaged
by overheating.
NOTICE
Never run the fuel tank completely dry be-
cause an irregular fuel supply can cause ig-
nition faults. This allows unburnt fuel to enter
the exhaust system, which could cause over-
heating and damage the catalytic converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is
working perfectly, there may be a smell of
sulphur from the gases on occasions. This
depends on the sulphur content of the fuel
used. This can quite often be avoided by
changing to another brand of fuel.
Particulate filter
The particulate filter eliminates most of the
soot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor-
mal driving conditions the filter cleans itself.
If the filter does not clean itself (e.g. if short
journeys are made continuously), it becomes
blocked with soot and the following indication is
displayed to the driver:
Particulate filter: cleaned
while the vehicle is moving. See
Manual.
The particulate filter needs cleaning (regenera-
tion).
Regeneration of the petrol particulate filter
Requirements for the regeneration journey: the
engine is at operating temperature.
●
Drive at a speed of between 50120 km/h
(31-75mph). This increases the temperature
and burns the soot in the filter ›››page245.
●
Consider the legal speed limits as well as the
recommended gears.
●
End the regeneration journey once the con-
trol warning lamp has gone out.
If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutes
of running in regeneration mode, have a speci-
alised workshop repair the fault.
WARNING
Always adjust your speed to suit the weather
conditions, roads, braking distance and traf-
fic if the particulate filter is in its regeneration
phase. Route recommendations should never
make you disregard each country's specific
trac regulations.
NOTICE
●
When the exhaust system detects that the
particulate filter is close to saturation, the
self-cleaning function of this system recom-
mends optimal driving for this function.
●
Due to the high temperatures caused by
the regeneration of the particulate filter, it is
possible that the radiator fan will activate af-
ter stopping the engine, even it its operating
temperature has not been reached.
●
Noise, smells and high idle speeds can oc-
cur during regeneration.
●
Always use the correct engine oil and the
correct fuel to make sure the useful life of the
particulate filter is not aected. Also avoid
making short trips all the time.
Troubleshooting
Fault in the emission control system.
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
Reduce speed and drive carefully to the near-
est specialised workshop to have the engine
checked.
246
Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning
Combustion failures that can damage
the catalytic converter.
The control lamp flashes yellow.
Reduce speed and drive carefully to the near-
est specialised workshop to have the engine
checked.
Particulate filter blocked
The indicator lamp lights up yellow
›››page245..
Fault in the petrol engine manage-
ment.
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
Have the engine checked as soon as possible
by a specialised workshop.
When the ignition is switched on, the (Elec-
tronic Power Control) lamp lights up and should
go o once the engine has started.
NOTICE
While the indicator lamps , or are
on, there might be faults in the engine, fuel
consumption may go up and the engine
might lose power.
Miscellaneous situations
247
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Miscellaneous situa-
tions
Vehicle tool kit
On-board toolkit
Fig.156 Underneath the floor panel of the
luggage compartment: on-board tools.
The vehicle tool kit is located under the floor
panel in the luggage compartment. To access
the on-board tools ›››page224.
The tool kit includes:
Adapter for the anti-theft bolt
Towing eye, removable
Wheel spanner
Crank handle for jack
Jack
Hook for extracting the central wheel trims
Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps
Some of the items listed are only provided in
certain model versions, or are optional extras.
WARNING
When the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility set
and spare wheel are loose in the interior they
can be violently thrown in case of a sudden
manoeuvre or braking and especially in acci-
dents, causing serious injury.
●
Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyre
mobility set and the spare wheel or tempo-
rary spare wheel are safely secured in the
luggage compartment.
WARNING
Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can
cause injury or accidents.
●
Never work with inappropriate or damaged
tools.
Note
The jack does not generally require any
maintenance. If required, it should be
greased using universal type grease.
Changing the windscreen
wiper blades
Wiper service position
Fig.157 Wipers in service position.
Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
With the wiper in service position, it is possible
to the fold the wiper arms ›››Fig.157.
●
Close the bonnet ›››page263.
●
Switch the ignition on and o.
●
Briefly press the wiper lever downwards.
Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. Us-
ing the windscreen wiper lever, the windscreen
wiper arms return to their initial position.
248
Miscellaneous situations
Note
●
The wiper arms can be moved into the re-
placement position when the front bonnet is
fully closed.
●
You can also use the service position, for
example, if you want to fix a cover over the
windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of
ice.
Changing the wiper rear wiper
blades
Fig.158 Changing the windscreen wiper
blades
The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as
standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is
responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent. If
the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of the
water as it is wiped across the windscreen will
be louder.
Check the condition of the wiper blades regu-
larly. If the wipers scrape across the glass,
they should be changed if they are damaged,
or cleaned if they are dirty ››› .
If this does not produce the desired results,
the setting angle of the windscreen wiper arms
might be incorrect. They should be checked by
a specialised workshop and corrected if neces-
sary.
Damaged windscreen wiper blades should
be replaced immediately. These are available
from qualified workshops.
Raising and lowering windscreen wiper arms
●
Place the windscreen wipers in the service
position ›››page247.
●
Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's fas-
tening point.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
●
Raise the wiper arms.
●
Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from
the windscreen wiper blades.
●
If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or damp
cloth may be used ››› .
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
●
Lift and unfold the wiper arms.
●
Press and hold release button ›››Fig.158
1
and pull gently on the wiper blade in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
●
Fit a new wiper blade of the
same length
and design on to the wiper arm and hook it into
place.
●
Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-
screen.
Changing the rear window wiper blade
Fig.159 Changing the rear wiper blade
●
Separate the wiper arm from the rear window.
●
Rotate the blade lightly ›››Fig.159 (arrow
A
).
●
Hold down the release button
1
while gently
pulling the blade in the direction of arrow
B
.
●
Insert a new blade of the same length and
type in the rear wiper arm in the opposite direc-
tion to the arrow
B
until button
1
hooks into
place.
●
Fold the wiper arm and rest it on the window.
Miscellaneous situations
249
Jump start
WARNING
Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re-
duce visibility and increase the risk of acci-
dent and serious injury.
●
Always replace damaged or worn wind-
screen wiper blades or blades that no longer
clean the windscreen properly.
NOTICE
●
Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could
scratch the glass.
●
If products containing solvents, rough
sponges or sharp objects are used to clean
the blades, the graphite layer will be dam-
aged.
●
Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint
thinner or similar products to clean the win-
dows.
●
In icy conditions, always check that the
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-
fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may
help to leave the vehicle parked with the wip-
ers in service position ›››page247.
NOTICE
●
To prevent damage to the bonnet and the
wiper arms, only leave them in the service
position.
●
Before driving, always lower the wiper
arms.
Jump start
Introduction
If the engine fails to start because of a dis-
charged 12-volt battery, the battery can be
connected to the battery of another vehicle to
start the engine.
Jump leads complying with the DIN 72553
standard are needed for starting (see cable
manufacturer's instructions). The wire cross
section must be at least 25 mm
2
for petrol en-
gines and at least 35 mm
2
for diesel engines.
NOTICE
To avoid considerable damage to the vehicle
electrical system, note the following care-
fully:
●
If the jump leads are connected incor-
rectly, a short circuit may occur.
●
Use only jump leads with fully insulated
clamps.
●
Do not allow the vehicles to come into con-
tact with each other, otherwise current may
start to flow as soon as the positive poles are
connected.
Jump start: description
Fig.160 Diagram of connections for vehicles
without Start Stop system
Fig.161 Diagram of connections for vehicles
with Start Stop system
The discharged battery must be properly con-
nected to the on-board network.
Make sure the battery clamps have sucient
metal-to-metal contact with the battery termi-
nals.
250
Miscellaneous situations
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Jump lead terminal connections
The jump leads should only be connected in
the order 1 > 2 > 3 > 4 ›››Fig.161.
Switch o the ignition of both vehicles
››› .
Connect one end of the red jump lead to
the positive
+
terminal of the vehicle with
the flat battery
A
.
Connect the other end of the red jump lead
to the positive terminal
+
in the vehicle
providing assistance
B
.
Vehicles without a Start-Stop system:
connect one end of the black jump lead
to the negative terminal
–
of the vehicle
providing the current
B
›››Fig.160.
Vehicles with a Start-stop system: connect
one end of the black jump lead
X
to a
suitable ground terminal, to a solid piece of
metal in the engine block, or to the engine
block itself ›››Fig.161.
Connect the other end of the black jump
lead
X
to a solid metal component bolted
to the engine block or to the engine block
itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do
not connect it to a point near the battery A.
Position the leads in such a way that they
cannot come into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
Starting
Start the engine of the vehicle with the
boosting battery and let it run at idling
speed.
Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat
battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until the
engine is running.
Removing the jump leads
Before you remove the jump leads, switch
o the dipped beam headlights if they are
switched on.
Turn on the heater blower and heated rear
window in the vehicle with the flat battery.
This helps minimise voltage peaks which
are generated when the leads are discon-
nected.
When the engine is running, disconnect the
leads in reverse order to the details given
above.
If the engine fails to start after about 10sec-
onds, switch o the starter and try again after
about 1 minute.
WARNING
●
Please note the safety warnings refer-
ring to working in the engine compartment
›››page263.
●
The battery providing assistance must
have the same voltage as the flat battery
(12V) and approximately the same capacity
(see imprint on battery). Failure to comply
could result in an explosion.
●
Never use jump leads when one of the bat-
teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even
after the battery has thawed, battery acid
could leak and cause chemical burns. If a
battery freezes, it should be replaced.
●
Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes
away from batteries, danger of explosion.
Failure to comply could result in an explo-
sion.
●
Observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the jump leads.
●
Do not connect the negative cable from
the other vehicle directly to the negative ter-
minal of the flat battery. The gas emitted
from the battery could be ignited by sparks.
Danger of explosion.
●
Never attach the negative cable to fuel
system components or the brake lines in the
other vehicle.
●
The non-insulated parts of the battery
clamps must not be allowed to touch. The
jump lead attached to the positive battery
terminal must not touch metal parts of the
vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
Miscellaneous situations
251
Towing the vehicle
●
Position the leads in such a way that they
cannot come into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
●
Do not lean on the batteries. This could re-
sult in chemical burns.
●
Take into account the instruction manual of
the jump lead manufacturer and the instruc-
tion manual of the other vehicle.
NOTICE
Immediately go to a specialist workshop and
have the 12 volt battery checked.
Towing the vehicle
Introduction
It takes practice to tow a vehicle, especially
when using a tow cable. Both drivers should be
well informed of the special features of towing.
Inexperienced drivers should refrain from tow-
ing.
During towing, make sure at all times that no
inadmissible traction forces or jolts are gener-
ated. On roads without a firm surface there is
always the danger of overloading the attach-
ment parts.
Take into account the legal provisions regarding
tow starting and towing.
Tow start
Tow starting means starting a vehicle's engine
while another puts it in motion by pulling it.
The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or
cable
Towing
Towing means a vehicle pulling another vehicle
that is not in a condition to run.
The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or
cable.
●
The maximum permitted speed is 50km/h
(30 mph).
●
The maximum permitted distance is 50km
(30 miles).
Tow cable and tow bar
It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a tow
bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. The tow
cable should only be used if a tow bar is not
available.
A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid
damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to use
a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly
elastic material.
Tow with a tow truck
If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with au-
tomatic transmission are only allowed to be
towed with the front wheels suspended.
WARNING
During the towing of a vehicle, the driving
behaviour and braking capacity change con-
siderably.
WARNING
Never allow the vehicle to be towed if it has
no power.
●
When towing, never remove the key from
the ignition or disconnect the ignition with
the ignition and start button. Otherwise, the
electronic lock of the steering column could
suddenly get blocked and it would be impos-
sible to steer the vehicle. This could cause an
accident, serious injury and loss of control of
the vehicle.
●
If the vehicle runs out of power during tow-
ing, stop the process immediately and seek
the assistance of specialised personnel.
NOTICE
Towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow
bar can cause damage to the vehicle.
●
If the vehicle is towed with a tow cable or
tow bar, special care must be taken.
●
If possible, have the vehicle transported on
a tow truck.
252
Miscellaneous situations
NOTICE
If the vehicle is pushed by hand, the tail light
units, the side spoilers of the rear window
and large sheet metal surfaces may be dam-
aged. In addition, the rear spoiler could be
detached.
●
If the vehicle is pushed by hand, the tail
light units, the side spoilers of the rear win-
dow, large sheet metal surfaces or the rear
spoiler.
NOTICE
Removing and attaching the cover and the
towing eye may cause damage to the vehi-
cle, for example, on the paintwork.
●
To avoid damaging the vehicle, remove and
replace the cover and the towing eye care-
fully.
NOTICE
Using a towing eye that is not suitable for the
vehicle can damage it.
●
When towing, always use the vehicle’s tow-
ing eye, which forms part of the on-board
tools, or an appropriate eye for towing.
Instructions for tow-starting and
towing
During towing, the change of direction can be
signalled on the towed vehicle even when the
hazard warning lights are on. To do so, at the
same time, the turn signal lever must be oper-
ated with ignition switched on. During this time
the hazard warning lights remain disconnected.
When the turn signal lever is returned to the
rest position, the hazard warning lights will be
automatically reactivated.
Cases where tow starting and towing the ve-
hicle are not permitted
Do not allow the vehicle to be towed in the
following situations:
●
The vehicle’s gearbox is damaged or has no
lubricant.
●
The 12-volt battery is discharged. In vehicles
with the “Keyless Access” locking and ignition
system the steering remains locked and the
parking brake cannot be deactivated and the
steering column lock cannot be released if they
are connected.
●
If a distance above 50 km needs to be travel-
led.
●
There is no guarantee that the wheels will
turn smoothly or that the steering will work after
an accident.
If the vehicle cannot be towed on its wheels for
any of the reasons mentioned above, request
assistance from specialised personnel and, if
necessary, have the vehicle transported with-
out the wheels touching the ground.
Tow start
Steps to be taken prior to tow starting
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: Due to
technical reasons, tow starting the vehicle is not
allowed. Attempt to start the engine using the
starting aid ›››page249.
Vehicles with a manual gearbox: In general, it
is not recommended to tow start the vehicle. If
the engine does not start, try the starting aid
first ›››page249. Please note that, in the case
of petrol engines, the maximum permitted dis-
tance for tow starting is 50m.
●
Secure the tow cable or tow bar using only
the attachment points provided for this pur-
pose.
●
Switch on the ignition and the hazard warning
lights.
●
Engage 2nd or 3rd gear while the vehicle is
stopped.
●
Press the clutch and hold it down.
●
When both vehicles are in motion, release the
clutch pedal.
●
As soon as the engine starts, depress the
clutch and disengage the gear to avoid collid-
ing with the towing vehicle.
Miscellaneous situations
253
Towing the vehicle
NOTICE
When tow-starting, unburnt fuel could enter
the catalytic converter and damage it.
Towing
Previous steps
●
Secure the tow cable or tow bar using only
the attachment points provided for this purpose
››› . Depending on the equipment, these
points may be a towing device or a towing eye.
●
Make sure the tow cable is not twisted. Other-
wise the towing eye could unscrew during tow-
ing.
●
Switch on the ignition and the hazard warning
lights of both vehicles. If necessary, take into
account other dierent provisions that may ex-
ist in this regard.
●
Take into account the instructions on towing
provided in the instruction manual of the other
vehicle.
Towing vehicle (front)
●
Do not actually start driving until the cable is
tight.
●
Accelerate with particular care.
●
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
Vehicles with a manual gearbox:
●
When starting to drive, use the clutch very
gently.
Towed vehicle (behind)
●
Make sure the ignition is switched on so that
the steering wheel does not lock and so that, if
necessary, you can use the turn signals and the
windscreen wiper.
●
The brake servo and power steering only
work when the engine is running. Otherwise,
you will have to depress the brake pedal con-
siderably harder and more force will be needed
to turn the steering wheel.
●
Release the electronic parking brake.
●
Make sure the tow cable is always taut.
●
Disengage the gear or place the gear selec-
tor in the Nposition.
WARNING
Never attach the tow rope or tow bar to axle
or running gear components. They could be
damaged, resulting in an accident and seri-
ous injury.
●
Seek specialist assistance and, if applica-
ble, have the vehicle transported on a tow
truck.
NOTICE
The vehicle can only be towed if the state of
charge of the 12-volt battery is sucient to
disengage the electronic parking brake and
the steering column lock. If the vehicle has
no power supply or there is an electric sys-
tem fault, the engine must be jump-started
to release the electronic parking brake and
deactivate the electronic lock of the steering
column.
Front towline anchorage
Fig.162 Front bumper on right: remove the lid.
254
Miscellaneous situations
Fig.163 Right side of the front bumper: towline
anchorage screwed in.
The housing of the removable towline anchor-
age is on the right side of the front bumper un-
derneath a cover ›››Fig.162.
The towing eye should always be kept in the
vehicle.
Bear in mind the instructions for towing
›››page252.
Fitting the towline anchorage
●
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool
kit in the luggage compartment ›››page247.
●
Remove the cover by pressing down on its
base and leave it hanging from the vehicle
›››Fig.162.
●
Screw the towing eye in the housing by
turning it to the maximum anticlockwise
›››Fig.163 , ›››
. Use a suitable object that
can completely and securely tighten the towing
eye in its housing.
●
After towing, unscrew the towing eye
clock-
wise with a suitable object.
●
Replace the cover and push it in until it clicks
into place.
●
Clean the towing eye if necessary and then
store it in the luggage compartment along with
the other vehicle tools.
NOTICE
The towing eye must always be completely
and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could
jump out of the housing during towing.
Rear towline anchorage
Fig.164 Rear bumper on right: remove the lid.
Fig.165
Right side of the rear bumper: towline
anchorage screwed in.
The housing of the screw towing eye is on
the right side of the rear bumper behind a lid
›››Fig.164.
Vehicles fitted as standard with a towing
bracket do not have any housing for the screw
towing eye behind the lid. In this case, the tow
hitch needs to be extracted or installed and
used for towing ›››page228 , ››› .
Bear in mind the instructions for towing
›››page252.
Fitting the rear towline anchorage
●
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool
kit in the luggage compartment ›››page247.
●
Press the right hand side of the cover
›››Fig.164 to unclip it.
●
Remove the lid and let it hang from the vehi-
cle
Miscellaneous situations
255
Fuses
●
Screw the towing eye in the housing by
turning it to the maximum anticlockwise
›››Fig.165 , ›››page255. Use a suitable ob-
ject that can completely and securely tighten
the towing eye in its housing.
●
After towing, unscrew the towing eye clock-
wise with a suitable object.
●
Clean the towing eye if necessary and then
store it in the luggage compartment along with
the other vehicle tools.
NOTICE
●
The towing eye must always be com-
pletely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it
could be released while towing and tow-
starting.
●
If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a
towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow with
a tow bar if this has been specially designed
to be installed with a tow hitch. If an unsuita-
ble tow bar is used, both the tow hitch and
the vehicle may be damaged. Instead, a tow
rope should be used.
Fuses
Introduction
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various
electrical components. Likewise, an electrical
component can be protected by several fuses.
Only replace fuses when the cause of the
problem has been solved. If a newly inserted
fuse blows after a short time, you must have
the electrical system checked by a specialised
workshop as soon as possible.
WARNING
The high voltages in the electrical system
can give serious electrical shocks, causing
burns and even death!
●
Never touch the electrical wiring of the ig-
nition system.
●
Take care not to cause short circuits in the
electrical system.
WARNING
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or
bridging a current circuit without fuses can
cause a fire and serious injury.
●
Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only
replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper-
age (same colour and markings) and size.
●
Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-
ple or similar.
NOTICE
●
To prevent damage to the vehicle’s electri-
cal system, before replacing a fuse always
turn o the ignition, the lights and all electri-
cal elements.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-
vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can
damage the electrical system.
Note
In the vehicle, there are more fuses than
those indicated in this chapter. These should
only be replaced by a specialist workshop.
Fuses inside the vehicle
Fig.166 On the dashboard on the driver side:
lid of the fuse box.
256
Miscellaneous situations
Opening and closing the fuse box located
below the instrument panel
●
Open: remove the fuse box cover in the direc-
tion indicated ›››Fig.166.
●
Close: click the cover back into place.
Identifying fuses below the dashboard by
colours
Colour
Current intensity in
amps
Orange 5
Brown 7.5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent 25
Green 30
Orange 40
NOTICE
●
Always carefully remove the fuse box cov-
ers and refit them correctly to avoid prob-
lems with your vehicle.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid
the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humid-
ity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to
the electrical system.
Fuses in the engine compartment
Fig.167 In the engine compartment: lid of the
fuse box.
To open the engine compartment fuse box
●
Raise the bonnet ››› on page263.
●
Press the locking tabs to unlock the fuse box
cover ›››Fig.167.
●
Then lift the cover out.
●
To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Push
the locking tabs down until they click audibly
into place.
Replace a blown fuse
Fig.168 Image of a blown fuse.
Preparations
●
Switch o the ignition, lights and all electrical
equipment.
●
Open the corresponding fuse box
›››page255, ›››page256.
Recognise a blown fuse
A blown fuse can be recognised if the metal
strip is melted ›››Fig.168.
●
Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has blown.
Miscellaneous situations
257
Fuses
To replace a fuse
●
Remove the fuse.
●
Replace the blown fuse by one with an iden-
tical amperage rating (same colour and mark-
ings) and identical size.
●
Replace the cover again or close the fuse box
lid.
Fuse placement
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-
perage (same colour and markings) and size.
Fuses in the vehicle interior
No. Consumers/Amps
1 Tow hook 20
3 Sound amplifier 30
4 Cigarette lighter/12V power point 20
6 Central locking 40
8 Heating fan/Climatronic 30
10 Tow hook 25
13
Lights switch, steering column LSS
and SMLS, diagnostic port, rain/
light sensor
7.5
14 Steering Column LSS: wiper con-
trol
10
15 Kombi, Emergency call (+NZ4) 7.5
16 Right lights power supply 40
No. Consumers/Amps
17 Right Door Window Control 30
18 Windscreen wipers 30
19 Radio, Multimedia System 25
20 Heated rear window 30
21 SCR Control Unit 30
23 Rear View Camera 7.5
24
Connectivity Box, external audio
source wiring (Double USB), MIB
display
5
25 Steering column electronics (MFL) 7.5
26 Gateway 7.5
27 Active suspension control unit 7.5
28 DWA Sensor 7.5
29 DWA Horn 7.5
31
9AA/9AB climate control unit 7.5
9AK Climatronic control unit 15
32 Steering Column LSS, without
Kessy
7.5
33 Left Door Window Control 30
35 Left lights power supply 40
36 Signal Horn 20
37 Heated seats control unit 30
38 BCM Power C63 30
No. Consumers/Amps
39 BSD, PDC, MRR, PLA 10
40 Light switch, diagnosis input,
headlamp range regulator, LSS
steering column: lamps, halogen
lamps, switch, reverse gear, elec-
trochromic mirror, RKA without ra-
dio.
7.5
41 Regulation of unfolded exterior
mirrors
7.5
42 Clutch pedal, ignition relays, AA
pressure sensor
7.5
43 DWP relay coil, rear window wiper
motor
15
44 Airbag 7.5
45 Left full LED headlight 7.5
46 Right full LED headlight 7.5
48 Steering column lock, Kessy Con-
trol Unit
7.5
49 SCR relay 7.5
53 Automatic gearbox lever, ZSS 7.5
58 Windscreen washer pump 7.5
59 Heated rear view mirrors 10
60 Tow hook 30
61 Tow hook 30
258
Miscellaneous situations
Fuse arrangement in engine compartment
No. Consumer/Amps
1
MPI Engine Injection Module 10
TSI Engine Injection Module 15
2
Fuel metering valve (TJ4/T6P/
N09), Low temperature coolant
pump (TJ4/T6P/N09/TC5); Oil
pressure regulating valve (TJ1),
AGR coolant valve (TJ1), High and
low pressure water pumps (TJ1),
SCR relay coil, cylinder head wa-
ter valve
7.5
3 Lambda probes 15
4
Engine petrol pump relay (MPI),
Gauge control unit (TSI)
15
5
Electric fan (EC), LDR valve, can-
nister and variable distribution
valve, oil pressure regulating valve,
cylinder disconnection valves, WIV
sensor
10
6 Spark plugs (MPI and TSI) 20
7 Vacuum pump (TSI) 15
8 Injectors and EKP relay coil (MPI) 10
9 Servo sensor 7.5
10
Vref Battery: Gateway, BDM and
BCM
7.5
12 Detachable compressor 10
No. Consumer/Amps
14
ESC, Relay 87 coil and engine
controller of engines (+ TJ1 / TJ4 /
TH4 / T5I / T6P / N09 / TC5 / T5Y).
7.5
15
Automatic gearbox DQ200 and
AQ160
30
17 50 Diag 7.5
18 BDM starter motor 30
20
ESC (Pump) 60
ABS (Pump) 40
21 ESC/ABS (Valves) 25
24
TH4 Electric fan without A/C for
moderate climate countries
30
25
TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moder-
ate climate countries
20
PTC1 40
26
TJ1/TJ4/N09/T6P or TH4/T5I Elec-
tric fan for warm climate countries
50
27
TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moder-
ate climate countries
30
PTC2 40
28 PTC3 40
Note
●
In the vehicle, there are more fuses than
those indicated in this chapter. These should
only be changed by a specialised workshop.
●
Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-
pear in the following tables.
●
Some of the equipment listed in the tables
below pertain only to certain versions of the
model or are optional extras.
●
Please note that the above lists, while cor-
rect at the time of printing, are subject to
change.
Changing bulbs
Introduction
Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of
practical skill. If you are unsure, SEAT recom-
mends that you consult a technical service or
request assistance from a specialist. In general
a specialist is needed if, in addition to the bulbs,
other vehicle components require removal.
Always use identical bulbs with the same desig-
nation. The name can be found on the base of
the bulb holder.
Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,
there are dierent sets of headlights and tail
lights:
●
ECOLED (full-LED) main headlights
●
High (full-LED) main headlights
Miscellaneous situations
259
Changing bulbs
●
Rear bulb light
●
LED rear light
LED technology lights
Full-LED headlights handle all light functions
(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam
and route light) with light emitting diodes (LEDs)
as a light source. They have been designed to
last the lifetime of the vehicle and the bulbs
cannot be replaced. In case of headlight fail-
ure, go to an authorised workshop to have it
replaced.
The fog lights, number plate light, side turn
signals and additional brake light are all LED
bulbs. With this in mind, they should be re-
placed by a technical service.
Bulbs (12 V)
Depending on the level of equipment fitted in
the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or all of
the interior and/or exterior lighting. LEDs have
an estimated life that exceeds that of the vehi-
cle. If an LED light fails, go to an authorised
workshop for its replacement.
Light source used for each function
Bulb light
a)
Left Right
Brake lights
2 x P21WLL 2 x P21WLL
Side lights
Retro fog light P21 WLL —
Bulb light
a)
Left Right
Reverse light — P21 WLL
Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL
a)
The table corresponds to a right-hand trac ve-
hicle. The position of lights may vary according to
the country.
Light with
LEDs
a)
Left Right
Brake lights LED LED
Side lights LED LED
Retro fog light LED —
Reverse light — P21 WLL
Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL
a)
The table corresponds to a right-hand trac ve-
hicle. The position of lights may vary according to
the country.
WARNING
●
Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The
glass can break when you touch the bulb,
causing injury.
●
When changing the bulbs, take care not to
injure yourself on parts with sharp edges.
NOTICE
●
Remove the ignition key before working on
the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit
could occur.
●
Switch o the lights and the parking light
before changing a bulb.
●
Take good care to avoid damaging any
components.
For the sake of the environment
Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis-
pose of used bulbs in the proper manner.
Note
●
Depending on weather conditions (cold or
wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the tail
lights and the turn signals may be tempora-
rily misted. This has no influence on the use-
ful life of the lighting system. By switching on
the lights, the area through which the beam
of light is projected will quickly be demisted.
However, the edges may continue to be mis-
ted.
●
Please check at regular intervals that all
lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on
your vehicle is functioning properly. This is
not only in the interest of your own safety,
but also that of all other road users.
●
Before changing a bulb, make sure you
have the correct new bulb.
260
Miscellaneous situations
●
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb
with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper
towel instead, since the fingerprints left on
the glass will vaporise as a result of the heat
generated by the bulb, they will be deposited
on the reflector and will impair its surface.
●
Depending on the level of equipment fitted
in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part
or all of the interior and/or exterior lighting.
LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds
than that of the car. If an LED light fails, go to
an authorised workshop for its replacement.
Changing bulbs
Tail light bulbs located in the bodywork
Fig.169 Boot: access to the bolt securing the
tail light unit.
Fig.170 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail
light.
Follow the steps indicated:
●
Check which of the bulbs is defective.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Remove the lid, levering the flat side of a
screwdriver into the recess ›››Fig.169
1
.
●
Remove the bulb connector
2
.
●
Unscrew the bolt securing the light
3
by
hand or using a screwdriver.
●
Remove the light from the body, gently pull-
ing it toward you, and place on a clean, smooth
surface.
●
Remove the bulb holder unlocking the retain-
ing tabs ›››Fig.170
A
.
●
Change the damaged bulb.
●
To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking
special care when fitting the bulb holder. The
securing tabs must click into place.
NOTICE
Take care when removing the rear light unit
to make sure there is no damage to the paint-
work or any of its components.
Note
●
Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to
place under the glass on the rear light unit, to
avoid any scratches.
●
For LED lights, you can only change the
turn signal and reverse light bulbs.
Tail lights bulbs located in the rear lid
Fig.171 Rear lid open: remove the lid.
Miscellaneous situations
261
Changing bulbs
Fig.172 Remove the bulb holder.
Follow the steps indicated:
●
Check which of the bulbs is defective.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Remove the rear lid cover in the direction of
the arrow ›››Fig.171.
●
Remove the bulb connector ›››Fig.172
1
.
●
Remove the bulb holder unlocking the retain-
ing tabs
A
.
●
Change the damaged bulb.
●
Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from
the glass part of the bulb.
●
Check that the new bulb works properly.
●
Carry out the same actions in reverse order
for assembly and pay special attention to plac-
ing the bulb holder, ensuring that the tabs are
properly secured.
Note
For LED lights, you can only change the turn
signal and reverse light bulbs.
Changing interior bulbs
Interior light and front reading lights
Fig.173 Front reading light.
●
Insert a fine screwdriver between the casing
and the glass ›››Fig.173.
●
Carefully remove the glass, levering it to
avoid possible damage.
●
Pull the bulbs outwards.
●
To remove the central bulb, hold and press to
one side.
●
Proceed in the reverse order, pressing gently
on the outer edge of the side light.
●
First fit the glass with the fastening tabs over
the frame of the switch. Next press the front part
until the two long tabs click on the support.
Note
In LED courtesy lights it is not possible to re-
place the light sources. If the light does not
work, take the vehicle to an ocial Service.
Luggage compartment lighting
Fig.174 Boot light.
Fig.175 Boot light.
●
Extract the bulb by pressing on its inside edge
using the flat side of a screwdriver ›››Fig.174.
Checking and refilling levels
263
Engine compartment
Checking and refilling
levels
Engine compartment
Working in the engine compartment
The engine compartment of the vehicle is a
dangerous area. You should only perform works
in the engine compartment if you have good
knowledge of the necessary operations and the
general safety measures, and if you have ade-
quate tools, means and operating fluids. Works
performed inadequately, could lead to serious
injuries ›››
. In this case, seek a specialised
workshop to perform all the works. SEAT rec-
ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
Before performing any work in the engine com-
partment, always park the vehicle on level and
firm ground, taking all necessary safety pre-
cautions.
WARNING
Any accidental movement of the vehicle dur-
ing maintenance work could cause serious
injuries.
●
Never perform works underneath the vehi-
cle without having first immobilised it to pre-
vent it from moving. When working under the
vehicle with the wheels on the ground, the
vehicle must be on a level surface and the
wheels must be locked.
●
If work must be performed underneath the
vehicle, take the extra precaution of support-
ing it safely using suitable assembly support.
The jack is not suitable for this purpose and
may not withstand, which could lead to seri-
ous injuries.
●
The Start-Stop system must be switched
o manually.
WARNING
The engine compartment of any vehicle is a
dangerous area in which serious injuries can
be caused!
●
When performing any type of work, always
ensure you are extremely cautious, and bear
in mind the general safety measures. Never
put yourself at risk.
●
Never perform works in the engine com-
partment if you do not have solid knowledge
of the necessary operations. If you are un-
sure of what needs to be done, seek a speci-
alised workshop to perform the works. Works
performed inadequately, could lead to seri-
ous injuries.
●
Never open or close the bonnet if you
see steam or coolant escaping from the en-
gine compartment. Steam or hot coolant can
cause severe burns. Always wait until you
stop hearing or seeing the steam or coolant
discharging from the engine compartment.
●
Before opening the bonnet, always wait for
the engine to cool down.
●
Touching hot engine or exhaust system
components could result in skin burns.
●
Turn o the ignition and keep the vehicle
key in a safe place at a safe distance from
the vehicle to prevent the ignition from being
turned on and the combustion engine started
by mistake.
●
Always keep children away from the en-
gine compartment and never leave them un-
supervised.
●
When the motor is hot, its cooling system is
pressurised. Do not open the expansion tank
cap, hot coolant may splash out and cause
severe burns and other injuries.
–
Turn the coolant expansion tank cap
slowly and very carefully anticlockwise
while pressing it down slightly.
–
Always protect your face, hands and
arms from the hot coolant and steam with
a large thick cloth.
●
When refilling operating fluids, ensure they
do not spill onto the components of the en-
gine or onto the exhaust system. These liq-
uids could cause a fire.
264
Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
The electrical system is under high voltage
and can cause electrical shocks, burns, seri-
ous injuries and even death!
●
Never short circuit the electrical system.
The 12-volt battery could explode.
●
To reduce the risk of electric shock and se-
rious injury, never touch the electrical wires
of the ignition system while the engine is run-
ning or when starting.
WARNING
There are rotating parts in the engine com-
partment which could cause serious injury.
●
Never insert your hand in the radiator fan
or around that area. All the rotor blades can
cause serious injuries. The fan activates de-
pending on the temperature and can switch
on automatically, even if the ignition is o.
●
If any work has to be done during engine
start-up or when it is running, take into ac-
count that the rotating parts (e.g. the poly-
V belt, alternator and the radiator fan) and
the high-voltage ignition system pose a fatal
hazard. Always act with extreme care.
–
Ensure that no part of your body, or any
jewellery or tie, loose clothing, loose long
hair can become trapped in the rotating
parts. Before performing works in the en-
gine compartment, remove any jewellery
or tie you may be wearing, tie up your hair
if it is long and gather any loose clothing.
–
Do not press the accelerator pedal while
not paying attention. Always do so with ex-
treme care. The vehicle could move, even if
the electronic parking brake is activated.
●
Do not leave objects in the engine com-
partment, e.g. rags or tools.
WARNING
The operating fluids and some materials of
the engine compartment are highly flamma-
ble and could cause a fire and serious inju-
ries!
●
Never smoke in the vicinity of the engine
compartment.
●
Never perform works close to unprotected
flames or sparks.
●
When you must perform works on the on-
board 12 volt electrical system, bear in mind
the following:
–
Always disconnect the 12 volt battery.
Ensure the vehicle is unlocked when dis-
connecting the 12-volt battery, otherwise
the anti-theft alarm will trigger.
–
Never perform works in the vicinity of
heating elements, water boilers or unpro-
tected flames.
●
Always have a fire extinguisher close-by,
ensuring it is operational and had been
checked.
NOTICE
When refilling or changing the operating flu-
ids, ensure you pour the correct fluids into
their corresponding filler caps. Using the
wrong operating fluids can lead to serious
malfunctions and motor damage.
For the sake of the environment
Operating fluids that overflow from the ve-
hicle contaminate the environment. There-
fore, check underneath the vehicle on a reg-
ular basis. If there are marks left by operat-
ing fluids on the ground, consult a special-
ised workshop and request the vehicle be
checked. If any operating fluid leaks out, dis-
pose of it in the correct manner.
Preparing the vehicle for work in the
engine compartment
Before performing works in the engine com-
partment, always perform the following opera-
tions in the order indicated ›››
:
1. Place the vehicle on level and firm ground,
taking all necessary safety precautions.
2. Press the brake pedal and keep it pressed
until the ignition is switched o.
3.
Apply the electronic parking brake.
4.
Manual transmission: place the gear lever
in neutral.
Checking and refilling levels
265
Engine compartment
Automatic transmission: move the selector
lever to position P.
5. Switch the ignition o ›››page111.
6. Remove the vehicle key from the vehicle
and store it outside to avoid inadvertently
starting the engine.
7. Wait for the engine to cool down su-
ciently.
8. Always keep other people away from the
engine compartment.
9. Immobilize the vehicle so that it cannot
move.
WARNING
For your own safety, do not ignore this impor-
tant check list, otherwise this could cause
accidents and serious injuries.
●
Always follow the indications on the check
list and always bear in mind the general
safety measures.
Opening and closing the bonnet
Fig.176 Release lever in the driver's footwell
area.
Fig.177 Lever under the bonnet.
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.
Before opening the bonnet, make sure that the
windscreen wiper arms are in place against the
windscreen.
●
Open the door and pull the lever that is un-
derneath the instrument panel ›››Fig.176
1
.
●
To lift the bonnet, press towards the left on
the lever located under the bonnet, in the cen-
tre ›››Fig.177
2
. The fastening hooks are
unlocked.
●
The bonnet can be opened. Release the bon-
net stay and secure it in the fixture designed for
this in the bonnet.
Closing the bonnet
●
Slightly lift the bonnet.
●
Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its
support.
●
At a height of approximately 20 cm let it fall
so it locks.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press
downwards. Open it again and let it fall as
mentioned above.
WARNING
Make sure that the bonnet is properly closed.
If it opens when driving, it can cause an acci-
dent.
NOTICE
In certain weather conditions, ice or snow
may build up between the bonnet and wind-
screen; do not force the bonnet open until
you are sure that there is no ice or snow, es-
pecially in the hinge area.
266
Checking and refilling levels
NOTICE
To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the
windscreen wiper arms, only open it when
the windscreen wipers are in place against
the windscreen.
Fluids and consumables
Introduction
All fluids and consumables, such as engine
coolant or vehicle batteries, are subject to con-
tinuous development. For this reason, whenever
a fluid or consumable needs to be replaced,
please contact a specialist workshop.
SEAT dealers always promptly receive informa-
tion about any modifications.
WARNING
If unsuitable fluids and consumables are
used or used improperly, accidents, injuries,
burns and severe poisoning can occur.
●
Only store operating fluids in their original
containers, tightly closed.
●
Never store operating fluids in empty food
cans, bottles or other empty containers, as
they could be ingested by somebody.
●
Keep all fluids and consumables out of
reach of children.
●
Always read and observe the information
and warnings given on containers of operat-
ing fluids.
●
When using products that emit harmful va-
pours, always work outdoors or in a well-ven-
tilated area.
NOTICE
Use only appropriate operating fluids. Never
confuse operating fluids. This could result in
serious malfunctions and motor damage!
For the sake of the environment
Leakages of operating fluids can contami-
nate the environment. If any operating fluid
leaks, collect it in an appropriate container
and dispose of it properly and in an environ-
mentally friendly manner.
Cooling system
Introduction
Only carry out work on the motor cooling sys-
tem yourself if you are familiar with the neces-
sary operations and the generally applicable
safety measures, and if you have the appro-
priate tools, equipment and operating fluids.
Works performed inadequately could lead to
serious injuries . In this case, seek a specialised
workshop to perform all the works. SEAT rec-
ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
WARNING
Engine coolant is toxic!
●
Only store coolant in its original container,
tightly closed and in a safe place.
●
Never store motor coolant in empty food
cans, bottles or other empty containers, as it
could be ingested by another person.
●
Always keep motor coolant out of reach of
children.
●
Ensure that the coolant fluid additive per-
centage is correct, taking into account the
lowest ambient temperature expected in the
location where the vehicle is to be used.
●
When the outside temperature is very low,
the coolant could freeze and the vehicle
could be immobilised. In this case, the heat-
ing would not work either and inadequately
dressed passengers could die of cold.
For the sake of the environment
Coolants and additives can contaminate the
environment. If any operating fluid leaks out,
collect it and dispose of it properly and in an
environmentally friendly manner.
Coolant specifications
The factory fitted motor cooling system is filled
with a mixture of specially treated water and at
least 40% coolant additive G12evo (TL-VW 774
L).
Checking and refilling levels
267
Cooling system
Get information from a specialist workshop
about which coolant is suitable for your vehicle.
SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership
for this.
To protect the engine cooling system, the ad-
ditive percentage should always be at least
40%. If more antifreeze protection is required
for climatic reasons, the additive proportion
can be increased. However, it should only be
increased up to a maximum of 55 %, otherwise
the antifreeze protection would be reduced and
the cooling eect would be impaired.
The G12evo (TL-VW 774 L) can be recognised
by its lilac colouring. This mixture of water
and additive not only provides antifreeze pro-
tection down to -25°C (-13°F), but also pro-
tects the light alloy parts of the cooling system
against corrosion, prevents limescale build-up
and considerably raises the boiling point of the
coolant.
When topping up the coolant, a mixture of dis-
tilled water and at least 40% of the appropri-
ate coolant additive should be used for opti-
mum corrosion protection ›››page267.
WARNING
If the vehicle’s cooling system does not have
sucient antifreeze protection, the engine
could fail and this could result in serious in-
jury.
●
Ensure that the coolant fluid additive per-
centage is correct, taking into account the
lowest ambient temperature expected in the
location where the vehicle is to be used.
●
When the outside temperature is very low,
the coolant could freeze and the vehicle
could be immobilised. In this case, the heat-
ing would not work either and inadequately
dressed passengers could die of cold.
NOTICE
Never mix the original additives for the
G12evo coolant (TL-VW 774 L) with motor
coolant fluid not authorised by SEAT.
●
If the fluid in the expansion tank does not
have a pink colour (resulting from mixing the
lilac additive with distilled water), but is, for
example, brown, the suitable coolant may
have been mixed with another unsuitable
one. The coolant must be changed as soon
as possible if this is the case! Otherwise se-
rious malfunctions or damage to the engine
and the cooling system could occur!
For the sake of the environment
Motor coolant and its additives can pollute
the environment. If any operating fluid leaks
out, collect it and dispose of it properly and
in an environmentally friendly manner.
Check and refill the coolant
Fig.178 In the front compartment: marking on
coolant expansion tank.
268
Checking and refilling levels
Fig.179 Front compartment: coolant
expansion tank cap.
Previous steps
●
Park the vehicle on a firm, flat surface.
●
Wait until the engine has fully cooled ››› .
●
Open the front bonnet.
●
The motor coolant expansion tank can be
recognised by the symbol on the cap
›››Fig.179
Check the level
When the vehicle is delivered (new vehicles),
the coolant may be above the marked area.
This is normal. It is not necessary to suck the
coolant out.
●
When the engine is cold, check the coolant
level using the side marking on the expansion
tank ›››Fig.178. The coolant level should be
between the marks.
●
If the level is below the minimum level mark
( ) on the tank, top up with coolant. When the
motor is warm, the coolant level may be slightly
above the upper mark.
Topping up the fluid
When the motor coolant level is too low, the
coolant warning light comes on. In this case,
immediately seek assistance from specialist
personnel.
If the coolant level is too low and there is no
workshop nearby, note the following:
●
Always protect your face, hands and arms
from hot coolant or steam by placing a suitable
cloth over the cap of the motor coolant expan-
sion tank.
●
Carefully unscrew the cap ››› .
●
Only top up with fresh coolant according to
SEAT specifications ›››page266.
●
Only top up with coolant if there is still some
coolant left in the expansion tank; otherwise the
motor could be damaged! If you do not see any
coolant in the expansion tank, do not continue
driving and seek specialist assistance.
●
If there is still some coolant left in the expan-
sion tank, top up with coolant up to the tank’s
upper mark and check the level the next day.
If the level drops again, go to a workshop and
request a check of the cooling system.
●
The coolant level must be between the marks
on the expansion tank ›››Fig.178. Never ex-
ceed the top edge of the marked area ›››
.
●
Screw the cap on tightly.
●
If engine coolant with the recommended
specifications is not available in an emergency,
do not use any other coolant additive! In this
case, top up with distilled water ››› only.
Next, ensure that the recommended additive is
topped up as soon as possible in the correct
proportion ›››page266.
WARNING
Steam and hot motor coolant can cause se-
vere burns.
●
Never open the front bonnet if you see or
hear steam or coolant escaping from the
front compartment. Always wait until you can
no longer see or hear steam or coolant es-
caping. Touching hot parts can result in skin
burns.
●
Before opening the front bonnet, please
note the following:
–
Apply the electronic parking brake.
–
Always keep children away from the front
compartment and never leave them unat-
tended.
Checking and refilling levels
269
Brake fluid
●
When the motor is hot, its cooling system is
pressurised. Do not open the expansion tank
cap, hot coolant may splash out and cause
severe burns and other injuries.
–
Turn the cap slowly and very care-
fully anticlockwise while pressing it down
slightly.
–
Always protect your face, hands and
arms from the hot coolant and steam with
a large thick cloth.
NOTICE
Only use distilled water! Other types of wa-
ter contain chemical substances that could
cause significant corrosion damage. If you
have added non-distilled water, have all of
the motor cooling system fluid changed im-
mediately by a specialist workshop.
●
When topping up the, do not fill over the
upper edge of the marked area ›››Fig.178.
Otherwise, when the temperature rises the
excess fluid will be expelled from the motor
cooling system and could cause damage.
●
If the system leaks a lot of coolant, only
refill once the motor has cooled down com-
pletely. If there is a significant loss of cool-
ant, there may be leaks in the cooling sys-
tem. Immediately go to a specialist workshop
to have the system checked. This could result
in motor damage.
●
Do not add coolant if the expansion tank
is completely empty! Air may have got into
the cooling system. Do not continue driving
and seek assistance from specialist person-
nel. This could result in motor damage.
●
When changing the operating fluids, make
sure that you pour the correct fluids into the
correct filler necks. Using the wrong operat-
ing fluids can lead to serious malfunctions
and motor damage.
Brake fluid
Check and refill the brake fluid
Fig.180 Engine compartment: brake fluid
reservoir cap.
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid level must be between the
and markings.
However, if the brake fluid level goes down no-
ticeably in a short time, or drops below the
mark, there may be a leak in the brake system.
Seek specialist assistance. A warning light on
the instrument panel display monitors the brake
fluid level.
Brake fluid level
The control lamp lights up red.
Brake fluid level is too low.
●
Stop driving!
●
Check the brake fluid level.
●
If the brake fluid level is too low, seek special-
ist assistance.
Changing brake fluid
We recommend that you have the brake fluid
changed by a Technical Service.
WARNING
If the brake fluid level is low or unsuitable/old
brake fluid is used, the brake system may fail
or braking power may be reduced.
●
Check the brake system and the brake fluid
level regularly!
●
When the brake fluid is used and brakes
are subjected to extreme braking forces,
bubbles of vapour form in the brake system.
These bubbles can significantly reduce brak-
270
Checking and refilling levels
ing power, notably increasing braking dis-
tance, and could result in the total failure of
the brake system.
●
Be sure to always use the correct brake
fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly
meets the VW 501 14 standard.
●
You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake
fluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT O-
cial Service. If none is available, use only
high-quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO
4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards
FMVSS 116 DOT4.
●
The replacement brake fluid must be new.
●
Brake fluid should be stored in the closed
original container in a safe place out of
reach of children. Risk of poisoning!
NOTICE
Brake fluid should not come into contact with
the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.
Note
Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant.
Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a
professional to dispose of them.
Windscreen washer reser-
voir
Checking the level of the window
washer tank and refilling it
Fig.181 In the engine compartment: blue cap
of the windscreen washer tank.
Check the water level in the windscreen washer
reservoir regularly and top up as required.
The window washer tank contains liquid deter-
gent for the windscreen and rear window.
There is a sieve in the filler neck of the washer
fluid tank. When filling the tank, this sieve re-
tains large dirt particles so that they do not
reach the nozzles. Do not remove the sieve ex-
cept for cleaning. If the sieve is damaged or
not fitted, these dirt particles could enter the
system during filling and clog the windscreen
washer nozzles.
●
Raise the bonnet ››› on page263.
●
The windscreen washer reservoir is marked
with the symbol on the cap.
●
Check if there is enough fluid in the tank.
Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-
screen and headlights. We recommend that
you always add a product to the windscreen
washer fluid.
Recommended windscreen wipers
●
For the hottest seasons we recommend sum-
mer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Proportions of
the mixture in the washer fluid tank: 1:100 (1 part
concentrate per 100 parts water).
●
All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass.
Approximate proportion of the winter mixture,
up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per
2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion of
mixture in the washer fluid tank.
The capacity of the windscreen washer tank is
approximately 3 litres.
Checking and refilling levels
271
Engine oil
A
B
NOTICE
If the water from the windscreen washer
does not contain enough anti-freeze, it may
freeze on the windscreen and rear window,
reducing forward and rear visibility.
●
In winter, ensure the windscreen washer
contains enough anti-freeze.
●
In cold conditions, you should not use the
windscreen wiper system unless you have
warmed the windscreen with the ventilation
system. The antifreeze could freeze on the
windscreen and reduce visibility.
NOTICE
Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other
similar additives with the windscreen washer
water. A greasy layer may be formed on the
windscreen which will impair visibility.
●
Use clean water with a window cleaner
recommended by SEAT.
●
If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to
the water in the reservoir.
NOTICE
●
Do not mix cleaning products recommen-
ded by SEAT with other products. This could
lead to flocculation and may block the wind-
screen washer jets.
●
When topping up service fluids, make ab-
solutely certain that you fill the fluids into
the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong fluids
could cause serious malfunctions.
●
Lack of window washer fluid causes the
view through the windscreen to be obscured.
Engine oil
General notes
Fig.182 In the engine compartment: engine oil
label
Fig.183 In the engine compartment: area
where the engine oil label is located
Key to the ›››Fig.182:
Information about the engine oil standard.
Information about engine oil viscosity.
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade
oil that can be used all year round.
Because the use of high-quality oil is essential
for the correct operation of the engine and its
long useful life, when topping up or changing
oil, use only those oils that comply with VW
standards.
For vehicles with an engine oil label
If the engine oil has to be topped up, use one
of the oils shown on the label ›››Fig.182.
The label with the prescribed standard is loca-
ted at the front of the engine compartment
›››Fig.183
1
. If you use the recommended
engine oil, you can top up the oil as often as
necessary.
272
Checking and refilling levels
–
For vehicles without an engine oil label
Contact a specialised workshop or SEAT of-
ficial service for information about the corre-
sponding standard.
If the engine oil level is too low
If the recommended engine oil is not availa-
ble, in the event of an emergency you can
change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 l of
the next oil until the next oil change:
Petrol engines: standard VW50400,
ACEA C3, ACEA C4, API SN or IL-
SACGF-6A.
SEAT recommends changing the oil at a speci-
alised workshop. SEAT recommends an Ocial
SEAT Service.
NOTICE
SEAT recommends the use of engine oils
approved according to the appropriate VW
standard. Use of engine oils that do not meet
these quality requirements can cause engine
damage.
SEAT recommends the use of Original SEAT
Spare Part engine oils.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the
engine oil. The deterioration caused by these
additives is not covered by the warranty.
NOTICE
0.5 l of engine oil of one of the indicated en-
gine oil standards may be used, only in the
event of an emergency and in exceptional
cases.
NOTICE
Take the following into account if you have
refilled with an engine oil dierent to those
specified in the aforementioned standards,
or by your SEAT technical service centre:
●
There is no way of completely avoiding the
danger of causing damage to the engine and
particulate filter.
●
You can continue driving with the vehicle if
the refill was no more than 0.5l of engine
oil. Go to a specialised workshop as soon
as possible and request an oil change. Oth-
erwise, there is a danger of engine damage.
●
If you have topped up more than 0.5l of
engine oil, drive with the engine at low load
levels and within the medium RPM range as a
maximum. Do not drive at more than 80 km/h
and do not travel more than 300 km (approx-
imately). Go to a specialised workshop as
soon as possible and request an oil change.
Otherwise, there is a danger of engine dam-
age.
●
You are responsible for the risk of possible
damage to the vehicle (engine, exhaust sys-
tem). If in doubt, do not start the engine and
request assistance from the technical serv-
ice centre.
●
Do not start the engine if you have topped
up with a fluid other than engine oil. Request
assistance from the technical service centre.
Danger of engine damage!
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an
engine oil that conforms to the correspond-
ing VW specifications and recommend keep-
ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en-
gine oil will always be available for a top-up
if needed.
●
If the label showing the engine oil specifi-
cations is missing ›››Fig.182, please con-
tact a specialist workshop.
Checking and topping up the engine
oil level
Fig.184 Engine oil dipstick.
Checking and refilling levels
273
Engine oil
A
B
C
Fig.185 Oil filler cap cover in the engine
compartment.
Key to the ›››Fig.184:
Do not top up oil in any case.
You can add oil but keep the level in that
zone.
The oil level is too low. Add oil up to zone
B
.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe
the warnings ›››page263, Working in the en-
gine compartment.
Check the oil level
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the
oil.
●
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
●
Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the
operating temperature is reached and then
stop.
●
Wait for about two minutes.
●
Locate the oil level dipstick. It can be recog-
nized by its coloured upper end.
●
Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a
clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as
far as it will go.
●
Then pull it out again and check the oil level
›››Fig.184. Top up with engine oil if necessary.
The oil should leave a mark between the areas
A
and
C
. It must never exceed zone
A
.
Depending on how you drive and the conditions
in which the vehicle is used, oil consumption
can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption
is likely to be higher for the first 5,000 km. For
this reason the engine oil level must be checked
at regular intervals, preferably when filling the
tank and before a journey.
Topping up engine oil
●
Locate the engine oil filler cap. It can be
recognized by the symbol on the cover
›››Fig.185.
●
Unscrew cap from the oil filler mouth
›››Fig.185.
●
Carefully add oil in small quantities (no more
than 0.5 l).
●
To avoid adding too much oil, whenever you
add a certain amount, wait about 2 minutes
and recheck the oil level ›››page273.
●
If necessary, add some more oil.
●
When the oil level reaches at least zone
›››Fig.184
B
, carefully screw on the engine
oil filler cap ››› .
Engine oil specification ›››page271.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compart-
ment or on the engine must be carried out
cautiously.
●
When working in the engine compart-
ment, always observe the safety warnings
›››page263.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil
comes into contact with hot engine compo-
nents when topping up.
NOTICE
If the oil level is above zone
A
, do not start
the engine. This could result in damage to
the engine and catalytic converter. Contact
a Technical Service.
For the sake of the environment
Under no circumstances should the oil level
be above zone
A
. Otherwise oil can be
drawn in through the crankcase breather and
leak into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-
tem.
274
Checking and refilling levels
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an
engine oil that conforms to the correspond-
ing VW specifications and recommend keep-
ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en-
gine oil will always be available for a top-up
if needed.
Engine oil change
We recommend that you have the engine oil
changed by a Technical Service.
WARNING
Only change the engine oil yourself if you
have the specialist knowledge required!
●
Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-
serve the warnings ›››page263.
●
Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil
may cause burn injuries.
●
Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such
as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil.
●
When removing the oil drain plug with your
fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre-
vent oil from running down your arm.
●
Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into
contact with engine oil.
●
Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be
stored in a safe place out of the reach of
children.
NOTICE
No additives should be used with engine
oil. This could result in engine damage. Any
damage caused by the use of such additives
would not be covered by the factory war-
ranty.
For the sake of the environment
●
We recommend that you change the en-
gine oil and the filter at a technical service
centre.
●
Never pour oil down drains or into the
ground.
●
Use a suitable container when draining the
used oil. It must be large enough to hold all
the engine oil.
Troubleshooting
Engine oil pressure too low
The indicator lamp lights up red.
Do not carry on driving! Switch o the en-
gine. Check the engine oil level.
●
If this warning lamp starts to flash, and
is accompanied by three audible warnings,
switch o the engine and check the oil level. If
necessary, add more oil ›››page272.
●
If the warning lamp flashes although the
oil level is correct, stop driving. Do not even
run the engine at idle speed! Seek professional
assistance.
Engine oil level too low
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
●
Check the engine oil level as soon as possible
›››page272.
●
Change the oil as soon as you have the op-
portunity to do so.
Fault in the oil level sensor
The control lamp flashes yellow.
●
Have the check done by a specialised work-
shop.
●
Until then it is advisable to check the oil level
every time you refuel.
12-volt battery
Introduction
The 12 volt battery is located in the engine
compartment. Its status is checked and, if nec-
essary, it is replaced as part of maintenance
work.
All work on batteries requires specialist knowl-
edge. Please refer to a SEAT Ocial Service
or a workshop specialising in batteries: risk of
burns or exploding battery!
The battery must not be opened! Never try to
change the fluid level of the battery. Otherwise
explosive gas is released from the battery that
could cause an explosion.
Checking and refilling levels
275
12-volt battery
Battery warning indications
Wear protective goggles.
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear
protective gloves and eye protection.
Rinse any splashes of electrolyte with
plenty of water.
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking
are prohibited.
The battery should only be charged in a
well-ventilated zone. Risk of explosion!
Keep children away from acid and the
battery.
Always follow the instruction manual.
If the vehicle is not used for long periods
The vehicle has a system for monitoring
the current consumption when the engine
is left unused for extended periods of time
›››page278. Some functions, such as the in-
terior lights, or the remote door opening, may
be temporarily disabled to prevent the battery
from running flat. These functions will come
back on as soon as the ignition is switched on
and the engine started.
WARNING
Working on the 12-volt battery and electri-
cal system can cause severe burns, fire and
electric shock. Always read and observe the
following warnings and safety precautions
before working on the battery:
●
Before working on the 12-volt battery,
switch o the ignition and all electrical con-
sumers and disconnect the negative cable
from this battery.
●
Always keep children away from the 12-volt
battery electrolyte and the battery itself.
●
Always wear eye protection and protective
gloves.
●
The battery electrolyte is very corrosive It
can cause skin burns and blindness. When
handling the 12-volt battery, protect your
hands, arms and face in particular from acid
splashes
●
Do not smoke while working and never
work in the vicinity of naked flames or sparks.
●
Avoid sparks caused by electrostatic dis-
charges, just like when handling electric ca-
bles and devices.
●
Never short the battery terminals.
●
Never use damaged 12-volt batteries. They
could explode. If the 12-volt battery is dam-
aged, replace it immediately.
●
Never use a frozen 12 volt battery. When
the battery is discharged, it may freeze at
temperatures close to 0°C (+32°F). If the 12-
volt battery is frozen, replace it immediately.
NOTICE
Do not expose the 12-volt battery to direct
sunlight for a prolonged period of time.
●
Ultraviolet rays can damage the battery
casing.
NOTICE
If the vehicle is not to be used for a long pe-
riod of time, protect the 12-volt battery from
frost.
●
The battery may freeze and, as a result,
suer irreparable damage.
Note
After starting the engine with a deeply dis-
charged or newly replaced 12-volt battery,
or after a jump start, some system settings
(time, date, personalised comfort settings
and programs) may be incorrectly set or de-
leted. Check and correct these settings once
the battery is suciently charged.
Note
During the winter, the starting power may
be reduced, and if necessary, the battery
should be charged.
276
Checking and refilling levels
Yellow or colourless:
Black:
Check the electrolyte level
Fig.186 Sight glass on the top of the 12 volt
battery (schematic representation).
Battery access
The 12 volt battery is located in the engine
compartment.
●
Raise the bonnet ››› in Working in the
engine compartment on page263.
●
Lift the cover that protects the front of the
battery.
Check the level
The electrolyte level should be checked regu-
larly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot countries
and in older batteries.
●
Check the colour display in the sight glass on
the top of the battery ›››Fig.186.
●
If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the
window gently until they disperse.
The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top
of the battery changes colour, depending on
the charge state and electrolyte level of the
battery.
There are two dierent colours:
The battery's electrolyte
level is too low. Go to a specialised work-
shop to have the battery checked and re-
placed if necessary.
The battery’s electrolyte level is correct.
Charging, replacing, disconnecting
and connecting the 12-volt battery
If you suspect that the 12-volt battery is dam-
aged or defective, have it checked by a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Charging the 12-volt battery
Contact a specialist workshop for charging the
12-volt battery, as the battery model fitted in
the vehicle in the factory uses a technology
that requires limited voltage charging ››› .
SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership
for this.
Replacing the 12-volt battery
The 12-volt vehicle battery has been designed
to suit its location and has special safety fea-
tures. If a 12 volt battery needs to be replaced,
the replacement battery must be installed by
a qualified technician. SEAT recommends visit-
ing a SEAT dealership. Component information
regarding size, maintenance, power and safety
characteristics to be met can be obtained from
a qualified technician, who should have the
necessary documentation and technical equip-
ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT deal-
ership.
The degassing hole of the 12 volt battery must
always be on side of the negative pole. The
degassing hole on the side of the positive pole
must always be sealed.
Only use maintenance-free 12 volt batteries
that comply with the TL 825 06 and VW 7 50 73
standards. These standards must be dated Oc-
tober 2014 or later.
The 12 volt battery must always be replaced
by a qualified technician, as the vehicle's elec-
tronic system must also be adjusted as part
of the replacement. In addition, the battery pa-
rameters relating to operational safety can only
be determined with the original battery. Only a
qualified technician has both the right technol-
ogy to make the adjustment and the correct
replacement batteries.
The use of unsuitable batteries will invalidate
the approval.
Vehicles with Start-Stop functions (
›››page115) are fitted with a special battery.
Therefore, it must only be replaced with a bat-
tery of the same specifications.
Checking and refilling levels
277
12-volt battery
Disconnecting the 12-volt battery
If the 12 volt battery is to be disconnected from
the vehicle's electrical system, please note the
following:
●
Switch o all electrical consumers.
●
Before disconnecting the battery, unlock the
vehicle, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.
●
First disconnect the negative cable and then
the positive cable ››› .
Connecting the 12-volt battery
●
Switch o all electrical consumers before re-
connecting the 12 volt battery.
●
First reconnect the positive cable and then
the negative one ››› .
After connecting the 12 volt battery and switch-
ing on the ignition, several control lamps may
light up. These lamps go out after a short dis-
tance at a speed of approx. 15 to 20 km/h (10
to 12 mph). If the warning lights do not go out,
visit a specialist workshop and have the vehicle
checked.
If the 12-volt battery has been disconnected for
a long period of time, it is likely that the next
service is not correctly indicated or calculated
›››page16 . In this case it will be necessary
to take into account the maximum maintenance
intervals allowed ›››page297.
Vehicles with a “Keyless Access” system
›››page65: If the ignition cannot be switched
on after connecting the 12 volt battery, lock and
unlock the vehicle from the outside. Then try to
switch on the ignition again. If the ignition does
not work, seek professional assistance.
WARNING
Attaching the 12-volt battery incorrectly or
using unsuitable batteries may result in short
circuits, fire and serious injury.
●
Use only maintenance-free 12 volt batter-
ies with an anti-spill system with the same
properties, specifications and dimensions as
the factory-fitted battery.
WARNING
Charging the 12-volt battery creates a highly
explosive mixture of detonating gases.
●
Only charge the 12-volt battery in a well-
ventilated place.
●
Never charge a 12-volt battery that is fro-
zen or has thawed. When the battery is dis-
charged, it may freeze at temperatures close
to 0°C (+32°F).
●
If the 12-volt battery has frozen, have it re-
placed without fail.
●
A short circuit may occur if the wires are
incorrectly connected to the poles. First
connect the positive cable and then the neg-
ative one.
NOTICE
●
Never connect or disconnect the 12-volt
battery when the ignition is switched on or
the engine is running. Also, never use a 12-
volt battery that does not meet the vehicle's
battery specifications. The electrical system
or certain electronic components could be
damaged and electrical malfunctions could
occur.
●
Never connect accessories that supply
power, such as solar panels or battery
chargers, to the 12-volt socket or cigarette
lighter, to charge the 12-volt battery. This
could damage the vehicle's electrical sys-
tem.
For the sake of the environment
●
The battery may contain toxic substances,
such as sulphuric acid and lead. Dispose of
the 12 volt battery in accordance with the
applicable regulations.
●
Electrolyte can contaminate the environ-
ment. If any operating fluid leaks out, collect
it and dispose of it properly.
Troubleshooting
Alternator fault
The control lamp lights up in RED.
The vehicle battery stops charging from the al-
ternator. You should immediately drive to the
nearest specialised workshop.
278
Checking and refilling levels
You should avoid using electrical equipment
that is not absolutely necessary because this
will drain the battery.
12 volt battery
The indicator lamp lights up YELLOW. The fol-
lowing message is displayed:
Low level of the 12 V vehicle bat-
tery. Charge while driving
Starting capacity may be limited. If this driver
message goes out after a certain amount of
time, the vehicle's battery has recharged while
driving and reached a sucient level. If the
driver message does not go out, take the vehi-
cle to a specialized workshop.
Energy management
Optimisation of the starting capacity
The power management controls the distribu-
tion of electrical energy and thus helps to en-
sure that there is always enough power availa-
ble to start the engine.
If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys-
tem is left parked for a long time, the battery
will gradually lose its charge because certain
electrical devices, such as the electronic gear-
box lock continues to draw current even when
the ignition is o. In some cases there may not
be enough power available to start the engine.
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent
power management system to control the dis-
tribution of electrical energy. This significantly
improves reliability when starting the engine,
and also prolongs the useful life of the battery.
The main functions incorporated in the power
management system are battery diagnosis,
residual current management and a dy-
namic power management system.
Battery diagnosis
The battery diagnosis function constantly reg-
isters the condition of the battery. Sensors de-
tect the battery voltage, battery current and
battery temperature. This enables the system to
calculate the current power level and charge
condition of the battery.
Residual current management
The residual current management reduces
power consumption while the vehicle is parked.
It controls the supply of power to the various
electrical devices while the ignition is switched
o. The system takes the battery diagnosis
data into consideration.
Depending on the power level of the battery,
switch o the individual electrical devices one
after the other to prevent the battery from los-
ing too much charge and to ensure that the
engine can be started reliably.
Dynamic power management
While the vehicle is moving, this function distrib-
utes the available power to the various elec-
trical devices and systems according to their
requirements. The power management ensures
that on-board systems do not consume more
electrical power than the alternator can sup-
ply, and thus maintains the maximum possible
battery power level.
Note
●
Neither is the power management system
able to overcome the given physical limits.
Please remember that the power and useful
life of the battery are limited.
●
When there is a risk that the vehicle will not
start, the alternator power failure or low bat-
tery charge level warning lamp will be shown
›››page277.
Flat battery
Starting ability has first priority. Short trips, city
trac and low temperatures all place a heavy
load on the battery.
In these conditions a large amount of power is
consumed, but only a small amount is supplied.
The situation is also critical if electrical devices
are in use when the engine is not running. In this
case power is consumed when none is being
generated.
Checking and refilling levels
279
Energy management
In these situations you will be aware that the
power management system is intervening to
control the distribution of electrical power.
When the vehicle is parked for long periods
If you do not drive your vehicle for a period
of several days or weeks, the power manage-
ment will gradually shut o the electrical devi-
ces one by one or reduce the amount of cur-
rent they are using. This limits the amount of
power consumed and helps to ensure reliable
starting even after a long period. Some conven-
ience functions, such as remote vehicle open-
ing, may not be available under certain circum-
stances. These functions will be restored when
you switch on the ignition and start the engine.
With the engine switched o
For example, if you listen to the sound system
with the engine switched o the battery will run
down.
If the energy consumption means there is a risk
that the engine will not start, a text will be dis-
played in vehicles with a driver information sys-
tem.
This driver indicator tells you that you must start
the engine so that the battery can recharge.
When the engine is running
Although the alternator generates electrical
power, the battery can still become discharged
while the vehicle is being driven. This can occur
when a lot of power is being consumed but only
a small amount supplied, especially if the bat-
tery is not fully charged initially.
To restore the necessary energy balance, the
system will then temporarily shut o the elec-
trical devices that are using a lot of power, or
reduce the current they are consuming. Heat-
ing systems in particular use a large amount of
electrical power. If you notice, for instance, that
the seat heating or the rear window heater is
not working, they may have been temporarily
switched o or regulated to a lower heat out-
put. These systems will be available again as
soon as sucient electrical power is available.
You may also notice that the engine runs at
a slightly faster idling speed when necessary.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
The increased idling speed allows the alterna-
tor to meet the greater power requirement and
charge the battery at the same time.
280
Wheels and tyres
P
Wheels and tyres
Important information
about wheels and tyres
General notes
●
When driving with new tyres, be especially
careful during the first 600 km (300 miles).
●
If you have to drive over a kerb or similar ob-
stacle, drive very slowly and as near as possi-
ble at a right angle to the obstacle.
●
Check from time to time if the tyres are
damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or dents).
Remove any foreign objects embedded in the
treads.
●
Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced
immediately.
●
Keep grease, oil and fuel o the tyres.
●
Replace any missing valve caps as soon as
possible.
●
Mark the wheels before taking them o so
that they rotate in the same direction when put
back.
●
When removed, the wheels or tyres should be
stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.
Low profile tyres
Low profile tyres have a wider tread, a larger
wheel diameter and a lower sidewall height.
Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile.
Low
profile tyres may deteriorate more quickly
than standard tyres, for instance due to
strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and
kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important
›››page282.
To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive
with special care when driving on roads in poor
condition.
Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.
If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im-
pact or have been damaged, have a special-
ised workshop check whether or not it is neces-
sary to change the tyre.
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quickly
than standard tyres.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily
visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the
car pulling to one side, this may indicate that
one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce speed im-
mediately if there is any reason to suspect that
damage may have occurred. Inspect the tyres
for damage. If no external damage is visible,
drive slowly and carefully to the nearest speci-
alised workshop and have the car inspected.
Foreign objects inserted in the tyre
●
Do not remove foreign bodies if they have
penetrated through the tyre wall!
●
If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility sys-
tem, where necessary seal the damaged tyre
as shown in section ›››page293. Use a spe-
cialised workshop for repair or replacement.
SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership
for this.
The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread
wraps around the foreign body and provision-
ally seals the tyre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-
rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Always
note the direction of rotation indicated when
mounting the wheel. This makes sure that opti-
mal use is made of tyre properties in terms of
aquaplaning, grip, excessive noise and wear.
Subsequent fitting of accessories
If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or
wheel trims, we recommend that you consult
with a SEAT Ocial Service for advice regard-
ing current techniques.
Speed symbols
The speed rating indicates the maximum speed
permitted for the tyres.
max.150 km/h (93mph)
Wheels and tyres
281
Important information about wheels and tyres
1)
COC = certificate of conformity.
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
Z
W
Y
max.160 km/h (99mph)
max. 170 km/h (106mph)
max.180 km/h (112mph)
max.190 km/h (118mph)
max.200 km/h (124mph)
max. 210 km/h (130mph)
max. 240 km/h (149mph)
max. 240km/h (149mph)
max.270 km/h (168mph)
max.300 km/h (186mph)
WARNING
●
New tyres do not have maximum grip dur-
ing the first 600 km. Drive particularly care-
fully to avoid possible accidents.
●
Never drive with damaged tyres. This may
cause an accident.
●
If you notice unusual vibrations or if the ve-
hicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the
vehicle immediately and check the tyres.
●
Never use old tyres or those with an un-
known history of use.
New wheels and tyres
It is best to have all wheels and tyres serviced
by a specialised workshop. There they have the
required knowledge, the special tools and the
corresponding spare parts.
●
Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If you
have installed new tyres, drive the first 600 km
carefully and at a moderate speed.
●
All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of the
same type, size (rolling circumference) and, if
possible, tread pattern.
●
When changing tyres, do not change just one;
change at least two on the same axle.
●
If you want to equip your vehicle with a com-
bination tyres and rims that are dierent to
those fitted in the factory, inform your special-
ised workshop before purchasing them ›››
The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for
your vehicle are listed in the vehicle documen-
tation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or
COC document
1)
). The vehicle documentation
varies depending on the country of residence.
If the type of spare wheel is dierent form the
normal wheels — e.g. in the case of winter tyres
or particularly wide tyres — the spare wheel
should only be used temporarily in the event
of a puncture, and the vehicle should be driven
with care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon
as possible.
In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4 wheels
must be fitted with tyres of the same brand,
type and tread so that the traction system is
not damaged by a dierence in the number of
turns of the wheels. Therefore, in the event of
a puncture, only a spare wheel with the same
perimeter as normal tyres should be used.
Manufacturing date
The manufacturing date is also indicated on
the tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of the
wheel):
DOT ... 2220 ...
it means, for example, that the tyre was manu-
factured in the 22nd week of 2020.
WARNING
●
Use only combinations of tyres and rims,
as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved
by SEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam-
aged, causing an accident.
●
For technical reasons it is not possible to
use wheels of other vehicles; in some ca-
ses not even wheels from the same vehicle
model should be used.
●
Always ensure that the tyres you have
chosen have adequate clearance. When se-
lecting replacement tyres, do not rely en-
tirely on the nominal tyre size marked on the
tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dier
significantly depending on the manufacturer.
282
Wheels and tyres
Lack of clearance can damage the tyres or
the vehicle and, as a result, endanger road
safety. Accident hazard!
●
Only use tyres that are over 6 years old in
an emergency, and drive with due care.
●
The fitting of tyres with run-flat properties
is not permitted on your vehicle! Prohibited
use can cause accidents or can damage
your vehicle.
●
If decorative hubcaps are subsequently fit-
ted, make sure that they allow enough air in
to cool the braking system. Accident hazard!
●
Models with aerodynamic wheel rims
and/or with bolt-on plastic elements (more
closed design) increase the likelihood of ice
and snow accumulating on the inside. This
should be taken into account, depending on
the driving situations, as snow or ice accu-
mulated in the wheels can cause vibration in
the vehicle when it drives at over 40 km/h. It
is advisable to remove ice and snow from the
inside of the wheels using hot water.
●
If you drive on dirt or gravel tracks, the
likelihood of stones becoming trapped inside
wheel rims with plastic elements increases
when driving at high speed or in a sporty
manner. If you see that there are stones trap-
ped between the aluminium wheel rim and
the insert, you can attempt to remove them
using pressurised water.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to
the laws in the country concerned.
Note
●
A SEAT Service Centre should be consul-
ted to find out whether wheels or tyres of
dierent sizes to those originally fitted by
SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about the
combinations allowed between the front axle
(axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).
●
Never mount used tyres if you are not sure
of their “previous history”.
Tyre life
Fig.187 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.
Correct inflation pressures and sensible driving
habits will increase the useful life of your tyres.
●
Check tyre pressure at least once a month,
and also prior to any long trip.
●
The tyre pressure should only be checked
when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the
pressure of warm tyres.
●
Adjust tyre pressure to the load being carried
by the vehicle ›››Fig.187.
●
In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, save
the modified tyre pressure ›››page292.
Wheels and tyres
283
Important information about wheels and tyres
●
Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.
●
Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from time
to time.
Tyre pressure
The values of the tyre pressure are shown on
the sticker label located on the read frame of
the front left door ›››Fig.187.
Insucient or excessive pressure greatly re-
duces the useful life of the tyres and adversely
aects vehicle performance and ride. Correct
inflation pressures are very important, espe-
cially at high speeds.
The tyre pressure must be adjusted according
to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the vehicle
is going to be fully loaded, increase the tyre
pressure to the maximum load value shown on
the sticker label ›››Fig.187.
Do not forget the spare wheel when checking
the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel infla-
ted to the highest pressure required for the road
wheels.
In the case of a minimised temporary spare
wheel (125/70 R16 or 125/70 R18) inflate to a
pressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre
pressure label ›››Fig.187.
Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can
be adjusted to medium load to improve driv-
ing comfort (tyre pressure ›››Fig.187).
When driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel
consumption may increase slightly.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard
braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre wear.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
However, certain circumstances may lead to
imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-
brations in the steering wheel.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as
they otherwise cause excessive wear on steer-
ing, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be
rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted or if a tyre
is repaired.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-
cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the
vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you
should check wheel alignment at a SEAT O-
cial Service.
WARNING
Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres
may lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, to
tread separation or even to a blow-out.
●
The driver is responsible for ensuring that
all of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflated
to the right pressure. The recommended tyre
pressure is indicated on the label ›››Fig.187.
●
Check tyre pressures regularly and ensure
they are maintained at the pressures indica-
ted. Tyre pressure that is too low could cause
overheating, resulting in tread detachment
or even burst tyres.
●
Tyre pressure should be that indicated on
the label when the tyres are cold at all times
›››Fig.187.
●
Regularly check the cold inflation pressure
of the tyres. If necessary, change the tyre
pressure of the vehicle tyres while they are
cold.
●
Regularly check your tyres for damage and
wear.
●
Never exceed the maximum permitted
speed or loads specified for the type of tyre
fitted on your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated
tyres will increase fuel con-
sumption.
284
Wheels and tyres
1)
Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in.
Tread wear indicators
Fig.188 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.
Fig.189 Interchanging tyres.
Wear indicators around 1.6mm high can be
found on the base of the original tyre treads,
ordered at regular intervals and running across
the tread ›››Fig.188. The letters “TWI” or trian-
gles on the sidewall of the tyre mark the posi-
tion of the wear indicators.
The minimum permitted profile depth
1)
have
been reached when the tyres have worn down
to the wear indicators. Replace the tyres with
new ones ››› .
With a sporty driving style, check the tread
depth every 5,000 / 10,000km (3,000 /
6,000mi). When checking the tread depth,
check the wear indicators in all the tyre
grooves.
Changing wheels around
In order to wear the wheels in a uniform manner,
it is recommended to interchange them regu-
larly according to the diagram ›››Fig.189. The
useful life of all the tyres will then be about the
same time.
WARNING
The tyres must be replaced at the latest
when the tread is worn down to the tread
wear indicators. Failure to follow this instruc-
tion could result in an accident.
●
Particularly in dicult driving conditions
such as wet or icy roads. It is important that
the tyre tread be as deep as possible and be
approximately the same on the tyres of both
the front and the rear axles.
●
The scant driving safety due to insucient
tread depth is particularly evident in vehicle
handling, when there is a risk of “aquaplan-
ing” in deep puddles of water and when driv-
ing through corners, and braking is also ad-
versely aected.
●
The speed has to be adapted accordingly,
otherwise there is a risk of losing control over
the vehicle.
Wheel nuts
The wheel bolts and rims have been designed
to be part of an assembly. When installing
dierent wheels (for instance alloy wheels or
wheels with winter tyres) it is important to use
the correct wheel bolts with the right length
and correctly shaped bolt heads. This ensures
that wheels are fitted securely and that the
brake system functions correctly.
The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily.
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-
theft wheel bolts ›››page289.
WARNING
Wheel nuts should never be greased or oiled.
●
Use only wheel bolts which belong to the
wheel.
●
If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts
is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehi-
cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-
ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and
threads can be damaged.
Wheels and tyres
285
Important information about wheels and tyres
1)
COC = certificate of conformity.
NOTICE
See ›››page291 to find out the recommen-
ded tightening torque for wheel nuts for steel
and alloy rims.
Winter tyres
●
Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.
●
Only use winter tyres that are approved for
your vehicle.
●
Please note that the maximum permissible
speed for winter tyres may be lower than for
summer tyres.
●
Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-
fective when the tread is worn down.
●
After fitting the wheels you must always
check the tyre pressures. When doing so, take
into account the correct tyre pressures lis-
ted on the rear of the front left door frame
›››page282.
In winter road conditions winter tyres will con-
siderably improve vehicle handling. The design
of summer tyres (width, rubber compound,
tread pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow.
This applies particularly to vehicles equipped
with wide section tyres or with high speed
tyres (code letters H, V or Y on the sidewall).
Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-
proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these tyres
are specified in the vehicle's documents (e.g.
EC Certificate of Conformity or COC
1)
). The ve-
hicle documentation varies depending on the
country of residence.
Winter tyres lose a great deal of their properties
when the tread is worn down to a depth of
4mm.
The performance of winter tyres is also severely
impaired by ageing, even if the tread is still
much deeper than 4 mm.
A code letter indicating the speed limit is stam-
ped on all winter tyres ›››page280.
In the infotainment system's Vehicle settings
menu, a speed warning can be set in the Tyres
menu.
Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds
must have an appropriate sticker attached so
that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stickers are
available from the SEAT Ocial Service and
specialised workshop. Please note the regula-
tions to this eect in your country.
“All-weather” tyres can also be used instead of
winter tyres.
Using winter tyres with V-rating
Please note that the generally applicable
240km/h (149mph) speed for winter tyres
with the letter V is subject to technical restric-
tions; the maximum permissible speed for
your vehicle may be significantly lower. The
maximum speed limit for these tyres depends
directly on the maximum axle weights for your
car and on the listed weight rating of the tyres
being used.
It is best to contact a SEAT Ocial Service to
check the maximum speed which is permissible
for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on the
basis of this information.
WARNING
Exceeding the maximum speed permitted for
the winter tyres fitted on your car can cause
tyre failure, resulting in a loss of control of
the vehicle – risk of accident.
For the sake of the environment
When winter is over, change back to summer
tyres at an appropriate moment. In tempera-
tures above +7°C (+45°F), performance will
be improved if summer tyres are used. Rolling
noise, wear and energy consumption will all
be reduced.
Snow chains
Snow chains are only permitted on the front
wheels, even on 4-wheel drive vehicles.
●
Check that they are correctly seated after
driving for a few yards; correct the position if
necessary, in accordance with the manufactur-
er's fitting instructions.
286
Wheels and tyres
●
Keep your speed below 50km/h (30 mph).
●
If there is a danger of being trapped despite
having fitted the chains, it is best to disable the
traction control (TCS) in the ESC ›››page130.
Snow chains will improve braking ability as well
as traction in winter conditions.
For technical reasons, the use of snow chains
is only permitted on the following rim and tyre
combinations:
Tyres Wheel rim Chains
195/60 R16 6Jx16 ET45 Max. link
13.5mm
205/60 R16 6Jx16 ET45
Max. link 9 mm205/55 R17 6.5Jx17 ET48
215/45 R18 7Jx18 ET47
Other dimensions do not allow chains
Remove any central wheel trims before fitting
snow chains.
WARNING
The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted
chains could lead to serious accidents and
damage.
●
Always the appropriate snow chains.
●
Observe the fitting instructions provided by
the snow chain manufacturer.
●
Never exceed the maximum permitted
speeds when driving with snow chains.
NOTICE
●
Remove the snow chains to drive on roads
without snow. Otherwise they will impair ve-
hicle handling, damage the tyres and wear
out very quickly.
●
Wheel rims may be damaged or scratched
if the chains come into direct contact with
them. SEAT recommends the use of covered
snow chains.
Changing a wheel
Introduction
Only change a wheel yourself if you are famil-
iar with the necessary operations and safety
measures, if you have the necessary tools and if
the vehicle is parked safely.
Preliminary actions
●
Stop the vehicle on a level surface and in a
safe place, as far away from road trac as
possible.
●
Apply the handbrake.
●
Switch on the hazard warning lights.
●
Manual transmission: engage 1st gear.
●
Automatic transmission: switch on the parking
lock P.
●
If towing a trailer, unhitch the trailer from your
vehicle.
●
Lay out the on-board tools ›››page247 and
the wheel to be changed.
●
Follow the legal provisions of each country
(reflective vest, warning triangles, light beacon,
etc.).
●
Get all occupants out of the vehicle and
keep them out of the danger zone (e.g. behind
the guard rail).
WARNING
●
Always observe the above steps and pro-
tect yourself and other road users.
●
If you change the wheel on a slope, block
the wheel on the opposite side of the car with
a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
Wheels and tyres
287
Changing a wheel
Location and use of the temporary
spare wheel
Fig.190 In the boot: remove the subwoofer.
The temporary spare wheel is stored under the
floor panel in the luggage compartment and is
attached by a thumbnut.
The temporary spare wheel has been designed
to be used for short periods of time. Have the
tyres checked and replaced as soon as possi-
ble at a SEAT Ocial Service or at a special-
ised workshop.
The spare wheel must not be switched for a
spare wheel from another vehicle.
Removing the temporary spare wheel
●
Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove the
temporary spare wheel ›››page225.
●
Turn the thumb wheel anticlockwise.
●
Take out the temporary spare wheel.
Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles fit-
ted with the optional sound system (with
subwoofer)
To remove the spare wheel, you must first re-
move the subwoofer.
●
Vehicles without a variable floor in the lug-
gage compartment: pull the floor of the lug-
gage compartment (carpet) upwards to get it
out.
●
Vehicles with a variable luggage compart-
ment floor: lift and secure the floor storage
compartment as explained in ›››page225.
●
Disconnect the subwoofer’s speaker cable
›››Fig.190
1
.
●
Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise
›››Fig.190
2
.
●
Remove the subwoofer speaker and the
spare wheel.
●
When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the
subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim with
care. When doing so, the tip of the “FRONT”
arrow on the subwoofer should point forward.
●
Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly
rotate the securing wheel clockwise so that
the subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in
place.
Removing the 16” temporary spare wheel
(without subwoofer)
●
Remove the luggage compartment varia-
ble floor to access the wheel and the tools
›››page225.
●
Loosen the strap that secures the box by
pressing on the buckle.
●
Remove the toolbox.
●
Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise and
remove it.
●
Press the thread and turn it 90° clockwise or
anti-clockwise and remove it.
●
Pull on the front part of the spare wheel to
remove it.
Chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not be
used on the temporary spare wheel.
If you have a puncture on one of the front
wheels when using snow chains, fit the tempo-
rary spare wheel in place of one of the rear
wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel
that you have removed and replace the punc-
tured front wheel with this wheel.
288
Wheels and tyres
WARNING
●
After fitting the temporary spare wheel,
check the tyre pressures as soon as possible.
Failure to do so may cause an accident. The
tyre pressure is listed on the back of the left
front door frame ›››page282.
●
Do not drive at over 80km/h (50mph)
when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on
the vehicle: risk of accident!
●
Never travel more than 200km using a
temporary spare wheel.
●
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking
and fast cornering: risk of accident!
●
Never use more than one temporary spare
wheel at the same time, risk of accident.
●
No other type of tyre (normal summer or
winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact
temporary spare wheel rim.
●
If you are driving using the spare wheel,
the ACC system could automatically switch
o during the journey. Switch o the system
when starting o.
Wheel central trim
Fig.191 Correct positioning of the central
wheel trim for steel rims.
The central trims must be removed for access
to the wheel bolts.
Removing
●
Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools
›››page247) to one of the recesses of the
central wheel trim and remove it.
Fitting
●
Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. The
bottom of the “S” of the SEAT badge should
align with the inflation valve ›››Fig.191
1
.
●
Press the central trim firmly until it locks in
with an audible click.
Note
There is also a valve mark on the back of the
central wheel trim that indicates the correct
alignment.
Wheel bolt caps
Fig.192 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.
Removal
●
Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools ›››Fig.156)
over the cap until it clicks into place
›››Fig.192.
●
Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
The caps protect the wheel bolts and should be
remounted after changing the tyre.
The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a spe-
cial cap. This only fits on anti-theft locking bolts
and is not for use with standard wheel bolts.
Wheels and tyres
289
Changing a wheel
Anti-theft wheel nuts
Fig.193 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and
adapter.
Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt
●
Remove the wheel trim or hub cap.
●
Insert the special adapter ›››Fig.193
1
(ve-
hicle tools ›››page247) onto the anti-theft
wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go.
●
Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto
the adapter as far as it will go.
●
Remove the wheel bolt ›››page289.
Note
Make a note of the code number of the anti-
theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place,
but not in your vehicle. If you need a new
adapter, you can obtain it from the SEAT O-
cial Service, indicating the code number.
Loosening wheel nuts
Fig.194 Tyre change: slacken the wheel bolts.
Fig.195 Tyre change: tyre valve
1
and the
correct position for the anti-theft wheel locking
bolt
2
or
3
.
Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the car
to loosen the wheel bolts.
Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn be-
fore raising the vehicle with the jack.
If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push on
the end of the wheel wrench with your foot.
Hold on to the vehicle for support and take care
not to slip during this operation.
Loosening wheel nuts
●
Fit the box spanner into the bolt as far as it will
go ›››Fig.194.
●
Hold the wrench at the end and rotate
the bolt approximately one turn anticlock-
wise››› .
Important information about wheel bolts
Factory-fitted rims and wheel bolts are spe-
cially matched during construction. Therefore, if
dierent rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts
with the right length and heads must be used.
This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and
that the brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you should not even
use wheel bolts from vehicles of the same
model.
On wheels with integral hubcaps, the anti-theft
wheel locking bolt must be screwed in the posi-
tions ›››Fig.195
2
o
3
, taking as reference
the position of the tyre valve
1
. Otherwise it
will not be possible to mount the hubcap.
290
Wheels and tyres
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not properly tightened,
they could come loose while driving and
cause an accident, serious injury and loss of
vehicle control.
●
Use only wheel bolts which correspond to
the rim in question.
●
Never use dierent wheel bolts.
●
Wheel bolts and threads should be clean,
free of oil and grease, and it should be possi-
ble to screw them easily.
●
To loosen and tighten wheel bolts, only
use the wheel wrench that came with the car
from the factory.
●
The wheel bolts should only be loosened
slightly (about one turn) before raising the
vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!
●
Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or
to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts
have been tightened to the prescribed tor-
que, they could come loose while driving.
●
Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel
rims with bolted ring trims.
●
If wheel bolts are tightened below the
prescribed torque, the bolts and rims could
come loose while driving. If tightening torque
is too high, the wheel bolts or threads can be
damaged.
Raise the vehicle
Fig.196 Jack position points.
Fig.197 Crossbar: mounting the jack on the
vehicle.
●
Rest the jack (vehicles tools) on firm ground.
If necessary use a large, strong board or similar
support. If the surface is slippery (for example
tiles) place the jack on a rubber mat or similar
to prevent it from slipping ››› .
●
Look on the strut for the mark of the jack sup-
port point (sunken area) closest to the wheel to
be changed ›››Fig.196.
●
Turn the jack crank handle, located below the
strut support point, to raise it until the tab
1
›››Fig.197 is below the housing that is provi-
ded.
●
Align the jack so that the tab
1
“grips” onto
the housing provided on the cross member and
the mobile base
2
is resting on the ground. The
base plate
2
should fall vertically with respect
to the support point
1
.
●
Continue turning the jack until the wheel is
slightly lifted o the ground.
WARNING
The factory-supplied jack is only designed
for changing wheels on this model. On no
account attempt to use it for lifting heavier
vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury.
●
Make sure the jack remains stable. If the
surface is slippery or soft, the jack could slip
or sink, respectively, with the consequent risk
of causing injuries.
●
Lift the vehicle using only the jack supplied
from the factory. Other jacks, even those ap-
proved for other SEAT models could slip, with
the consequent risk of injury.
●
Place the jack only at the support points
provided on the strut and align it. Otherwise,
the jack could slip because it does not have
sucient grip on the vehicle: risk of injury!
Wheels and tyres
291
Changing a wheel
●
You should never place a body limb such as
an arm or leg under a raised vehicle that is
solely supported by the jack.
●
If you have to work underneath the vehicle,
you must use suitable stands additionally to
support the vehicle, there is a risk of acci-
dent!.
●
Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one
side or the engine is running.
●
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
raised. The vehicle may come loose from the
jack due to the engine vibrations.
NOTICE
●
The vehicle must not be raised on the
crossbar. Place the jack only at the support
points provided on the strut and align it. Oth-
erwise, the vehicle may be damaged.
●
Any type of load or weight applied to the
external trim/door will (stepped on, fitting
the jack, resting heavy objects, etc.) can
cause damage to it. SEAT accepts no re-
sponsibility for any damages caused by im-
proper use of the external trim or body.
Removing and installing a wheel
Change the wheel after loosening the wheel
bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.
When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim may
hit and damage the brake disc. For this reason,
please take care and get a second person to
assist you.
Taking o the wheel
●
Unscrew the bolts with the wheel wrench and
place them on a clean surface.
●
Remove the wheel.
Putting on the spare wheel
Check the direction of rotation of the tyre
›››page291.
●
Place the spare wheel or temporary spare
wheel into position.
●
Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them a
little with the wheel wrench.
●
Use the appropriate adapter to tighten the
anti-theft wheel bolts.
●
Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack.
●
Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of the
wheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in diag-
onal pairs (not in a circle).
●
Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on.
The wheel bolts should be clean and turn
easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect
the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-
ces. These surfaces must be clean before fitting
the wheel.
Tightening torque of the wheel nuts
The prescribed tightening torque for wheel
bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. After
changing a wheel, have the tightening torque
checked immediately with a torque wrench that
is working perfectly.
Before checking tightening torque, have any
rusty wheel bolts that are dicult to screw re-
placed and clean the wheel hub threads.
Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or to
the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have
been tightened to the prescribed torque, they
could come loose while driving.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern have been
designed to operate best when rotating in only
one direction. An arrow on the tyre sidewall in-
dicates the direction of rotation on tyres with
directional tread. Always observe the indicated
direction of rotation in order to guarantee opti-
mum grip and help avoid aquaplaning, exces-
sive noise and wear.
If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction
of rotation, drive with extreme caution, as the
tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is
of particular importance when the road surface
is wet. Change the tyre as soon as possible or
remount it with the correct direction of rotation.
292
Wheels and tyres
Works after changing a wheel
●
Replace the hub caps or wheel bolt caps
(depending on equipment).
●
Return all tools to their proper storing loca-
tion.
●
If the replaced wheel does not fit in the spare
wheel housing, store it safely in the luggage
compartment ›››page223.
●
Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-
ted tyre as soon as possible.
●
In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica-
tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory
›››page292.
●
Have the tightening torque of the wheel nuts
checked as soon as possible with a torque
wrench ›››page291. Meanwhile, drive care-
fully.
●
Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as pos-
sible.
Tyre pressure monitor sys-
tem
Tyre pressure monitor indicator
Fig.198 Instrument panel: warning of loss of
tyre pressure.
The tyre pressure monitoring system compares
the individual speeds of each wheel and thus
the dynamic radius with the help of the ABS
sensors.
The tyre pressure monitor indicator warns of
any change in the tread diameter of a wheel
›››Fig.198.
Wheel tread change
The wheel diameter changes when:
●
Tyre pressure is changed manually.
●
Tyre pressure is insucient.
●
The tyre structure is damaged.
●
The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load.
●
The wheels on an axle are subject to a heav-
ier load (e.g. with a heavy load).
●
The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
●
The temporary spare wheel is fitted.
●
The wheel on one axle is changed.
There may be a delay in the reaction of the tyre
pressure monitoring indicator or it may not
indicate anything under certain circumstances
(e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or unpaved
roads, or when driving with snow chains).
Calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring indi-
cator
After changing the tyre pressure or replacing
one or more wheels, the tyre pressure moni-
toring indicator must be recalibrated. Do the
same, for example, when the front and rear
wheels are swapped.
It should be calibrated with the vehicle stopped
and its tyres cold. If calibrated while the tyres
are hot, the pressure check and calibration pro-
cedure should be repeated when cold before
the next trip.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Save the new inflation pressure in the Info-
tainment system: function button > Vehi-
cle status > Tyres; OR: > External
settings > Tyres ›››page33.
Wheels and tyres
293
Tyre repair
The tyre pressure loss indicator uses the
ABS sensors to compare the turns of each
wheel and, therefore, their tread circumferen-
ces, among other aspects. After a long journey
with varied speeds the programmed values are
collected and monitored.
With the wheels under very heavy loads, the
tyre pressure must be increased to the total
recommended tyre pressure before the calibra-
tion ›››Fig.198.
WARNING
When the tyres are inflated at dierent pres-
sures or at a pressure that is too low then a
tyre may be damaged resulting in a loss of
control of the vehicle and a serious or fatal
accident.
●
If the lamp lights up, reduce speed im-
mediately and avoid any sudden turning or
braking manoeuvres. Stop when possible,
and check the tyre pressure and status.
●
The tyre pressure loss indicator only works
correctly if all the tyres are at the correct
pressure when cold, and it is subsequently
calibrated according to the described pro-
cedure.
●
If a tyre has not been punctured and it does
not have to be changed immediately, drive to
the nearest specialised workshop at a mod-
erate speed and have the tyre checked and
inflated to the correct pressure.
Note
●
Driving for the first time with new tyres at
a high speed can cause them to slightly ex-
pand, which could then produce an air pres-
sure warning.
●
If excessively low tyre pressure is detected
with the ignition on, an audible warning will
sound. In the event that there is a fault in the
system, an audible warning will sound.
●
Driving on unpaved roads for a long pe-
riod of time, or sporty driving, may tempora-
rily deactivate the system. The control lamp
shows a fault, but disappears when road
conditions or the driving style change.
●
Do not only rely on the tyre pressure moni-
toring system. Regularly check your tyres to
ensure that the tyre pressure is correct and
that the tyres are not damaged due to punc-
ture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents. Remove
objects from the tyres only when they have
not pierced the tyres.
●
The tyre pressure monitoring indicator
does not function when there is a fault in the
ESC or ABS ›››page128.
Troubleshooting
Low tyre pressure
The control lamp switches on yellow.
The inflation pressure of one or more wheels is
much lower than the value set by the driver, or
the tyre has structural damage.
●
Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely
as soon as possible.
●
Check all tyres and pressures.
●
Replace any damaged tyres.
OR: Fault in the tyre pressure gauge.
Consult a specialised workshop if the tyre pres-
sure is correct and the lamp remains lit after
switching the ignition o and back on again.
Tyre repair
TMS (Tyre Mobility System) puncture
repair kit
The puncture repair kit (Tyre Mobility System)
will reliably seal punctures caused by the pen-
etration of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm
in diameter. Do not remove foreign objects,
e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.
After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,
you must again check the tyre pressure about
10 minutes after starting the engine.
You should only use the tyre mobility set if the
vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are famil-
iar with the procedure and you have the nec-
essary tyre mobility set. Otherwise, you should
seek professional assistance.
294
Wheels and tyres
1
Do not use the tyre sealant in the following
cases:
●
If the wheel rim has been damaged.
●
In outside temperatures below -20°C (-4°F).
●
In the event of cuts or perforations in the tyre
greater than 4 mm.
●
If you have been driving with very low pres-
sure or a completely flat tyre.
●
If the sealant bottle has passed its use by
date.
WARNING
Using the puncture repair kit can be danger-
ous, particularly when filling the tyre on the
roadside. To reduce the risk of serious injury,
consider the following:
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
Park it at a safe distance from surrounding
trac to fill the tyre.
●
Ensure the ground on which you park is flat
and solid.
●
All passengers and particularly children
must keep a safe distance from the work
area.
●
Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn
other road users.
●
Always stop the engine, apply the elec-
tronic parking brake and put it in gear if fitted
with a manual gearbox, or press the parking
lock button P if fitted with an automatic gear
box, to reduce the risk of involuntary move-
ment of the vehicle .
●
Use the tyre mobility system only if you
are familiar with the necessary procedures.
Otherwise, you should seek professional as-
sistance.
●
The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo-
rary emergency use only until you can reach
the nearest specialised workshop.
●
Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo-
bility set as soon as possible.
●
The sealant is a health hazard and must be
cleaned immediately if it comes into contact
with the skin.
●
Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the
reach of small children.
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant does not have the
same performance properties as a conven-
tional tyre.
●
Never drive faster than 80km/h (50mph).
●
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking
and fast cornering.
●
Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50mph) and then check
the tyre.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of used or expired sealant observing
any legal requirements.
Note
A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at
SEAT dealerships.
Note
Take into account the separate instruction
manual provided by the tyre mobility system
manufacturer.
Anti-puncture kit contents
Fig.199 Standard display: contents of the
anti-puncture kit.
The anti-puncture kit is located underneath the
floor covering in the luggage compartment. In-
cludes the following components ›››Fig.199:
Valve insert remover
Wheels and tyres
295
Tyre repair
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
A sticker to be adhered to the instrument
cluster, within the driver's visual field, to re-
mind that the maximum advisable speed
“max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”
Filler tube with cap
Air compressor (depending on the version,
the model may vary).
ON/OFF switch
Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated in
the inflator tube).
Warning provided by tyre pressure monitor-
ing system (it can also be integrated in the
inflator tube).
Tube for inflating tyres
12 volt connector
Bottle of sealant
Spare tyre valve
The valve insert remover
1
has a gap at the
lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert can
only be screwed or unscrewed in this way. This
also applies to its replacement part
11
.
Sealing and inflating a tyre
Sealing the tyre
●
Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use
the device ›››Fig.199
1
to remove the valve
cap. Place it on a clean surface.
●
Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously
›››Fig.199
10
.
●
Screw the tyre inflation hose ›››Fig.199
3
into the tyre sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will
break automatically.
●
Remove the filler cap ›››Fig.199
3
and
screw the open end of the tube into the tyre
valve.
●
With the bottle upside down, empty all of the
contents into the tyre.
●
Remove the bottle from the valve.
●
Replace the howitzer with the device
›››Fig.199
1
onto the tyre valve.
Inflating the tyre
●
Screw the tyre inflation tube of the compres-
sor ›››Fig.199
8
on the tyre valve.
●
Check that the air evacuation screw is
closed ›››Fig.199
6
.
●
Start the engine and leave it running.
●
Attach the connector ›››Fig.199
9
to the
vehicle’s 12 volt power outlet ›››page177.
●
Switch on the air compressor with ON/OFF
switch ›››Fig.199
5
.
●
Keep the air compressor running until it rea-
ches a pressure of 2.0-2.5 bar (29-36psi/
200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 minutes.
●
Disconnect the air compressor.
●
If it does not reach the pressure indicated,
unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.
●
Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is
distributed throughout the tyre.
●
Screw the compressor tyre
inflator into the
valve.
●
Repeat the inflation process.
●
If it still does not come up to pressure, the
tyre is too badly damaged. Stop and seek as-
sistance from authorised personnel.
●
Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew the
tyre inflation tube from the tyre valve.
●
When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and
2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding
80km/h (50 mph).
●
Attach the sticker ›››Fig.199
2
to the instru-
ment panel display, within the driver's field of
vision.
●
Check the pressure again after 10 minutes
›››page296.
WARNING
When inflating the wheel, the air compressor
and the inflator tube may become hot.
●
Protect hands and skin from hot parts.
●
Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube
or hot air compressor on flammable material.
●
Allow them to cool before storing the de-
vice.
●
If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at
least 2.0bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is
too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a
good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-
tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
296
Wheels and tyres
NOTICE
Switch o the air compressor after a maxi-
mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid over-
heating! Before switching on the air com-
pressor again, let it cool for several minutes.
Check after 10 minutes of driving
Screw in the inflator tube ›››Fig.199
8
again
and check the pressure on the gauge
7
.
1.3bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:
●
Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed
suciently with the tyre mobility set.
●
You should obtain professional assistance
››› .
1.4 bar (20 psi/140 kPa) and higher:
●
Set the tyre pressure to the correct value
again.
●
Carefully resume your journey until you reach
the nearest specialised workshop without ex-
ceeding 80km/h (50mph).
●
Have the damaged tyre replaced.
WARNING
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous
and can cause accidents and serious injury.
●
Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure
is 1.3bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.
●
Seek specialist assistance.
Maintenance
297
Service
Maintenance
Service
Service work and the Digital Mainte-
nance Plan
Log of services performed (“Digital Mainte-
nance Plan”)
The SEAT dealership or a specialised workshop
records Service receipts in a central system.
Thanks to this comprehensive documentation
of the service history, it is possible to reproduce
the services performed any time. SEAT recom-
mends requesting a Service receipt after every
service carried out containing all the services
carried out on the system.
Whenever there is a new service the receipt is
replaced with a current one.
The Digital Maintenance Plan is not availa-
ble in some markets. In this case, your SEAT
dealer will inform you about the current
documentation of the work.
Service works
In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT au-
thorised service or specialised workshop docu-
ments the following information:
●
When each one of the services was carried
out.
●
Whether a specific repair has been sugges-
ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near
future.
●
If you have expressed a special request for
the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will write
the work order.
●
The components or fluids that were changed.
●
The date of the next service.
The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until the
next inspection. This information is documented
in all checks performed.
The type and the volume of the service may
vary from one vehicle to another. A specialised
workshop will be able to provide specific infor-
mation on the jobs for your vehicle.
WARNING
If the services are insucient or not per-
formed and if the service intervals are not
observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in
trac cause an accident and severe injuries.
●
Make sure that any repairs are carried out
by a SEAT authorised service or specialised
workshop.
NOTICE
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
to the vehicle due to insucient work or of
lack of availability of spare parts.
Note
Regular services on the vehicle not only
maintain its value, but also its correct opera-
tion and road safety. For this reason, conduct
the services in accordance with SEAT guide-
lines.
Set Service or Flexible Service Inter-
vals
Services are classified as oil change service
and inspection. The service interval display
on the instrument panel display serves as a re-
minder of the next service.
Depending on the features, the engine and the
conditions of use of the car, either the Fixed
service or the Flexible service will be applied
for an oil change service..
How to know which type of service needs to
his vehicle
Check the tables below:
298
Maintenance
Oil change service
a)
PR No.
Type of
service
Service interval
QI1
Fixed
Every 5000km or after
1year
b)
QI2
Every 7500km or after
1year
b)
QI3
Every 10000km or after
1year
b)
QI4
Every 15000km or after
1year
b)
QI6 Flexible
According to the service in-
terval display.
a)
The data are based on normal conditions of use.
b)
Whatever happens first.
Inspection Service
a)
According to the service interval display.
a)
The data are based on normal conditions of use.
Particular characteristics of the Flexible
Service
Regarding the Flexible Service the oil change
service only has to be performed when the ve-
hicle needs it. To calculate when you have to
carry out this service, take into account the in-
dividual conditions of use and personal driving
style. A major component of the
flexible service
the use of LongLife oil instead of conventional
engine oil.
Bear in mind the information about the specifi-
cations of the engine oil according to the VW
standard ›››page271.
If you do not want to the flexible service you
can select the fixed service. However, a fixed
service may aect service costs. The Service
Advisor will gladly advise you.
At SEAT, the dates of the services are indicated
by the service intervals display:
●
on the instrument panel ›››page27
●
in the infotainment system: menu > Set-
tings > Service; OR > Vehicle sta-
tus > Service ›››page33.
The service interval display gives information
for service dates that involve an engine oil
change or an inspection. When the time for the
corresponding service comes, additional work
required, such as the change of brake fluid and
the spark plugs, can be carried out.
Information about the terms of use
The service intervals and groups are usually
based on normal conditions of use.
If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-
verse conditions of use, some of the work
must be carried out before the next service pe-
riod or even between service intervals.
Conditions of use adverse include:
●
The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.
●
Frequent short trips.
●
Letting the engine idle for a long period of
time, as in the case of taxis.
●
Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.
●
Frequent driving with a trailer (depending on
equipment).
●
Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a
lot of trac and stops (e.g. in the city).
●
Using the vehicle mostly in winter.
This applies especially for the following
parts (depending on equipment):
●
Dust and pollen filter
●
Air Care allergen filter
●
Air filter
●
Toothed chain
●
Particulate filter
●
Engine oil
The Service Advisor of your specialised
workshop will gladly inform you about the
need of performing service work between nor-
mal service intervals, always considering the
conditions of use of your vehicle.
Maintenance
299
Additional service oers
WARNING
If the services are insucient or not per-
formed and if the service intervals are not
observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in
trac and cause accidents and severe inju-
ries.
●
Have the services conducted at authorised
SEAT services or specialised workshops.
NOTICE
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
to the vehicle due to insucient work or of
lack of availability of spare parts.
Service sets
Sets of services include all the maintenance
works needed to ensure the safety and the
smooth running of the vehicle (depending on
the conditions of use and the features of the
vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or oper-
ating fluids).
Maintenance services are divided into inspec-
tion and review services. Consult the details of
the jobs required for your vehicle at:
●
Your SEAT authorised service
●
Your specialised workshop
Due to technical reasons (continuous develop-
ment of components) the sets of services may
vary. Your SEAT authorised service or special-
ised workshop is always receiving updates in
time.
Additional service oers
Approved spare parts
Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-
ceived for their vehicles and approved by SEAT,
with a special emphasis on safety. These parts
correspond exactly to the manufacturer's re-
quirements in terms of design, accuracy of the
measurements and materials. The original SEAT
Spare Parts have been conceived exclusively
for your vehicle. For this reason, we always rec-
ommend the use of Original SEAT Spare Parts.
SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and
suitability of parts from other manufacturers.
Approved spare parts
Approved spare parts, following the manufac-
turer's requirements, are an additional service
to you, oering the possibility of replacing com-
plete sets, such as: light engine, gearboxes,
heads, control units, electrical components,
etc.
These parts are, approved parts, and are the
same as the factory parts, which are also ap-
proved spare parts.
Original accessories
We recommend you only use SEAT Original Ac-
cessories and SEAT approved accessories for
your vehicle. The reliability, safety and suitabil-
ity of these accessories have been inspected
specifically for this type of vehicle. SEAT cannot
be held liable for the safety and suitability of
parts from other manufacturers.
Service Mobility
As of the moment you purchase your SEAT ve-
hicle you will be able to enjoy the benefits and
coverage of Service Mobility.
For the first two years after the purchase, your
new SEAT vehicle is automatically covered by
Service Mobility at no additional cost.
If you wish to enjoy this service after this period,
you can extend SEAT Service Mobility as long
as you carry out the recommended Inspection
and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-
ised Service.
If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a fault
or an accident, our assistance services will help
you keep moving.
Take into account that the SEAT Mobility Serv-
ice diers depending on the country in which
the vehicle was purchased. For further informa-
tion ask your SEAT dealership or the SEAT web-
site in your country.
300
Maintenance
Vehicle upkeep and clean-
ing
Basic observations
Regular and careful care helps to maintain the
value of your vehicle. In addition, it may be-
come a prerequisite to demand the warranty
in the event of corrosion damage and deficien-
cies in the paint coat of the bodywork.
Specialised workshops have the necessary
care products. Please follow the instructions for
application on the packaging.
WARNING
●
Cleaning products and other materials
used for car care can be damaging to your
health if misused.
●
Always keep care products in a safe place,
out of the reach of children. Danger of poi-
soning!
For the sake of the environment
●
When purchasing car care products, chose
products that are compatible with the envi-
ronment.
●
The waste from car-care products should
not be disposed of with ordinary household
waste.
Washing the vehicle
The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g. re-
mains of insects, bird excrements, tree resin or
anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the more
damage it can cause to the surface. High tem-
peratures, for instance strong sunlight, further
intensify the damage.
Before washing the car, soften the dirt using
plenty of water.
To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird
droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and a
microfibre cloth.
Have the underside of the vehicle washed after
the end of the anti frost salts in winter.
High pressure cleaning equipment
When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure
cleaner, always follow the operating instruc-
tions for the equipment. This applies particu-
larly to the operating pressure and the distance
between the spraying water.
Do not point the jet directly towards the side
windows, doors or covers; the same applies for
the tyres, rubber hoses, damping material, sen-
sors or camera lenses. Keep a distance of at
least 40cm.
Do not remove snow and ice with a high-pres-
sure cleaner.
Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out in
a direct stream or one that has a rotating jet for
forcing o dirt.
The water temperature must not exceed 60°C.
Automatic car washes
Spray the vehicle before starting the car wash.
Make sure that the windows are closed and
the windscreen wipers are deactivated. Bear
in mind the instructions of the car wash tunnel
operator, especially if your vehicle has detach-
able parts.
Use of car washes without brushes if possible.
Washing by hand
Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a
soft sponge or with a brush. Only use cleaning
products that do not contain solvents.
Polishing
Polishing is only necessary when the vehicle's
paintwork has lost its gloss and cannot be re-
stored with care products.
Do not polish matt painted surfaces! If the
paintwork is polished, the surface will be irrep-
arably damaged.
Washing vehicles with matte paintwork
To wash the vehicle, it is best to use a spe-
cial cleaner for matte paintwork. For further
information, please contact an ocial service
centre.
Maintenance
301
Vehicle upkeep and cleaning
Apply the product by spraying it onto the body-
work. Work in one zone at a time and leave the
product to act for at least 2 minutes. Wipe it
with a microfibre cloth and avoid placing ex-
cessive pressure on the treated area until the
dirt is removed. Once clean, repeat the appli-
cation of the product area by area and spread
it until a uniform finish is achieved.
If the vehicle is aected by mosquitoes or
larger amounts of dirt, spray the product on the
entire surface, leave it to act for 2 minutes and
apply pressurised water until it is completely
clean. Once dry, apply the product one zone at
a time and spread it with microfibre, avoiding
excessive pressure, to achieve a uniform finish.
In both cases, the final application cares for the
vehicle in an optimal manner and provides a
protective layer against dirt and water.
WARNING
●
Only wash the vehicle with the ignition
switched o or according to the specifica-
tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Acci-
dent hazard!
●
When cleaning the underbody or the inside
of the wheel arches, protect yourself from
sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of cuts!
●
After cleaning the brakes could act more
slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice on
the brake discs and pads. Accident hazard!
In this case the brakes should be dried by
pressing the brake pedal several times.
WARNING
Incorrect use of high-pressure cleaning
equipment can cause damage. This can lead
to accidents and serious injuries.
●
Never direct the jet of the high-pressure
cleaning equipment directly at the orange
high-voltage cables, the high-voltage sys-
tem components or the 12-volt on-board net-
work.
NOTICE
●
Before washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash, the exterior mirrors should be fol-
ded in to prevent them from being damaged.
The electric folding exterior mirrors should
only be folded or unfolded electrically!
●
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Risk of damaging the paint job!
●
Do not use sponges, abrasive household
sponges or similar to clean insect remains.
Risk of damaging the surface!
●
Vehicle parts with matte paint:
–
Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of
damaging the surface!
–
Never select washing programmes that
include the use of wax. This could damage
the appearance of matte paint.
–
Do not put stickers or magnets on parts
with matte paint, as removing them may
damage the paint.
For the sake of the environment
The car should only be washed in special
wash bays. These places are prepared to
prevent oily water from getting into the pub-
lic drains.
Cleaning the exterior
Below can be found some recommendations on
the cleaning and upkeep of individual vehicle
components.
Go to your specialised workshop if you have
special questions or parts that are not listed.
Take the general considerations into account
›››page303, Take special care with....
Windscreen wipers
●
Dirt: Soft cloth with windscreen cleaner.
302
Maintenance
1)
Neutral soap solution: maximum of two tablespoons in 1 l of water.
Headlights / Tail lights
●
Dirt: Soft sponge with neutral soap solution
1)
.
Sensors / Camera lenses
●
Dirt:
–
Sensors: soft cloth with a solvent-free
cleaning product.
–
Camera lenses: soft cloth with an alcohol-
free cleaning product.
●
Snow/ice: Hand brush/Solvent-free antifreeze
spray
Wheels
●
Antifreeze salt: Water.
●
Brake abrasion dust: Special acid-free clean-
ing product.
End exhausts
●
Antifreeze salt: Water, if a fine steel cleaning
product is required, or a non-abrasive and non-
corrosive cleaning product.
Covers / Trims
●
Dirt: Neutral soap solution
1)
, if a fine steel
cleaning product is required.
Paint
●
Paint flaws: Check the paint's colour code at
an authorised service and restore with a touch-
up pencil.
●
Spilled fuel: Immediately rinse with water.
●
Tank with environmental rust: Apply rust re-
mover and then apply hard wax. Go you your
specialised workshop if you have any queries.
●
Corrosion: Have your specialised workshop
take care of this.
●
Water does not form droplets on the clean
paint: Maintain with hard wax (at least twice a
year).
●
No shine despite maintenance/unattractive
paint: Treat with suitable wax and apply paint
preservative afterwards if the wax used does
not contain preservative ingredients.
●
Tanks, e.g. insect remains, bird droppings, tree
sap, road salt: Immediately soak with water and
remove with a microfibre cloth.
●
Grease-based dirt, e.g. cosmetic products or
sunscreen: Remove immediately with a neutral
soap solution
1)
and a soft cloth.
Carbon fibre parts
●
Dirt: Clean in the same way as painted parts
›››page300.
Decoration slides
●
Dirt: Soft sponge with neutral soap solution
1)
.
Interior cleaning
Below can be found some recommendations on
the cleaning and upkeep of individual vehicle
components.
Go to your specialised workshop if you have
special questions or parts that are not listed.
Take the general considerations into account
›››page303, Take special care with....
Windows
●
Dirt: Apply windscreen cleaner and then dry
with a cloth.
Covers / Trims
●
Dirt: Neutral soap solution
1)
.
Plastic parts
●
Dirt: Damp cloth.
●
Encrusted dirt: Neutral soap solution
1)
, if possi-
ble a solvent-free plastic cleaning product.
Displays/instrument panel
●
Dirt: Soft cloth with a liquid crystal display
cleaner.
Maintenance
303
Vehicle upkeep and cleaning
1)
Neutral soap solution: maximum of two tablespoons in 1 l of water.
Control panels
●
Dirt: Soft brush, then a soft cloth with a neu-
tral soap solution
1)
.
Seat belts
●
Dirt: Neutral soap solution
1)
, allowed to dry
before retracting.
Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather
●
Particles of dirt stuck to surfaces: Vacuum
cleaner.
●
Water-based dirt, e.g. coee, tea, blood etc.:
Absorbent cloth and neutral soap solution
1)
.
●
Grease-based dirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.: Ap-
ply a neutral soap solution
1)
. Absorb the dis-
solved grease and paint particles dryingwith
an absorbent cloth, in case you must treat it
with water afterwards.
●
Special dirt, e.g. pens, nail polish, dispersion
paint, shoe polish, etc.: Special stain remove:
dry with an absorbent cloth, if applicable, ap-
ply neutral soap solution afterwards
1)
.
Natural leather
●
Recent dirt: Cotton cloth with neutral soap
solution
1)
.
●
Water-based dirt, e.g. coee, tea, blood etc.:
–
Recent stains: absorbent cloth.
–
Dry stains: stain remover suitable for
leather.
●
Grease-based dirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.:
–
Recent stains: absorbent cloth and suitable
stain remover for leather.
–
Dry stains: grease solvent spray.
●
Special dirt, e.g. pens, nail polish, dispersion
paint, shoe cream etc.: Stain remover suitable
for leather.
●
Care: Apply preservative cream regularly to
protect from sunlight. Use a coloured preserva-
tive if required.
Carbon fibre parts
●
Dirt: Clean as with plastic parts.
Take special care with...
Headlights/tail lights
●
Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with a
dry cloth or sponge.
●
Do not use cleaning products that contain
alcohol. Risk of cracks!
Wheels
●
Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive
products.
●
If the protective coating on the paint of the
rim has been damaged due to stone impacts,
scratches, etc., the damage should be repaired
immediately.
Camera lenses
●
Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice
or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of crack-
ing the lens!
●
To clean the camera lens, never use abra-
sive cleaning products or products with alcohol.
Risk of scratches and cracks!
Windows
●
Remove snow and ice from windows and ex-
terior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To
avoid scratches, the scraper should only be
pushed in one direction and not moved to and
fro.
●
Never remove snow or ice from windows and
rearview mirrors with warm or hot water. Risk of
cracks on the windows!
●
To prevent damage to the heating of the rear
window, do not put stickers over the heating
elements.
304
Maintenance
Covers/trims
●
Do not use cleaning products or chrome
based cleaning agents.
Paint
●
The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust
before applying wax or care products. Risk of
scratches!
●
Do not apply wax or care products if the vehi-
cle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of damag-
ing the paint job!
●
The ambient rust deposits must not be re-
moved through friction. Risk of damaging the
paint job!
●
Remove cosmetic products and sunlight im-
mediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!
Displays/instrument panel
●
The displays, the instrument panel and the
trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of
scratches!
●
Make sure that the instrument panel is
switched o and cooled down before cleaning.
●
Make sure that no liquid leaks between the
instrument panel and the trim. Risk of damage!
Control panels
●
Make sure that no liquid leaks into the control
panels. Risk of damage!
Seat belts
●
Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.
●
Seat belts and their components must never
be cleaned with chemical products, nor should
they be allowed to come into contact with cor-
rosive liquids, solvents or sharp objects. Risk of
damaging the fabric!
●
If you find any damage to the belt webbing,
belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle, ask
your specialised workshop to replace the belt
in question.
Fabrics/artificial leather/microfibre
●
Do not treat artificial leather/microfibre with
leather cleaning products, solvents, wax polish,
shoe cream, stain removers or similar products.
●
If the stain is very hard to remove, take the
vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it re-
moved there. This will prevent damage.
●
Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. to clean.
●
Do not turn on seat heating to dry the seats.
●
Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, rivets
or belts can damage the surface.
●
Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage the
seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro fasten-
ers are closed.
Natural leather
●
Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,
spot removers or similar products on leather.
●
Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, rivets
or belts can damage the surface.
●
Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. to clean.
●
Do not turn on seat heating to dry the seats.
●
Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for
long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose
some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-
longed period in the bright sun, it is best to
cover the leather.
WARNING
Do not use water-repellent coatings on the
windscreen. In bad visibility conditions such
as humid weather, darkness or when the sun
is in its lowest point, visibility may be impac-
ted. Accident hazard! Such coatings can also
cause the windscreen wiper blades to make
noise.
Note
●
Remains of insects can be removed much
more easily with previously treated paint.
●
Regular car care treatments can prevent
deposits of ambient rust.
Maintenance
305
Accessories, spare parts and repair work
Remove the vehicle from trac
If you want to leave your vehicle stationary
for a long period of time, contact a qualified
workshop. They will gladly inform you about
the necessary measures, such as anti-corrosion
protection, Service and storage.
Also take into account the indications relat-
ing to the vehicle’s battery ›››page274 ,
›››page274, Introduction.
Accessories, spare parts
and repair work
Introduction
Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer for
advice before purchasing accessories and re-
placement parts.
Your vehicle is designed to oer a high standard
of active and passive safety. For this reason, we
recommend that you ask a SEAT Ocial Serv-
ice for advice before fitting accessories or re-
placement parts. Your SEAT Ocial Service has
the latest information from the manufacturer
and can recommend accessories and replace-
ment parts which are suitable for your require-
ments. They can also answer any questions
you might have regarding ocial regulations.
We recommend only using SEAT accessories
and genuine SEAT parts®. SEAT has tested
these parts and accessories for suitability, reli-
ability and safety. SEAT
Ocial Services have
the necessary experience and facilities to en-
sure that the parts are installed correctly and
professionally.
Although SEAT continuously monitors the mar-
ket, it cannot judge whether products not au-
thorised by SEAT meet the vehicle’s reliability,
safety and suitability requirements. SEAT there-
fore accepts no liability for these products,
even if, in certain cases, they are authorised
by an ocially recognised technical inspection
institute or ocial body.
Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di-
rect eect on the vehicle and/or the way it
is driven, such as a cruise control system or
electronically-controlled suspension, must
be approved for use in your vehicle and bear
the e mark (the European Union's authorisation
symbol).
If any additional electrical devices are fitted
which do not serve to control the vehicle itself
(for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or venti-
lator fan, etc.), they must bear the marking
(manufacturer conformity declaration in the Eu-
ropean Union).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone holders
or cup holders, should never be fitted on the
covers, or within the working range of the air-
bags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury if
the airbag is triggered in an accident.
Technical
modifications
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic
components, software, wiring or data transfer
in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning.
You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership
cannot be held liable for any damage caused
by modifications and/or work performed incor-
rectly.
For this reason we recommend asking ocial
SEAT service centres to do any necessary work
using genuine SEAT parts®.
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other
work on your vehicle can lead to malfunc-
tions and cause accidents.
Radio telephones and oce equip-
ment
Radio transmitters (fixed installation)
Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters
in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT gen-
erally authorises in-vehicle installations of ap-
proved types of radio transmitters provided
that:
306
Maintenance
●
The antenna is installed correctly.
●
The aerial is installed on the exterior of the
vehicle (and shielded cables are used together
with non-reflective aerial trimming).
●
The eective transmitting power does not ex-
ceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.
A SEAT Ocial Service and specialised work-
shop will be able to inform you about options
for installing and operating radio transmitters
with a higher transmitting power.
Mobile radio transmitters
Commercial mobile telephones or radio equip-
ment might interfere with the electronics of your
vehicle and cause malfunctions. This may be
due to:
●
No external aerial.
●
External aerial incorrectly installed.
●
Transmitting power more than 10 W.
You must, therefore, do not operate portable
mobile telephones or radio equipment inside
the vehicle without a properly installed external
aerial ››› .
Please note also that the maximum range of
the equipment can only be achieved with an
external aerial.
Business equipment
Retrofit installation of business or private equip-
ment in the vehicle is permitted, provided the
equipment cannot interfere with the driver's im-
mediate control of the vehicle and that any
such equipment carries the mark. Any retro-
fit equipment that could influence the driver's
control of the vehicle must have a type appro-
val for your vehicle and must carry the e mark.
WARNING
Mobile telephones or radio equipment which
is operated inside the vehicle without a prop-
erly installed external aerial can create ex-
cessive magnetic fields that could cause a
health hazard.
Note
●
The posterior fitting of electric and elec-
tronic equipment in this vehicle aects its li-
cence and could lead to the withdrawal of
the vehicle registration document under cer-
tain circumstances.
●
Please use the mobile telephone/radio op-
erating instructions.
Information for the user
307
Vehicle antennas
Information for the user
Warranty
Fault-free operation warranty
SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect
condition of new vehicles. Check the purchase
agreement or complementary additional docu-
mentation provided by your Technical Service
to see the conditions and the terms of the war-
ranty. Consult further information in this regard
in your SEAT Ocial Service.
Information stored by the
control units
Storage of accident data (Event Data
Recorder)
Your vehicle has an event data recorder (EDR).
The EDR’s function is to record data in the event
of a mild or serious accident. These data are
used to support the analysis of how dierent
vehicle systems behaved.
The EDR records, over a reduced time range
(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driving
data and data from the restraint systems, such
as:
●
How
dierent vehicle systems worked.
●
Whether the driver and the occupants were
wearing their seat belts.
●
How hard the acceleration or brake pedal
was pressed.
●
Vehicle speed.
●
GPS position.
These data will provide a better understanding
of the circumstances of the accident.
Data from the driving assist systems are also
recorded. This includes data such as whether
the systems were inactive or active and if such
action had an impact on the vehicle’s dynamic
behaviour, changing its path in the aforemen-
tioned situations, accelerating or decelerating
the vehicle.
Depending on vehicle equipment, this includes
data from systems such as:
●
the adaptive cruise control
●
the lane assist system
●
parking assistants
●
the emergency brake functions.
The EDR data are only recorded in specific ac-
cident situations. No data are recorded in nor-
mal driving conditions.
No audio or video data inside or around the
vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstances
are personal data such as name, age, or gen-
der recorded. Nevertheless, third parties (such
as criminal proceedings authorities) may relate
the contents of the EDR data to other data
sources and create a personal reference in the
context of an accident investigation.
In order to read the EDR data it is necessary
to access (if legally permitted to do so) the
vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) interface
while the vehicle is switched on.
SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless
the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lessee or
hirer) gives their consent. There may be excep-
tions to this, depending on legal or contractual
provisions.
Due to legal requirements in safety-related
products, SEAT may use the EDR data for field
research and in order to improve vehicle system
quality. Any data used for the purposes of re-
search will be treated anonymously (in other
words, no reference will be made to the vehicle,
their owner or the lessee/hirer).
Vehicle antennas
Infotainment system and antennas
The infotainment system's antennas are instal-
led on dierent locations on the vehicle:
●
On the roof.
●
On the windscreen, between the layers of
glass.
●
On the rear and side windows with a printed
antenna structure ››› .
308
Information for the user
NOTICE
The printed antenna structure on the rear
and side windows can be damaged by ob-
jects rubbing against it or by the use of
corrosive products, or products containing
acids.
●
Do not apply any stickers to the rear and
side window areas.
●
Never clean the antenna structure with
corrosive or acidic products.
Materials and recycling in-
formation
Environmental compatibility
Environmental protection is a top priority in the
design, choice of materials and manufacture of
your new SEAT.
Constructive measures to encourage recy-
cling
●
Joints and connections designed for easy
dismantling.
●
Modular construction to facilitate disman-
tling.
●
Increased use of single-grade materials.
●
Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in
accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and ISO
1629.
Choice of materials
●
Use of recycled materials.
●
Use of compatible plastics in the same part if
its components are not easily separated.
●
Use of recycled materials and/or materials
originating from renewable sources.
●
Reduction of volatile components, including
odour, in plastic materials.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants.
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions
dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive
2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa-
valent chromium.
Manufacturing methods
●
Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the
protective wax for cavities.
●
Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-
cle transport.
●
Use of solvent-free stickers.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling systems.
●
Recycling and energy recovery from residues
(RDF).
●
Improvement in the quality of waste water.
●
Use of systems for the recovery of residual
heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, etc.).
●
The use of water-soluble paints.
Recycling of electrical or electronic
devices
All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that
are not permanently fitted in the vehicle must
be marked with the following symbol:
This symbol indicates that EED must not be dis-
carded as home waste but through selective
waste collection.
Product recycling
✓ Valid for market: France
Fig.200 Recycling notice for France.
Please note the recycling instructions in
›››Fig.200 for the following items:
●
Vehicle keys
●
Remote control of auxiliary heating and venti-
lation.
Information for the user
309
Declaration of conformity
●
Compressor.
●
Charging cable.
●
Mobile key card.
Fig.201 Fire extinguisher recycling notice for
France.
Please note the recycling instructions in
›››Fig.201 for the following items:
●
Extinguishers.
Fig.202 Recycling notice for France.
Please observe the recycling instructions
›››Fig.202 for documentation and packaging
or bags of the following items:
●
Maintenance manual.
●
First aid kit.
●
Extinguishers.
●
Compressor.
●
Charging cable.
●
Charging socket and watertight seal.
●
Vehicle toolbox.
●
Puncture repair spray.
●
Jack.
●
Warning triangle.
●
High visibility jacket.
●
Tool bag.
For the sake of the environment
The Triman logo and the Info-tri symbol con-
tain important classification information for
the end user.
Product recycling
✓ Valid for market: Italy
Environmental labelling
Legislative decree no. 116 (3 September 2020),
which transposes EU Directive 2018/851 on
waste, and EU Directive 2018/852 on packag-
ing and packaging waste, states that all pack-
aging must be properly labelled to facilitate
the collection, reuse, recovery and recycling of
packaging, and to give users correct informa-
tion about the final destination of the packag-
ing.
Information about the environmental labelling
of packaging present in the vehicle can be
accessed by scanning the following QR code,
which links to a website where the information
required by this regulation can be found:
Declaration of conformity
Commercialisation of finished products on
the British market (England, Wales and Scot-
land):
The UKCA (UK Conformity Assessed)
marking is a new British marking used for
products commercialised in Great Britain
(England, Wales and Scotland).
Importer:
Volkswagen Group United Kingdom Ltd.
Yeomans Drive, Blakelands
Milton Keynes, MK 14 5AN
United Kingdom
Vehicles commercialised on the British market
by the importer mentioned above may include
complete products that comply with the follow-
ing provisions:
310
Information for the user
●
The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regula-
tions, 2016
●
The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regula-
tions, 2016
●
The Supply of Machinery (Safety) (Amend-
ment) Regulations, 2011
●
The Noise Emission in the Environment by
Equipment for use Outdoors Regulations, 2001
●
The Restriction of the Use of Certain Haz-
ardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic
Equipment Regulations, 2012
●
The Medical Devices Regulations, 2002
(SISI 2002, no. 618, in its amended version)
(UKMDR 2002)
●
The Pressure Equipment (Safety) Regulations,
2016
●
The Personal Protective Equipment (Enforce-
ment) Regulations, 2018
Note
For medical devices, the marking will re-
main valid in the UK until 30 June, 2023.
In accordance with the aforementioned regula-
tions, the importer has ensured that:
The manufacturer has performed the corre-
sponding conformity assessment, has drawn
up the technical documentation and meets the
market requirements.
Note
Until 31 December 2025, the British market
may be placed on a label that is axed to
the product or the attached documentation.
Radioelectrical equipment
Simplified declaration of conformity
Your vehicle has dierent radioelectrical de-
vices. The manufacturers of these devices
declare that they comply with Directive
2014/53/EU when legally required.
The full text of the EU compliance declaration is
available online at the following address:
www.seat.com/generalinfo
United Kingdom
Your vehicle has dierent radioelectrical devi-
ces. The manufacturers of these devices de-
clare that they comply with the UK Radio
Equipment Regulations 2017 (SI 2017/1206) if
required by law.
The full text of the declaration of conformity
is available online at the following Internet ad-
dress:
www.seat.com/generalinfo
Ukraine
Your vehicle has dierent radioelectrical devi-
ces. The manufacturers of these devices de-
clare that they comply with Ukraine Decree
355/2017 (TR Radio Equipment) where legally
required.
The full text of the declaration of conformity
is available online at the following Internet ad-
dress:
www.seat.com/generalinfo
Addresses of the manufacturers
The address of the manufacturers of compo-
nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot
include a sticker are listed below, as long as it is
legally required:
Central control unit (BCM)
Robert Bosch GmbH/Braunschweig
Theodor-Heuss-Strasse 12
38122 - Braunschweig, Germany
Phone: 0049 53188890
Keyless Access system and key with radio
remote control of the central locking system
HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA/Hamm
Roemerstr. 66
59075 - Hamm, Germany
Phone: 0049 23817980
Information for the user
311
Radioelectrical equipment
Roof antenna
ASK Industries S.p.A
Via dell'Industria n.12/14/16
60037 Monte San Vito (AN), Italy
Phone: +3907174521
Website: www.askgroup.it
Mitsumi Electronics Europe GmbH
Siemensstrasse 32
63225 Langen, Germany
Phone: +49 (0) 6103913-0
Website: www.minebeamitsumi.co.jp
Molex CVS Hildesheim GmbH
Daimlerring 31
31135 Hildesheim, Germany
Phone: +49 3377 3160
Website: www.molex.com
Antenna amplifiers
ASK Industries S.p.A
Via dell'Industria n.12/14/16
60037 Monte San Vito (AN), Italy
Phone: +3907174521
Website: www.askgroup.it
Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH
Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51
72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany
Phone: +49 7127 140
Website: www.te.com
KATHREIN Automotive GmbH
Römerring 1
31137 Hildesheim, Germany
Phone: +498031184-0
Website: www.kathrein.com
Molex CVS Hildesheim GmbH
Daimlerring 31
31135 Hildesheim, Germany
Phone: +49 3377 3160
Website: www.molex.com
Navigation antenna
Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH
Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51
72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany
Phone: +49 7127 140
Website: www.te.com
KATHREIN Automotive GmbH
Römerring 1
31137 Hildesheim, Germany
Phone: +498031184-0
Website: www.kathrein.com
Connectivity Box
Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH
Märkische Strasse 72
15806 Zossen OT Dabendorf, Germany
Phone:+49 3377 3160
Website: www.molex.com
Basic infotainment system
Panasonic Automotive Systems Czech
U Panasonicu 266
530 06, Pardubice, Czech Republic
Optional infotainment system
LG Electronics Mlawa SP
LG Electronics 7
06 500, Mlawa
Radio remote control of the auxiliary heating
Digades GmbH Digitales Und Ana/Zittau
Äußere Weberstr. 20
02763 - Zittau, Germany
Phone: 0049 358357750
Instrument panel
Analogue SE38x/SE316
Visteon Electronics Germany GmbH
Visteonstr. 4-10
50170 Kerpen, Germany
Analogue all other models
Continental Automotive Spain, S.A.
Crta. de Rubí a Ullastrell, nº 12-30
08191 Rubí (Barcelona - Spain)
FPK (digital)
Continental Automotive GmbH
VDO-Strasse 1,
64832 Babenhausen, Germany
Panasonic Automotive Systems Europe GmbH
Robert Bosch Str. 27-29
63225 Langen, Germany
312
Information for the user
1)
The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional
requirements.
Panasonic Automotive Systems Czech, s.r.o.
U Panasonicu 266
530 06, Pardubice, Czech Republic
CUPRA Born Digital Cockpit
Europe - CE
LG Electronics Inc. Single Point of Contact
Krijgsman 1, 1186 DM Amstelveen,
The Netherlands
United Kingdom – UKCA
LG Electronics U.K. Ltd,
Velocity 2, Brooklands Drive,
Weybridge, KT13 0SL
Front radar sensors
MRR for SE38X
Robert Bosch GmbH
Markwiesenstrasse, 46
72770 Reutlingen (Kusterdingen) Germany
MRR for Tarraco, Ateca, Ibiza, Arona
Automotive Distance Control Systems GmbH
Peter-Dornier-Strasse, 10
88131, Lindau, Germany
Rear radar sensors
Hella GmbH & Co. KGaA
Rixbecker Straße 75
59552 Lippstadt (Germany)
Online Connectivity Unit
LG ELECTRONICS INC.
10, Magokjungang 10-ro,
Gangseo-gu, Seoul, Republic of Korea
Radio equipment, frequency band,
maximum transmitting power
Below can be found details of the radio equip-
ment
1)
that can be fitted to all SEAT models.
Unless otherwise stated, the data are valid for
all models (variations are indicated in footnotes
to the tables):
Frequency band
Max. station
power
Key with radio-operated remote control
(vehicle)
433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)
433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW
868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW
434.42 MHz 32 µW
Radio-operated remote control (auxiliary
heater)
868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0MHz) 25 mW
✓ Valid for: Leon, Ateca, Tarraco
Transmitter-Receiver (auxiliary heater)
868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0MHz) 23.5 mW
✓ Valid for: Leon, Ateca, Tarraco
Bluetooth
2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm
2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm
Connection to the vehicle’s external an-
tenna
GSM 900: 880-915MHz 33 dBm
GSM 1800: 1710-1785MHz 30 dBm
WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980MHz 24 dBm
WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785MHz 21 dBm
WCDMA FDD VIII: 880-915MHz 21 dBm
LTE FDD1: 1920-1980MHz 23 dBm
LTE FDD3: 1710-1785MHz 23 dBm
LTE FDD7: 2500-2570MHz 23 dBm
LTE FDD8: 880-915MHz 23 dBm
LTE FFD20: 832-862MHz 23 dBm
✓ Valid for: Tarraco, Leon
Information for the user
313
Radioelectrical equipment
Wireless hotspot
2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm
✓ Valid for: Leon, Ateca, Tarraco
Keyless Access
434.42 MHz 32 µW
125 kHz 89 dBµA/m
a)
a)
Valid for market: Ukraine
Radar sensors for front assist systems
76 GHz-77 GHz
28.2 dBm
a)
35.0 dBm
b)
a)
Valid for: Leon
b)
Valid for: Ibiza, Arona, Ateca, Tarraco
Radar sensors for rear assist systems
24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm
Wireless charging function
110-120 kHz 5 W
Instrument cluster
125 kHz 40 dBµA/m
Online Connectivity Unit
EGSM900: 880-915MHz 33 dBm
DCS1800: 1710-1785MHz 31 dBm
UMTS FDD 1: 1920-1980MHz 24 dBm
UMTS FDD 3: 1710-1785MHz 24 dBm
UMTS FDD 8: 880-915MHz 24 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 1: 1920-1980MHz 23.5 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 3: 1710-1785MHz 23.0 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 7: 2500-2570MHz 23.5 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 8: 880-915MHz 23.0 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 20: 832-862MHz 23.5 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 28: 703-748MHz 23.0 dBm
Additional information for countries
outside the European Union
Mexico
Your vehicle has dierent radioelectrical de-
vices. The manufacturers of these devices
declare that they comply with Directive
RLVCOAR15-0008 when legally required. The
full text of the declaration of conformity is avail-
able online at the following Internet address:
https://www.seat.mx/servicio/mi-seat/manual-
del-propietario.html
Certificate: RLVHERS17-0286. RS4 Hella
KGaA Hueck & Co. short-range radar
IFT:RLVHERS17-0286. The operation of this
equipment is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this equipment or device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this equip-
ment or device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
United Kingdom
The following applies to importers in the UK
market:
Volkswagen Group United Kingdom Ltd.
Yeomans Drive, Blakelands
Milton Keynes, MK 14 5AN
United Kingdom
Turkey
Telsiz Ekipmanları Yönetmeliği (2014/53/AB)
Aracınızda çeşitli telsiz ekipmanları bulunmak-
tadır.
Telsiz Ekipmanlari Yönetmeliği (2014/53/AB)
açısından Türkiye pazarı için radyo ekipmanı
ithalatçısı (bu bilgi sadece resmi temsilcimiz
olan Doğuş Otomotiv Servis ve Ticaret A.Ş.’nin
ithal ettiği ürünler için geçerlidir):
Doğuş Otomotiv Servis ve Ticaret A.Ş.
Şekerpınar Mahallesi, Anadolu Caddesi, No: 22
ve 45
41420 Çayırova/Kocaeli
314
Information for the user
Ukraine
І
мпортер
:
ТОВ «Порше Україна»
просп. Павла Тичини, 1В, офіс „В“, 4-й
поверх
02152 Київ, Україна.
Importer:
Porsche Ukraine LLC
Pavla Tychyny ave. 1V, Oce “B”, 4th floor
02152 Kyiv, Ukraine.
Technical data
315
Indications about the technical data
Technical data
Indications about the tech-
nical data
Vehicle identification data
The values indicated in the technical data may
dier depending on optional equipment or ver-
sion of the model, as well as in the case of spe-
cial vehicles and equipment for certain coun-
tries.
The information in the ocial vehicle documen-
tation takes precedence at all times.
Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifi-
cations section
kW
Kilowatt, engine power measure-
ment.
PS
Horsepower (not currently used),
engine power measurement unit.
rpm, 1/min
Revolutions per minute – engine
speed.
Nm
Newton metres, unit of engine tor-
que.
CZ
Cetane number, indication of the
diesel combustion power.
RON
Research octane number, indication
of the knock resistance of petrol.
Vehicle ID number
The vehicle ID number can be found in the fol-
lowing places:
●
One the vehicle's data label.
●
In front, under the windscreen.
●
To the right in the engine compartment.
Type plate
The type plate is located on the vehicle’s right
hand door frame. Vehicles for certain export
countries do not have a type plate.
Performance
The values apply only to optimal road and
weather conditions.
The vehicle’s performance has been calculated
without any equipment that would aect it, e.g.
accessories.
Fuel consumption
Approved consumption values are derived from
measurements performed or supervised by
certified EU laboratories, according to the legis-
lation in force at the time (for more information,
see the Publications Oce of the European
Union on the EUR-Lex website: © European Un-
ion, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and apply to the
specified vehicle characteristics.
The values relating to fuel consumption and
CO
2
emissions can be found in the documenta-
tion provided to the purchaser of the vehicle at
the time of purchase.
Fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions depend
on the equipment/features of each individual
vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road
conditions, trac conditions, environmental
conditions, load or number of passengers.
Tank level
Petrol engines 40 l, 7 l reserve
Weights
The kerb weight values apply to the vehicle
as ready to drive with a driver (75 kg), oper-
ating fluids and, if applicable, tools and the
spare wheel. The kerb weight increases with
optional equipment and retrofitting of accesso-
ries, which reduces the possible payload ac-
cordingly.
Load on the roof
The maximum authorised load on the roof of
your vehicle is 75 kg.
Trailer weight
The maximum permitted drawbar load on the
ball head of the towing bracket is 55 kg.
316
Technical data
WARNING
The values indicated for the maximum per-
mitted weights must not be exceeded. There
is a risk of accident and damage!
Technical data
317
Indications about the technical data
Engine specifications
Petrol engines 1.0 TSI Start-Stop
Power output in kW (hp) at 1/min 70 (95)/5,000-5,500 81 (110)/5,500 85 (115)/5,000-5,500
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 175/1,600-3,500 200/2,000-3,000 200/2,000-3,500
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 3/999 3/999 3/999
Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ
Gearbox manual manual DSG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 182 (V) 190 (V) 190 (VI) 190 (VI)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (s) 11.5 10.6 10.8 10.0
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,710
a)
1,730
a)
1,750
a)
1,740
a)
a)
Varies depending on the features.
Petrol engines 1.5 TSI Start-Stop 1.6 MPI
Power output in kW (hp) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 81 (110)/5,800
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,500 152/3,850-4,100
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1,498 4/1,598
Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ
Gearbox DSG manual automatic
Top speed (km/h) 210 (V) 180 (IV) 180 (IV)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (s) 8.4 11.2 11.6
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,770
a)
1,690
a)
1,730
a)
a)
Varies depending on the features.
318
Technical data
Dimensions.
Fig.203 Dimensions and angles.
Technical data
319
Indications about the technical data
ARONA
A Front projection (mm) 809
B Rear projection (mm) 779
C Wheelbase (mm) 2,566
D Length (mm) 4,154
E Front
a)
track (mm) 1,513
F Back
a)
track (mm) 1,495
G Width (mm) 1,780
H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,537
b)
I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 173
J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 18.1°
K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 28.1°
Turning radius (m) 10.6
a)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
b)
Dimension to the roof bars.
320
Technical data
Index
321
Index
Numbers and Symbols
12-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
A
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Activating SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
System limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Adjust
front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
for the head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Android Auto™
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
interior monitoring and anti-tow system . . . . . . 72
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Anti-trap function
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Apple CarPlay
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Applications (apps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Approved spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Aspects to think about before starting the vehicle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Assistance systems
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
driving assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . 144
front camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
front radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . . . 152
parking aid Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
rear camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
rear radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
road signs detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
safety advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
switching o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
system limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
322
Index
tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
ultrasound sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Audible warning
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Audio warning signals
warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . . . . 85
Automatic gearbox
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . . . . 120
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
B
Backrest of the rear seat
folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Belt force limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Bicycle carrier
fitting onto the coverable tow hook . . . . . . . . . 235
max. load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Blown bulbs
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Bonnet
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Braking system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Brands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
C
Camera
cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
auto-locking due to involuntary opening . . . . . 68
central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Keyless Access system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
tail light bulb in the bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Changing the battery
of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Check lists
requirements for Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
requirements for MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Child lock
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Child seats
attachment systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
group classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
i-Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57
Cleaning
high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . . 300
special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Clocks
set the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Clutch (lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Connectivity
WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Control and warning lamps
12-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Index
323
airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
ESC in Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
ESC o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . . . 154
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 242
seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Control lamps
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Cooling system
check the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Current documentation attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
D
Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Deactivating SEAT CONNECT services . . . . . . . 182
Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Disposal
seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Downhill assistance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Drink holder
bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
in the rear central armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Drive Profiles
see Drive profile selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Driving
driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
loaded vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 110
with the luggage compartment open . . . . . . . 108
with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Driving Assist (Travel Assist)
see Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Driving with a loaded vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Driving with the luggage compartment open . 108
DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
E
e-Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
E10
see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Eco-driving notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Electric devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Electronic dierential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
324
Index
replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Emergency braking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Emergency call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Emergency call service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Emergency locking of the front passenger door 74
Emergency opening
driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Emergency operation
front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Emissions control system
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Engine
noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Engine and ignition
emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . . . 112
switching o the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Engine compartment
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
check the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Engine failure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Engine oil
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271, 274
check the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Engine oil pressure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Environment
ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
recycling of electrical appliances . . . . . . . . . . 308
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Environmental tip
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
ESC
connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Exiting a parking space
with the parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Exterior lighting
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Exterior mirrors
driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
fold manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
External audio sources
adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
F
Fabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Factors that have a negative influence on safe
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Filling capacities
window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Front bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Front camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Index
325
Front compartment
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 267
windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Front passenger front airbag
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Fuel
ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Fuel consumption
inertia disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
why does consumption increase? . . . . . . . . . . 245
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fuel tank cap
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Fuel tank flap
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
colour coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255, 256
preparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
G
Gear change
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Gear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . . 40
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Headlights
trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
I
i-Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Identification of fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
adapt menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
assistants and vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
before
first use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
customise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
customised menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
executing functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Media mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 195
Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
share a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Infotainment system
see Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271, 297
Inspection reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Basic digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
digital (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
326
Index
status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
use with the multifunction steering wheel . . . . 29
warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . . 22
Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 16, 19
Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Interior mirror
anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
J
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
K
Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Keyless Access
Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Keys
changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 73
vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
L
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Lane Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Lane departure warning (Side Assist)
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
indication on the exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
lane change Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Lift the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Lights
audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
cominghome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
leavinghome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
switching on and o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Loading the luggage compartment
fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Lock and unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 223
emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
removing and fitting the shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
store the rear shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . 225
Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
M
Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Malfunction
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Index
327
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Microfiber: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
MirrorLink®
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Mobility Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 203
favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
select source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
N
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 213
decrease the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
edit route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
enter an address for a guide destination . . . . 213
favourite destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
frequent destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
function: entering destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
increase the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
last destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
learn usage pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
navigation announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
operating the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
route details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
save destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
saved data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
saved destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
trac reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
updating navigation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
use contact details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Noise
brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
O
Octane (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 16
partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
On-board toolkit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Online services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Operation in winter
salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Original accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Overview
of warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
view of the vehicle from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
view of the vehicle from the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
view of the vehicle from the rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ownership accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
P
Painting the vehicle
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Park assist
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
see the Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
with the parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
angle parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
leaving a parking space (only when parallel
parked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
328
Index
parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
stop early . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Parking systems
automatic brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
reverse assist (Rear View Camera) . . . . . . . . . . 171
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Partial odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 106
Petrol
additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Press & Drive
start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
R
Radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Trac information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
tune station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
type of reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Radio screen: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Rain and light sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Rain sensor
function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Rear camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Rear cross trac alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Rear fog light
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 76
Rear mounting
towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Rear radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Rear Trac Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Refuelling
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
opening the fuel tank flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
safety warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Remote control key
unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Reverse assist (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Reverse assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 16, 17
Road signs
shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Road signs detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
fix the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Rotation direction
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Running in
new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
S
Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 114
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Safety
child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Index
329
Save fuel
inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Screen
clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Seat belts
adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
automatic retractor, tensioner and belt force
limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
maintenance and disposal of seat belt
tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
SEAT Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
SEAT Drive Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
selecting a profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
SEAT Ident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Seats
adjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
backrest of the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Selection of driving profile
characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Selector lever (automatic gearbox)
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Selling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Service
Digital Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
terms of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Service Menu
service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . 120
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Special characteristics
Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer
combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Start the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Start-Stop system
disconnect and connect manually . . . . . . . . . . 116
driver indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
the engine does not turn o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Starting up the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Status display
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
doors, front bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . 19
Eco-driving notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
330
Index
Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . . 22
Steering
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Steering wheel
adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 120
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
other object holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Storage compartment accessories
see Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Storage of accident data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226, 228
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Switching o
telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Symbols
see Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
T
Tail lights on the bodywork
remove the tail light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Technical data
engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Telephone
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
send messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
speed dial buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
switching o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
to call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Time
adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57
Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57
Torque
wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 195
Tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 231
Towable loads
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Towing device
fitting a bicycle carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
fitting later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Towing the vehicle
emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
prior steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Trac information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Trac information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Trac programme
see TP (trac information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
LED tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 231
loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer
combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 231
technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 231
towable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Index
331
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . 228, 233
Trailer mode
see Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
problems and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Troubleshooting
DSG gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Turning o the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Turning the ignition on and o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Tyre pressure monitor systems
tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280, 291
for winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
U
Ultrasound sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . 225
Vehicle
data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
lending or selling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
unlocking and locking (Keyless Access) . . . . . 65
vehicle ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
view from behind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
view from the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle care
wiper blade service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Vehicle conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Vehicle location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Siri™ (Apple CarPlay™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
wake word: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Volume
set for external audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
W
Warning lamps
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Washing the vehicle
cleaning the exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . . 300
interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Wheel central trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
anti-theft device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
loosen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
332
Index
Wheels
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
removing and attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
wheel central trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Window washer
window washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Window washer water
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
automatic opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
rain and light sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Winter conditions
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Wiper and rear window wiper blades
cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 301
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or
omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.06.23
Vehicle identification data
Model:
Vehicle Registration:
Vehicle identification
number:
Date of vehicle registration
or vehicle delivery:
SEAT Official Service:
Service advisor:
Telephone:
Confirmation of receipt of documentation
and vehicle keys
The following items were delivered
with the vehicle:
YES NO
On-board documentation
First key
Second key
Correct working order of all keys was
checked
Location:
Date:
Signature of owner:
Arona
Owner’s manual
6F9012720BT
Inglés 6F9012720BT (06.23)
SEAT Arona Inglés (06.23)
